Home

User Manual - Kimmel Services

1. Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 14 Form fields Element Description Person User Fields Person User Field Labels Displays a list of 90 currently assigned labels for the Person form user fields New Label New label To assign or edit the label of a Person form user field select a label and enter the new or edited text in this dialog box The user field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long Credential User Fields Credential User Field Labels Displays a list of 20 currently assigned labels for the Credential form user fields New Label New label To assign or edit the label of a Credential form user field select a label and enter the new or edited text in this dialog box The user field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long How to 1 Select a label in the Person User Fields windowpane Edit the label by entering over the text in the New Label field below this windowpane Select a label in the Credential User Fields windowpane Edit the label by entering over the text in the New label field below this windowpane Repeat for each label field that you want to edit A Oe D Sd Click Save before you exit this tab Mode labels tab Use this tab to change the labels of modes These labels are used in scheduling Refer to the Event Time and Mode Schedule forms for configuration of the modes you have created and labeled here Chapter 2 System preferences
2. NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button 152 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Instruction tab Use this tab to create instructions on how to react to specific transactions The instructions should belong to the same facility as the transaction with which they are associated Figure 59 Instruction tab Instruction e Facility gnore Facilities Instruction Number po Instruction call 911 Table 82 Form fields Element Description Number Assign a number to the instruction records The range for instructions is 0 to 254 for a total of 255 instructions Instruction Enter the text you want to display when the associated transaction occurs The instruction can be 1 to 500 alphanumeric characters in length How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 82 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define alarm responses The Response form Alarms 4 Events group allows you to create a list of frequently used predefined responses to an alarm and reduces the need to type an entry A response describes a reaction to an alarm The response entries that you create display as selections on the Alarm Monitor form Table 83 Form fields Description Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilit
3. Record Button Click to begin recording the selected video file to a CD Help Click to access the Online Help system 1 Review the guidelines in Table 123 and complete this tab Note If you choose to record a video clip to a CD performance is compromised If you have other surveillance windows open close them You may want to continue surveillance at another computer while the video is recording to CD 2 GE Security uses only Roxio Direct CD software If you have a recordable drive and Roxio Direct CD software Note If you purchased your system from GE Security Roxio software was provided for you Double click the file name of the video you are going to record a b Verify the path c Verify the naming convention of the video d Verify the recording drive and device e Click to begin recording The button displays red while recording If you want to stop the recording in progress click the red button f Follow the directions and prompts as they display in the popup windows DVR disk is full This warning notification may display when the DVR internal disk for storing video is reaching its full capacity Refer to the DVR User Manual for specific information on configuring disk management options Chapter 5 209 Video Navigate video console Video Console in the Monitors Controls group allows operators to view live and recorded video select different cameras and direct cameras to
4. User Manual Selection of this option launches the User Manual for this application About This Application Help Menu Select About to display a license summary window that lists the following e Application Version of software installed on your computer Service Pack if any Copyright information Detailed list of licensing features e Deployment preferences of this application on your system e List of supported DVRs enabled only if applicable to your system e Address and phone number of GE Security Taskbar The taskbar Status Bar is a toggle election on the View menu and determines whether or not this toolbar is visible across the bottom of the FCWnx screen The Taskbar indicates the current operator communication 19 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual port status number of clients connected number of alarms and number of background tasks It may look similar to the following The numbers indicate the total status of all facilities assigned to the current operator secure Comm On O Clients 1 Alarms 0 Background Tasks 0 Z secure Displays the currently logged user ID that by default is secure Communication Port Status Comm status displays in color depending on the state e Blue All controllers for the operator s facility are offline e Green All controllers for the operator s facility are online e Yellow Some controllers for the operator s facility are in error
5. Path Browse Table 196 Form fields Element Description Computer This field is unavailable when creating a new record The name of your computer displays in this field LogFile Name or identify your file e For FCWnx logfile names enter an sp1 extension Example COM11log spl e For GMC VMC logfile names enter Log extension Example GMC 10g Path Designate the path and directory in which to place your LogFile Browse Click to display a Browse for Folder window allowing you to navigate to the directory in which to place your Logfile How to 1 Review Table 196 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save 3 Open the Diagnostic Setting form from the Diagnostics group You want to select this LogFile name from the list of files displayed and assign components for monitoring 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Appendix A 347 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Diagnostic settings Use the Diagnostic Setting form Diagnostics group to select items to monitor using the Diagnostic Viewer program Note Use this form with care The more items you turn on for monitoring the more your system performance is affected This is even more important when monitoring port communications or controller items Description Select a diagnostic object name from the list box in the right windowpane The selected component displays in the Description field as a read only entry Settin
6. Chapter 6 227 Areas and intrusion zones Figure 100 Digital Output tab AA Description Facility X Area Reader Alarm Digital Output Assign Digital Outputs Table 137 Form fields Element Description Listbox The list box on the right displays digital outputs assigned to this Area Digital Output Click to display a Digital Output Assignment window enabling you to select and assign available digital output records How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 137 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Arm Disarm an Area This application supports global spans multiple ACU controllers and local one ACU controller arming and disarming of an Area using the reader keypad or manual control Global operation requires host to controllers communication Local operation allows arming disarming without host communication Note Initially every newly created Area is armed If the Area form Alarm tab Keypad Arm Disarm option is to set to None the Area cannot be disarmed but the readers do allow access When the Area is entered an alarm is reported This may not be the configuration that is intended If you have no intention of arming disarming the Area you have two choices to control these alarms 1 Manually turn off monitoring on the alarms 2 Set local keypad masking to Local or Global even though you do not have an IKE reader and control the access to
7. SMTP E mail Server Enter the name of the server that handles the transfer of e mail to and from the e mail addresses This dialog box cannot be left blank and accepts up to 256 alphanumeric characters From E mail Address Enter an e mail address of the account or person that is generating this alarm notification such as spadmin aol com This dialog box cannot be left blank and accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters Allow Anonymous Access This checkbox is selected by default permitting the transmission of an e mail alarm notification without further authentication The E mail User Name and E mail Password dialog boxes are not available for entry and not required with default settings If the security requirements of the e mail server require further authentication clear the check box to make available the dialog boxes for entry of an E mail User Name and E mail Password e E mail User Name Enter the user name that the e mail server uses to validate this user This dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters e E mail Password Enter the user password that the e mail server uses to validate this user This dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters Chapter 2 27 System preferences How to 1 Select a time interval for archiving your database 2 Configure the number of seconds that elapse before your FCWnx system detects and advises you that your database is not accessible If you are using image bad
8. Open a blank form Click Search to display a list of existing records We recommend entering search criteria to narrow your search results to only records that are to be updated Records that match your search criteria display in the list box to the right of the form Note If there are no records Mass Update is not available Move the mouse pointer below any of the tabs and right click to display a shortcut menu to related forms To enable the Mass Update mode select Mass Update from the shortcut menu Note the change in the appearance of the form ONLY those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass update changes are now enabled and blank Refer to Conditions of mass update on page 269 Select the records you want to adjust from the list box on the right Typical Microsoft Windows selection deselection process is used in this application Make the required adjustment to the form Click Save The update of records begins immediately A window displays with a progress bar indicating the update progress Click Abort if you want to stop the update in progress e You cannot close a form during the Mass Update process Note Right click shortcut menu navigation is unavailable when you are in Mass Update mode e If you have changed any preference but did not click Save a message reminds you to discard or save your changes e Smaller batch updates are recommended to prevent performance issues during a mass update Chapter 7
9. Table 95 Form fields Element Description Alarm sense time events This windowpane displays the currently assigned events and their associated sense time Edit Available only if there are currently assigned alarm sense time events This button is used to modify existing alarm sense time events The Alarm sense time form on page 170 form displays Add Click Add to assign events to the specified sense time The Alarm sense time form on page 170 form displays Remove Select an alarm sense time event to remove and click Remove How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 95 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 170 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Alarm sense time form This form allows you to add or edit the link between an event and an alarm sense time The event determines when and to what value the sense times for all alarms in the group are changed Figure 71 Alarm Sense Time Alarm Sense Time E Even A New time jo Cancel Table 96 Form fields Element Description Event Select an event from the drop down list If there are no events listed you need to configure events using the Event Schedule form New time Select or enter a sense time The value is in seconds and indicates the delay before triggering an associated digital output or sending in as alarm for this application if the DI type is Alarm This number tells the system how many
10. V S 1 Front Door Admin Bldg VVS 3 Front Door Factory VYS 4 Back Door Admin Bldg VVS 5 Back Door Factory NA VVS 2 Supervisor s desk Admin Bldg Sam to Spm WWSX6 Supervisor s desk Factory Spm to Midnight WSX5 Supervisor s desk Factory Midnight to Sam Chapter 4 173 Devices Element Description Description Click to assign a unique title to this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Definition tab This tab allows you to configure the routing of alarms to selected Client Groups according to a schedule or at all times Additionally you can select Client Groups and set a time to bump the alarm to an additional location e You can configure both Routing and Bumping only a Routing record or only a Bumping record e Client Groups can be part of any Region in a Global configuration 174 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 74 Definition tab Es Routing and Bumping Description Facility X Definition Alarms Routing Client Groups Assign Client Groups C Always Time Schedule y m Bumping Client Groups Assign Client Groups Time To Burnp Minutes f
11. e Allow the ability to arm disarm with a reader an Intrusion Zone and access a particular Zone Intrusion Zones can be assigned to an access right For systems using ACU controllers e You can assign Areas to an access right and then assign a time schedule and dates to the Area access right Table 141 Form fields Element Description Description This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Access Right from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Note For Micro controller readers assign readers to the access right using the Access Right tab For ACU controller readers assign the readers to an Area first Then assign the Area to the access right using the Area tab Chapter 7 239 Access rights departments persons and credentials Access rights tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Use this tab to assign readers owned by Micro controllers to this access right record You can add additional control to the access right by assigning a time schedule Figure 103 Access rights tab e Description O IS Facility Lo Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion
12. e Printer Displays the currently selected printer to which credential transactions prints This may be the same or a different printer than that used for alarm activity e Select Printer Click to select a printer to which credential transactions prints Note 1 Printer options must be selected on the Reader form in order for credential transactions to print 2 All zone activity transactions print and do not follow routing or schedules assigned to a reader How to 1 Review Table 28 on page 50 before you begin completion of this form 2 Click Browse to display a Select Client window 3 Proceed to complete the remainder of the options according to your system this client and the guidelines in Table 28 on page 50 4 Repeat these steps for each client that you are defining Chapter 2 53 System preferences Backup Clients tab Note This tab displays ONLY at client computers that are licensed for Client Redundancy Use this tab to configure your backup clients that would take over the devices in case of a failure at the default client computer Figure 15 Backup Clients tab e Description fo Facility ef Client Backup Clients m Backup Clients Move Up Move Down Assign m Database Connection Heartbeat Assian Controller Phone s Heartbeat Interval seconds 2 Redundancy J7 Display redundancy notification Heartbeat Retries JV Perform Backup on Norma
13. monitored in the Swipe and Show window If readers have been selected right click an activity record and launch the Swipe and Show program Launch Swipe and Show Starts the Swipe and Show program Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time Note If Imaging is not licensed for the system this option is not available Credential Displays the Credential form making available the selected credential record View Live Video Accesses live video from the camerals associated with the reader s credential transaction as defined by its event trigger In order to view live video the DVR must be online if it is a duplex recorder the recorder must also be in record mode The following windows open e The Digital Video Viewer Refer to Navigate video console on page 209 for information about the Digital Video Viewer e Video window s displaying the current live view of the camerals associated with the credential transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time Chapter 9 Monitor and control Table 174 Form fields continued Element Description View Recorded Video Accesses previously recorded video from the camera s associated with the reader s credential transaction as defined by its event trigger In order to view recorded video the DVR must be online and available The DVR cannot be serving another request for playback of any record
14. Chapter 2 37 System preferences 10 x Settings User Fields Mode Labels Address Fields Communication Settings Clear Archive Security Advanced m Password Minimum Length characters Cannot begin with a numeric character J Cannot end with a numeric character Must be mixed case contain both upper and lower case characters TF Must contain both alpha and numeric characters Minimum numeric characters fi 3 r Credential T Hide PIN Number 7 Table 19 Form fields Element Description Minimum Length characters This field accepts 1 to 20 characters Enter a number then select those features that you want to enforce for this password e Cannot begin with a numeric character Cannot end with a numeric character Must be mixed case contain both upper and lower case characters Must contain both alpha and numeric characters If selected this option enables the Minimum numeric characters control field Enter a number that represents the number of numeric characters for this password Minimum numeric characters The range for this selection is 1 to 19 characters with at least 1 alpha character Credential Hide PIN Number This determines whether or not the actual PIN numbers display on the Credential form and in a Credential History Report If selected the numbers are hidden and replaced by asterisks in the PIN Number field How to 1 Assign
15. Digital Output DO Groups E Time schedule Enable Disable 139 140 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 70 Form fields Element Description Time Schedule Click the drop down list to select a previously created time schedule Enable Disable Select Enable if you want to enable this digital input when this time schedule starts Enabling the digital input allows it to then trigger the associated digital output when a state change occurs Select Disable if you want to disable this digital input when this time schedule starts Disabling the digital input prevents the state change from being reported and the associated digital output from triggering How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 70 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Events tab Note This tab is available for input if the type of Digital Input is Digital Output Use this tab to assign events and an associated sense time to this digital input Events define start time s and day s only There is no end associated with an event Therefore that event stays in effect until another event changes it or you change it manually Figure 51 Events tab Digital Input Sense Time Description Sense Time Min Chapter 4 Devices Table 71 Form fields Element Description Sense Time This windowpane displays which events change the sense time You can also ass
16. This form allows you to create a list of frequently used predefined responses to an alarm and reduces the need to type an entry The response entries that you create display as selections on the Alarm Monitor form Complete the field on this tab Examples Police are on their way Maintenance is cleaning up Click Save between each entry and before you exit a Alarms amp Events Alarm Refer to Define alarms on page gs 153 1 When you set up your controller some alarms are automatically set up for you The Alarm form is used to modify an alarm record However alarms for digital inputs must be set up manually using the Digital Input form When the records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmm b pp ACU controller mmmmm bb pp where mmmm or mmmmm represents the controller number to which this alarm is associated b represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each alarm displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form With the exception of external alarms you cannot delete alarm records Alarms are managed by the owner of the alarm record The alarm owner can be an API module CCTV Interface digital input camera DVMR controller or reader For an alarm to display
17. To identify a reader module door input look for a default description that follows this format 01 1 01 Reader To identify a 20DI module input point look for a default description that follows this format 01 1 01 DI Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a controller connected to a keypad reader 1 3 4 a o Press the start key on the keypad The start key is labeled with either an asterisk lt gt or a plus lt gt depending on the reader model Enter one of the following 0 to turn monitoring off 1 to turn monitoring on Enter the alarm group number 00 to 15 you want shunted Press the end key that is labeled with either a pound sign or an lt x gt Press the start key on the keypad again Enter your credential number on the keypad Press the end key lt gt or lt x gt Normal type reader Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a controller connected to a normal reader 1 Press the start key on the keypad The start key is labeled with either an asterisk lt gt or a plus lt gt depending on the reader model Enter one of the following 0 to turn monitoring off 1 to turn monitoring on Enter the alarm group number 00 to 15 you want shunted Press the end key which is labeled with either a pound sign or an lt x gt Present a valid credential to the reader Keypad alarm shunting The keypad alarm shunting feature allows you to turn the mo
18. event trigger 207 play controls 277 record to CD 207 recording device 208 video console search for video 2 3 video console window 209 video popup enable alarm video popup 205 W weak encryption key 384 WiseUpdate 342 North America T 561 998 6100 T 888 GE SECURITY 888 437 3287 F 561 998 6224 E rs bctinfo ge com Asia T 852 2907 8108 F 852 2142 5063 Australia T 61 3 9259 4700 F 61 3 9259 4799 Europe T 32 2 725 11 20 F 32 2 721 40 47 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 www gesecurity com O 2007 General Electric Company All Rights Reserved imagination at work
19. ooooooocoommorrommmmmm 348 Diagnostic Viewer program oooococcccccccccccr rr 351 MAUI Sad snag tbandp WW Al AA E EEEE EE EESAN 352 PFETELEMCES s soroan coda a hide a le add EE iia 354 Online help cotas o A anne AAA seamseete 355 A seeen hod SRETAN keg sheds cas ase alee dapat 355 SM O Ns 355 ADULTA CAC ci A I YA 355 Questions and ANSWETS ococcccccccccoo rr 356 Dal ri AN 356 aloe A e A In A O 358 Global configurato Ai AOS 358 NETWORKING iii A dd 360 PROS LS A A A ven es pats 362 REGUEIS sic iccksutcts A EEES O 362 RNA 363 Setup RAID Ue ais 365 SOMA a A A A A A A A ltd 368 Terminal Services A as 370 User GUESLIONS A wesw eeeee Rees 371 MOO PAE E A alt 373 Customer SUPPOM eiers teenie oe be a ee ON EATE EE EE E AE E E 373 Appendist B COPEC NON essnee oneen aesan a a enaa aE 375 OVNI Wisconsin 376 Ul certification ai AA as Aaa 376 e y AA E O A N O E 377 ce eee een ree A ee ne AE ey err erry 385 xi xii Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual xiii Preface This is the GE Facility Commander Wnx User Manual This document includes an overview of the product and detailed instructions for configuration and administration functions Read these instructions and all ancillary documentation Refer to Related documentation on page xiv The most current versions of this and related documentation may be found on our Web site at www ge security com Conventions used in this document The follo
20. y Table 52 Form fields Element Description Reset APB Event Select an event from the drop down list of available event records that resets the anti passback status for all credentials in the controller Reset T amp A Event Select an event from the drop down list of available event records that resets the T amp A status for all credentials in the controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 52 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Select this tab to view information about an individual controller as currently stored in the controller s database The columns of the Controller Monitor form also reflect the status of the selected controller and explain what is happening between the host and the controller This is a read only windowpane in two column format as follows Figure 34 Status tab Table 53 Form fields Element Description Mode Controller Description Micro JS Facility Ignore Faciities Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Port Settings Mode Normal Firmware Version 6 1 Firmware Patch Level Firmware Revision Date 06 15 05 Boot Version 5 Memory Size Meg 4 Encryption None gt Last status date fi 0 03 2006 Last status time 08 04 46 AM Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh m
21. Assign Alarms Click to display an Alarm Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign alarms for this application to this Routing and Bumping record How to 1 Review Table 100 to complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab API connections This form in the Gateways amp Interfaces group allows you to define an interface license for external application integration by assigning a description of the API Application Program Interface service that has been configured to communicate with FCWnx This option is purchased individually and licensed with your FCWnx system For complete details contact your GE Security Sales Representative The number of API records that you can configure is limited to the number of API connections for which you are licensed Once configured real time event processing and remote command and control functionality extended by way of the API includes the following e Bi directional alarm event processing for monitoring and acknowledgement e Receiving FCWnx access control credential events e Receiving digital input events e Receiving intrusion zone events e Control of alarm point monitoring On Off e Control of digital input points Enable Disable e Control of digital output points Open Close e Control of intrusion zones Arm Disarm Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF workstation do not display and cannot be configured monitored or controlled through an API conn
22. Auto Logoff Select the number of minutes the system waits since the last action was taken before logging off the current operator To turn off the auto logoff feature and remain permanently logged in enter O zero The default setting is 20 minutes Note You must restart the FCWnx client program for changes to the Auto Logoff selection to take effect Display Alarm Notification Enable this field if you want an alarm dialog box to display whenever an alarm occurs based on facilities available to the current operator Client Region Failover Note This checkbox displays only on a Global configuration This checkbox is applicable to FCWnx Global configurations When displayed the default state of this checkbox is selected and grayed out If a database failure occurs at the default Regional Database Server this client would automatically fail over to a configured backup Regional Database Server Backups are configured on the Region form Backup Regions tab Click the checkbox to clear and disable the automatic failover option You might choose to clear this checkbox to prevent nonessential client failover Enable Auto Shutdown FCWnx services automatically shut down when a client closes the FCWnx application and meets all the Auto Shutdown criteria Services automatically shut down when a client closes the FCWnx application and meets ALL of the following criteria 1 Does not host any controllers or DVRs 2 Do
23. Choose the Start Date of the data that you want to remove from your archive database by selecting the month then the day to begin your archive 5 Choose the End Date of the data that you want to remove from your archive database by selecting the month then the day to end your archive 6 Click Delete 7 Click OK Note The deletion of an archive database is taking place in the background Progress is indicated on the status bar in the lower right side of the screen The process may take hours to complete The length of time is dependent on the size of the archive database and the hardware components of your computer 36 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 8 Upon completion a message displays The records from the Archive database has been successfully deleted Click OK Appending archive databases If you have a backup of a SecurePerfectArchive 3 xo0r later database the data can be restored using the Maintenance Utility for this application Backup and Restore functions are detailed in the Installation Manual The Maintenance Utility for this application also appends credential history alarm history operator history and where appropriate Digital Input history Zone history and DVR history data to the current Archive database Current Archive data is not affected In order to use the Append utility you must meet the following criteria e Backup Archive files must be restored to a local or mapped network directory
24. Events group 2 Click Alarm Routing and Bumping icon 3 Assign Client groups for Routing and a frequency option 4 Assign Client groups for Bumping and a frequency option 5 Follow guidelines to complete the form Set Automatic Logoff Time Refer to Table 28 on page 50 1 Click Administration group 2 Click Client icon 3 Set Auto logoff Minutes qs 23 qs 24 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 2 Administrator tasks continued Element Description Diagnostics Refer to Diagnostics overview on page qs 344 1 Click Diagnostics group 2 Click Diagnostic Setting icon 3 Select items from the list box on the right windowpane that you want to monitor using the Diagnostic Viewer program 4 Select Enable debug messages Note Use this form with care The more items you turn on for monitoring the more your system performance is affected This is even more important when monitoring port communications or controller items 5 Click Diagnostics group 6 Click Diagnostic Viewer icon to open the Diagnostic Viewer program The activities of your selected component are displayed Contact Customer Support Refer to Customer Support on page qs 373 1 If you require assistance first contact your local Business Partner 2 Tocontact GE Security use the following numbers and addresses Telephone United States 1 888 GE SECURITY 1 888 437 3287 Asia 852 2907 8108 Australia 61 3 9259
25. Interface Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection Trigger One DO upon floor selection Element Description Reader To tag a reader as an elevator reader select a reader from the drop down list of available readers If no readers are listed check that the readers have been marked active on the Reader tab of the Reader form Micro controller The list displays all available readers ACU controller The list displays available readers associated with a controller that is set as an elevator controller These readers are also associated with an Area Floor Tracking Select one of three options e No Floor Tracking Floor s selected are not sent to Credential History not tracked e Floor Tracking by Input The floors selected are sent to Credential History e Floor Tracking by Keypad Floor selection is made by using the keypad of the reader and the floor s selected are sent to Credential History Note Do not switch between floor tracking and no floor tracking in the same elevator record If you want to change an existing record delete that record and create a new one with the desired floor tracking method Interface Select one of two options Trigger All DOs prior to floor selection All the appropriate floor selection buttons activate The user can select one or more floors e Trigger One DO upon floor selection All the appropriate floor selection buttons activate The user can se
26. The entries are not saved Chapter 4 183 Devices Table 104 Form fields continued Element Description Add Click Add to open the Area Time Schedule Selection dialog box allowing you to assign an Area and Time Schedule from drop down lists to associate with this elevator record Remove Select an Area Time Schedule and then click to delete from this elevator record How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 104 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Floor Digital Output tab Note This tab displays ONLY if you select No Floor Tracking or Floor Tracking By Keypad from the Floor Tracking field on the Elevator tab Select this tab to link a digital output to a floor Note Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller Figure 80 Floor Digital Output tab e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Assigned Floor Digital Output Floor Digital Output Area Edit Add Remove 184 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 105 Form fields Element Description Assigned Floor Digital Output This list box displays the currently assigned floors digital outputs and Area for systems using ACU controllers Edit To edit a floor digital output link select and entry from the list and then click this button The Fl
27. User Manual Table 190 Form fields Element Description Select type Select one of the alarm DI types from the drop down list e Alarms e Alarm Groups e Digital Input Note Nothing displays in the list box until you choose a controller option Select controller Select a controller option e All displays all the selected type of devices in the current operator s facilities for all controllers By Controller displays all the selected type of devices in the current operator s facilities for a specific controller Columns in Windowpane Description Description of the Alarm DI in the database Controller Controller on which the Alarm DI is located SCIF Workstation If a SCIF Area is assigned the name of the SCIF workstation displays here Controller Type Displays the type as a Micro or ACU controller Area This selection is for systems with ACU controllers Secure Area associated with the controller Set state to Note The names of the buttons change depending on the DI type Alarm or Other selected If an Alarm or Alarm Group is selected click e Monitor On To monitor the selected alarms or alarm groups Setting Monitor On displays the alarms on the Alarm Monitor form e Monitor Off To immediately discontinue monitoring the selected alarms or alarm groups Setting Monitor Off does not display alarms on the Alarm Monitor form e Indefinite To make the change permanent This selection does not allow it
28. You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 3 You cannot delete an alarm group record Alarm groups are owned by the associated controller record Use the Alarm Group form to assign events or schedules to alarm groups 4 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Elevators Elevator Refer to Define elevators on page qs 178 1 Decide which method of elevator control you want to use The methods of implementing elevator control No floor tracking method Floor tracking by input Floor tracking by keypad 2 Depending on the type of controller used in your system for this elevator your configuration steps vary 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence Quick Setup guide Configuring elevator control using a micro controller L 2 Create Floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators Configure the elevator records You use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select Method of elevator control Readers Verify that readers are active on the Reader form Floors You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a
29. a Yes displays in the Global Server field Synchronization interval fields are unavailable for input You can assign synchronization intervals on Regional Database Servers only e Is a Regional Database Server a No displays in the Global Server field Synchronization interval fields are available for input Note The synchronization processing time is dependent on how much data needs to be synchronized and the performance of your system Using Windows we recommend that you synchronize time settings on the computers within your FCWnx Global configuration Database Synchronization Interval min This database contains configuration data relating to credentials and controllers The default and minimum number of minutes for synchronization of this database is every five minutes The maximum number of minutes is 1440 once per day History Database Synchronization Interval min This database contains current history including credential transactions and operator history The default and minimum number of minutes for synchronization of this database is every five minutes The maximum number of minutes is 1440 once per day Note REMINDER A subscription is a request for a copy of data or database objects to be replicated It defines what publications are received where and when The time that it takes to complete this process of replication and synchronization is dependent on the amount of data needed to be synchronized Li
30. e Flashing Completed e idle e Incorrect controller type e Inquiry e Normal e Password download e Reader download e Reset e Schedule download e Telephone download e There are fewer than 4 passwords defined Mode This displays the current mode or state of the controller The mode is assigned on the Mode Schedule form or by a manual control command The mode default labels are Normal Mode 1 Mode 2 or Mode 3 or as re labeled on the Preference form Comm device Comm device messages include the following e If this is a direct connect controller lists the COM port to which this controller is connected e If this is a dial up controller the text Dial Up is displayed e If this is a network controller the IP address of the controller is displayed e If this is a network direct controller the IP address displays If the controller loses network connection and fails over to a direct connect in approximately two minutes the display changes from the IP address to COM port When a failover occurs a yellow LED displays in the COM address column e If this is a network network controller the IP address displays If the controller loses network connection fails over to a secondary network IP address the display changes to the secondary IP address When a failover occurs a yellow LED displays in the COM address column e If this is a network dial up controller the text Dial Up is displayed Note
31. leave these fields blank Device report form This tab is used only when generating a Device Report Filter or select specific information you want to display on the report e Device From the drop down list select a device that you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all select lt ALL gt Note The following exceptions apply e Ifa Camera or Digital Video Recorder was selected as Report Type on the General tab the Device drop down list fills with DVRs only e If Alarm API Connections is selected as Report Type on the General tab the drop down list contains only lt ALL gt e For all other Report Types the list fills with controllers Chapter 10 Reports DI History report form Use this tab to select or limit the criteria by which this report is generated DI State Select the state of this DI as Set Reset Open or Short If you want to use all DI states select lt ALL gt Controller Select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt DI Type Select the DI type as Alarm Elevator or Inactive If you want to use all DI types select lt ALL gt DI Description Enter the range of device descriptions on which you want to report Leave blank for all descriptions Controller Description Enter the range of controller descriptions on which you want to report Leave blank for all descriptions Operator History report
32. records the Enable unique amp required Employee Number check box remains clear OR e Set a control that requires all Person records to have an entry in the Employee number field If you choose to require all Person records to have a unique employee number select Enable unique amp required Employee Number 1 A message displays informing you The Employee number field on the Person form is required and unique Once this is enabled it cannot be changed back Do you want to continue with this change Click Yes 2 A second message displays Could not enable unique and required Employee number Duplicates already exist or field is empty in the database Refer to the Diagnostic Logfile 3 Navigate to the logfile A message informs you that the system generated a text file and placed the file in the Logs folder of the application Server Navigate to the Logs folder in the FCWnx installation folder Locate the DuplicateEmployeeNumbers txt file consult the list of duplicate or blank employee numbers locate those Person records and assign a unique employee number to each 4 When all records on the txt file list have a unique employee number return to the Preference form select Enable unique amp required Employee Number and click Save If you cannot save and again receive additional messages you must repeat the steps above 5 The selection to require all Person records to have a unique employee number cannot be reversed and all
33. to the history file or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be saved to the history file Valid transactions to monitor Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be displayed on the Activity Monitor form or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be displayed on the Activity Monitor form Valid transactions to printer Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be sent to the printer or No if the above schedule is when you do not want valid transactions to be sent to the printer How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 62 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Reader type schedules tab Use this tab to select the schedules that are used to determine when a reader is used as a Normal Credential Keypad or Keypad reader Chapter 4 Devices Event schedules define start time s and day s only There is no end associated with a reader schedule event Therefore that event schedule stays in effect until another schedule changes it or you change it manually Figure 44 Reader Type Schedules tab Reader e Description Facility X gt Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Rout
34. 03 03 ACU Reader 3 DO Relay 14236 03 03 ACU Reader 3 Aux DO Relay Table 68 Form fields Element Description This section displays for systems configured with Micro controllers Output A Primary Local A primary input assignment is not required The default is None Click the drop down list to select an available DO to assign as the primary e f you select an output this output must belong to the local controller e Ifthe controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO is triggered e Ifthe ON time on the Digital Output form is set to 00 this DO remains active until the digital input is reset Output B Click the drop down list to select an available DO e The digital outputs in this list can be on a local controller or other controllers Output B is activated only if the host is online and able to communicate with other controllers e The outputs that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned e This output does not communicate if offline Chapter 4 Devices Table 68 Form fields continuea Element Description This section displays for systems configured with ACU controllers Output Relay Control Available Output Relay Windowpane Select from the Available list those outputs that you want to assign to this record The outputs that display in this list are th
35. 1 Review the guidelines in Table 144 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Intrusion Zones tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers This tab allows you to assign intrusion zone control to previously created access rights Access to a reader and access to an intrusion zone are two separate access rights Only credential holders with an Arm Disarm Intrusion Zone access right are able to arm and disarm zones by accessing a credential keypad reader within a zone When a zone is armed all readers within that zone go offline therefore normal access rights do not gain access into the area Figure 106 Intrusion Zones tab Table 145 Form fields Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials e Description S Facility Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones Areas Assigned Intrusion Zones Assign Intrusion Zones Element Description Assigned Intrusion Zones This windowpane displays a list of previously assigned intrusion zones for the currently selected access right record Assign Intrusion Zone Click this button to display the Intrusion Zone Assignment dialog box allowing you to assign and unassign intrusion zones to the selected access right If no intrusion zones display verify that intrusion zones were configured on the Intrusion Zone form The Intrusio
36. 134 Digital Output tA 0 n 136 DOIGIOUDS TOD iis ri II A AAA A AA eneenees 137 Schedules a teca Dades 139 A eat ore E E EE O eyo kota a a E N N IS 140 o A IO 141 Define digital Outputs cc v 05 vee cave tikis Tatai nE ad ia a 143 Digital Output taD patiia a a S dado 144 SECOS diia AAA AAA L ida 146 Manual Controls ds 146 AVANCE italia 147 Define digital output JFOUPS oooococooccccrocccccn correr rr 149 A SEO 149 Sehed leta ii A dite 151 Define INStrUCHONS cubra nadaa 151 vi Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 5 InStrUCON tai A A ERAEN 152 Define alarm FESPONSES aii A A A new bean teed 152 Alarmi Response iuris aiii 153 Define GIGNMS i iii A A wwe aia Veter 153 AMD a AA ge Seuerde dann eer ee ee adh datseranadnaaadens 155 SOL instructions 10D arcos bale agetenmatinnnsd bbe M44 dg A ule E a n AA ee 157 Digital Outputs TOD cui AS A hadi t en 158 DO EOS OD a ada 160 SChedUIG1ODss uc4vesrcandddrageaeuweawe rr ad n 162 EVE O ar A A 163 STKO JUTE O SEE IR O 164 CENAD a iaai aR A A EAEE EE E AA E EAE NE 166 Addi gsound to AN alar on a EEE EE a e ala 167 Define alarm Groups i ct 167 GROUP AD sb 168 Events LOD AO xe aches cachiecererenarandodedytiss A A pnd Aaa Ab 169 Define alarm priority ivccevisesea cesses A EE Sey NER AT ESOS aie a 170 Configure alarm routing and bumping 2 cee cece cece cee ence rro 172 Definition TOD te AAA ddadadala eee oe 173 Alarme tU A gira a E RE E
37. 255 characters Enter the reason for manually changing the state of the specified digital output The text entered here is recorded in Operator History Set state to On for Duration Click to set the selected digital output to its Active state for the On time specified on the Digital Output tab On Indefinite Click to set the selected digital output to its Active state until it is manually set to its inactive state The only way to turn it off is by selecting Off on this tab or Off on the Manual Door DO Control form Off Click to set the selected digital output to its inactive state Sched Override Use this option to change the state of the DO if you want the schedule to override its setting For example use Sched Override to unlock a door if you want a schedule at a later time to lock this door If you don t want the scheduler to lock your door use the On Indefinite selection How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 76 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Advanced tab Note The options on this tab are available and enabled only when the controller type is an ACU controller Use this tab to link digital outputs to an alarm When this alarm is activated the digital output is also triggered 147 148 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Example The digital output is a siren An alarm is generated when a door forced alarm is generated Because the digital output siren is
38. 4700 Europe 48 58 326 22 40 Latin America 305 593 4301 Be ready at the equipment before calling FAX 561 998 6224 Web site www ge security com Support rs bctsupport ge com Documentation bctdocs ge com 3 Check the Web site periodically for timely information on all GE Security products Quick Setup guide How to accomplish operator tasks Table 3 Operator tasks Element Description Arm Disarm e Area e Intrusion Zone Refer to Arm Disarm an area by access right on page qs 228 iR 2 3 4 OR 1 a Refer to Arm disarm an intrusion zone on page qs 234 IE Click Policies amp Places group Click Access Right icon Assign the Area to this access right Swipe the credential at any of the credential keypad readers within an Area Click Manual Control icon Click Area and Zones tab and click Arm or Disarm Click Policies amp Places group Click Access Right icon Assign the Intrusion Zone to this access right To Arm 1 followed by a valid credential read To Disarm 0 followed by a valid credential read Click Manual Control icon Click Area and Zones tab and click Arm or Disarm View Video Console Refer to Video windows on page qs 196 1 2 Note f an alarm is generated with associated video the Video Console icon displays Click Monitors amp Controls group Click Video Console icon in the Alarm Monitor and you can access Video Console by cl
39. 56 history 36 owner 56 priority 70 schedules 68 sense time 70 settings 756 sounds 2 alarm groups 67 alarm instruction 9 alarm monitor column headings 297 shortcut menu 299 toolbar 298 alarm points 8 alarm printing 52 385 alarm responses 9 752 alarm video popup enable 205 alarms 53 adding sound 67 routing and bumping 72 antipassback 377 API connections 76 architecture client server 4 archive 33 34 appending archive databases 36 area arm disarm an area 379 arm disarm by access right 228 arm disarm by manual control 228 define 220 arm disarm area by access right 228 area by manual control 228 intrusion zone by manual control 230 intrusion zone options 229 auto shutdown services 5 auto update 342 check for update 344 B backing up data 34 backup client 53 backup region 4 before you begin 3 C camera preset 200 camera presets 797 cameras 798 enable 799 presets 797 PTZ Control 793 status 795 type 799 CCTV 216 certifications 375 check for upgrade 75 clear archive 33 client backup 53 configure 48 49 client monitor shortcut menu 303 toolbar 302 386 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual client redundancy 56 client server architecture 4 clients groups 57 COM port 361 communication setting 3 connection error 363 controller configuration 04 definition 92 description address 93 flashing 777 hardware address 93 type 93 controller flash and controller preference configuration
40. 770 controller monitor 303 controller flash and configuration 308 search criteria and controller selection 306 shortcut menu 307 toolbar 306 controller record generation 86 controller records dial up 90 direct connect 89 controllers 86 conventions xiii converting 358 creating records 20 credential 17 22 3 8 11 16 25 26 27 41 44 52 60 73 84 85 92 102 115 116 118 120 123 127 290 access mode 3 activity monitoring 288 alarm processing 296 alias 45 archive history 36 assign guard tour 283 backup data 34 client redundancy 56 define 262 design 259 door schedule 25 facility code company code 727 format 110 114 273 formats in 40 bit and 55 bit wiegand protocol 276 guard tour 280 282 283 history report 18 history transactions 723 IKE readers 32 loading 89 95 loading method 9 PIN digits 38 readers 772 controller preference report 17 328 route activity 282 swipe and show 294 tour points 283 transaction override 323 user fields 28 customer support 373 D database utility Integrity utility 356 MSDEAdmin 357 DCOM 6 debug 353 debug messages 345 deleting records 22 demo mode 3 55 departments 246 dependencies service dependencies 372 DES DESII 00 380 device configuration 4 diagnostic object 348 Diagnostic Viewer 357 menus 352 preferences 354 diagnostics 344 Diagnostic Viewer 35 remote 345 troubleshooting 34 dial up controller records 90 dial up troubleshooting 364 digital inpu
41. ACU controller The installer has selected an alarm other than 1 for the door contact If you are not certain which alarm point is being used contact the installer e None Use this selection when the door is not monitored for open status The setting None sends a Door Used message to the host when antipassback is active Note When configuring paired readers both readers use the same door contact REX Digital Input Select the alarm point from the drop down list that is connected to the REX device for this reader e Default The REX alarm point is automatically set as the second alarm point on the reader or reader interface e Other alarms available on the associated ACU controller The installer has selected an alarm other than 2 for the door contact If you are not certain which alarm point is being used contact the installer e None Use this selection when the door is part of paired readers controlling an antipassback secure Area REX is initiated by a reader rather than an alarm point Note When configuring paired readers door contacts and the REX input points are the same Paired readers are used to control a door from both directions This is important when using anitpassback secure Areas How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 59 and complete the fields on this tab according to the reader and controller type that you are configuring 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Routing tab Chapter 4 123 Devic
42. Access rights departments persons and credentials e A Mass Update Complete dialog box displays indicating completion or failure Note When mass updates are processed to an access right a log file is generated and a View Results key displays in the dialog box Click to view the completion log We recommend that you rename and save this file to another location for reference purposes Renaming the log prevents an overwrite The questionable log is available for Customer Support to review and locate discrepancies Be aware that this log file is automatically overwritten every 7 days in order to prevent unnecessary data that would accumulate on your hard drive 9 When the process is complete a Mass Update Complete dialog message displays 10 Right click and select Mass Update from the shortcut menu to disable and exit Mass Update mode The records refresh at this point 11 Updates display in the list box to the right Conditions of mass update Note The time to process a mass update depends on your system performance number and type of updates Specifically the credential learn and alarm processing functions may be influenced We recommend that you schedule mass update processing during off peak hours for your company GE Security has set 200 as the default maximum number of records that can process updates at one time However this number is configurable Call GE Security Customer Support for assistance if you want to recon
43. Alarm Open 0003 0 02 Reader 2 0 00 Alarm Open Active State Sense Time 0003 0 03 Reader 3 0 00 Alarm Open Minutes 0003 0 04 Reader 4 0 00 Alarm Open 0003 0 01 DI 1 0 00 Inactive Open 0 0003 0 02 DI 2 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 03 DI 3 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 04 DI 4 0 00 Inactive Open IV Enabled 0003 0 05 DI 5 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 06 DI 6 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 07 DI 7 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 08 DI 8 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 09 DI 9 0 00 Inactive Open Comment 0003 0 10 DI 10 0 00 Inactive Open 0003 0 11 DI 11 0 00 Inactive Open I y z Bal al Di Records ss Note The Controller form contains a combination of tabs The settings selected on the Controller Definition tab determine which tabs display Note that any time a credential that is not in a controller is presented to a reader it is reported as unknown and the host sends the credential to the controller This happens regardless of the Credential Loading option The controllers can store only a limited number of credentials When a previously unknown credential is sent to a controller whose credential capacity is exceeded the controller randomly chooses a credential to delete to make room for the new credential The credential is deleted from the controller but not from the FCWnx system 86 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Define controllers Use the Controller form Security Devices group to configure controllers Complete th
44. COE TOT o ci ia ie a Bowlin Sebi ok ENE A Se Ed acne ena 314 Transaction override cia ia hak be e ee d 323 WRS NEN oi E ec sls ek A ai ea 325 288 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations Activity monitoring Note Fora shortcut to the functions available within the Activity Monitor form or to a related form right click anywhere in the area where the credential transactions display Not all options are available to you You must click on a credential transaction with a camera association in order to enable video options on the shortcut menu Camera and reader association linking is accomplished on the Alarms amp Events Group Event Trigger form Figure 125 Activity monitor 4 Activity Monitor SS iol xj gt iNo BEO Date Time Activity Type drea Zone Location Name Number Reference 10 06 2006 11 21 55 AM E Unknown 0001 1516320 Table 172 Form fields Element Description Date Displays the date in the controller on which the credential transaction occurred Time Displays the time of the credenti
45. Click to go back to the previous view Click to go to the next view Use this toolbar to resize the page view You can use the zoom tool use the page fit icons o e E E A ail EA O zoom out incrementally set a of zoom or zoom in incrementally 1of450 pi O xiv Facility Commanderf Wnx Edition User Manual Related documentation Training sources For more information about FCWnx Editions and hardware that works with it consult the following Facility Commander Wnx Installation Manual Credential Designer Manual Graphics Console Manual Installing Facility Commander Wnx in a Clustered Environment ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers User Guide Micro 5 Installation Guide Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 Installation Guide Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 Microcontroller Quick Installation Instructions M3000 Installation Manual These documents and others are included on the Documentation CD ROM in PDF format The CD is included in the media kit shipped with your system You must have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed on your computer to view PDF documents For your convenience a copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader software is included on the CD You may want to take advantage of the XtremeLearning library of convenient comprehensive and interactive Web based training courses available through your GE Security business sales representatives Quick Setup guide dia This section walks you thr
46. Definition tab PA ye Complete all applicable fields and enabled tabs according to the type of controller that you are configuring Click Security Devices group Click Controller icon Select connection type as Dialup on the Definition tab Complete the Settings to Reach Host tab Om E AN S Complete the Settings to Reach Controller tab Configure Devices Refer to Device configuration on page qs 84 Follow the recommended order for completion of device configuration 1 Click Security Devices group 2 Click the icon and complete the form that corresponds to the device that you are configuring Configure Guard Tours Refer to Guard tours on page qs 279 1 Click Guard Tours group 2 Click Guard Tour icon 3 Configure the specifics of this tour by completing the elements displayed on the form Configure Monitor Redundancy Refer to Client redundancy overview on page qs 56 Although devices like the controller are designed to run without the host software running for days eventually memory is going to be filled up at the controller end The redundancy feature in FCWnx is designed to address this condition Clients can be configured to be backed up by other clients so that in case of the default hosting client called the primary client being disabled one of the backup clients takes over all its devices This is designed to work automatically without any operator intervention so the system contin
47. Digital Input form Use the Alarm form to modify an alarm record With the exception of external alarms you cannot delete alarm records Alarms are managed by the owner of the alarm record The alarm owner can be an API module CCTV Interface digital input camera DVMR controller or reader For an alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form you can either select the Monitor field on the Alarm form or schedule the alarm to be monitored When set to be monitored the alarm displays and changes to an alarm condition 154 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual NG Fora shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Ifyou are using this shortcut menu to get to the Time Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Note Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF workstation cannot be configured monitored or controlled unless you are at the SCIF workstation Table 84 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters When the records are created the default description is in the format mmmm b pp where mmmm represents the controller number to which this alarm is associated b represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number Example 0001 1 01 Tamper This tamper alarm is on controller 1 module 1 alarm 1 To change this description select and enter text over the existing
48. Duration Activates the selected DO for the time specified in the On Time column e Off Immediately deactivates the selected DO e On Indefinite Activates the selected DO which remains active until you manually turn it off by clicking Off e Sched Override This option is not available for ACU controllers Use this option to change the state of a DO if you want a schedule to override its setting Purpose This field accepts 255 characters Enter an explanation for locking unlocking doors or activating deactivating DO points These comments are written to the operator history file and display on the Operator History Report Purpose Field Chapter9 317 Monitor and control How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 189 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Alarm Digital Input tab Note Functions associated with a SCIF workstation cannot be controlled with the Manual Control form EXCEPTION If you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting the controller functions can be controlled Manually monitor alarms and DIs Digital Input points depending on the current operator s facilities and permissions Note There may be schedules in effect that override manually controlled changes if schedule override is selected otherwise the manual control selection is truly indefinite Figure 134 Alarm Digital Input tab E Manual Control 318 Facility Commander Wnx Edition
49. Equipment UL 1778 or the Standard for Fire Protective Signaling Devices UL 1481 A UL listed printer shall be provided Signal prioritization shall be set up as follows from highest to lowest Alarm Trouble Supplementary such as access control Polling of a receiving unit must not exceed 200 seconds Exit and Entry delay must not exceed 60 seconds Communication between Host and Protected Premise Units must consist of an independent dedicated and direct Ethernet line Communication over LAN and WAN has not been investigated by UL Elevator Control DVR CCTV Camera functions and Keypad Alarm Response have not been evaluated by UL 377 Glossary This section explains some terms as they apply to FCWnx Table 206 FCWnx terms explained Element Description antipassback Antipassback APB is an access control feature designed and configured to reduce the chance of users passing back their credential to another person attempting to gain access Micro Controllers When readers are designated as entry IN or exit OUT the system is able to record whether a user is inside or outside at any time by noting the last place a credential was used If the last valid transaction was reported at an IN reader then the system knows that they are inside If the last valid transaction was at an OUT reader then the system knows that they are outside e Active APB does not let a person re enter unless they first exit The user is un
50. FCWnx Use this form to configure operator records Table 35 Form field Element Description Facility A facility can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator NG Fora shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Operator tab Use this form in the Administration group to create operator records that allow individuals to access the FCWnx program 62 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 18 Operator tab Operator Table 36 Form fields Element Description Login ID Assign and enter a login ID for this operator Name Enter the name of the operator Permission From the drop down list of previously created permissions assign a permission to this operator Language Click the drop down list to display a list of available languages installed on your system Select the language with which this operator accesses and operates the FCWnx system Also see Multiple language support on page 64 Table 36 Form fields continuea Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Facility Commander Password Authentication Note This grouping is selected by default If this option is selected Active Directory Password Authentication is not available Password Enter the password this operator uses to log in to FCWnx This field accepts a minimum o
51. FCWnx clients to this group Enter a comment describing the reason for creating this group A A A Click Save before you exit this tab Create permissions Use the Permission Form Administration group to create permission records The forms in FCWnx display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned to this operator The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned here e Permissions and facilities must be created before they are assigned to operators e Permissions are assigned to operators and define what operators can do within FCWnx Note FCWnx comes with a System Administrator permission that allows full action on all forms You can create more restrictive permissions and apply the System Administrator permission ONLY to those operators fully trained in FCWnx Table 33 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique title for this permission record Save Click to save the record Chapter 2 System preferences Permission tab The forms in FCWnx display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned to this operator The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned here During a database conversion from an earlier version of FCWnx workstation types default to Administration Figure 17 Permission form e Description Permission Forms Action
52. If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 93 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters The description of the alarm group should be unique When the records are created the default description includes the controller to which this alarm group is associated and the number of the alarm group for example 0001 Group 1 which represents alarm group one on controller one All alarms are automatically assigned alarm group 0 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the alarm group number and controller number prefix to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware Facility A facility option can be assigned for the alarm group from the drop down list of available facilities Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of an alarm group to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 168 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Group tab Use this tab to schedule when the alarms in the group are monitored or when to print alarm transactions by assigning previously defined time schedules to alarm groups Figure 69 Group tab Table 94
53. Ifa host computer is licensed for Client Redundancy has assigned a backup client and a failover occurs a failover COM port displays Head Of Line e ifthe controller is defined as head of line this field is blank e Ifthe selected controller is not head of line this field contains a description of the controller that is the head of this line 305 306 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 183 Form fields continued Element Description Message Count This field displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to a selected controller Controller Monitor toolbar Note For a shortcut menu to functions available within the Controller Monitor form select a controller from the list and right click For icon functionality on the Controller Monitor Form toolbar refer to Table 184 Table 184 Form fields Element Description Select Columns Display the Select Columns dialog box This option allows you to select columns that you want to display on the Controller Monitor form by putting a check next to the column name When you click OK the selected columns are saved so you do not have to select again the next time the form is opened Note If you are licensed for Client Redundancy the column Default Hostname is available for selection If not licensed for Client Redundancy this selection is unavailable Search Display the Search Criteria and Controller Selection dialog box allo
54. Import or export custom credential records in a Wiegand or magnetic stripe format into the controllers on your system e Identify the pattern of data bits mask of the credential numbers that you are importing or exporting to your system e Store standard custom credential format in the database for this application e Interpret data from credentials presented at a Wiegand or magnetic stripe reader Table 166 Form fields Element Description Search Display or change an existing record 274 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 166 Form fields Element Description Add Configure a new Credential Format record Default values display for you Delete Delete a selected Credential Format record from the list in the windowpane on the right that is no longer required or applicable Description Enter a unique or suggestive description for this credential format The field accepts 1 to 64 characters Example 33 Bit Indala Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Credential Format Tab Configure the specific mask of this custom credential format You cannot save this record until you have completed the entries on this tab Credential format tab This tab allows you to identify the pattern of the data bits mask combination in the credential numbe
55. Reader Table 54 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Modules Lists all modules supported by this application and the controller type you have selected e To add a module to the current controller record click and drag to the Configuration column e Ifthe addition of the module violates a controller configuration rule you get an error and the module is not added Configuration Lists the current configuration of the controller For systems with Micro controllers e A Power Comm module is automatically added when you create the controller record e The reader digital input and digital output modules need to be added to match the physical setup of the controller Note Following the addition or deletion of a module you MUST click Save for the appropriate records to be generated or deleted Once you add a module you can mix and match with other types of modules For example if you add one 2RP module additional modules can be 2RP or 2SRP For the M5PX you can add up to four 2RP modules four 2SRP modules two 4CRP modules two 8RP modules or two CK8RP modules DI and DO modules can be added with all of the above For systems with ACU controllers e ACU modules e The reader RRE1 RRE2 RRE4 RREIKE digital input RIM and digital output RRM modules need to be added to match the physical setup of the controller Note Following the addition or deletion of a module you MUST click Save
56. Select controller Note A controller must be selected before the system searches and displays results in the list box All displays all the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on all controllers By Controller displays all the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on a selected controller Click the drop down list to display a list of controllers Select DO type e f you select Reader the windowpane displays the DO points available for the readers e Ifyou select Other the windowpane displays Aux DOs the two 2 DO relays available on a 2RP module and other DO points Example DO points include lights and sirens that may be connected to the controller 316 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 189 Form fields continued Element Description Columns in Windowpane Description Description of the reader DO in the database Controller Controller on which the reader DO is located On Time Displays the On Time in the database The On Time is the number of seconds this DO remains in the active state when activated Door Status Displays as Locked or Unlocked Reader Status Displays Online if the reader is currently online and Offline if the reader is currently offline Area This selection is for systems with ACU controllers The secure Area associated with the controller SCIF Workstation If a SCIF Area is assigned the name
57. The priority range is O to 19 Each alarm category allows you to assign a Background color and Font color Click the drop down list to display a palette of available colors Select a color and click OK For your convenience a Preview box displays a sample of the assigned colors so you can preview your selections Alarm State Alarm This alarm point is in an active state Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block The following alarm states display in the selected color Alarm Cut Short Reset This alarm point has reset and is no longer in the active alarm state Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the Reset state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block Any alarm in Reset state displays in this color 172 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 97 Form fields continued Element Description Bumped Alarm The notification for this alarm point has been bumped to an additional location Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the Bumped state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block The following bumped alarm states display in the selected color Alarm Cut Short Re
58. This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL Debug Select this option to enable disable the display of DEBUG messages Debug messages are optional messages which should be turned on only when diagnosing system operation Use the Diagnostics Settings form in FCWnx to turn them on or off WARNING Be careful when enabling this option as this adversely affects system performance and use additional hard drive space On the main Filter drop down menu the Debug option is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled these messages are displayed This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL Warning Select this option to enable disable the display of WARNING messages Warning messages indicate abnormal system operation Though the system is behaving abnormally the behavior is not fatal to system operation On the Filter menu the Warning option is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled these messages are displayed This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL 353 354 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 202 Filter menu Fatal Select this option to enable disable the display of FATAL messages Fatal messages indicate serious abnormal system behavior These messages are always written to the log On the main Filter drop down menu the F
59. Zones Areas Assigned Readers Assign Readers C Allow access at all times Access control Allow access by schedule Time schedule y Table 142 Form fields Element Description Assigned readers This windowpane lists all readers currently assigned to this access right Assign Readers Click to display the Reader Assignment dialog box and select from a list of readers available for assignment by this operator If no readers are listed check that the readers have been marked Active on the Readers tab of the Reader form The Reader Assignment window displays when you click Assign or Assign Readers enabling you to select and assign a reader association Only readers in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Access control Allow access at all times Select this option to allow access all the time in all modes Allow access by schedule Select this option to assign a time schedule to this access right The time schedule governs when the access right grants access to the assigned readers Time schedule If you selected Allow access by schedule this field is now available to select a time schedule from the drop down list of previously created time schedules Note If
60. a short tone when alarms are detected Enable global T amp A Broadcast Select this checkbox if you want the entry status either IN or OUT for all credentials using Time and Attendance readers to be sent to and enforced by all controllers Disabling the checkbox requires each controller to enforce T amp A independently Enable global APB Broadcast Select this checkbox if you want the entry status either IN or OUT for all credentials using anti passback readers to be sent to and enforced by all controllers Disabling the checkbox requires each controller to enforce anti passback on readers within each controller Enable unique amp required Employee Number Selected and unavailable by default This checkbox is only available after converting and upgrading a previous database This feature enforces assignment of unique and required Employee numbers for each Person record 25 26 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 13 Form fields Element Description Grant Access on Duress Select this checkbox to allow a door to open and to signal a threatening situation With a valid access right and valid credential a PIN code is entered at the reader and one of the following a Micros the final digit is incremented by 1 That is 1232 becomes 1233 1239 becomes 1230 Note that ONLY the final digit changes b ACUs the entire number is incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 This se
61. additional information regarding the available functions Monitor Activities Refer to Monitor and control on page qs 287 1 Click Monitors amp Controls group 2 Click the icon of the appropriate monitor e Activity Monitor displays credential transactions e Alarm Monitor displays alarm activities e Client Monitor displays client information e Controller Monitor displays controller information 3 The options on the monitor toolbar vary with the monitor that is displaying All Monitors These forms are outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations Table 3 Operator tasks continued Quick Setup guide Element Description View Graphics Console Refer to Graphics Console on page qs 313 Note This option is available only if you are licensed for Graphics Console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual Click Monitors amp Controls group Click Graphics Console icon The Graphics Console option opens the application that allows you to view the maps of your facility that were created in the Graphics Map Editor These maps point out the location and type of incoming alarms as they occur such as a door
62. allows your GE Security Business Partner or Support Center personnel to dial into your computer and observe the situation thus providing a quicker response and resolution time The LogFile form allows you to select your computer set up a new logfile establish an identity for the file and designate a path and directory in which to place your logfile Logfiles The LogFile form Diagnostics group allows you to select a computer in your network for this application set up a new logfile establish an identity for the file and designate a path and directory in which to place your logfile All log files should be saved in the Logs folder it is easier to locate for backups and upgrades It is a shared folder which means other clients can gain access to the log files Each client computer has a set of diagnostic objects that represent what can be monitored on that machine Diagnostic objects can be controlled remotely turned on or off All diagnostic objects can write messages to a common default logfile or any diagnostic object can write to a separate log file created and defined by the user Before any logfile can be deleted from this application you must re assign diagnostic objects to another logfile 346 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual LogFile tab Click Add to create a new logfile record or Search to display a list box of previously created LogFiles Figure 140 Logfile tab LogFile Computer tt a LogFile
63. and a different graphic for contract employees within your organization Table 157 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique or suggestive description for this credential design During installation of Credential Designer four standard credential designs are included in the Designs folder of this application e Landscape e Portrait e No Design Wanted Poster Do one of the following e Select from the list of existing standard design records e Select and edit a standard design by renaming and saving e Create a new design Note When you add a design enter a description and click Save to enable the Edit Credential Design button on this form Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Design tab Use this tab to create a new credential design record If you are editing an existing design these options are not available Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Figure 116 Design tab Credential Design e Description GE Landscape Facility ignore Facilities y Design r Select default layout Portrait Landscape r Select import layout Import Layout m Edit Badge Design Table 158 Form fields Element Descri
64. and disarmed through access control by using a credential and keypad reader DI or manual control The intended application is suited for arming and disarming intrusion zones from outside of the monitored and secured areas Arm Disarm When the Arm Disarm is set active Armed the associated secure area is armed by placing all readers offline all alarm points monitored on and the arm disarm DO goes active e When the Arm Disarm Intrusion DI is reset not active Disarmed the associated zone is disarmed by placing all readers online all alarm points monitored off unless on a schedule and the arm disarm DO goes inactive A Complete the Intrusion Zone Form The Intrusion Zone form is required for creating a relation between readers alarm inputs the Arm Disarm Intrusion point and the arm disarm DO Perform the following 1 Define an Intrusion Zone with a description and facility assignment 2 Select a controller selection to establish the zone source and its intrusion points 3 Assign the following intrusion zone components arm disarm DO arm disarm Intrusion DI readers and alarms e Arm Disarm Intrusion DI This is a single record selection from a drop down list filtered by active facility that consists of all available Arm Disarm Intrusion points for the controller Only the DIs that have not been assigned are available e Alarm Points This is a multi record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facili
65. and include where the controller is located and or how it is used For example 1 Building A2 North Telco Closet could represent Controller 1 located in Building A2 North in the Telco Closet This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 4 A facility option can be assigned for your new controller record from the Facility drop down list All devices such as readers alarms and Dis added with the controller belong to the same facility as the controller If you edit the Facility option on an existing controller record a messages displays Do other devices change to the same facility as the controller If you select Yes all associated devices and alarms change to the newly assigned facility If you select No the facility change takes place only on the controller record The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made 5 This form contains the basic information about the controller When configuring a controller COMPLETE THE DEFINITION TAB FIRST Other tabs display depending on the selections you make on this tab 6 Review the guidelines and complete the fields on this form according to the controller type that you are configuring Security Devices Reader Refer to Define readers on page qs 112 1 When a controller record is created reader records are also created The number of records depends on the controller that you configure and the reader modules that the controller contains 2 When rea
66. and normal access rights do not gain access into the area When a zone is disarmed all readers within the zone go online and normal access rights gain access into the area If schedules were assigned then the reader follows the schedule Note If you expect to arm disarm by using any one of the readers within a zone That reader must be assigned on the Access Right tab of the Access Right form and be an assigned reader in the Intrusion Zone listed on the Intrusion Zone tab Individually created access rights must be assigned to the person that arms disarms the Intrusion Zone One right allows access to the readers and another right allows access to the Intrusion Zone Arm Disarm by Manual Control Manual zone control for arming and disarming is accomplished using the Intrusion Zone tab on the Manual Control form This follows the standard Manual Control form conventions including a Purpose entry by the operator Define intrusion zones This form is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers This option opens the Intrusion Zone form Places amp Policies group that allows you to create or edit an Intrusion Zone record then assign related devices based on the current operator s facilities and permissions If you are modifying an existing zone configuration it is recommended that you verify the state of the zone by obtaining a current status Table 138 Form fields Chapter 6 231 Areas and intrusion zon
67. any area and click again A window opens with information pertaining to the selected section of your form Record Toolbar Click any button on this standard toolbar for associated result Add Record Click to add a record The Add Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data This is the best way to start or add a new record because the default data often saves you from entering the data The Add Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given permission to update records Save Click to save the current record The Save Record menu option saves changes made to the current record into the database Unsaved entries are discarded The Save Record option is available only when a form is open and you have been given permission to update records Print Preview Click to preview before printing The Print Preview option allows you to preview before printing and is available only when a Report form is displaying A printer must be added to your FCWnx system in order for this feature to be available Following completion of all tabs and options on the Report form click to preview a copy of your report On the Preview Report screen the Total field represents the number of records in the database and not the number of records that matched your search criteria The zoom value always reads 100 regardless of the zoom used Table 5 Form fields co
68. as certain Windows messages and certain parts of the reporting functions e Ifa particular language is not provided by GE Security the installation takes place in English and the application runs in English Facilities tab Use this tab to assign facilities to an operator Figure 19 Facilities tab e Facility m mal Operator Facilities Assigned Facilities Assign Facilities Table 37 Form fields Element Description Assigned Facilities This list displays the facilities assigned to the current operator Assign Facilities Click to display the Facility Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign facilities to this operator Facility Assignment This dialog box lists the facilities available for assignment to this particular operator e Facilities can be moved to the Assigned list by selecting and clicking the appropriate arrow e Facilities can be removed from the Assigned list by selecting and clicking the appropriate arrow 66 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 37 and complete this tab 2 Click Facility Assignment to display a list of facilities 3 Assign those facilities that you want associated with this operator 4 If you remove a facility from this operator record that facility now displays in the Available list 5 Click OK to accept and close the Facility Assignment dialog box 6 Click Save before you exit this tab Wh
69. assign at least one reader OR a digital input and alarm to an Intrusion Zone The reader cannot be assigned to an elevator Click Assign Readers to display a dialog box that enables you to assign active readers The Reader Assignment window displays when you click Assign or Assign Readers enabling you to select and assign a reader association Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Assigned Alarms This list box displays a list of intrusion alarms in the same zone not already assigned on the selected controller This cannot be an external DVMR or a logical such as Host Comm or Lost Credential alarm Click Assign Alarms to display a dialog box that enables you to assign alarms This is an optional assignment The Alarm Assignment window displays a list of alarms in the system for this application for the facilities available for assignment by this operator All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Chapter 6 233 Areas and intrusion zones Table 139 Form field
70. authorized Client Monitor toolbar Table 181 Form fields Element Description Disconnect Client Disconnect the selected client Launch Client Select this icon to launch a CCTV interface other than integrated CCTV This option also displays on the shortcut menu for this form The shortcut menu displays when you click the right mouse button on the Client Monitor form Help Displays the online Help system Chapter 9 Monitor and control Client Monitor shortcut menu Table 182 Form fields Element Description Disconnect Select this icon to disconnect the selected client Launch Select this icon to enable a CCTV interface other than integrated CCTV Client Form To display the Client form to add a client to this application network Recover To initiate recovery of a host that failed was taken over by a backup client and is now able to host its original devices When the default client is running a manual recovery procedure is required to bring all its devices back to itself Also refer to Backup Clients tab on page 53 e A notification message informs you of a successful recovery Control of devices is returned to the default host e A notification message informs you of an unsuccessful recovery Verify communication with the default host and retry the recovery Region To display the Region form to add a Region record to this Global system Recover Region To initiate recove
71. binary dialog boxes in three 16 character strings Hex characters Valid and allowable hex characters include the base 16 numbering system 0 through 9 and A through F Note Ifyou do not enter unique hex characters this controller record is not saved An invalid field message displays informing you that the keys that were chosen are too weak Edit Click to re assign or revise an existing encrypted data key for a selected controller When you click this button one time this button label changes to Auto Generate Auto Generate Click this button to system generate a data key We recommend that you record this number How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 50 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Time Zone tab Use this tab to select the time zone of this controller Figure 31 Time Zone tab e Description ad Facility Events Status Controller Configuration Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada Chapter 4 101 Devices Table 51 Form fields Element Description Zone Drop down List Select the time zone of this controller from the drop down list of available time zones You can also use your mouse click and drag feature to select and edit the time zone Global Graphic Use your mouse click and drag feature to select and edit the time zone Automatically adjust clock for The h
72. by either selecting a predefined response or entering text Column headings Default columns display Drag and drop capability allows you to re arrange the columns You can also display only a few columns Table 177 Form fields Element Description State Displays an icon associated with an alarm process state Priority Displays the priority of the alarm The priority tells the system in which order it should alert the operator when multiple alarms occur simultaneously The priority range is O to 19 The lower the number the higher the priority of the alarm Also refer to Define alarm priority on page 170 Description Displays the alarm description Refer to the following examples e Tamper Alarm Micro controller mmmm b pp Tamper ACU controller mmmmm na pp Tamper where mmmm or mmmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the point or device number and Tamper is the alarm description e Regional Failover on a Global configuration bet testpc Region Failover Alarm where bcttestpc is the PC Name of the client that has failed over to its configured backup Region and Region Failover Alarmis the alarm description Reference Displays additional information relating to the type of credential alarm Only reader alarms have a reference such as a person name or credential number This c
73. change in the scheduling occurs immediately For example if archiving is taking place on Tuesdays and the schedule is revised to archive on Wednesday the archiving occurs one day later on Wednesday Monthly The archive is appended on the last day of the month beginning at 11 59 58 P M The FCWnx services do NOT have to be running Archiving occurs as long as SQL Server Agent services are running Database Connection This feature allows you to configure the amount of time that elapse before your FCWnx system detects and advises you that your database is not accessible Timeout sec The default is 30 seconds The minimum is 3 seconds the maximum is 120 seconds 1 In an FCWnx Global configuration this is the amount of time until a Regional failover begins 2 In a typical FCWnx configuration this is the amount of time before FCWnx transactions are saved FCWnx services shut down and a message advises you to repair your database Retry The default is 3 retries The minimum is 0 the maximum is 5 retries Photo Aspect Ratio Select or enter a number for the height and the width The aspect ratio controls the relationship between the height and width of the photos This setting controls the photos displayed in the Capture program on the Person form and in the Credential Designer program Console alarm sound Continuous Short Select Continuous to sound a continuous tone when alarms are detected Select Short to sound
74. client communication across your network The application is launched in the following ways e Auto launches immediately following the licensing sequence e Select Configure Ports on the main File menu of this application e Click Start then select Programs Facility Commander Wnx then Security Configuration The three windows of this application are as follows 1 Communications Ports for Clients These are the ports used for TCP and UDP filtering Low Range Enter 6700 High Range Enter 6709 Click Next to continue The settings are automatically saved to your computer 2 DCOM User and Password Anonymous By default this checkbox is selected and this application uses anonymous authentication That is DCOM authentication is not verified DCOM communications are configured for you by running the SecurityCn g application Supported authentications Anonymous Local User Account Domain Account Domain Yes N A Yes Workgroup Yes Not supported N A Clear this checkbox to enable the fields on this tab Username Enter a domain or local user name for this user This field accepts 34 characters Chapter 1 7 Introduction Password Enter a domain or local password for the user listed in the User Name field This field accepts 34 characters Password Confirm Enter the domain or local password a second time identical to what was entered in the Password field Domain Enter the name of the FCWnx domain or workgroup Click Next to
75. color select Edit Background then select a color from the Color dialog that displays 7 Add one or several bitmaps inside the credential design preferences 8 Add one or several text boxes 9 Move or resize the photo and text as desired 10 Click Save qs 18 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence 9 Back up your system Refer to the application installation Manual for detailed instructions for all types fim of backups This list assists in backing up a Professional system 1 Back up the entire Facility Commander Wnx Edition folder If you purchased your system from GE your system contains a CD RW drive acceptable for backup purposes Copy the Facility Commander Wnx Edition folder to your backup media To back up your Facility Commander Wnx Edition databases custom stored procedures or triggers added to the Facility Commander Wnx Edition databases need to be removed You can re create custom procedures or triggers after restoring the database files e Create a folder on your system where the backup files are to be stored e Click Start Programs FCWnx then FCWnx Maintenance Utility e Ifthis utility is not found in the Start menu then go to the Facility Commander Wnx Edition directory and double click the file Maintenance exe e Click Backup Accept the default Login of
76. continue The settings are automatically saved to your computer and DCOM is configured for FCWnx e At logon the user is prompted for a domain user name and password This logon is used to authenticate remote DCOM objects At a later time if you choose to change this selection return to this window e To keep interruptions to the FCWnx application to a minimum your IT Department may choose to set passwords as never expiring e If any computer in your FCWnx system uses DCOM authentication then all other client computers must use DCOM authentication 3 Firewall Configurations Note This window does not display for Windows 2000 operating systems The following port numbers display by default Controller Communications Port 6699 Client Workstation Server Communications Port 135 RPC The following port numbers are read from the dvmrtable of your FCWnx system Server Workstation Video Streaming Port 8088 Used by the video server to send streaming video Start Video Communications Port Range 3 8085 Used by video clients to communicate with video servers These numbers signify a range of ports Your application log identifies the specific ports that are opened Additionally your firewall application identifies which ports are on or off Start Digital Video CViewer Port Range 20 8089 Additional ports used by video clients to communicate with video servers These numbers signify a range of ports Your application log i
77. control Note Do not switch between floor tracking and no floor tracking in the same elevator record If you want to change an existing record delete that record and create a new one with the desired floor tracking method No floor tracking method With this method you define the floors available and define a digital output relay for each floor Only digital outputs provided by the DO module can be used In addition each DO can by used in only one elevator and mapped to only one floor The number of floors is limited by the number of DO modules that can be placed in the controller The maximum number of modules in a controller is four Micro controllers The maximum number of floors available is 64 maximum of 4 modules x 16 DOs 64 DOs ACU controllers The maximum number of floors available is 128 12 on the ACU2 controller 7 RRMs x 16 relays and 1 RRM x 4 relays Floor tracking by input Define the floors available then define a digital input and digital output relay for each floor The digital inputs are used for floor selection Only digital inputs provided by the DI module can be used for floor selection and each digital input can be used for only one elevator and mapped to only one floor The digital outputs are used to control where the elevator moves Only digital outputs provided by the DO module can be used and each digital output can only be used in one elevator and mapped to one floor Using this method Micro control
78. credentialholder or reporting functions pertaining to this specific SCIF Area This SCIF workstations has authorization to perform the following functions for the associated SCIF Area devices e Readers lock unlock system control e Alarms monitor e Outputs Relays activate de activate Area Arm Disarm Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Arm Disarm Select whether the schedule chosen above arms or disarms the Area How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 134 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Reader tab Use this tab to assign readers associated with this Area record e Only available reader types of Normal and antipassback APB are displayed and available for assignment e A reader can be assigned to only two areas one entering Area and one exiting Area or one Area for Neutral Chapter 6 223 Areas and intrusion zones Figure 98 Reader tab e Description Facility y Area Reader alarm Digital Output Entering rea Readers Assign Exiting Area Readers Assign m Neutral Area Readers Assign Table 135 Form fields Element Description Entering Area Readers Click Assign to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this Area Assigned readers display in the Entering Area Readers windowpane This type of reader which gives an IN status is used to ente
79. database e Armed Area Zone description displays current condition in red font e Disarmed Area Zone description displays current condition in green font State The current state of the displayed elements Refresh Click to refresh the status of the elements displayed in the windowpane Expand Click to expand a single selected element Expand All Click to expand all levels of the navigation tree Collapse All Click to collapse all levels of the expanded elements in the navigation tree Set state to These buttons are enabled when an Area or Zone description is selected Arm Immediately arms the selected Area or Intrusion Zone Disarm Immediately disarms the Area or Intrusion Zone Purpose This field accepts 255 characters When you select an Area or Intrusion record this box is enabled Enter an explanation for arming disarming These comments are written to the operator history file and display in the Purpose Field on the Operator History Report How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 191 and complete the selections on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Mode tab Note The form is enabled for systems using Micro controllers Select all or individual controllers or clients for immediate change of mode Example The change of mode for controllers is helpful for an immediate lockdown or to open all doors immediately The change of mode for clients applies to alarm routing and b
80. digits indicate your company number 67 with preceding zeros 0067 The second set of four digits indicate your company facility number 10 with preceding zeros 0010 2 Move your number into the listbox 3 Click Save before exiting this tab Configure regions Use the Region form Administration group to display if you are licensed for Global configuration Refer to the Facility Commander Wnx Edition Installation Manual for complete details of the Global features When a Server computer is added to an FCWnx Global configuration Region form records are also created You cannot delete a Region form record Note The Region Form allows you to assign or edit the frequency of synchronization intervals for your Global configuration database replication Global systems can also be configured for database redundancy at the Regional level A Regional Database Server can be configured to have backup Servers in the event of a failure at the default Regional Server APB options are available for configuration in the selected Region REMINDER A subscription is a request for a copy of data or database objects to be replicated It defines what publications are received where and when The time that it takes to complete this process of replication and synchronization is dependent on the amount of data needed to be synchronized Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 21 Form fields Element Description Description Click S
81. displays until the battery is reset by recharging or the controller is powered back on To configure the 11th DI on an MPX2000 to function as a low battery alarm 1 2 Open the Digital Input form from the Devices menu and click Search to display a list of digital inputs Select the DI labeled xxxx x 11 where 11 is the 11th DI point of the Micro PX 2000 controller module Select Alarm from the drop down list of available DI types Click Save Open the Alarm form from the Devices menu and click Search to display a list of alarms belonging to the controllers Chapter 4 89 Devices 6 Select the DI labeled xxxx x 11 where 11 is the 11th DI point of the Micro PX 2000 controller module 7 Extend the Description entry by entering text indicating low battery The entry may look similar to 0002 2 11 Low Battery 8 On the Alarm tab of the Alarm form select Monitor from the Settings options 9 Click Save For systems with ACU controllers When RIM modules are added the following records are created e 16 supervised inputs e 3 unsupervised inputs e 2 Aux DOs Example 16337 00 00 ACU Reader To change this description enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the number prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters DO module record creation For systems with Micro controllers Whe
82. each reader record Digital output records If you added a 2RP or 2SRP module a digital output record called Aux DO is generated for each reader record There are 2 DO relays available on a 2RP module For systems with ACU RRE1 RRE2 RRE4 RREIKE Reader records Alarm records e None of these alarms are monitored If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is triggered you need to go to the Alarm form Alarm Tab and enable Monitor in the Settings section e In addition all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 To change this go to the Alarm Group form Digital input records Digital output records DI module record creation For systems with Micro controllers When you add a 20 DI module twenty 20 digital input records are created Example 0001 1 01 DI This digital input is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change this description enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Note Micro PX 2000 ONLY When you create and save a Micro PX 2000 record FCWnx creates and supports 11 DI points however the 11th Dl is a low battery alarm from the controller If power is off and the backup battery is running low the controller sends an alarm transaction to the Alarm Monitor form The alarm
83. ererat ao na wns Oa aoe Garden a Wee Som seayers 207 Navigate video Console 0 ac cin cae irast dane eae 209 EAT AE A ae Me aE ae Le ae 213 Delme TIGL TEI occon oven Rhode EEEE ed i allen N none ween 216 Wr e os hb Se be es be ee eS E be eh Ges 217 188 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview Video driver installation After installation of the video adapter card Windows automatically detects the new video card on power up Follow the installation instructions received with your video driver software then reboot your computer After your computer has rebooted you need to select your video resolution Application computers require that you run in 1024 x 768 resolution Choose 16 bit High Color minimum To change your video settings follow the steps below 1 Right click the desktop and select Properties 2 From the Display Properties window select the Settings tab 3 Select the desired video characteristics Define digital video recorders Digital video surveillance is integrated into the system for this application and requires its own hardware and software The system supports the following digital video multiplexer recorders Table 107 Form fields Element Model Description Version GE GE DVMRe 4CD GE DVMRe 10 CD GE DVMRe 16 CD Requires duplex PPC firmware Version 3 18 or later and MUX firmware Version 3 24 or later GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 4 GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 1
84. external device such as lights sirens and door strikes that may be connected to the controller Refer to your controller installation manual for information on how to connect a digital output device to the controller The digital outputs available depend on the controller setup and readers used For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 73 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters When the records are created the default description is in the format mmmm b pp where mmmm represents the controller number to which this digital output is associated b represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number Example 0001 1 01 DO This digital output is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmm b pp prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware Facility A facility option can be assigned for your new Digital Output record from the Facility drop down list The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made WARNING Be very careful when assigning the facility of a digital
85. for an employee who enters a motorized door by wheelchair Privileged APB Note This selection applies to readers associated with ACU controllers Select this feature if you want to record APB without preventing this person from accessing doors That is enabling this field allows any valid credential to unlock a door regardless of the credential s status However the credential s status is still logged according to the reader used and is recorded as such in the credential history Example This privilege may be appropriate for high level company executives Conditional Unlock Select to enable this feature if you want this person to have access to the facility although the facility may be locked due to a mode change or event that caused a normal schedule override such as a plant closing for inclement weather When this selection is enabled and saved a message displays asking the user if this selection is to be applied to all credentials currently issued to this person Find and Assign Credential Click to find the next credential presented to a selected reader Select any active reader If the credential is not in this application you can add it This is a convenient way to assign credentials How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 151 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Location tab Use this tab to enter location information for this person The fields accept 64 al
86. for the appropriate records to be generated or deleted Once you add a module you can mix and match with other types of modules For example if you add an RRE1 module additional modules can be RRE1 RRE2 RRE4 and RREIKE deleted Note Following the addition or deletion of a module you MUST click Save for the appropriate records to be generated or Once you add a module you can mix and match with other types of modules For example if you add one 2RP module additional modules can be 2RP or 2SRP For the M5PX you can add up to four 2RP modules four 2SRP modules two 4CRP modules two 8RP modules or two CK8RP modules DI and DO modules can be added with all of the above How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 54 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Select then drag the Modules to the Configuration window 3 Ifyou receive an error message for a violation evaluate your selections and add the appropriate modules for your configuration 4 Click Save before you exit this tab 105 106 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Port Settings tab This tab displays only when you are configuring a controller type as direct connect network network direct or network network controller type Refer to the sample Connection type figure displayed below Figure 36 Port Settings tab Table 55 Form fields Connection type Network Network y Dial up Direct Network Network Dial up N
87. form Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated Activity Type Enable the activity types on which you want to run the report Login Name Select the operator you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all operators select lt ALL gt Form Name Select the forms you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all forms select lt ALL gt Person report form This tab is used only when generating a Person Report Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated allowing you to narrow the selection of information displayed on your report Employee Last Name Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report If you want to list all persons leave these fields blank Department To provide additional filtering you can select to run a report on only those persons in a selected department Personnel Type To provide additional filtering you can also select to list only those persons assigned a selected personnel type Schedule report form This tab is used only when generating a Schedule Report Filter or select specific information you want to display on the report Controller From the drop down list select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt 335 336 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Time and Attendance History report f
88. held open alarm Operators can issue commands and launch applications such as locking and unlocking doors 4 Graphics maps are organized according to their facility The items that display in the navigation pane are determined by an operator s permission levels and context Initially the facilities are collapsed Expand a facility Even if the facility containing that map is collapsed the icon is red which indicates that a map in that facility is in alarm Click on a map to open it You can also open a map from the Menu bar by selecting File Open The corresponding facility in the Navigation pane expands accordingly 5 The Graphics Monitor is divided by a split bar with split pointers which can be used to change the size of the window View Remove Alarms from the Alarm Monitor Form Refer to Alarm monitoring on page qs 294 1 Click Monitors amp Controls group 2 Click the Alarm Monitor icon to display the monitor Alarm messages display 3 Select one or more alarm messages that you want to remove 4 Click the Alarm Monitor toolbar icon to Purge All and remove all messages or Purge Individual to remove one alarm message All Monitors These forms are outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi moni
89. ignoring any other settings This occurs if FCWnx services are stopped and Perform Backup on Normal Shutdown is enabled on the Backup Clients tab of the Client form When a backup client detects that the default client is offline an approximate takeover timing can be predicted using the following formula Ping Interval x Retry Count of Default Computer Heartbeat Interval x Heartbeat Retry Count of Default Computer Network Delays All these values are configured on the Client form The values in this formula can be adjusted to achieve a shorter or longer takeover scenario 55 56 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Client redundancy overview The FCWnx software system is responsible for processing alarm and credential transactions from devices like controllers and DVRs The software is responsible for writing these transactions to the database A device such as a controller or DVR is hosted by a single FCWnx client The client could potentially be responsible for hundreds of devices and can be a single point of failure Although devices like the controller are designed to run without the host software running for days eventually memory is going to be filled up at the controller end The redundancy feature in FCWnx is designed to address this condition Clients can be configured to be backed up by other clients so that in case of the default hosting client called the primary client being disabled one of the backup clients
90. intrusion zone between 1 and 96 Duplicate numbers are allowed but not on the same controller Controller Select a controller from the drop down list of available controllers that control this intrusion zone This is a one to one relationship and establishes the zone source and intrusion access points The controller must be connected and online Note A Reader or Digital Input and Alarm must be selected in order to save this record Arm Disarm DO Select one DO from the drop down list of DOs that trigger when an Intrusion Zone is armed disarmed This is an optional assignment This DO can be assigned to another Intrusion Zone Arm Disarm DI Select one DI from the drop down list of available Dis of the Type Intrusion as assigned on the Digital Input form This DI can arm disarm an Intrusion Zone and is an optional assignment This DI cannot be assigned to another Intrusion Zone Note When you unassign a DI save this record It is now available to re assign to another Intrusion Zone Last Status Date Date of last zone history transaction on record Time Time of last zone history transaction on record Status Status as of last zone history transaction on record Note In order to refresh this status section click off of this record then back or close then reopen the form Devices Assigned Readers This list box displays a list of available active readers in the same zone belonging to the selected controller You must
91. is empty click Add to display a list of available fields This option may not be available on all report types e Add Click to select the fields by which you want to sort the groups This displays the Sort Fields dialog e Delete Select a field and click to remove a field from the Sort Groups list e Up Select a field and click to increase the priority of this field which determines how the groups are sorted e Down Select a field and click to lower the priority of this field which determines how the groups are sorted Chapter 10 333 Reports Fonts tab This tab displays in all reports and is used to change the fonts on selected text in a report Note Be careful when selecting font styles and sizes Some styles may not display as desired when printed and some sizes may be too large for the page Use the Print Preview option to check how the font style and size prints on a page Title To change the current font of the report title click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes Header Fields To change the current font of the report headings and or field descriptions within the report click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes Group Fields To change the current font of the group headings click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes Data Fields To change the current font of the report information click Change to display
92. is online and connected a If a Heartbeat exists the default client is alive and the backup client does not initiate takeover of the devices from the default client b If a Heartbeat does NOT exist the backup client initiates takeover of devices from the default client The backup client uses the following values Heartbeat seconds Select a computer from the Backup Clients list box and assign an interval of seconds the range is 10 to 180 between Heartbeat checks The default number is 60 seconds This number can be reset at any time e Heartbeat Retries Select the number of times the range is 1 to 3 this backup client checks for a Heartbeat stamp in the database before initiating takeover of devices from the default client The default number of retries is 2 Assign Controller Phone s This button is only available after completing the following e Backup clients have been assigned e The currently displayed client is host to Dial up and or Network Dial up controllers In the event of a system failure the controllers associated with the failed client must have available telephone numbers to reach the backup client Click to display an Assign Controller Phone Numbers dialog box Assign Controller Phone Numbers Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to select a controller from the Dial Up Controller drop down list and assign telephone numbers used by this controller to reach the selected backup client e Click to displ
93. is open and before the door closes Overlap Door Closed A second credential can be presented even if the first credentialholder has not yet opened the door Door Held Open Options Select one of the following options Delay Held Open 1 Minute When this option is selected the timer is extended an additional minute after the normal Held Open timer At the end of the normal Held Open time the reader s LED signals an alarm If the door closes before the additional minute expires the alarm cancels and is not sent to the host Extend Held Open REX Active When the held open timer expires an active REX restarts the held open timer If this option is not selected the Held Open timer starts counting as soon as the door opens and the timer expires even if the REX stays activated with the door open At the end of the time period a Held Open alarm is generated Extend Held Open REX Toggle If the REX is pressed or released toggled before the Held Open timer completes its countdown the timer restarts until the REX is released long enough for the timer to expire If this option is not selected the Held Open timer starts counting down as soon as the door opens and expires even if the REX is released and reactivated 131 132 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 65 Form fields continued Element Description Door Lock Options Select one or both of these options Enable Lock Monitor This selection ind
94. newly added Person records must have a unique employee number Personnel type Select the appropriate personnel type from the drop down list This is a required field Department Select the appropriate department from the drop down list 249 250 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 151 Form fields continued Element Description Trace activity Select to enable this field if you want a record of all activity on this credential Each time this credential is used a message displays on the Activity Monitor and a record is written to the history database If the system has a printer association the message is printed This field overrides the routing of activity as defined on the Reader form Note We do not recommend activating the trace function at a site that uses dial up controllers A controller dials the host whenever a traced credential is read This may incur additional telephone costs Extended Unlock Alarm Sense Select to enable this field This person is now allowed extra time to gain access to an Time entry or exit point in the system A popup message asks you if you want to change all associated Credential records to follow Extended Unlock Time If you select Yes all credentials for that person are changed to Follow Extended Unlock Time as configured on the Door Functions tab of the Reader form Refer to Door Functions tab on page 119 Example An extended time limit can be configured
95. of the SCIF workstation displays here Controller Type Displays the type as a Micro or ACU controller Set state to Note The names of the buttons change depending on the DO type Reader or Other selected If Reader is selected click e Duration Unlock To unlock the selected door for the time specified in the On Time column e Lock To immediately lock the selected door e Indefinite Unlock To unlock the selected door It remains unlocked until you manually lock it by clicking lock e Sched Override This option is not available for ACU controllers To change the state of a door or DO if you want a schedule to override its setting Example Use Sched Override to unlock a door if you want a schedule at a later time to lock this door If you don t want the scheduler to lock your door use the Indefinite Unlock selection e Lock No Access To lock down all readers No transactions are allowed until those readers are put back to lock or unlock mode The host tracks Lock No Access This allows the readers to be taken out of the Lock No Access mode when the next action is performed if it is a state other than Lock No Access For micro controllers when a door is unlocked a valid credential displays as invalid If a database download is performed after putting the readers into Lock No Access state it reverts to the normal reader state defined by the reader record If Other is selected click e On For
96. on the Alarm Monitor form you can either select the Monitor field on the Alarm form or schedule the alarm to be monitored When set to be monitored the alarm displays and changes to an alarm condition qs 10 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence e Alarm Group e Elevators Application Group Menu Application Form Alarms amp Events Alarm Group Refer to Define alarm groups on page qs 167 1 Alarm groups provide two things 1 a convenient way of scheduling many alarms at once and 2 a means of disabling monitoring in many alarms from a keypad reader When a controller record is created 16 alarm groups are also created 2 The description of the alarm group should be unique When the records are created the default description includes the controller to which this alarm group is associated and the number of the alarm group for example 0001 Group 1 which represents alarm group one on controller one All alarms are automatically assigned alarm group 0 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the alarm group number and controller number prefix to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of an alarm group to a different facility than the controller
97. on the Area form e To track and grant deny access based on APB Areas APB Areas must be configured across ACUs e When exiting an APB Area to a non APB Area the credentialholder must exit the non APB Area before being allowed back into an APB Area otherwise a Tailgating error occurs This error is prevented by assigning Multiple Exiting Areas on the Reader form e Timed APB on the reader takes precedence over the timed ABP setting on the Area form APB with door contact e The user must open the door to be placed in the Area e If Valid No Passage is enabled and the door is opened Valid Open is displayed on the Activity monitor The User is recorded as IN the Area e If Valid No Passage is not enabled and the door NOT opened Valid No Passage is displayed on the Activity monitor The User is NOT recorded as in the Area e If Valid No Passage is NOT enabled and the door is opened Valid is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is recorded as IN the Area e If Valid No Passage is NOT enabled and the door is NOT opened Valid is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is NOT recorded as in the Area APB without a door contact e If Valid No Passage is enabled and the door is opened Valid Open is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is recorded as IN the Area e If Valid No Passage is enabled and the door is NOT opened Valid Open is displayed on the Activity Monitor The User is recorded as IN the Area e If Valid No P
98. one of the fields select a Label in the User Fields windowpane Enter the value that you want to display corresponding to this label This text box field accepts 32 alphanumeric characters User Field The existing list of labels and their values is listed in the User Fields windowpane The selected label in the User Field windowpane is the label to which you are assigning a value 268 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 2 Review the guidelines in Table 162 and complete the fields on this tab Example The Credential User Field 1 was previously defined and labeled on the Preference form as Condition of Credential The first label listed here in the User Fields windowpane displays as Condition of Credential Select Condition of Credential In the Modify Field dialog box enter the corresponding condition of this credential as Reported Lost by Credentialholder Click Save before you exit this tab Mass update Note Forms where Mass Update is applicable include the Person form and the Credential form This option is not available until at least one record exists in the list box to the right of the form The Mass Update mode allows you to simultaneously update properties on a group of records within the application This is very helpful when a number of records for a single form require the identical property or value change Mass Update mode of processing is enabled as follows 1 2
99. output groups are also created with default data based on the modules you added on the Controller Configuration tab 15 Use the Controller Utilities form to set the controller online Controller Definition tab Configuring your FCWnx system depends on the system that you purchased and licensed For example if you purchased a system that includes Micro controllers you are licensed for Micro controllers and cannot configure ACU controllers Note Configure your system with forethought You need to designate a physical address for your controller before you create a definition This tab contains the basic information on the controller such as its address and connection type When configuring a controller COMPLETE THIS TAB FIRST Other tabs display depending on the selections you make on this tab Upon creation the controller is offline Before the host communicates with the controller you must change it to online using the Controller Monitor form You do not see any credential or alarm transactions until this is done Figure 28 Controller Definition tab Controller e Description rrr Facility 2 Events l Status Controller Configuration Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Controller type Pol Hardware Address gt Description Address J7 Elevator Controller Head of line Select head of line controller C No C Yes a gt Connection type 7 Host keep alive seconds Host Computer Defa
100. output wiring AL Software Side Digital Output Wiring for either Stand Mode E or Floor Tracking Modes Software DO Optional Selected Floor feedback input wiring used with Floor Tracking Mode Only BIOR 000014 Software Side Wiring for Keypad Floor Mode where the floor is selected by the keypad in the reader Elavator Sfd ed ER iHoor Select Gutton Not seed Sooo A When an ACU controller is used for elevator control all DOs are in active set state when not selected If the ACU fails all floors are enabled Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Security tab Note This feature is disabled and not supported for ACU controllers Figure 30 Security tab Controller Table 50 Form fields Element Description Controller password The Controller Passwords list box has the following default password entries enabling four possible levels of security Select a password it now displays in the Password dialog box Select one 1 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog bo two 1 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box three 1 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box four 1 to re assign a password by typing over the default displayed in the dialog box Click Change to save and re assign the new password Note If you change your controller passwords you must ente
101. point or device number It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters 2 A facility option can be designated The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the controller when a controller is created Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of a DI to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form You cannot delete digital input records The number of digital inputs is based on the controller you set up and modules that the controller contains Security Devices Digital Output Refer to Define digital outputs on page qs 143 1 When DO records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmm b pp ACU controller mmmmm bb pp where mmmm or mmmmm represents the controller number to which this digital output is associated b represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number It is recommended that you keep the mmm b pp prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Note Be very careful when assigning the facility of a digital output to a different fac
102. reader you want to set online and check the Online and Active options Question How do I get into the Credential Design program 1 The client you are using must have a license for Imaging Select Monitors amp Controls then Client Monitor The bottom section of the Client Monitor Form contains the section Imaging Information You may need to make the window larger to display the number of Imaging licenses presently in use and number of Imaging licenses you are allowed as purchased with your system Locate the name of your computer in the Client list Then look in the column Imaging status and verify that it reads Enabled 2 If Imaging status reads Disabled and the numbers indicate a license is available for use go to the Administration menu and select Client On the Client Form Client tab select Enabled in Imaging Status to enable Imaging Return to the Client Monitor Form to validate the Enabled status You may need to log off and log on again in order for the selection to take effect 3 If you are licensed and Imaging is enabled the Edit Credential Design button becomes enabled allowing you to enter the Credential Design program Sample credential designs are provided to get you started Question What is wrong when I run Diagnostic Viewer try to open a file and only one logfile shows in the Logfile Dialog This indicates the database cannot be accessed Test the database connection by following the steps in Y get a connection
103. readers and when with time schedules an individual can gain entry For systems using Micro controllers e Assign readers to the access right using the Access Right tab e Define which floors a person can access and what digital output groups a person can trigger with a valid credential Note Floors and elevators are assigned to an access right e Intrusion Zones can be assigned to an access right allowing the ability to arm disarm with a reader the zone and access to a particular zone For systems using ACU controllers e For ACU controller readers assign the readers to an Area first Then assign the Area to the access right using the Area tab e Assign Areas to an access right and then assign a time schedule and dates to the Area access right 1 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the type of controllers in your system 2 Following the creation of access rights create departments 3 Now you are able to create person records and assign access rights and departments to the person records 4 If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image Quick Setup guide qs 17 Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence e Persons e Credential Application Group Menu Application Form Personnel Person Refer to Define persons on page qs 247 1 Click th
104. readers 732 image capture 256 crop an image 257 displaying existing images 257 input device 256 instructions 5 Integrity utility 356 interface 2 6 API 5 383 CCTV 2 216 intrusion zone 230 arm disarm 254 L language 370 language support 64 licensing 3 log off 8 log on log off 8 logfiles 345 low battery alarm 88 M M 5 PXN 0 308 maintenance 18 34 35 36 357 manual control 3 4 mass update 268 conditions 269 menus 9 file 74 help 9 report 17 search 6 video console action menu 2 2 video console display menu 2 2 video console file menu 2 video console window menu 2 3 view 6 388 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual window 9 Micro 86 87 88 93 105 114 128 Micro 5 xiv flashing Micro PX 2000 flashing MicroPXNPlus flashing mode label 28 module 364 monitor activity 288 alarm 294 client 300 controller 303 MSDEAdmin 357 N navigation network 3 4 56 84 106 auto update 342 bandwidth 93 comm device messages 305 connection issues 360 controller 54 controller settings 94 encryption 99 103 firmware firmware file 309 guard tour controller 252 logfile 345 parity checking 275 PC name 50 port settings 06 primary 06 printing 52 secondary 07 security permissions 52 SMTP server name 73 storage 36 system clients 48 takeover and recovery 55 TCP IP address 92 O online help 355 operators 6 override transaction 323 overview 2 P panes
105. sa and enter the Password for sa The default password assigned for the sa user was master e Navigate to the drive and directory folder on your system where the backup files are to be stored Double click to open the Destination folder e Holding down the left mouse button drag and drop the destination folder onto each of the database fields The BAK files in each field are automatically named to include the directory path file name date and time If you choose not to back up any of the three databases clear the check box at the end of that field If the check box is selected but no destination is entered in the database field backup of that database file does not occur e Click Backup The backup process begins When then backup is complete a dialog box displays a message verifying the successful backup of the chosen databases e Click OK Exit the Maintenance window Back up Designs Graphics Images Signatures and Videos folder You can use any backup program you want and any media such as tape zip disks CD or a network folder The size of the files in the folder you want to back up are a determining factor of which media to use Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence Quick Setup guide qs 19 This list assists in backing up an Enterprise system Note Using SQL Server Management Studio backups can be scheduled
106. selected e Click Undo to remove the selected area from the grid e Click Clear All to remove all selected areas e Click Select All to select the entire area 8 Click Search The Results display with number of matches found camera name start date and time end date and time and type 9 Double click an item in the Results to view the video in the Video Console 216 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Define CCTV interfaces The CCTV Interface form Gateways amp Interfaces group is used for serial interfaces that are interfaced to this application Following installation of hardware and the CCTV interface software you must create CCTV alarm records This form is used to set up CCTV alarms Table 131 Form fields Element Description Description This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made CCTV tab Use this tab to set up a CCTV alarm Figure 96 CCTV tab E CCTY Alarm Description Facity E CCTV CCTY Interface CCTY Alarm Enable Message m Disable Message m Reset CCTY Alarm C when the alarm is cleared from the Alarm Monitor q C when the alarm Resets Table 132 Form fields Element Description CCTV Interface CCTV In
107. state Clients Displays the number of clients licensed online and logged into FCWnx Alarms Displays the number of unacknowledged alarms displaying on the Alarm Monitor form Background Tasks Displays the number of tasks currently in progress The length of the task is dependent on the size of the job and hardware components of your computer The process may take hours to complete A caution DO NOT shut down FCWnx services until the background task is complete Creating editing and deleting records FCWnx forms use a standard method to add edit or delete records Creating records To create a record 1 From the Application Group pane such as Personnel select a secondary item then click the appropriate tab For example Personnel Person Personnel tab When a form is opened the record list window is empty 2 From the tool bar click Search to verify that a record does not already exist A record list window displays with all of the existing records or displays the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search 3 Click New laa The New Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data This is the best way to start or add a new record because the default data often saves you from entering the data Chapter 1 21 Introduction The New Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you hav
108. such as Front Door Inv Credential Camera 1 Reader 1 You can assign a reader alarm or camera alarm or both and this can be reflected in the description of the Trigger Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form that become the source for this Event Trigger When tagged events are identified by a search retrieved and viewed the video playback begins at the start of the event and continues playing until you elect to discontinue the playback Monitors amp Controls Controller Monitor Refer to Controller monitoring on page qs 303 1 Right click on the Controller Monitor to display a shortcut menu Select Flash Controller s to download the latest firmware to the selected controller When the Controller Flash Controller Preference Configuration dialog box displays click Start Flashing Controller s This option starts flashing the selected controller s with the latest firmware A dialog box displays asking you to verify your request The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes it varies with the amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller qs 13 qs 14 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence e Put controller online and monitor communications 8 Create e Areas Monitors amp Controls Controller Monitor Refer to Contr
109. takes over all 1ts devices This is designed to work automatically without any operator intervention so the system continues to work efficiently One of the backup clients performs the role of the default client until the default client is back up and running The devices that can be taken over at present are all DVRs network controllers dial up controllers and network dial up controllers Direct controllers cannot be hosted by any other than the default client computer The table below assists you to find the areas in this manual that relate to the redundancy feature Table 30 Configuring client redundancy Element Description Reference Topics Configuring Client Redundancy Am Licensed for Client Redundancy Licensing on page 3 How do configure backup clients for redundancy Backup Clients tab on page 53 What controllers are supported Backup Clients tab on page 53 Assign Controller Phone s What are the limits on controllers and DVRs Backup Clients tab on page 53 What is not permitted Backup Clients tab on page 53 When a Failover Occurs Messages Displayed Backup Clients tab on page 53 Display Redundancy Notification Client Monitoring Client monitoring on page 300 Active Client How long should wait when a failover occurs Backup Clients tab on page 53 Database Connection Heartbeat What alarms display on the Alarm Monitor Alarm tab on page 155 What is the behavior on th
110. text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each alarm displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware Example Failover Alarm BCTTOKYO Failover Alarm A failover alarm is created when backup clients are assigned to the default client computer The alarm record displays the default client computer name as part of the description This failover alarm indicates the default client as BCTTOKYO If the description indicates Region Failover Alarm the name of the Regional Database Server is included in the description Alarm descriptions coming into this application from an API can be ambiguous and the source of the alarm point may be unclear It is recommended that you rename API alarm points to correspond to the actual physical point to assist in processing and acknowledging when an alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Chapter4 155 Devices Alarm tab This tab configures the behavior of the alarm Figure 61 Alarm tab o A Controller dial host A Vv M 7 k kR Table 85 Form fields Element Description Group Displays the alarm group to which this alarm was assigned The default is alarm group 0 You can change to any o
111. the alarm s transaction as defined by its event trigger Refer to Video windows on page 196 for window management information Note In order to view recorded video the DVR must be online and available and not serving another request for playback of recorded video based on this event The following windows open 1 Digital Video Viewer window Refer to Video Console Help for information about the Digital Video Viewer 2 Video windowls displaying the current live view of the camerals associated with the alarm transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time View Single Recorded Frame Select to display the first frame of the event recording as a still photo Quick Launch Select to automatically access live and recorded video from the camerals associated with the alarm s transaction as defined by its event trigger Refer to Video windows on page 196 for window management information Note In order to view live and recorded video the DVR must be online and available and not serving another request for playback of recorded video based on this event The following windows open 1 Digital Video Viewer 2 Video windowls displaying the current live view of the camerals associated with the alarm transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time For additional information click Help on the Digital Video Viewer window Client monitoring
112. the connection between the client and the server e Connected The client and server are communicating Not Connected The client and server are not communicating Description Displays the description of the client Region This is a Global configuration and this is the name of the Region for this client Active Region This column displays an entry when a Regional Database Server has failed and a backup Server is now hosting the database e The column displays the currently active Region e Following a recovery to the default host this column is blank File Server Hosting Display name of the File Server that is hosting the database for this client Mode Displays the status of the Mode for this client Primary Com Port Displays the primary communications port used for CCTV serial interface Secondary Com Port Displays the secondary communications port used for CCTV serial interface Connection Information Licenses Used The number of clients currently connected to the server CCTV interface clients do not count against client licenses Client Licenses The total number of licenses authorized Imaging Information Licenses Used The number of clients currently given Imaging permissions Imaging Licenses The total number of Imaging licenses authorized Thin Client Information Licenses used The number of host computers enabled with the Thin Client option Thin Client Licenses The number of Thin Client licenses
113. the range of controller descriptions you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt Expiration Date filter tab Credential report Use this tab to generate a report based on the expiration date of the credentials Do not filter credentials by expiration date Select this field if you do not want to use the expiration date as a method of filtering the report information This is equivalent to running a report on credentials for all expiration dates Filter credentials using this expiration date range Select this field if you do want to use the expiration date as a method of filtering the report information If this is selected you must select a starting and ending date Starting date Click the start date you want for the starting range of expiration dates Ending date Click the ending date you want for the ending range of expiration dates Chapter 10 339 Reports Return Date filter tab Credential report Use this tab to generate a report based on the return date of the credentials e Do not filter credentials by return date Select this field if you do not want to use the return date as a method of filtering the report information This is equivalent to running a report on credentials for all return dates e Filter credentials using this return date range Select this field if you do want to use the return date as a method of filtering the report information If this is selecte
114. to an IntegrityCheck html file in your application Logs folder OR Select Unlock Database Mutex to unlock the shared resource Select Unlock to unlock the database mutex for this application s SQL instance Click OK when the Application Success window displays Click View Integrity Report to review the messages generated to an IntegrityCheck html file in your application Logs folder Review the file to determine if database errors were detected OR Click Close to close the window and exit Note The Replication tab is applicable to systems that have Global configuration installed We recommend that you call GE Security Customer Support for assistance in setting the preferences for the Global configuration database replication Appendix A 357 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Question How do I install and use MSDEAdmin utility You are not required to install this utility MSDEAdmin has been installed for you in the event that database maintenance may be required on a system with MSDE This utility is used to access and maintain the FCWnx database This utility also has backup and restore functionality 1 Navigate to the directory on your computer where FCWnx is installed and locate C1ientYMSDEAdmin Double click to open Double click setup exe to install the files on your computer and open the Setup Wizard Select Repair MSDE Admin Click Finish and please wait until you are notified that installation is complete Click Close t
115. to be overridden by a schedule can be monitor ON or OFF e Sched Override for systems using Micro controllers only To change the state of the monitoring by a schedule override For example use Sched Override to monitor an alarm until a schedule overrides it If you don t want the schedule to stop the monitoring click Indefinite If a Dl is selected click e Enable To enable the selected DI on the controller so a state change is reported e Disable To immediately disable the selected DI on the controller so its state changes are not reported to the host or trip a Digital Output e Indefinite To Enable or Disable permanently e Sched Override for systems using Micro controllers only Use this option to change operation state of a DI if you want a schedule to override its setting For example use Sched Override to control operation of the DI until a schedule takes over If you don t want a schedule to control activation of a DI use the On Indefinite selection Purpose This field accepts 255 characters Enter an explanation for monitoring an alarm or enabling disabling DI points These comments are written to the operator history field and display on the Operator History Report Purpose Field Chapter 9 319 Monitor and control How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 190 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Areas and Zones tab This form allows you to manually contr
116. to enter a PIN 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 20 for example PIN is 1234 20 1254 the operator enters 1254 4 A message displays the state of the Area disarming as successful When using the Areas for Arm Disarm feature Note The keypad arm disarm feature must be configured as Local on the Area form Alarm tab Arm 1 The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required 2 Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the Areas displayed select the Area to arm 3 Select ON 4 Reader display indicates Area Secured Disarm 1 The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required 2 Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the Areas displayed select the Area to arm 3 Select OFF 4 Reader display indicates Area Unsecure auto update Use this form to configure your network computer for this application for automatic notification and installation of the latest Quick Fixes and Service Packs This feature must be coordinated with your IT Department They may have certain procedures restrictions or security policies in place backup A backup is a copy of selected data Since this application does not contain a backup option you can use any method you like to back up the data Refer to Backing up data on page 34 calendar Select the day month and year such as the controls of credential issue return or e
117. tour Assign Tour Credentials e Click to display a Credential Assignment dialog box allowing you to assign credentials to this tour e Ifa reader is assigned as a tour point a credential must be assigned before this Guard Tour record can be saved The Credential Assignment window displays when you click Assign Tour Credentials enabling you to select and assign tour credentials to a tour e Multiple credentials can be assigned to a guard tour but if a credential is assigned to a tour the same credential cannot be assigned to any other tours e The same credential must be used to complete the entire tour e When a credential is assigned to a guard tour the credential is downloaded to all controllers that have reader type tour points for that guard tour e If any reader is assigned as a tour point at least one credential must be assigned to the tour e If all tour points are Dis you do not need to assign a credential to the tour Click OK to display the results in the Tour Credentials windowpane Save e Click to save this tour record and simultaneously create a new alarm Guard Tour Max Time Exceeded e if you have not completed the required elements you cannot save How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 169 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define tours points This feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Note The Tour Poi
118. using a reader that does not fit into the above categories For ACU controllers e Magstripe if using magnetic stripe card readers e Wiegand if using Wiegand card readers e Custom enables a field for selection of a Credential Format Credential Format e This field is available when magstripe Wiegand or custom has been selected as the Model type Select from a drop down list of available credential formats in the database e ACU controller reader models are custom only After selecting the Model as Custom then select a Credential Format The maximum number of Wiegand formats from which to select and assign is 15 e The maximum number of Magstripe formats from which to select and assign is 15 Status Online This field is automatically enabled when this reader record is created An online reader accepts a valid credential read and unlocks a door provided it is one of the licensed active readers You also have the option to schedule a reader offline When the reader is offline the reader does not accept valid credential reads does not unlock a door and transactions display on the Activity Monitor as Invalid Active This field is automatically selected and allows the accepting of credential transactions when this reader record is created The number of active readers counts against your reader limit as defined by your software license For example if your license key allows the use of 64 readers you may have only 64 readers mark
119. viii Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 7 Armi disatimn by manual Cot ii EDO 228 Overview INTTUSION ZONES seie nena A A eee E 229 Define intrusion ZONES 035 sigsas ot ese A tea evans asennad lea E oun eb a arta ae eee 230 intrusion zone 1 o APPO ROO ee hace PPP Toakasaded ouiddeaaamnneamned a Mmaasene eal sess 231 STUD iii ci A S SEEE 233 Arm disarrian intrusi n ZO 00d ida di Ad dara 234 What S NMERKE cito 2d A dt rial 235 Access rights departments persons and credentials 237 OVERVIEW occ a A seme darmenees sealers 238 DETIENE is ia 238 Access Montt dass 239 A aiden uuennn pnaphininut ead eae Renae E A T 240 Digital Output Groups tabes inse rrecri ori t Ee eh iid EEEE OAA sess an daveecuueebbeadinase eas 241 intrusi n ZONES ta Die isnan A Ad A eh Sarees 242 AROS TOD iy cc dide dongs vata eidddaae nuda as 244 Define personnel type tota a A ase 245 Personnel TY POA ida 245 Define departments reiecit imeni A A A ie 246 Depantment A idaceiew ek dasa EEE ERAEN 246 Define PpersOns iii cov eae hae phase ee eae Hele ee sds E DRE E wees da ESE ve PEREIRA EKERN ER 247 Personnel tai A gedunieics te OESS 248 QTE IN EA atic a AS al elayactsh ean bP Ord Sed Maca da dadaded EEE 250 User Fed rica A on 252 ACCES RIGHTS TAD rin tddi iii 253 Photo tab ii A A A dda eee eee be SIN SANDEL 254 Advanced Dias dad 255 IMOIJO COP ULS cra a A EE ERRE ES A ai 256 Selecting dn IN PUCEV
120. y Alarm Selection Person Selection Message Format m Date Time Format ee m Header m Footer m Alarm Information 7 Add Alarm Instruction Alarm Text Reset Text Table 45 Form fields Element Description Date Time Format Select a date time format from the drop down list Header Select this check box to display a header greeting In the Header field enter text up to 256 alphanumeric characters This could be additional details explaining the alarm condition e if you do not enter a header greeting an equivalent white space displays at the beginning of the e mail notification e if you do NOT select the check box any header message you create is NOT included in your e mail Footer Select this check box to display a footer closing In the Footer field enter text up to 256 alphanumeric characters This space could provide a name and number to contact ifthe receiver has a question e Ifyou do not enter a foot or closing an equivalent white space displays at the end of the e mail notification e If you do NOT select the check box any footer message you create is NOT included in your e mail Table 45 Form fields continuea Chapter 3 Schedules Element Description Alarm Information Add Alarm Instructions Select this check box to include the alarm instruction associated with this alarm in this e mail notification e If this check box
121. you have an archive database this date displays when you click Show Date Show Date If you have an archive database click Show Date e The Earliest Date in Current Archive DB and Latest Date in Current Archive DB displays e If you do not have an archive database the two date fields state No Record Archive Clean Period e Start Date Select the Start Date of the data that you want to remove from your database by selecting the month then the day to begin your archive e End Date Select the End Date of the data that you want to remove from your database by selecting the month then the day to end your archive Delete Click after selecting Start Date and End Date to remove from your database Note The deletion of an archive database takes place in the background Progress is indicated on the status bar This may take hours to complete and is dependent on the size of the Archive database and the hardware components of your computer 33 34 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Click Show Date to display the Earliest Date in Current Archive DB and Latest Date in Current Archive DB 2 Set the Start Date and End Date for the dates that you want removed from your database archive 3 Click Delete to clean that portion of your database archive The removal takes place in the background Backing up data A backup is a copy of selected data Since this application does not contain a backup o
122. you have defined Areas the Areas tab of the Access Right form allows you to assign multiple Areas to an access right using an assignment dialog Only credential holders with an area assigned on the Access Right form are able to arm and disarm areas using any of the credential keypad readers within an Area When an area is armed all readers within the area go offline and normal access rights do not gain access into the area When an area is disarmed all readers within the area go online and normal access rights gain access into the area If schedules are assigned then the reader follows the schedule Arm disarm by manual control Manual Area control for arming and disarming is accomplished using the Areas and Zones tab on the Manual Control form This follows the standard Manual Control form conventions including a Purpose entry by the operator Chapter 6 229 Areas and intrusion zones Note Because you have access to an Area this does not necessarily mean that you can arm disarm You must also be configured for Arm Disarm on the Person form Overview intrusion zones About Intrusion Options This feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Intrusion functionality provides the ability to define local intrusion zones per controller that consist of e Readers e Alarms e Arm disarm input point Intrusion DI e Arm disarm output point DO The defined intrusion zones have the ability to be armed
123. 0 GE DVMRe CT StoreSafe Pro 16 Requires triplex firmware Version 5 x or later CT StoreSafe and StoreSafe Pro series recorders are part of the family of wavelet compression based technology products GE DVMRe CT Il StoreSafe Pro Il 4 GE DVMRe CT Il StoreSafe Pro Il 10 GE DVMRe CT Il StoreSafe Pro Il 16 CT Il and StoreSafe Pro Il series recorders are part of the family of wavejet compression based technology products Integral Technologies DVXi DVXe 3 x DS Xpress 4x American Dynamics Intellex DVMS8000 3 1 and earlier Nice Pro Harmony 8 x Digital Watchdog DWPro All versions Pelco DX8000 1 0 Panasonic HD500A 2 5 Chapter 5 189 Video Note Increasing the processor speed and memory on the Server and or client workstations may be required for optimizing performance in your specific application The DVR form Security Devices group allows you to configure integrated digital video surveillance within this application This option provides event driven video recording allowing you to access and control live and recorded video and initiate camera control at any workstation within this application system e Enterprise Edition supports up to 256 licensed DVR connections e Professional Edition supports up to 16 licensed DVR connections The following order is recommended for configuration of a DVR system for this application 1 Set up operators and permissions 2 Con
124. 0 seconds and in most cases it does not need to be changed Chapter 4 Devices Table 49 Form fields continuea Element Description Host Computer Select the PC Name from the drop down list This is the host machine that communicates with the newly defined controller in the future and acts as the controller communication server If the Default Hostname computer is in a failover condition you cannot re assign this controller to any other Host computer except the Active Client that is presently hosting this device Credential Loading Note that any time a credential that is not in a controller is presented to a reader it is reported as unknown and the host sends the credential to the controller This happens regardless of the Credential Loading option The controllers can store only a limited number of credentials Refer to the licensing chapter of the FCWnx Installation Guide for capacities When a previously unknown credential is sent to a controller whose credential capacity is exceeded the controller randomly chooses a credential to delete to make room for the new credential The credential is deleted from the controller but not from the FCWnx system Select Force to force a download of all credentials that can possibly gain access to a reader on the controller Select Learn to allow the controller to learn the credentials as they are presented For example when a credential is presented to a reader and the controll
125. 00 to 5 00pm 17 00 Click Save before you exit this tab Note You need to assign this time schedule to a device such as a reader Note the example below Example BocaHQ Normal Workweek would indicate a facility specific time schedule where BocaHQ refers to a geographic location For example you can create a time schedule that is active Monday through Friday 8 00 A M to 5 00 P M This particular time schedule perhaps called Normal Workweek can be applied to the Access Right for Permanent Employees and you may want to turn off alarm monitoring during those hours 1 On the Reader form select Building 1 Lobby Door reader record 2 On the Functions Schedule tab of the Reader form select a Door schedule entitled BocaHQ Normal Workweek from the drop down list of Time schedules 3 Select Unlock Chapter 3 71 Schedules 4 The result is that the selected reader unlocks the door based on the time schedule as configured for BocaHQ Normal Workweek Define event schedules Use this form in the Schedules group to create event schedules Events define the day s of the week and time s an action starts Note An event schedules when an action occurs such as resetting an anti passback status dialing a controller or changing a physical reader type There is no end time associated with an event Events are comprised of one or more times on one or more days of the week and modes Events differ from time schedules in that ev
126. 00 2003 Standard Edition e FCWnx Software Server Note Cluster technology or Global configuration selections in this Enterprise level system installation provide new architecting options All configuration options are detailed in the FCWnx Installation Guide e Allows database and file Server to be placed on different Windows Server computers e SQL Server 2000 2005 Standard Edition Database and applicable SQL Server Service Packs e Imaging The feature is installed but not recommended for production as an Imaging workstation e Clients FCWnx supports 800 system wide clients any client can host a controller e Controllers FCWnx supports 512 system wide controllers 32 on the server and up to 64 per communications client Win2000 Professional Edition or FCWnx Software WinXP Professional Edition Server e SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE and applicable Service Packs or SQL Server 2000 Personal Edition Imaging The feature is installed on the server as an Imaging workstation Clients The system supports five system wide clients any five can also be configured as communications clients for hosting controllers Controllers The system supports 32 system wide controllers Win2000 Professional or XP e FCWnx Software Professional Client Workstation e Imaging The feature is installed Facility Commander Wnx edition services Windows uses special programs called services A service is a process that can s
127. 1 Mode2 Mode 3 Event Event details Event time Mode day E Table 41 Form fields Element Description Time chart Click your mouse pointer on the time and day of the week mode This creates a diamond that indicates that the event occurs at that time and that day of the week mode Note that the current event s diamond is selected Time is displayed in half hour increments by default To change the display increment click and hold the left mouse button on the right end of the bottom time bar then move the cursor to the left until you are at the desired time increment Then click the desired time If the point is incorrectly located you can drag and drop the point to the exact location you want Event Displays the number of the event The numbers start with one for the first event and increment consecutively for each event thereafter New Click to create a new event Ignore This feature is not implemented in the FCWnx application at this time Delete Click to delete an event You can delete a schedule that is currently in effect The Delete button removes the most recent point you have created If you continue to click Delete additional calendar points disappear in the order they were created Deleting a schedule does not affect the current state of any devices to which this schedule is associated Any devices currently under the effect of the deleted schedule remain in that st
128. 1 01 Supervised Exit 0001 1 02 DI 0001 1 02 Reader 0001 1 02 Supervised Exit 0001 1 03 DI 0001 1 04 DI 0001 1 05 DI 0001 1 06 DI 0001 1 07 DI Lo Open La Open La Open La Open La Open La Open La Open Lu Open Lu Open Lu Open Lu Open Lu Open Lu Open Lu Open Lo Sinan 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 187 Form fields Element Description Select controller e Select All to display the status for all digital inputs on all controllers e Select By controller to display the status for all digital inputs on a selected controller Click the drop down arrow to display a list of active controllers Refresh Click to get an updated status on the digital inputs A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes A reader and associated Dis are grouped together by reader number Note A refresh selected for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned Chapter 9 Monitor and control Table 187 Form fields continued Element Description Column Headings Number Displays the number of the digital input assigned by the system Description Displays the description of the digital input A reader and associated Dis are grouped together in reader number order Controller Displays the number of the controller to which this digital input belongs State Displays the state of t
129. 164 and complete the fields on this tab e Alias credential numbers saved to the system are automatically preceded with a 1 if this is the first Region 2 if this is the second Region and so on e If this is a Global configuration the credential alias number is preceded by the Region ID number that uniquely identifies the Region Therefore the same alias number can be assigned across regions because the number is uniquely identified by the Region ID 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Create custom credential status The Custom Credential Status form Credentials group allows you to create custom credential status definitions that more closely describe active valid or suspended invalid credential transactions When assigning a credential this status displays in the drop down list of the Credential Definition tab Credential form When the credential is swiped this custom status displays on the Activity Monitor and the credential status displays in reports 271 272 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Example 1 An employee is suspended for a week pending investigation following a disagreement with a Manager The credential is assigned a status of Suspended A custom credential definition One Week Suspension was created and assigned to this credential During the week the employee attempts to enter the building The credential holder presents the credential at a reader The transaction displays on the Act
130. 325 REDOM aeaa rn E EEE N E E N N ETR 327 OVER EE A A E den A 328 Designing reports ja a a E AE OA E E A A E OE S 329 Temiplatedetined oronro ea A A a 329 Report templates WiINndOW coi id kikai i eeen AEA EEEE E A nE ee 329 New template didlOd secs cis ex ci A AERE AEE 329 O AO 329 A A A 330 Cregte default templite cocida Ras 330 setas defqulttemplate o ri 330 EDO do ada 330 Delete templates ir a it A tah tate staat 330 Tabs on Report TOnMS iii A ai aaa 330 Genel TOD iaa a AB 330 POLS TOD vid tv A A ii 333 El ii watchs manhied Gebhwess Saga cn eeee beh A EE 333 Date RON nai aa enaalulauladaaan 4 336 Database MOD ANO U PPn es Paka aaia in EEE dd ENEE DE GEE CARE RATE E BEER ee 337 Additional Hits TAD ss sacras A A 337 Expiration Date filtr COD so 4 4 0 sececacecace ai adaddadeddadddda dei 338 Return Date filter tab an 339 Guard OU E isis 339 RECO LOD o A A A Ad 339 A deetehcroen a tetany a doe otto E a eee ee Fics 339 Diagnostics and troubleshooting ccc cece cece cee e eee eeeees 341 OVERVICW 6 cess it a A toa 342 A t pdate cio a A A banadanonnneea ean 342 Check for Updates caras 344 Diagnostics OVErVICW o iii A AA A 344 Remote didQMOStiGS sextocosssio airada ie aida 345 LOQTIHCS xo A di EEEE RINE 345 logfile ta sess aii A Hatin a a e td hee 346 Diagnostic Settings io io ri A A AAA AAA 347 Settings tabr pa A AA AE 347 When to enable debug messages for a diagnostic object
131. 9 parity checking 275 password 177 active directory 64 authentication 63 performance 357 permissions 58 person 17 10 26 44 116 127 179 180 220 229 230 233 237 238 233 331 access right 253 address fields 29 define 247 define credential 262 define type 245 image capture 256 invalid 288 monitor 288 name 248 photo aspect ratio 25 report 331 reports 328 330 reports menu 7 selection 75 transaction override 323 user field 27 persons 247 ping client connectivity 49 database connection heartbeat 54 time interval 52 play controls 2 popup video 205 ports 15 361 363 firewall and DCOM 6 preface xiii preferences 24 printer credential 362 printer driver installing 26 product contents 3 Q questions and answers 356 quick launch 293 quick setup guide R RAID server 365 reader define 2 IKE 732 keypad alarm shunting 8 keypad only type reader 778 normal type reader 778 read and keypad type reader 717 schedules 26 status 127 record generation controller 56 records creating 20 deleting 22 editing 2 records generation 86 recovery 55 regions 39 APB region configuration 43 backup region 4 registry settings 34 related documentation xiv remote diagnostics 345 replication 46 358 replication and synchronization conflicts 46 report form tabs 330 reports 327 default template 330 designing 329 print 350 templates 329 restoring databases 36 routing and bumping 78 156 172 S safety te
132. A device takeover succeeded e A device takeover did not succeed Select Details button for explanation If the first in line backup client is not available a second backup client takes over control of devices and a notification message displays updating you e Recovery of the default client and transfer of devices failed Select Details button for explanation e Recovery succeeded If you clear this check box you do not receive a notification message however indication of a takeover displays on the Client Monitor form Perform Backup on Normal Shutdown This check box is unchecked or clear by default Select this check box to trigger the takeover by a specified backup client of devices associated with a client during a normal shut down If your system is not licensed and you are operating in demo mode this option is not available for selection How to 1 Verify that you are licensed for Client Redundancy gt 9 e Review Table 29 before you begin configuration of this form Proceed to configure your backup clients according to your system and the guidelines in Table 29 Click Save before you exit this tab Takeover and recovery timing Client device takeover occurs following communication breakdown between the default client and the backup client under the following circumstances 1 If network problems should occur 2 Ifa default client computer crashes 3 Immediate takeover following normal shutdown
133. AID 368 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Array and the files contained on the disk For this configuration process we need Read Write permissions 10 Select Read Write access and click OK You do not need to provide logon information unless someone has already configured and secured the system and you are making changes to the previous configuration Note When the program opens for the first time a message displays stating IT Network Monitoring Service is not configured for discovery would you like to configure now Click No to close the window and return to the main screen for IT Assistant Installing MS SQL Server 2000 2005 on the RAID server Refer to the appropriate chapter in the Installation Manual for details and instruction to configure SQL Server Software Question What software and firmware versions are supported in FCWnx components The following are minimum requirements for FCWnx system components Element NET Framework Acrobat Reader DVR Internet Explorer MDAC MS SQL Symantec pcANYWHERE Description 2 0 automatically installs with FCWnx if not already there 5 x or later to view manuals online Version 7 0 is provided on the FCWnx Documentation Plus CD for your convenience Refer to Define digital video recorders on page 188 for a list of devices and supported firmware versions 6 1 or later with applicable service pack 2 8 or later with applicable service pack MSDE S
134. Accura 33 6 Message 1 displays on the Logfile every 90 seconds following a period when the modem is NOT operating until the modem is available and operational again Verify the following e Selected modem on Preference form is identical to the modem you want to use If the modem you want to use is not on the list of available modems you may have to reinstall the driver for the modem or select another modem Modem is turned on e Comm port connection is complete e Connection is plugged in properly Appendix A 365 Diagnostics and troubleshooting e Modem settings are correct Maximum speed value of 9600 applies to MOST modems If you are having problems using this setting refer to your modem manual for more information Message 2 displays ONE time only and that is when your modem returns to operational after a period when the modem was NOT operational The Controller Monitor form indicates that the controller dedicated to a modem is in an error state Question Why does the host dial a controller Whenever a change is made to a form that requires an update to the controller database such as changes to the Person form the host dials the controller with the changes If you make many changes the controller may go to idle between your changes causing a disconnection with the host Then the host needs to dial the controller back to download the next change You have two options available to work around this situation 1 Inc
135. Alias form Credentials group to control the alias numbers that display in place of the encoded credential number An alias is a number that represents the encoded credential number You decided whether to use credential alias and which method during installation of this application If you chose None this form is unavailable in the application Credential alias provides added security in that the encoded number is displayed only to authorized users The encoded credential number is hidden on the Credential form reports and Activity Monitor form Table 163 Form fields Element Description There are two methods of using credential alias Manual Enter the credential alias number on this form Automatic The credential alias number is chosen for you NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Credential Alias tab Use this tab to assign alias numbers to credential encoded numbers Figure 120 Credential alias tab ES Credential Alias Company Coe MMMM Card Number Issue Number 4 Encoded Number Credential Alias Eind Credential Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Table 164 Form fields Element Description The following three fields are for systems with ACU controllers Company Code Select None or select from the drop down list of available company codes as pre
136. All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations Use this form to obtain client information such as client type Imaging status and connection status A client is a computer that has all the functionality of the Database Server computer but does not store the database and it does not validate license information For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Figure 129 Client monitor Client Monitor Chapter 9 Monitor and control 10 x Client Active Client Client Type Imaging status Thin Client Status Connection status Description Mode BCT6XDKQ71 Cy SP Client App 8 Enabled Disabled Connected BCT6XDKQ71 Normal INFRA_16C1241 4 SP Client App 3 Enabled Disabled Y Connected Mickey Normal Connection Information Licenses used Client licenses Imaging Information Licenses used 2 Imaging licenses 5 Table 180 Form fields Element Description Client Name of the networked computer To delete client must have a connection Status of Not Connected Note When adding cl
137. At the Select system type screen click Both to indicate that you are installing both Managed Node and Management Station A summary window displays the installation options you have selected and gives you an opportunity to verify the installation criteria make corrections or abort the installation When you are satisfied with the summary click Next You are prompted to verify all options by asking Are you sure Click Yes to begin the installation A progress monitor displays listing the components being installed and the installation of applications proceeds When installation of all components is complete you are asked to reboot the computer Reboot your computer at this time An icon displays on the desktop labeled IT Assistant You can access the Disk Array software from the icon or the group created in the Start menu After the computer restarts and you log on a message displays stating that the Windows Server application Disk Administrator has been replaced by the Dell OpenManage Array Manager If for some reason you later uninstall the Array Manager software the Windows Server Disk Administrator is restored to the pre installation configuration Double click the IT Assistant icon on the desktop to display Logon Information By default you are given the choice of Read only access to monitor the status of the Disk Array You may also select Read Write access allowing you to make changes and configure the various preferences of the R
138. CD to the folder where the DII firmware resides 2 Use the AcuxUtil exe utility The functionality of this utility is described in the ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers Hardware Installation Manual 3 View edit flash files Use this option ONLY when it is necessary to selectively flash an older version of firmware on a controller This application automatically selects the latest version by default The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes it varies with the amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller Click OK to begin the flash When flashing is complete the controller resets and requests a database e Micro 5 PX and Micro PX 2000 The form opens with the latest efl firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older firmware file Micro 5 PXN and Micro PXN 2000 The form opens with the latest efl network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file e MicroPXNPlus and MicroPXNPlus2000 The form opens with the latest efl network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file e Browse Click to navigate to another media source or directory where firmware files reside e Override Block Checking Ignore this check box This selection is for Customer Support use only Note Secure Perfect Version 4 XX and later micro firmware is able to communicate
139. CWnx FileServer interface attempts to locate an available fileserver If all attempts fail the interface generates an alarm Note If you select a failover Regional Server and want your clients to failover to the backup Server you must also select the Client Region Failover checkbox on the Client form Client tab Figure 11 Backup Regions tab Table 23 Form fields E Region e Description MIAMI Region Backup Regions M Backup Regions Move Up Move Down Assign Element Description Backup Regions This list box displays those Regional Database Server computers that you have assigned to take over control in the event of a failure at the default Regional Database Server The order in which the computer names display determines which Server is next in line to take over Move Up Select and click to move this Regional Server up the list Move Down Select and click to move this Regional Server down the list Assign Click to display a Backup Region Assignment dialog box listing available Regional Database Servers found on your FCWnx Global system Those computers selected and assigned when you close the dialog box display in the Backup Regions list Backup Region Assignment A list displays of available backup Regional Database Server computers e Select one or more computer names from the available list and then click the right arrow to assign e Select one or more computer na
140. Click Save before you exit this tab Define persons Use the Person form Personnel group to create a record for a person someone who can access the readers controlled by the system Note A Person record assigned to a suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preference form displays in red font in the list box on the right gt NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Table 150 Form fields Element Description Last Name Enter the last name of the individual record you are creating This is a required field Facility A facility option can be assigned to this record from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator 248 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Personnel tab Create a record of an employee s personal information Note Only Last Name Personnel Type and Employee Number are required fields Figure 110 Personnel tab 7 Person po Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Advanced as po pT Po Ss es ka ka ke lt I Table 151 Form fields Element Description First name Enter the first name of the person Middle name 1 Enter the middle name of the person Middle name 2 Enter an additional name such as another middle name of the person Note Initials as displayed in th
141. Commander Wnx Edition User Manual AA A IES Follow the instructions shipped with your printer Select the appropriate printer port Select a name for the printer and indicate if it is the default printer Do not print a test page click Finish After the installation is complete move the mouse pointer over the printer icon click the right mouse button and select and set Properties 6 Complete the printer setup and then click Exit Note The printer may NOT support transparent bitmaps If the printer runs out of credentials or the ribbon needs to be replaced while in the process of producing credentials an error message displays Correct the condition at the printer and then put the printer back online before continuing with your print job Define credentials The Credential form Credentials group is used to define a credential by entering specific information such as the credential number and the person to whom this credential is assigned A credential identifies a person to this application This is usually a credential with an embedded number that uniquely identifies the credential However the credential does not have to be a card it could be a unique number that is entered into a keypad reader Table 159 Form fields Element Description Search Click Search to display a list of previously created credential records to review or modify It is possible to change the status of all credentials for the same person
142. E 175 APLCONNECHONS uri A A A eee ed OE EE EEES 176 Definitii cia ii 177 Define Mo iia ii A E A E Ross Ar AAA 177 o E 178 Define elevators 000 000 A a a E ada 178 Methods of elevator Control vinci ei anwar ae de added es 179 Floor tab of access right form for systems using Micro controllers oooooocoocococcocco 179 Configuring elevator control using a Micro controller oooooocoooococoocoroororonro ron 180 Configuring elevator control using an ACU controller ooooooocococcococcoronnororrornn rr 180 Elevator TOD AOORRPROCOOCO5O 5 ON 0 OO o EE EA E E EEE shaw 181 Public Access ia iras ii A AA db 182 Floor Digital OUTBUL TOD uvniiisaarrerrcldaid 183 Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab 2 cence EErEE eet ene e cena es 184 Elevator Control Sample Scenarios 0 nen rr rr 186 What S NER 665s cisge ese cer cd chat abGteeaneceddid ridad ad 186 NiO A sear eaereoresaso endnotes PO 187 OVEIVIOW ti va ees Ebadi AA eee e cig ONES AAA da 188 Video driver installtiO sii A AA AA eee 188 Define digital video recorders 0 ccc cece cece eee eee eee ene rr 188 DVR ui A eee RED MRR Ge A ORS Rea eoe 190 Digital Video Recorder TOL cee ceoe aac A di 190 DO pd 190 COMMUNICAtION Settings TOD iii li n 192 Video Display ta A A da 193 Chapter 6 USD A IRA 194 VICO WUT OWS a Di bd 196 Define camera Presets cri a lira 197 D fiMition Dr edad 197 Define COMES ccoo A A a a ie 198 SA ends bbb bddacdaea gee
143. Element Description Title bar Displays the Video Console and the window instance number Each time you open another Video Console window another window instance number displays indicating the window sequence such as 1 2 or 3 Menu bar The menu bar contains the following menus File Action Display Window and Help Navigation pane The navigation pane is made up of two tabs Physical View and Display View e The Physical View tab displays configured DVRs and cameras in a hierarchal structure Each DVR is identified with the associated cameras and preset conditions The DVRs are listed in alphabetical order Note All devices are displayed according to the facility to which they are assigned Therefore even if a camera is associated to a DVR if they are assigned to different facilities the camera does not display under the associated DVR e The Display View tab displays any custom views that you have saved Play controls The play controls allow you to capture a snapshot and to control and adjust live and recorded video Video display This portion of the screen displays the live or recorded video from the selected DVR camera Multiple cameras can be selected and displayed in two up four up nine up or sixteen up views Status bar The status bar displays error messages and an icon that indicates if Video Console is connected to the FCWnx server Green indicates the system is connected and communicating Red indicate
144. Fie E Reports None Personnel Credentials C Read Q Places amp Policies Monitors amp Controls c e Updat Alarms amp Events Update Security Devices i Elevators ca B Guard Tours Graphics Mixed 7 Schedules Gateways amp Interfaces Administration Diagnostics G 2 6 Table 34 Form fields Element Description Forms The information in the Forms windowpane can be viewed one of two ways 1 If a displays to the left of the form name then additional items are available Click to display additional forms You can also double click the Forms menu item to view the additional forms 2 Right click the windowpane to display the shortcut menu with these options Show by Action lists the actions None Read Update All followed by the forms assigned to them Operator displays the Operator form which shows permissions assigned to existing operators Actions Four types of actions can be assigned e None means that no access is given to that form Read means that read only access is given The form and the associated records can be viewed but not modified e Update means that the records on that form can be viewed and modified e All means that the records on that form can be viewed modified and deleted e Mixed is not an action to be assigned It is used only on this form to signal that any forms beneath a general title have different actions assig
145. Figure 4 Mode Labels tab AE Settings User Fields Mode Labels Address Fields Communication Settings Clear Archive Security Advanced Address 1 Address 2 ddress2 Address 3 ddress3 Address 4 Address Address 5 fAddess6 MA TE IZ Table 15 Form fields Element Description Mode 1 The default label displays To change the label select and enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Mode 2 The default label displays To change the label select and enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Mode 3 The default label displays To change the label select and enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Mode 4 For systems using ACU controllers these additional Modes display Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 How to 1 Select in the field of any one of the Mode label fields Enter over the existing text up to 30 alphanumeric characters Repeat for each label field that you want to edit eis Click Save before you exit this tab Address Fields tab Use this tab to modify the labels of the address fields These labels are used on the Person form 29 30 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 5 Address Fields tab Table 16 Form fields Element Description Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 Address 5 The default label displays To edit or create a new lab
146. Form fields e Description ss Facility Py Group Events Number Controller Py m Monitoring Time schedule y C On Off Print Alarm Time schedule y C Yes C No Element Description Number This is a read only field Displays the number of the alarm group Controller This is a read only field Displays the description of the controller on which this alarm group is located Monitoring Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want to monitor the alarm group or Off if the above schedule is when you do not want to monitor alarms belonging to this alarm group Print Alarm Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want to print alarms belonging to this alarm group or No if the above schedule is when you do not want to print alarms belonging to this alarm group How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 94 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 169 Devices Events tab Use this tab to schedule changes to the sense time on all alarms in the group by assigning previously defined events to alarm groups Figure 70 Events tab e Description Facility v Group Events Alarm sense time events Event Description Sense Time Remove
147. GE Security User Manual Facility Commander Wnx Seamless Effective Efficient Facility Commander Wnx Edition E AA Car E Vic w ev us U U Y a 2 A M ma am a Vf wa Sa E mm Seo Ba Zz IMM VU UM IN E Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use Copyright O 2007 GE Security Inc All rights reserved This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Document number 46064100182 March 2007 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are registered trademarks of General Electric Facility Commander Wnx Edition and logo are registered trademarks of GE Secu
148. IER ccc eddadciondhn dss isbn 256 Displaying existing IMAGES veias tan aware pa dida dalla liceos 257 Design Credentidls o cocos is e a ii 259 Credential design TOrM coo AA ARA 260 DESIDIA A A AAA 260 installing Print drivet A ted hadaweodaawndeeteguntaenneneess 261 Define credentidlS iii ds a es be ek hein dd E ied i a een 262 credentidlDefiniti ntab asar rre 263 Ses be og de E E E A EEEE EE EE GT T eee see A E GAE 266 Us p Fields in 267 Mass UPCOtE ioioccniciai rocas dada REEE ENE E A 268 Conditions OF MOSS UPAdIE sti died ei 269 Define credential alias ocio ains oe ME ade Heche e ee edewede ae esas 270 Credential AlidS tabs ii A it fal 270 Create custom credential StatusS oooooococoocccrcrccccrr ccoo rr rr rro 271 Create credential forMats ocomoionsracin ri a da as 273 Credential TOrmatta D saine a to 274 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Credential formats in 40 bit and 55 bit Wiegand protocol oooooooccococcororoororccronroo 276 Whats NERU 2 ssc SGe vee es Bide A dee ve ati 277 GUISA a ANA 279 OVEIVIEW si Aa 280 Define Guard TOUS aii il di 280 G ardto r taba A A anew aa ae 281 Define tours Point Womccininacas sra id aiii a 283 TOUF PONE A 284 What s Mex ocasion rr A A A A a ad 285 Monitor and CONO arar 287 OVOIN IEW ce casi avs Pr AA Ae lala 288 Activity MOnitoring veia sa lets es 288 Activity Monitor shortcut MENU acia cs raras ir 292 Swipe and SOON ri ei 293 AIOFMIMONITONI
149. IN A credential was presented at a reader and an invalid PIN was entered This message displays for as many times as you enter an invalid PIN unless Max Invalid Pin is configured on the Reader form Reader tab The credential does not grant access e Max Invalid PIN Max Invalid PIN Count is active on this reader and the number of invalid credential counts has reached the maximum as configured on the Reader form Reader tab The credential did not grant access and the credential is suspended The following are intrusion zone and Area activities e Zone Armed By reader DI manual control or ACU by inactivity e Zone Disarmed By reader DI manual control or ACU by inactivity e Arm Disarm Failed Zone Not An alarm is in alarm state Device or credential transaction failed Secure e Arm Disarm Failed Time No credential transaction The 10 second time period allowed for completion of the arm Expired disarm process at keypad and reader has expired For systems using ACU controllers this is a 30 second time period but can be modified e Arm Disarm Failed Invalid Intrusion Zone not assigned to access right or is invalid Access Right e Arm Disarm Failed Not in Reader is not assigned to the zone Zone The following are Guard Tour activities e Tour Started Security officer has started a Guard Tour e Tour Ended Security officer has completed a Guard Tour All tour points have been h
150. In Out Time amp Attendance In Out This type of reader is used ONLY for Wiegand Swipe Readers such as the Model 100 To get an IN status hold the credential so that the front of the credential is facing you The logo is usually printed on the front of the credential Then swipe the credential through the reader To get an OUT status turn the credential around so that the back of the credential is now facing you Swipe the credential through the reader 115 116 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 58 Form fields continued Element Description APB and T amp A Options e Passive APB and T amp A Note This option is not available for readers associated with ACU controllers If you are using an anti passback APB reader or time and attendance T amp A reader enable this field for the reader to function as a Normal type reader thereby allowing any valid credential to unlock the door regardless of the credential s IN OUT status However the credential s status is still logged as IN or OUT according to the reader used and is recorded as such in the credential history Use this if you want to record APB or T amp A without preventing unauthorized persons from accessing doors Example Timing begins when a credential is presented to an IN reader Until that time expires the user cannot enter again regardless whether they went through an OUT reader If a user tries to go through the IN reader a second time the contr
151. NG eiii A E ERE EE ER AA RES aaa iaa 294 Using the Alarm Monitor form ooococoococcocoocnroo rr 296 AA errre aan EE EEEE E EEEO E A LAK pata 297 Alarm Monitor tool DATs eenen st EEA A a adas 298 Alarm Monitor shortcut men ci a A A IAS 299 ClientMONItONING ss eis idad id 300 Client Monitor toolbar s 22 4 ai 302 Client Monitor Shortcuts ai rea 303 Controller monitoring lt gt ici ea eladeed sad idee Has ea ee 303 Controller Monitor toolbar recita 306 Search criteria and controller selection 0200 0 0 ccc ccc ence b ene tenet teen eens 306 Controller Monitor shortcut MENU 2 cece rr 307 Controller flash and controller preference configuration 0 ce cece ccc cence nee eens 308 Digital input StAtUS sssri serii sanr e A oe ease A A Pie ae 309 Status tab see 309 Digital OU TpUESTATUS 2 a 311 Status tab iia o sas 311 Graphics Console cocos nica da aa 313 Graphics Preferences ii a A A A ds 313 SVMDOMECtOf ins oia lt AA A a ease taken amie 314 GGTOPMICS ECICOR 55 a aie renerne e lada 314 Graphics Consoles 555s ccccen dukes A E 314 Manual Control OM iii dias 314 Reader Ogital Output tTO D ii a A ds 315 Alarm Digital putita ii 317 AREAS dnd Zo 319 Mod tacita 320 Guardtour DE dolia 322 Transaction VEO ini a ies ata a 323 x Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 10 Appendix A OVERIGEHOD sii A A A ao E 323 What SNERT oeroue renta E E E N E O E E R
152. Preference form and door access was granted with a valid credential This selection allows a duress alarm to be generated when a PIN code is entered and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 The door opens b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 The door opens e Duress Valid No Passage Grant Access on Duress is active on this system selected on the Preference form and door access was granted with a valid credential This selection allows a duress alarm to be generated when a PIN code is entered and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 The unlock time expired and the door did not open e Valid Open Enable Valid No Passage is active on this reader A valid credential read occurs and the door opens 289 290 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 172 Form fields continued Element Description e Valid No Passage Enable Valid No Passage is active on this reader A valid credential read occurs but the door did not open within the configured unlock time This may be an indication of someone deciding not to pass through the door or an accidental read as someone passes a reader e Invalid P
153. Refer to Define cameras on page qs 198 1 Use this form to edit camera preferences Camera records are automatically created when a DVR is defined on the Digital Video Recorder form The camera records display in the format 00X 0X Camera where 00X is the DVR address and Ox is the camera number It is recommended that you keep the number prefix to aid in locating the cameras Note Device description updates are communicated to corresponding 2 ER alarms DIs and DOs In order for changes to migrate to additional form windows that may be open at the time of a change the open windows should be closed and then re opened before the new device description is able to be seen A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the camera type that you are configuring Alarms amp Events Event Triggers Refer to Define event triggers on page qs 201 1 An event consists of a camera and either readers alarms or zone activity A trigger causes an event or program routine to be executed depending on what options you set on the tabs of this form Intrusion Zone activities can also trigger an event Example A camera begins recording in response to an invalid credential transaction An alarm is recorded in response to the credential transaction 2 Enter a description that conveys specific information relating to a physical location camera reader or state
154. Regional Server are easily identifiable A facility option can be designated To select a PC name click Browse to display a Select Client window 4 Proceed to complete the remainder of the options according to your system this client and the guidelines in this manual 5 Repeat these steps for each client that you are defining Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence 4 Define permissions 5 Define operators y e Quick Setup guide qs 3 Administration Permission Refer to Create permissions on page qs 58 Click the add icon to begin a new record Enter a unique title for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Expand the Forms navigation tree to display the FCWnx forms Select a form and select one of the Actions to associate with the form and the permission you are creating Click Save Notice that the icon has changed to the associated action granted to this permission Administration Operator Refer to Determine and create operators on page qs 61 Ou OT a as Dot A facility option can be designated Enter the Login ID associated with this operator record Enter the name of the operator Select a permission from the drop down list associated with this operator Select a language from the drop down list associated with this operator Using the guidelines in Table 36 complete the FC
155. Server This means that the Regional Servers are not required to request updated data from the Global Server because updates are periodically supplied to Regional Servers according to a set schedule Replication intervals are configurable through SQL Server Enterprise Manager user interface Data is continually synchronized by implementing this customized replication configuration Refer to the FCWnx Installation Guide for a terminology list and complete description of this feature Also refer toGlobal configuration regional rules on page 44 and Replication and Synchronization Conflicts FCWnx Enterprise Edition Licensed for Windows 2000 2003 Standard Edition Server as the operating system and SQL Server 2000 2005 Standard Edition as the database FCWnx Enterprise configuration is designed for mid to large sized systems with capacity requirements of up to 50 clients 1 024 controllers and 4 096 readers Note Cluster technology selections in this Enterprise level installation provide new architecting options See the document Installing Genesis in a Clustered Environment for additional information and instructions FCWnx Professional Edition Licensed for Windows 2000 Professional Server or XP Professional Server as the operating system and SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine MSDE SQL 2000 Server Personal Edition or SQL 2005 Standard as the database FC Wnx Professional Edition is designed for small to mid sized systems with capacity requirements of u
156. Service on all servers that are experiencing the problem c Open Event Viewer to make sure that the errors are not longer occurring Solution 2 The domain name for the server may not be represented in the DNS Snap in Click Start Programs Administration Tools DNS The DNS displays Expand the node for the domain Make sure that the Server computer name displays under the domain root If the Server computer name is not here but it is in the Active Directory Users and Computers Snap in the FRS does not recognize the Server computer as part of the domain Question I m experiencing space issues What can I do Consider cleaning out your FCWnx Replication folder Question An error message displays when attempting to add a device to another Region within the Global system The message informs the operator that addition of the device is in excess of the license limit for that Region What can I do From the Administration menu select Region When the Region Form opens click Search and select the Regional Server computer in question from the list box on the right The License Info at the bottom of this form displays the current licensing capabilities of the selected Region Review the license capabilities If limits for a device have been reached additional devices cannot be added at this time Question What is Domain Controller Down Time There may be an occasion when the domain controller is inaccessible In a Global Edition configurat
157. This box displays the results of the search The list of controllers are those that meet the search criteria and are selected to be displayed Search Click to display the controllers as requested by the preferences you selected Clear Search Clears the controller search criteria and selection preferences from the form windowpanes allowing you to select new criteria Recall Controller Search Select to recall and display the results of the last search performed Every time the monitor is opened the system displays the monitor columns based on the criteria of the last previous search Controller Monitor shortcut menu Note These options also display on the Controller Monitor form toolbar Refer to individual icons for additional details of each function Table 186 Form fields Element Description Edit Open the Controller form and edit the settings for the selected controller Change State Change the current state of the selected controller Download Credentials Reload the credential database records for the selected controller Download Database Download the controller s database Reset Controller Physically reset the controller Reset T amp A Set the time and attendance status to neutral for all credentials in this controller Reset APB Set the anti passback status to neutral for all credentials in this controller Dial Hang up Controller Dial that co
158. This displays on the Alarm Monitor form as Alarm with a process state of Acknowledged preceded by a check e When an alarm NOT configured for Operator acknowledge is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and is acknowledged its internal process state becomes Inactive and the alarm is removed from the Alarm Monitor form 296 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Note When an alarm is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and its internal process state is Pending displayed as Acknowledged preceded by a check on the Alarm Monitor form and the alarm is Purged individually or Reset see 2 above its internal process state becomes Inactive and it is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and the alarm is reset see 3 its internal process state is Completed This displays on the Alarm Monitor as Alarm in reset When an alarm is in reset and the alarm is either acknowledged or purged see 4 above its internal process state becomes Inactive and it is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and the Purge All feature is employed see 5 above its internal process state becomes Inactive and it is removed from the Alarm Monitor form When an operator acknowledges a few specific alarms their process state becomes Inactive and they are removed from the Alarm Monitor form This
159. Tour Started This button is unavailable if a tour is not in progress This button is not available if the time assigned for the selected tour has expired e Pause Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to pause a tour that is currently in progress The Tour State column indicates Tour Paused This button is unavailable if a tour is not in progress e Purpose Specify a reason for stopping or starting this tour Enter a brief statement about the operator s actions How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 193 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Transaction override The Transaction Override form Administration group opens with a default record already displaying Use this form to manually enter an In or Out status for credential transactions that you want to enter into the selected database This information can be used by those who create reports to track view and verify employee transactions pair In and Out transactions or review total transactions Example This form may be appropriate for tailgaters Polite employees card in to unlock and exit a door then hold the door for another person exiting the building The second person may not present their card If the reader is an APB or T A reader you may want to track pair transactions for selected credentials as a record of those that do not card when exiting Override tab Use this tab
160. Whether valid transactions are being routed to the Activity Monitor form e Printer Whether valid transactions are being routed to the printer Active Access Rights Displays a list of access rights that are currently active ACU controllers Reader Status Displays Online if the reader is currently online and Offline if the reader is currently offline Reader State Display Idle Ready if the reader is online and active Door Status Displays Open or Closed Door Mode Displays Normal Overlapped Door Open or Overlapped Door Closed Keypad Enabled Displays Disabled or Enabled Reader Firmware Version Displays a version number if applicable Chapter 4 129 Devices Table 64 Form fields Element Description Last status date Displays the date when the status was last requested Last status time Displays the time when the status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information for this reader from the controller It may take a moment to complete the refresh of the data A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes CAUTION A status refresh requested for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 64 This is a read only form 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to pro
161. Wnx Password Authentication grouping or remove the selection and complete the Active Directory Password Authentication qs 4 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence 6 Define schedules e Time schedules Schedules Time Schedule Refer to Define time schedules on page qs 68 Click the add icon ato begin a new record 2 Enter a unique title for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 3 A facility option can be designated 4 Review the guidelines in Table 39 and complete this tab similar to the following steps 5 Create 5 intervals for the five days of the week Monday through Friday from 8 00am 08 00 to 5 00pm 17 00 6 Click Save before you exit this tab Note You need to assign this time schedule to a device such as a reader Note the example below Example BocaHQ Normal Workweek would indicate a facility specific time schedule where BocaHOo refers to a geographic location For example you can create a time schedule that is active Monday through Friday 8 00 A M to 5 00 P M This particular time schedule perhaps called Normal Workweek can be applied to the Access Right for Permanent Employees and you may want to turn off alarm monitoring during those hours On the Reader form select Building 1 Lobby Door reader record On the Functions Schedule tab o
162. a 38 CONTIGUPFETEGIONS socia A A A da 39 REQIONTOB ic ad a 40 Back p Regions TAD ii A A A EOR cad eeaunes 41 APB REGION Configura LOD eesriie aeee nan iii enla 43 Global configuration regional rules cece ccc cece ete cnc 44 Replication and synchronization conflicts 0c cece cece nee nee n rr 46 Define facilities sx a AAA Meenas A 47 Facilita A A letras 47 Identify and configure clientS ccc cece eee eee eee ence rr 48 INGEWONKIM asada 48 AAA O E 0 A EE Aled 49 Boku Clint a aa 53 Takeover and recovery TIMING caricia a A a eb 55 Client redundancy OVervieW sescccnrrrrredosor rokan rr EEEE EEEE EE EEKEREN 56 Definie clients groups vuitton E TE A a a a a 57 CEE GROW D TOD 5 dass 57 Create permissions 2 momia A is 58 A A ades 59 Determine and create operators 6 cece ccc cee eee cr rr 61 Operator TOD s acco rren E te pagumeehaincnttane cad E EE E O A EE EREE 61 Mu ltiplelangua ge SUPP te ensisi dia 64 Facilities tab ii A A R 65 WhaES NeXE caos rociar tasado dd nds 66 os AAA APP 67 OVEIVI SW irc A a A lA da a Aa 68 Define time schedules osc 8s cocci ee sg bl rra ARA AS dinmeddad dee canes 68 TIME SCHECUIES TED iia A A 69 Define event schedules hades needed bse de e ried Souda ir da Sawai 71 Event Schedules TADS seis Suk rd it 71 Configtire event Notifier 002 A AA A 73 Alarm Selecione i ls 74 Person Selection tab cenicienta a 75 Message FOOT iii A a aia a 76 Define mode Schedu
163. a credential to print Credential Design Displays the name of the current credential design Click the drop down list to select a different credential design Print If there is a printer configured for your system click to print a credential for this person Signature If there is a signature capture associated with this person record it displays here Chapter 7 255 Access rights departments persons and credentials How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 155 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Advanced tab This tab applies to person records associated with ACU controllers Areas assigned to this person record must be configured for keypad arm disarm This person is allowed to arm disarm Areas using an IKE reader designed for keypad arm disarm Figure 115 Advanced tab e Last Name 5 Facility y Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Advanced Areas for Arm Disarm Assign rea Table 156 Form fields Element Description Areas for Arm Disarm This window displays a list of Areas that are assigned to this person Assign Areas Click to display an Area Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and assign Areas that this person can arm disarm The Area Assignment window displays when you click Assign Areas enabling you to select and assign an Area association Only Areas in the operator s facilit
164. a door can remain open with a valid credential read or an exit request This time must always be greater than the maximum unlock time 1 Enter a number between O minimum and 62 minutes 2 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum seconds The Alarm sense time for the Reader and the DI Sense Time on the DI form are added together to determine the total time that a door can remain open before the system triggers a Door Held Open alarm Extended unlock The extended time interval in minutes and seconds that a door remains unlocked after the reader reads a valid credential 1 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 60 maximum minutes 2 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum seconds Example If the door is used by handicapped persons or the reader is mounted at a distance from the door a longer unlock time may be required If a 0 is entered in this field the current state of the reader is changed or toggled to its opposite state The standard situation is the first credential read causes the door to unlock and the next credential read toggles the door locked This time interval is also used if you selected Duration in the Door Lock On field below Extended Alarm sense This time interval is calculated automatically and is a read only entry Table 59 Form fields continued Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Door lock on Once the door is unlocked this field allows you to specify when
165. a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes Page Footer To change the current font of the report footer click Change to display a list of available fonts font styles and font sizes The report footer contains the report title current system date and the page number Filters tab Alarm History report form Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated Controller Select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt Alarm Select the alarm you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all alarms select lt ALL gt Priority Select the alarm priority you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all alarm priorities select lt ALL gt Area History report form This tab allows you to limit the person or credentialholder records printed on this report Credential Number Enter the range of credential numbers you want listed on this report Leave blank for all credentials Employee Name Enter the range of employee last names on which you want to generate a report Leave blank for all names Employee Number Enter the range of employee numbers on which you want to report Leave blank for all numbers 334 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Area report form This tab is used only when generating an Area Report Use this tab to select criteria by which this report is g
166. a ok ads ee Se ee a 48 TIENE clients BRON PE oo een thos RARA Hows e edie nee a READ 57 Create PETINISSIONS iii dd nh tirsisti rr tiry 58 Determine and create operdlOTS ea ce ec iian a e 61 UOLS E opke reire Bs es AA A A Ri ed ei 66 24 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview Complete initial setup of system preferences facilities client computers permissions and operators in your Facility Commander Wnx Edition system before defining other records Complete the steps in the order presented Configure preferences Administration Group Complete the tabs of the Preference form Administration group to assign global settings used throughout the FCWnx system You want to configure the global system preferences before you begin loading your database by creating records and assigning permissions Setting tab Use this tab to set the general system settings Figure 2 Setting tab Preference Table 13 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Archive Database Select an option to schedule archiving history Archiving creates a copy of the latest history transactions leaving your history database empty The default value for this option is Monthly If you select Daily The archive is appended every day beginning at 11 59 58 P M Weekly The archive is appended every week on the day that you select beginning at 11 59 58 P M You must select a day of the week Any
167. a preset location Video Console can be accessed in the following ways e From the FCWnx Application Group Panel under Monitors amp Controls Video Console e From the main toolbar by clicking the Video Console icon e Ifan alarm is generated with associated video the Video Console icon displays in the Alarm Monitor and you can access Video Console by clicking on it Other capabilities include e Live video can be sent to multiple video consoles e Video Console can be automatically launched with live and recorded video when an alarm event occurs e Multiple video streams from multiple DVRs can be sent to the Video Console e Multiple camera views allow an operator to select two up four up nine up or sixteen up views e Recorded video is available to multiple Video Consoles e A single frame of recorded video can be viewed e Video can be searched by date and time play position or token e If the camera has PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom capabilities you can use the mouse to control the camera movement This feature is not available if another operator has control of the camera Video Console window The Video Console window consists of the following Figure 95 Video Console window video Console 1 MER iol x Fie view Window Help al al a mo am Y x 5 Custom View Facility View N 2 Ignore Facilities 210 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 124 Form fields
168. a tour is paused and later resumed before expiration of estimated completion time the remaining unused tour time is reflected in the Time to Complete column e Client Description This column displays the client that is hosting the selected tour A color indicator displays the current connection status of the client that is hosting the selected tour Green indicates online Red indicates offline Chapter 9 Monitor and control Table 193 Form fields continued Element Description Lower Windowpane e Tour Point This column displays a list of points associated with the selected Guard Tour e Point Status This column displays a hit or not hit real time status You do not have to refresh your window to see the current state of the tour points for the selected tour e Last Hit Time This column has an entry following a valid hit to this point Set tour to e Start Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to manually begin a Guard Tour The Tour State column indicates Tour Started e Stop Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to prematurely stop a tour in progress The Tour State column indicates Tour Not Started This button is not available if a tour is not in progress e Resume Verify that the appropriate tour is selected in the upper windowpane Click to resume a tour that was previously paused The Tour State column indicates
169. able point e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a point e A DI start point can exist in only one tour therefore any Dis previously assigned as Start Tour Point in any tour do not display in the list The DI point cannot be re used e All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region e Tour points can be readers or Dis that are not on a dial up controller 1 If a reader is selected as the start point Dis not assigned to a tour display in this list 2 DI points can only be assigned to one tour 3 Reader tour points can be assigned to any tour and any number of tours A reader as a tour point can be re used e The number of points assigned to a tour is limited to 64 e If any reader is assigned as a tour point at least one credential must be assigned to the tour e If all tour points are Dis you do not need to assign a credential to the tour Click OK to display the results in the Tour Points windowpane Move Up Select and click to move this Tour Point up the list This tour point order displays on the Manual Control form Guard Tour tab Chapter 8 Guard tours Table 169 Form fields continued Element Description Move Down Select and click to move this Tour Point down the list This tour point order displays on the Manual Control form Guard Tour tab Tour Credentials Displays a list of assigned tour credentials At least one credential must be assigned to a
170. able to pass back their credential to allow a friend to gain entry e Passive APB records the status but does not enforce the status The system knows where a person is but does not stop them from entering twice e Timed APB refers to a system where users are forgiven after a certain length of time configured in minutes After the configured time is expired the user status is set to neutral and the system allows them to re enter This eliminates the need for an OUT reader and prevents a credential holder from re entering for that time period e Global APB tracks the user throughout the entire FCWnx network and across all controllers No matter where a user is their APB status is recorded e Regional APB FCWnx Global configuration tracks the user within a Region The user is active in that Region only and inactive in all other Regions APB transactions using Valid No Passage as selected on the Reader form e Transactions are not tracked if the door is not opened 378 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description ACU controllers When designated as Entering Area or Exiting Area readers the system is able to record whether a user is inside or outside of an Area at any time by noting the last place a credential was presented Note If one Area is configured for APB ALL Areas must be configured for APB e The Area must be defined as an APB Area
171. additional filter for the report e User Fields This window lists all the user fields the user field value you want to use as a filter and whether the user field should print You can print the user field on the report by selecting the field Print selected user field or deselect this field so the user field does not print e Modify Value To change the value of a user field select the user field you want and enter a new value in this field e User fields printed on report If this field is enabled then the currently selected user field prints on the report e Clear All Set All Click Clear All so that none of the User Fields are set to print Click Set All to set all of the User Fields to print e Print selected user field Enable this field to set the selected User Field to print or disable this field so that the selected User Field does not print Credential history report form Use this tab to select additional specific criteria by which this report is generated e Controller Select the controller you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all controllers select lt ALL gt e Reader Select the reader you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all readers select lt ALL gt e Department Select the department you want to use to generate report information If you want to use all departments select lt ALL gt e Activity Select the credential activity you want to use to filter re
172. ader in the primary local group the reader follows the alarm state e If the DOs in the primary local group are set to O for the ON time that forces the DO to follow the state of the alarm or input Note Be aware that Invalid Credential alarms and Lost Credential alarms do not reset If you assign a DO Group to either of these alarms the alarm goes inactive or turns off when acknowledging or purging Chapter 4 161 Devices Figure 64 DO Groups tab e Description Facility y Alam SetInstuction Digtal Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Dutput Groups Primary Local Output Group i fore Assign DO Groups Reader DO Actions r Aurilary DO Actions Alarm Alarm hd y Reset Reset ld vv Table 88 Form fields Element Description The following features are applicable to only Micro controllers Output Groups This windowpane displays assigned digital output groups The digital output groups can be on a local or other controller Assign DO Groups Click to display a Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and assign alarm DO groups that you want associated with this alarm record Primary Local Out Group The first local output group in the list of assigned output groups automatically displays as the primary You can select another output group as primary from the output groups displayed in the windowpane If the selection is not on a loca
173. ail Contact your local network administrator to get the SMTP server name to be used E mail sent by FCWnx are sent through this SMTP Server If you receive an error message or have a problem with your configuration contact your local network administrator The Event Notifier form Alarms amp Events group allows you to e Assign those alarms and reset conditions that trigger an e mail message e Assign people who are to receive that e mail notification of the alarm reset condition e Format the style and content of the e mail message Table 42 Form fields Element Description Description Assign a unique title to this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button 73 74 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Alarm Selection tab The Alarm Selection tab allows you to assign alarms in this operator s facility that trigger an e mail message Figure 22 Alarm Selection tab e Description Po Facility v Alarm Selection Person Selection Message Format Assigned Alarms Transaction Type 7 Alarm IV Reset Table 43 Form fields Element Description Assigned Alarms This windowpane dis
174. ailable only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template Tabs on report forms General tab This tab displays on several Report forms but the options vary as noted Person Administration Device and Time and Attendance History reports This form sets the preferences of the report Report Title Enter a title for this report of up to 64 characters Report Type Select the type of report you want to run Chapter 10 331 Reports If this is a Person Report the following options are available Access Rights Data provides a description of the access this person has and if access is granted all times in all modes Credential Data provides the credential number PIN status issue and expiration dates for each credential the person has been assigned Location Data provides the address and telephone number for each person Standard Data provides the last name first name initials personnel description department employee number and extended unlock time This information is also provided on the other report types for person reports User Data provides up to 90 user fields on each person You can select which ones to include in the report If this is an Administration Report the following options are available Alarm Instruction provides a listing of alarm messages defined in the system Alarm Notifier provides a listing of e mail alarm notification information defined in the system Alarm Routing and Bumping provi
175. al on the time chart the details of the selected interval display in the Interval details Note ACU controllers support eight Time Schedule intervals Even if you save a Time Schedule record with more than eight intervals ONLY EIGHT intervals display on the Area tab of the Access Right form and the Area tab of the Area form New Click to create a new interval on the time chart You may have to adjust the times Delete Click this button to delete an interval from the time chart e Select an interval on the time chart and click Delete e Using the arrows beside the Interval field scroll to the appropriate interval number and click Delete e Select and enter an interval number by typing over the existing number in the Interval field and click Delete Interval Details The controls in this section are not needed in most circumstances Use details to verify that your selections match the calendar display Start time Displays the time on which the selected time interval begins Stop time Displays the time on which the time interval ends Mode day Displays the mode or day on which the interval schedule occurs How to M oe Da NS Review the guidelines in Table 39 and complete this tab similar to the following steps Enter the description Time Schedule 8 5 in the Description edit box Create 5 intervals Monday Friday from 8 00am 08 00 to 5 00pm 17 00 Create 1 interval for Mode 7 from 8 00am 08
176. al transaction occurrence in the controller Activity Type Displays the type of activity that occurred along with a graphic e Valid Person was granted access e Invalid Person was not granted access Examples Person was not given access to the reader the credential is suspended the reader was inactive the reader was offline or the door was unlocked e User defined custom This credential is mapped to a Suspended on the Custom Credential Status form and credential status does not grant access The user defined custom credential status displays in the Activity Type column as assigned on the Credential form Example 1 On the Custom Credential Status form a status of Pregnancy leave is created and assigned a Status of Suspended 2 Jane Doe goes on leave and her credential is assigned a Status of Pregnancy leave as selected from the Credential form Status drop down list 3 While on leave Jane swipes her badge ot a valid reader Access is denied 4 The Activity Monitor Activity Type column displays a message of Pregnancy leave Table 172 Form fields continued Chapter 9 Monitor and control Element Description e Lost Credential status is lost e Unknown Credential is not in this application database APB in Invalid Current credential APB current status of IN and attempted to gain access to an APB IN reader APB Out Invalid Current credential APB current status of OUT and attempted to
177. alidates the user login ID and password against the specified Active Directory and not the FCWnx database This authentication overrides any password preferences entered through FCWnx Browse Click to display a list of Active Directory Domain Controller Servers Select the Domain Controller Server computer that authenticates the FCWnx operator and controls the users passwords and the FCWnx system to which you are assigning this operator The selected Server computer authenticates this operator name and password The selected Server name now displays in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 36 and complete this tab 2 Enter the Login ID associated with this operator record 3 Enter the name of the operator 4 Select a permission from the drop down list associated with this operator 5 Select a language from the drop down list associated with this operator 6 Using the guidelines in Table 36 complete the Facility Commander Wnx Password Authentication grouping or remove the selection and complete the Active Directory Password Authentication Click Save before you exit this tab Multiple language support Note Some items you should note about national language support English is the default language and is always installed The Windows operating system should be installed for the specific language chosen for this application For example 1f running this application in Spanish Windows Spanish should be i
178. and has a whole new look Features are enabled on the application forms according to the controller hardware and system that you purchased and licensed 381 382 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description Simple File Sharing Simple File Sharing is a feature in Windows XP that removes file sharing security options available in other versions of Windows This setting must be disabled for FCWnx to operate successfully between Servers and clients Once the user sets the permission the user and clients have access to shared files and the ability to assign passwords to shares To disable folder shares 1 Double click My Computer on the Windows XP Desktop 2 From the Tools menu select Folder Options to open a Folder Options window 3 Click the View tab and locate the Use Simple File Sharing Recommended checkbox in the list of Advanced Settings 4 To disable Simple File Sharing ensure this checkbox is not checked Click inside the checkbox to disable the option The Simple File Sharing checkbox should be at or near the bottom of the Advanced Settings list 5 Click OK to close the Folder Options window The settings for Simple File Sharing are now updated no computer reboot is required Note 1 Enabling Simple File Sharing prevents the ability to assign user level passwords to shares When Simple File Sharing is enabled on a computer remote users are not prom
179. ant and drag to the Configuration column To delete select a module from the Configuration column right click and select Delete Click Save If there is any required information missing a window displays listing those items that are incorrect or missing Don t forget to save the record again once you fix those items When the controller record is created the records for the associated readers alarms alarm groups digital outputs and digital output groups are also created with default data based on the modules you added on the Controller Configuration tab Use the Controller Monitor form to set the controller online Creating dial up controller records Set up your modem s through the Server or client computer operating system Refer to the documentation 1 2 you received with your modem Select the Administration group then select Preference Select the Communication Settings tab and enable the modem s that are used for controllers You need to stop the Server computer and then restart it 10 11 12 Chapter 4 91 Devices Once you restart this application and log in select the Device menu then Controller When you click Add to add a controller record on the Controller Definition tab default values are filled in for the following fields Head of line and Credential Loading e Enter the address of the controller e Enter the type of controller e If this controller is the first controller on a st
180. any problems with your system you can always restore your backup Note Enterprise Edition Systems use SQL Server utilities to back up the database History and Archive Professional Edition Systems use the FCWnx Maintenance Utility to back up the Database History and Archive information tables and queries Archiving An archive is a history of transactions The archive is created automatically by this application based on the time interval that you selected on the Preference form Daily Weekly or Monthly When you select Weekly you must also select a day of the week Chapter 2 35 System preferences If you select e Daily The archive is appended every day beginning at 11 59 58 P M e Weekly The archive is appended every week on the day that you select beginning at 11 59 58 P M You must select a day of the week Any change in the scheduling occurs immediately For example if archiving is taking place on Tuesdays and the schedule is revised to archive on Wednesday the archiving occurs one day later on Wednesday e Monthly The archive is appended on the last day of the month beginning at 11 59 58 P M The services for this application do NOT have to be running Archiving occurs as long as SQL Server Agent services are running The archiving process takes place independently of this application As long as the SQL Server Agent services are running the archive process occurs Determine the status of the SQL Server Agent
181. ar driver For example everything for a GE video recorder works well but there is no video for a camera on a Pelco recorder VMC Drivers Server If there is a problem on the Server that seems to be related to a particular driver For example everything for a GE video recorder works well but there is no video for a camera on a Pelco recorder Appendix A 351 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Diagnostic Viewer program When you select Diagnostic Viewer in the Diagnostics group the Diagnostic Viewer program opens The activities of your selected component are displayed Those items with the COM and Line as part of the component name have the highest effect on system performance and hard drive usage The Diagnostic Viewer application is a diagnostic tool used in conjunction with this application Diagnostic Viewer allows you to view the contents of the application diagnostic log files apply filters to limit the information displayed and search for a specific log entry Each day this application writes messages to a diagnostic log file There is a default log file created for each day of the week such as FCWnxEEFriday sp1 This file is overwritten each week thus creating a new log for that day During normal operation informational as well as debug messages are written to the daily log file Under abnormal conditions the log file may also contain warning and or fatal messages indicating failure conditions Diagnostic Vie
182. are read only electronic versions of printed documents The documents are in PDF format and included on a separate document CD Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to view these documents It is also included on the CD If you do not already have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed follow the steps below 1 Copy the Acrobat executable file from CD ROM onto your hard drive 2 Navigate to Windows Explorer and double click the file 3 Follow the on screen installation instructions To view the PDF file double click the file name or start Adobe Acrobat Reader and open the document you want to view For additional information refer to Adobe Acrobat Reader online Help Save Position To save the position of any main application or external application window right click to display a shortcut menu Select Save Position Close the window When re opened the window displays in the saved position Secure Perfect Secure Perfect is a multi edition software offering of Integrated Secure Management Software designed on Microsoft Windows technology Secure Perfect Editions provide full security management functions including access control intrusion zone control alarm monitoring reporting photo ID badging and CCTV interfaces as standard features Secure Perfect Editions also offer integrated system options that include digital video surveillance and Web based reporting FCWnx combines the features of Secure Perfect and Diamond II software
183. assage is NOT enabled and the door is opened Valid is displayed on the Activity monitor The user is recorded as IN the Area e If Valid No Passage is NOT enabled and the door is NOT opened Valid is displayed on the Activity Monitor The user is recorded as IN the Area Note By default all readers are created with a door contact DI defined archive An archive is a history of transactions The archive is created automatically by this application based on the time interval that you selected on the Preference form Daily Weekly or Monthly Refer to Archiving on page 34 Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description arm disarm an area This application supports global spans multiple ACU controllers and local one ACU controller arming and disarming of an Area using the reader keypad or manual control Global operation requires host to controllers communication Local operation allows arming disarming without host communication How arming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator to enter a PIN 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 10 for example 1234 10 1244 the operator enters 1244 4 A message displays the state of the Area arming as successful How disarming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator
184. at s next Proceed to Chapter 3 Schedules on page 67 Chapter 3 Schedules This chapter provides an overview of Facility Commander Wnx Edition time event and mode schedule configuration In this chapter A crs Stein deed recanted He gL ed aed heb Ged bebe 68 PCE tme SOM OA LEG os shiv Base de a ence dg a eke eee a eee tesa lace 68 Dejme event SCHECHES copo iad bio Dhow AAW HG Lhe Hw De 71 CONN RUIS EVERT ROS obi eho ehh ee a 73 Define mode schedules ore an Roce a cereri erra dere TI WES enean ie d EAE add 81 68 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview This chapter provides an overview of Facility Commander Wnx Edition schedule configurations The maximum number of combined schedules time event and mode for any one Micro controller is 1 023 The maximum number of combined schedules time event and mode for any one ACU controller is 253 Define time schedules The Time Schedule form Schedules group is used to create time schedules Note Note Time schedules define the dayls of the week and time s an action starts AND ends A time schedule determines when an action occurs such as turning on alarm monitoring Time schedules are comprised of one or more time intervals start and stop times on one or more days of the week and modes Time schedules differ from events in that time schedules define an interval of time over which an action occurs while events schedule when an action occu
185. at you are adding the controller directly upstream towards the host from it needs to be reset in order for it to recognize the controller you are adding Example If your line of controllers looks like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 And you want to add Controller 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Then you would need to reset Controller 2 in order for Controller 3 to be recognized e For connection type select Direct e Set Host keep alive time interval e Enter the PC name of the host computer or navigate and select e Select a method On the Password tab if you do not enter passwords the default passwords one 1 two 2 three 3 and four 4 are used If you want to change the passwords you can do so at any time On the Time Zone tab a default time zone is filled in Verify and adjust time zone settings as necessary On the Comments tab enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field On the Events tab you may want to schedule when APB and T amp A are reset Select the Status tab to view information about the controller such as the firmware version You can request the latest information by clicking Refresh On the Controller Configuration tab select the modules that are in the controller you are setting up Click the module you w
186. atal option is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled these messages are displayed This option is also found on the Diagnostic Viewer toolbar This application writes four types of log messages INFORMATIONAL DEBUG WARNING AND FATAL Table 203 Help menu Help Topics Select to display online Help topics About Diagnostic Viewer Select to display a dialog box describing version information Preferences Use this form accessed on the File drop down menu of the Diagnostic Viewer application toolbar to set options for the Diagnostic Viewer program Figure 143 Diagnostic Viewer Preferences preferences x Cancel Dd T Open today s log file when program starts IV Prompt before deleting contents JV Use small toolbar Max entry limit f 000 Read from beginning of file Read from end of file Table 204 Form fields Element Description Open today s log file when program starts Enable this option if you would like the current day s log file to automatically load when the Diagnostic Viewer program is started Prompt before deleting contents Enable this option if you would like a prompt to appear before deleting the contents of the current log file Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting Table 204 Form fields continued Element Description Use small toolbar Enable this option to decrease the size of the toolbar Max entry limit Enter the number of en
187. ate until changed manually or by another event schedule Event Details The controls in this section are not needed in most circumstances Use details to verify that your selections match the calendar display e Event time Displays the time at which the event occurs e Mode day Displays the mode or day on which the event occurs Chapter 3 Schedules How to 1 Review Table 41 and create an event using the guidelines listed 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Note You need to assign this event schedule to a device such as a controller see Controller form Events tab or a reader see the Reader form Reader Type Events tab Example BocaHQ Weekend Begins indicates a facility specific event schedule where BocaHgQ refers to a geographic location For example you could create an event beginning each Friday at 6 00 P M that resets the APB status and the T amp A status and sets a reader to Credential and Keypad Employees coming into the building after 6 P M on Friday are required to present their credential and then key in a PIN number to enter the building Remember that an event stays in effect until another event occurs to change it Therefore in our example a second event needs to be scheduled to change that reader back to Normal on Monday morning Configure event notifier Note Keep in mind that you can use an SMTP Server such as Lotus Notes or SendMail or even online mail services such as Yahoo to send e m
188. ation Group pane continued Element Description Personnel Click to display items in the Personnel group The following selections display in the Personnel group pane e Person e Personnel Type e Department Credentials Click to display items in the Credentials group The following selections display in the Credentials group pane e Credential e Credential Designer e Credential Alias e Credential Format e Custom Credential Status Places Policies Click to display items in the Places amp Policies group The following selections display in the Places Policies group pane e Facility e Area If your system is licensed for ACU controllers this item displays e Intrusion Zone If your system is licensed for Micro controllers this item displays e Access Right Monitors amp Controls Click to display items in the Monitors amp Controls group The following items display in the Monitors amp Controls group pane e Activity Monitor e Alarm Monitor e Client Monitor e Controller Monitor e Graphics Console e Video Console e Manual Control e Digital Input Status e Digital Output Status Alarms amp Events Click to display items in the Alarms amp Events group The following items display in the Alarms amp Events group pane e Alarm e Alarm Group e Alarm Priority e Routing amp Bumping e Response e Instruction e Event Notifier e Video Event Trigger Chapte
189. ations Refer to Client monitoring on page 300 Verify client configurations Refer to Identify and configure clients on page 46 After creating schedules return to the applicable device records and assign schedules If your system is using ACU controllers you must assign devices to an Area Refer to Define areas on page 220 In case of a default host computer that has failed devices that have been added to the default host computer during the failover cannot come on line until the default host has recovered and a system recovery notification is received Controllers overview Note Controller records can be created within FCWnx without having the controllers attached and configured Additional device records can be configured after creating controller records Controllers manage access through the use of devices such as credential readers alarm points and output points physically wired to the controller which is then connected to the host by one of the following methods 1 2 3 Directly Using RS 232 cabling through a modem Through a network Chapter 4 85 Devices FCWnx provides a controller auto configuration feature allowing you to set up the database with the exact module configuration that you selected during the controller configuration process When you create a controller record only those records for the associated devices readers alarms alarm groups and digital outputs supported by the controller s configurat
190. available Wiegand credential formats from which to choose and assign to this controller e Clear formats in controller Click to clear all custom credential formats from the controller Credentials associated with those formats no longer work If you change the credential format any format that existed in the controller previously is replaced Chapter 4 Devices 2 Start flashing controller s This option starts flashing the selected controller s with the latest firmware A dialog box displays asking you to verify your request The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes it varies with amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller 3 View edit flash files Use this option ONLY when it is necessary to selectively flash an older version of firmware on a controller This application automatically selects the latest version by default The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes it varies with amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller Click OK to begin the flash When flashing is complete the controller resets and requests a database e Micro 5 PX and Micro PX 2000 The form opens with the latest e 1 firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older firmware file e Micro 5 PXN and Micro PXN 2000 The form opens with the latest e 1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older networ
191. ay a list of only Dial Up and Network Dial Up controllers for the client record displayed e When you select a controller from the drop down list the Phone numbers to reach backup client xxxxxx fields become available for entry where xxxxxx name of selected client in the Backup Clients list box e When you enter a number in the first field the Save button becomes available e All Number fields must contain a telephone number of up to 20 digits If there is only one telephone number for this controller to reach the backup client repeat this number in all four fields If you click Save after completing the first Number field the system automatically completes all Number fields with a duplicate number e Click Save to save the list of telephone numbers The controller dials the number in Number 1 and then tries the others in numerical order until connection it made e Click Close to exit the dialog box e Repeat the process for each controller in the Dial up Controller drop down list e Click Save to save this client record Table 29 Form fields continuea Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Redundancy Display Redundancy Notification By default this check box is checked If licensed for Client Redundancy this check box must be selected to generate a notification message that displays at all clients based on facilities available to the current operator when e Aclient failure occurs e
192. ay take a moment to complete Displays the mode of the controller Chapter 4 Devices Firmware Version Displays the version number Firmware Patch Level Displays the patch level number Firmware Revision Date Displays the date of the last firmware revision Boot Version Displays the number of the boot version Memory Size meg Displays the amount of memory in megabytes Encryption Indicates if encryption is in use on this controller Note Encryption status for a head of line network direct controller If the controller loses network connection and fails over to a direct connect a configured Encryption status changes to None since Encryption is available for network controllers only These items apply to ACU controllers ONLY e Supports 16 Readers Indicates Yes or No whether this controller supports 16 readers Number of Cards in Database Displays the number of credentials in the controller database e Supports 8K Areas Indicates Yes or No whether this controller supports 8K Areas e Device Type Displays the device type e Preference Updates Allowable Indicates Yes or No whether this controller allows preference updates e Battery Backup Memory Indicates Yes or No whether this controller has backup memory 103 104 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 53 Form fields Element Description Last status dat
193. b of the Preference form Purpose This field accepts 255 characters Enter the reason for this change of mode This comment is written to the operator history file and displays on the Operator History Report How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 192 and complete the selections on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 321 322 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Guard tour tab Note This tab dis plays if you are licensed for Guard Tour The purpose of using this form is to manually start pause resume or stop a Guard Tour that is currently in progress The upper windowpane displays all Guard Tours configured in your system to which this operator has access Figure 137 Guard tour tab 10 x e Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas and Zones Mode Guard Tour Table 193 Form fields Tour Poit Point Status Last Hit Time Set tour to Purpose Start Stop Resume Pause Es Element Description Upper windowpane Guard Tour A list of configured tours descriptions in this application e Tour State This column displays the current state of all Guard Tours in your system Typical states are 1 Tour Started 2 Tour Not Started 3 Tour Paused e Time to Complete This column displays the estimated time assigned for completion of a tour based on the clock time that this tour started and maximum tour time allowed If
194. ber of those entries displayed Preferences Refer to Preferences on page 354 Exit Select to close the Diagnostic Viewer application Table 200 Edit menu Copy Select this option to copy the contents of the selected rows into the Windows Clipboard Table 201 View menu Toolbar Select to display the toolbar menu This is a toggle selection Status Bar Select to display the status bar This is a toggle selection Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting Table 201 View menu Auto Scroll Select this option to automatically scroll to the last of the incoming messages at the bottom of the viewer As new messages come in while you have Diagnostic Viewer open the viewer scrolls so that the most recent message always displays in the viewer If the scroll option is disabled new entries do not scroll the currently displayed entries off the screen Pause Select this option to stop the scrolling of incoming messages in the viewer When paused select this option again to resume scrolling Find Select this option to search for specific text in the log file Table 202 Filter menu Info Select this option to enable disable the display of INFORMATIONAL messages Informational messages indicate normal system operation They are always written to the log On the main Filter drop down menu this item is preceded with an icon and if it has been enabled the messages are displayed
195. ble Monitor in the Settings section In addition all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 You can change the Alarm Group on the Alarm Group form Reader module record generation The reader modules listed in the Modules column on the Controller Configuration tab depend on the Controller Type you selected on the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form When you add a reader module certain records are automatically created For systems with Micro controllers e Reader records If adding a 2RP or 2SRP module two reader records are generated By default these readers are active and able to accept credential transactions Readers marked as Active count against your reader limit e Alarm records e An alarm record is generated for each reader record If you selected Supervised when you added the module an additional alarm record is generated for each reader called Supervised Reader If you are adding a 2SRP module you receive an additional alarm record for each reader called Supervised Exit 88 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual e None of these alarms are monitored If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is triggered you need to go to the Alarm form Alarm Tab and enable Monitor in the Settings section e In addition all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 To change this go to the Alarm Group form Digital input records A digital input record is generated for
196. can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop Select this option to save the position If you close the window and reopen the window opens at the saved position This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations Always On Top Selection of this option keeps the window in the forefront of all windows displaying on your workstation for this application Chapter 5 197 Video Define camera presets This form in the Security Devices group allows you to edit or enter a description and number for a camera preset After setup and programming of your DVR devices to meet your monitoring requirements you need to parallel the settings and positions in the configurations in this application Presets must be defined before you can assign them to a camera on the Presets tab of the Camera form Note This option is available for PTZ cameras only Table 113 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters In this field enter or edit the description for the selected preset This should be a unique name describing or numbering a preset camera position Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Definition tab Use this tab to assign a number to this camera preset Figu
197. cense Info This list informs the operator of the current licensing capabilities of the selected Region Example This information is helpful to an operator when attempting to add an additional feature to a Region A message may display informing the operator that addition of the feature is in excess of the license limit for that Region The operator consults this form to review the license capabilities If limits for that feature have been reached additional devices cannot be added at this time How to 1 Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait between database synchronization Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait between history database synchronization 2 3 Verify the license information 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Backup Regions tab Global systems can be configured for database redundancy at the Regional level A Regional Database Server can assign another for backup in the event of a failure at the default Regional Database Server Regional database redundancy and fileserver redundancy operate independently One or the other or both can fail at the same time whether they reside on the same server computer or are configured to reside on separate computers FCWnx initiates three tries to fail over to another fileserver This process is taking place in the 41 42 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual background After three tries with no success an F
198. cess refreshing the data Advanced tab These options are selectable for ACU controllers Use this tab to configure options for readers associated with ACU controllers These fields are not enabled or selectable if there are no readers associated with this controller 130 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 46 Advanced tab Table 65 Form fields Element Description Blink LED for Secure Status Select from a drop down list of available reader LED characteristics The behavior indicates whether an Area is armed or disarmed Always On This is the default setting The red LED on the reader is constantly on Blink On Secure This setting causes the LED to blink when the secure Area about to be entered is armed Blink On Unsecured This setting causes the LED to blink when the secure Area being entered is disarmed Reader Trace Instruction Message Select from a drop down list of available instructions in the system for this application that is an appropriate response to be associated with a trace on this reader If you need to create a new and appropriate instruction refer to the Alarms amp Events group Instruction form Table 65 Form fields continuea Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Access Mode Host Online Select a validation option available at this reader when the associated host is online with the controller e Normal Access is granted when a
199. cility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 167 Form fields continued Element Description Parity layout 2 E O Indicates the second parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even E or Odd 0 parity bit Parity layout 3 E O Indicates the third parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even E or Odd O parity bit Parity layout 4 E O Indicates the fourth parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even E or Odd 0 parity bit Number of facility characters The number of facility code bits in the data mask Numbers of credential characters The number of credential number BID bits in the data mask The following applies to all formats Import format from file This selection is enabled when you click New to add a new record Click to navigate to a network drive CD diskette or a local drive of your computer and import a Wiegand or magnetic stripe file Example Wiegand File Name wgd Export format to file Click to navigate to a network drive CD diskette or local drive of your computer and export a Wiegand or magnetic stripe file Comments Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 167 and complete the fields on this tab Also refer to e Cont
200. ck amp White Username fp Password Element Description Resolution From the drop down list select your video display resolution as Low 12K per image Medium 20K per image or High 28K per image Black and White Select if you choose to further reduce the size of images transmitted over the network for display purposes Video displays in black and white however the video remains locally stored on the DVR in its original recorded resolution and color settings Max Search Time for Recorded Events secs Select or enter the number of seconds This selection is the length of time a search request for recorded video waits before timing out Search times may vary depending on network traffic DVR processing load and number of recorded events Video Standard Select PAL or NTSC e PAL Phase Alternating Line is a European TV standard NTSC National TV Standards committee is the U S TV standard administered by the FCC Note If your DVR is a GE Kalatel brand this standard is auto detected How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 111 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Perform a search select a DVR from the right list box of this form window and click Status Chapter 5 195 Video Note The DVR must be online in order to display a Status pane Figure 86 Status tab Digital Yideo Recorder e Description test Facility ignor
201. con is available LA View Video Console on page qs 25 If your system is licensed for this feature the following icon is available D Manually Control Dis DOs Areas Intrusion Zones on page qs 26 89 Access Online Help How to accomplish administrator tasks on page qs 21 How to accomplish operator tasks on page qs 25 Configure Devices on page qs 21 Arm Disarm on page qs 25 areas and intrusion zones Configure Guard Tours on page qs 21 View Video Console on page qs 25 Configure Monitor Redundancy on page qs 21 Manually Control Dis DOs Areas Intrusion Zones on page qs 26 Create Controller Records on page qs 21 Monitor Activities on page qs 26 Create Credential Designs on page qs 22 View Graphics Console on page qs 27 Create Access Rights on page qs 22 View Remove Alarms from the Alarm Monitor Form on page qs 27 Create Person Records on page qs 22 Create Reports on page qs 27 Mass Updates on page qs 23 Alarm Routing and Bumping on page qs 23 Set Automatic Logoff Time on page qs 23 Diagnostics on page qs 24 Contact Customer Support on page qs 24 qs 1 qs 2 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to configure a system in recommended sequential order Table 1 Quick setup sequence Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence 1 Define preferences 2 Define facilities 3 Define clients EY o Ee Administration Prefere
202. configure elevator records Here you select Method of elevator control Readers You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available Floors to Area association Note Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller qs 11 qs 12 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence e DVRs e Cameras Security Devices Digital Video Recorder DVR Refer to Define digital video recorders on page qs 188 The following order is recommended for configuration of a DVR system for this application 1 Setup operators and permissions 2 Configure the DVR Refer to the manuals received with your DVR for hardware setup and installation specifics 3 Configure DVR devices DVR devices can be hosted on the Server computer for this application and or client workstations The actual number of DVR devices hosted on each Server computer may vary Distributing DVR hosting across multiple computers may be required for optimizing system performance in your specific application Note When you change a facility designation it changes the faci
203. contains The alarms for digital inputs are not created automatically when you set up a controller Set the Type field to Alarm and then save the record The associated alarm record is created Refer to your Controller Installation Guide for information on how to connect a digital input device to the controller NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 66 Form fields Element Description Description When the records are created the default description is in the format mmmm b pp where mmmm represents the controller number to which this digital input is associated b represents the module number and pp represents the point or device number Example 0001 1 01 DI This digital input is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change or add to this description enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each digital input displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Facility A facility can be assigned for the new Digital Input record from the Facility drop down list Note The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the controller when a controller is created Be very careful when assign
204. control by using a credential and keypad reader or manual control The Area form provides the ability to define Areas for each controller that consists of the following e Keypad Disarm and arm e Time Schedules e SCIF Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facility Workstations e Readers e Alarms e APB e Digital outputs Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form When an Area record is updated and saved all controllers are notified of the new configuration Quick Setup guide qs 15 Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence e Intrusion zones Application Group Menu Application Form Before you can delete an Area record 1 Access rights must be removed 2 Devices associated with this Area must be removed This Area must be removed from the Advanced tab of the Person form as assigned for Arm Disarm Places amp Policies Intrusion Zone Refer to Overview intrusion zones on page qs W 229 The Intrusion Zone form is required for creating a relation between readers alarm inputs the Arm Disarm Intrusion point and the arm disarm DO Perform the following 1 Define an Intrusion Zone with a description and facility assignment 2 Select a controller selection to establish the zone source and its intrusion points 3 Filtered on the operator s active facilities assign the following intrusion zone components arm disarm DO ar
205. cords is open Search The Search option conducts a search in the database for all records that match the search criteria data you enter in the form The records found by the search are displayed in the search results window Data can be in any number of fields in the form or any number of tables Only records that match all fields in which data is entered are displayed An asterisk can be entered in text boxes to indicate wildcard characters The Search option is available only when a form is open that contains records Examples e Enter S in an appropriate text box to display any records beginning with S e Asearch for credentialholders with the last name starting with Sm would yield such names as Smith and Smythers If no search data is entered all records display Any column displaying in the list box can be sorted by clicking on the column heading Table 9 View menu Element Description Status Bar Status Bar is a toggle option and determines whether or not you view the status bar at the bottom of your screen Clear the check box to hide the status bar from view The status bar displays the status of this application indicating the current operator communication port status number of clients connected number of alarms and number of background tasks Also see Taskbar on page 19 Note The numbers indicate the total status of all active facilities assigned to the current operator Chapter 1 In
206. corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the Power Communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the Power Communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules Configuring elevator control using an ACU controller 1 Create a Controller record and assign the Controller type as an Elevator Controller This controller cannot manage any thing else It can only manage elevators Create Floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators Create Area records on the Area form Assign readers to the Area See Area form Reader tab Note The Area must also be assigned to an access right for a person to gain access to that reader Now you can configure the elevator records You use the Elevator form to
207. ct the appropriate digital input 7 Enter the Event tag 8 Click Search The Results display with number of matches found start date and time end date and time and type 9 Double click an item in the Results to view the video in the Video Console How to search by video event When investigating alarm events investigators or other operators may need to retrieve previously recorded video clips Use the DVR Event Search tab to locate video clips stored on the DVR device To search for previously recorded video 1 2 From the Action menu select Search Video The Video Search window displays Select the DVR Event Search tab The search criteria includes recorder camera start and end dates and times and search type Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips Use the Recorder drop down list to select the appropriate DVR Use the Cameras drop down list to select the appropriate camera Use the Start Date and End Date fields to enter the dates to search The current date is the default setting To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to select the day Click OK Use the Start Time and End Time fields to narrow the search To change the start and end times enter the hour and minutes in the field Use the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm Select the search type The opt
208. d you must select a starting and ending date e Starting date Click the start date you want for the starting range of credential return dates Ending date Click the ending date you want for the ending range of credential return dates Guard tour tab Guard Tour History report Click Edit to display the Guard Tour Assignment Dialog Box enabling you to assign Guard Tours for which this report generates The assigned Guard Tours display in the open window pane of this tab Reader tab Roll Call report Use this tab to select specific readers that form the basis of information for this report This windowpane displays the list of readers that currently apply to this report If there are no readers listed click Edit to display a Reader Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and add readers Areas tab Access report Use this tab to select specific Areas that form the basis of information for this report This windowpane displays the list of Areas that currently apply to this report If there are no Areas listed click Edit to display an Area Assignment dialog box allowing you to select and add Areas 340 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting This appendix provides information for troubleshooting your system and contacting Customer Support In this appendix OEP ooh is di id a dee pk L amp E SG a 342 PONIA A AE elie da A ne des iS 342 Check JOP o AA hho baa ew bbe Gae
209. d a represents port address and pp represents the reader number Example Micro record 0001 1 01 Reader This reader is on controller 1 module 1 reader 1 To change or add to this description select and enter text over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each reader displayed to aid in locating the reader points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Chapter 4 113 Devices Reader tab This tab contains the basic information about the reader Figure 39 Reader tab El Reader e Description Facility X D Reader Type Schedules Status Advanced Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Routing Schedule Contoler ESS Module Number Model y Credential Format v gt Status l Physical type IZ Online Normal Credential Only VV Active Credential and PIN Required Credential or Keypad Entry r Logical type Normal C TeAln Elevator APB In C TRA Out C TRA In Out C APB Out C Inrequired APB and TA Options IV Passive APB and T amp A Timed APB min Multiple Exiting Areas Assign m Keypad Options 7 Max Invalid PIN Cou
210. de is day of the week dependent and it is the default mode for the FCWnx system The remaining modes are not day of the week dependent Both schedules and events can be defined in terms of modes Sunday through Saturday configurations are only in effect in Normal mode Next you could define other modes such as Mode 1 as Half Day Holiday Mode 2 as Full Day Holiday Mode 3 might be Return to Normal since modes do not end another mode takes the active mode to another mode For systems using ACU controllers these additional Modes display Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Note Mode schedules created on the Mode Schedule form display as schedule options on the Event Schedule form and Time Schedule form You can change the label of your modes on the Preference form Mode Labels tab You must restart the FCWnx program for any changes to the Preference form to take effect Quick Setup guide qs 7 Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence 7 Configure devices e Controller e Reader Application Group Menu Application Form Security Devices Controller Refer to Define controllers on page qs 86 B 1 Controller records can be created within FCWnx without having the controllers attached and configured Additional device records can be configured after creating controller records Click the add icon to begin a new record The description of the controller should be unique
211. definition A Valid only status does not allow the door to open Suspended Select to assign a suspended status to this credential This credential does not grant access The Activity Monitor displays the user defined custom credential format in the Activity Type column Example 1 On the Custom Credential Status form a status of Pregnancy leave is created and assigned a Status of Suspended 2 Jane Doe goes on leave and her credential is assigned a Status of Pregnancy leave as selected from the Credential form Status drop down list 3 While on leave Jane swipes her badge at a valid reader Access is denied 4 The Activity Monitor Activity Type column displays a message of Pregnancy leave Add Click to add to the list box following creation of a new definition Update Click to update a definition Delete Click to delete a selected credential status definition from the list You are not able to delete a credential status that is currently assigned to a credential Help Click to access the online Help system Cancel Click to close this form without making any changes How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 165 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Create credential formats Note If you experience difficulty with this form contact GE Customer Support for assistance The Credential Format form Credentials group allows an operator to do the following e
212. dentifies the specific ports that are opened Additionally your firewall application identifies which ports are on or off Note If you change any setting you are opening firewall ports and changing how video communicates It is recommended that each computer in your FCWnx system be changed to the identical setting Then restart services Click Finish to save and close this application The settings are automatically saved to your computer Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Navigation Typical Microsoft Windows navigation is used in this application Selecting menu bar drop down menu workspace items and task bar options are typical Microsoft navigational procedures Color or format in text or changes in the cursor identify hotspot links to related topics 1 To make the navigation or topic panes larger e Point to the divider between panes When the pointer displays hold down the left mouse and drag the divider left or right e Point to any corner of the windowpane When the pointer changes to a double sided arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the corner 2 Move up or down the topic window by clicking the scroll bar on the right side of the topic pane 3 To save the position of any main application or external application window right click to display a shortcut menu Select Save Position Close the window When re opened the window displays in the saved position Log on log off Enter your logon lo
213. deo Window Auto Pop up on the Event Trigger form ifthe operator has been assigned permission for Digital Video Viewer If operator permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available this option does not activate even though selected here Once selected the operator login retains this feature until disabled no matter which computer in the system was used for logging in Table 10 Reports menu Element Description Person The Person option displays the Person Report form that allows you to create a report on the people in the database Credential The Credential option opens the Credential Report form that allows you to create a report on the credentials in your system Administration The Administration option opens the Administration Report form that allows you to create a report on the administrative aspects of your system such as alarm instructions events host preferences operators permissions responses schedules archives clients and floors Device Configuration The Device option opens the Device Report form that allows you to create a report on devices such as controllers readers alarms alarm groups digital outputs digital output groups digital inputs DVRs cameras and elevators 18 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 10 Reports menu continued Element Description Schedule The Schedules Events option opens the Schedule Report form that allows you
214. der records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmm b pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmm or mmmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number and a represents port address and pp represents the reader number It is recommended that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix in each reader displayed to aid in locating the reader points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters 3 The reader is automatically enabled as Online and Active and configured to accept credential transactions when a reader record is created A facility option can be designated 5 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the reader type that you are configuring qs 8 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence e Digital Input e Digital Output e Digital Output Group uo w Security Devices Digital Input Refer to Define digital inputs on page qs 133 1 When the records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmm b pp ACU controller mmmmm bb pp where mmmm or mmmmm represents the controller number to which this digital input is associated b represents the module number and pp represents the
215. des a listing of schedule descriptions routing clients time to bump bumping clients routing clients assigned alarms and comments Archive provides a listing of all the archive files currently in the Database directory Credential Format UBF provides a listing of custom credential format types data and parity layouts number of facility and credential characters and comments Client provides a listing of the clients defined on the system their Region auto shutdown selection and whether they have an Imaging license Event Trigger provides a listing of defined event triggers defined in the system including Intrusion Zone events Events provides a listing of events defined on the system Facility provides a listing of all facilities defined on the system Floor provides a listing of floor descriptions and their associated floor selection numbers Guard Tour provides information associated with each Guard Tour configured in the FCWnx system including Groups Tour Points and credentials assigned Host Preference provides a listing of information from the Preference form including database connection timeout database retry count e mail addresses e mails sent and duress Intrusion Zone provides a list of intrusion zones and the controllers that own them Operators provides a listing of operators and their permissions defined on the system Permission provides a listing of permissions defined on the system Response provides a l
216. e For systems using ACU controllers these additional Modes display Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Note e Mode schedules created on the Mode Schedule form display as schedule options on the Event Schedule form and Time Schedule form e You can change the label of your modes on the Preference form Mode Labels tab You must restart the FCWnx program for any changes to the Preference form to take effect What s next Proceed to Devices on page 83 82 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 4 Devices This chapter provides an overview when defining configuring and assigning devices In this chapter A OW oers a sectscas etri eh he as LS Ate eG nds Ged edd 84 a 6 bode 6c Wave Blea E Gane a lednsd ae nsai le eae ues 84 Controllers OVERVIEW sco a ai HAG Lae RR dae 84 DCRR CONTONE TE eer A la 86 Controller flash and controller preference configuration 110 DIET FGI E ioc get eons ey on we Wad os PMs E Cr ebawards 112 Define digital inputs s hw da sea a bbe adie es 133 TIENE ESO A aE As Da 143 Define digital Ouiput BrOUDS 0 6 kk nee ds 149 DEJE TASIHICH ORS oe on ia ta Ree had Ni ee Sh dd 151 Hame atari A hw aca alas Acne aed leeds wea as 152 POG darty doe a etek he a i eh SB ee De 153 Adding sound to an alal aos we nie eet cence nea e aiekin Dea Rena 167 Deine alarm GTOUDS occie iiy ced be ead bee eae ia dde 167 Dime alarm priory oie keh does oo ow baa ered data wie teas 170 Con
217. e ACU controllers support multiple combinations of port addresses for readers inputs and output modules Refer to your ACU hardware manual for setting combinations ACU2x surface mounted ACU2XL 16 built in LAN connection ACU2XL 8 built in LAN connection e ACURS2 built in LAN connection e ACURS4 built in LAN connection e ACUVision built in LAN connection When you make a selection the appropriate fields become available for the selected controller type Hardware Address Micro Controller Enter a number from 1 to 9999 maximum ACU Controller This number is the five digit serial number printed on the ACU panel Enter a number from 1 to 61439 maximum Description Address The field is available for ACU controllers only This field contributes the controller number portion of device descriptions If you replace a controller board be sure to enter the new hardware address serial number here if you want the hardware address portion of the device description to be accurate in the records of associated devices such as this reader description example 12345 1 01 Reader This reader is on controller 12345 module 1 reader 1 If the board is changed 12345 is no longer accurate 93 94 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 49 Form fields continued Element Description Elevator Controller The field is available for ACU controllers only ACU controller Select this check box if this cont
218. e User Manual of your DVR for specific installation configuration and operation instructions Digital Video Recorder form Use this form in the Security Devices group to configure DVRs NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Table 108 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique descriptive name for your DVR in the Description field Facility A facility option can be assigned for your new DVR from the Facility drop down list When you change a facility designation it changes the facility for the DVR only You receive a message displaying Do other devices change to the same facility as the digital video recorder Select Yes or No If you select Yes the alarm record and camera records change as well You need to verify the accuracy of the revised records Definition tab Use this tab to assign or edit a bus address type host computer or poll time Figure 83 Definition tab Table 109 Form fields Element Description DVR Address Digital Video Recorder Facility e Description test ignore Facilities y Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status DVR Type x DVR Address Bus Address m Host Computer Default Hostname Poll Time seconds Poll Interval fi 5 Timeout 5 E Chapter 5 Vid
219. e been given permission to update records The Add Record icon on the Record toolbar has the same features as the New Record menu option 4 Complete the form A detailed explanation of each field on the form can be found on the Form fields table for each form in this guide Not all fields may display on your form or they may display as read only and disabled When all required information is complete you are able to save the record 5 Click Save ed If you are unable to save or additional information is required a message displays informing you of the additional requirements in order to save this record Complete the additions or necessary changes and click Save again Editing records To edit a record 1 From the Application Group pane such as Personnel select a secondary item then click the appropriate tab For example Personnel Person Personnel tab When a form is opened the record list window is empty 2 From the tool bar click Search A record list window displays with all of the existing records or displays the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search 3 Select a record from the list e Click a single record in the record list to select that record for editing The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next The field values display in the various tabs of the form e More than one row can be selected in ord
220. e e Description work week Facility gnore Facilities Time Schedules 00 00 00 00 oo00 oeoo po epo oo RRR Monday i i E Momo 7 Tuesday i E E esescnaa Wednesday ii i 08 00 17 00 Thursday 3 13 0 oomo Friday i i ft Saturday i i He Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 L Made 5 Mode 6 Made7 Made8 Interval fi New Delete Interval details Start time os 00 Mode day Stop time fi 7 00 Thursday y al Element Description TimeChart In line with the appropriate day of the week left click the desired start time continue to hold the mouse button and drag the bar to the right until you reach the preferred stop time This creates a bar thot indicates one interval of time during this time schedule Continue to create intervals on the time chart for appropriate days of the week associated with this time schedule Note The time 00 00 is the same as 24 00 of the same day For example Saturday at 00 00 on the left side of the chart is the same as 00 00 on the right side of the chart 70 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 39 Form fields continued Element Description Intervals Each bar on the time chart indicates an interval of time The system assigns a number to each interval as it is created on the time chart This is the number displayed in the Interval field If you select an interv
221. e Device or badging failed The zones are not secure e The arm disarm device is not a part of the selected zones e The 10 second time period allowed for completion of the arm disarm process at keypad and reader has expired e The presented credential does not have access rights for transactions in the selected Intrusion Zones Tag Selection Select one of the options None No tag is sent for marking a recorded video or manipulating the record rate Tag only A tag is sent for marking recorded video at the camera s current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the camera s record rate to its event record rate settings Assigned Intrusion Zones This list box displays those Intrusion Zones that you have assigned to this Event Trigger Chapter 5 Video Table 122 Form fields continued Element Description Assign Intrusion Zone Click to display an Intrusion Zone Assignment dialog box listing available Intrusion Zones in your system Those zones selected and assigned when you close the dialog box display in this list box The Intrusion Zone Assignment displays when Assign Intrusion Zone is clicked on the Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right form or Event Trigger form The window displays a list of all intrusion zones for the controllers in the facilities available for assignment by this operator You can assign an unlimited number of intrusion zones to an acce
222. e Digital Video Viewer and Video Console window on page 209 Help Network List Recovery Recovery Notification e Messages Backup Clients tab on page 53 Display Redundancy Notification e Client monitoring on page 300 How do recover Client Monitor shortcut menu on page 303 What happens when a default client is back up Backup Clients tab on page 53 Display Redundancy Notification What is the timing on the recovery Takeover and recovery timing on page 55 Chapter 2 57 System preferences Define clients groups This form in the Administration group allows you to assign FCWnx client computers into logical groups Members of a Client Group cannot have conflicting Mode Schedules A comment box is available to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field Note Client groups can be assigned to specific alarm routing and bumping configurations You may want to review the Sample Scenario in Figure 73 Routing and bumping scenario on page 173 Table 31 Form fields Element Description Descriptions This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique description that identifies this Client Group Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Save You cannot save this record until at
223. e Displays the date when the status was last requested Last status time Displays the time when the status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information from the controller lt may take a moment to complete the refresh of the data A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes Note A status refresh requested for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned How to 1 Review the fields on this tab This is a read only windowpane in two column format 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to process refreshing the data Controller configuration tab Use this tab to assign the appropriate modules to this controller Note Before continuing verify that the controller type is correct The modules that display in the Modules column depend on the type of controller you have selected Figure 35 Controller Configuration tab Controller e Description Micro SS Facility fignoreFacitties Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Port Settings Modules Micro BPX Configuration 0001 0 Power Comm E 0001 1 16D0 0001 1 20D1 0001 1 2RP 0001 1 01 Reader 0001 1 02 Reader 0001 1 01 Aux DO 0001 1 02 Aux DO 0001 1 01 Reader 0001 1 02
224. e Facilities y Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status Resolution Medium Bel T Black amp White Max Search Time for Recorded Events Ss M pa secs Video Standard Username Password C PAL NTSC Table 112 Form fields Element Description General Status Displays current time time powered on MUX firmware PPC firmware and disk capacity Camera Status Displays current status of camera alarms and video loss alarms Record Status Displays status disk status time recording and time until disk is full Archiving Status Displays archive status device status time archiving and time until archive is full Ethernet Status Displays normal connect IP address and connect priority and live connect IP address and connect priority e A duplex recorder priority status displays on a line separate from the IP address e A Triplex and or Matrix recorder priority status displays as the last entry of the IP address such as 003 018 146 159 3 Status Click Status to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last Status request This button is disabled when a status request is in progress How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 112 to assist you in review of the window on this tab 2 The status pane clears when you select another DVR from the list box on the right 196 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Video windows This is a brief o
225. e PERSONS chica ti ea han ead ede te E E 247 FINE BODE cass TE E tk ew ade to a eae tk na Eas ead 256 Design credentials ic bona ne eck ek RE eed oe 259 Credential OMI AA Taw how aes 260 a A Hae aH He ED haere ee 262 HEIST NEIRA wage GH ete Saye 268 Define credential Quads a hae cha bbe eae aaa s 270 Create custom credential stats cocina 271 Create credential formats 0 0 ccc cece eens 273 URO PR reer deinen g teens ai ete He be eats kb ee eds 277 238 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview We recommend that you complete the forms described in this chapter in the order presented The forms described in this chapter create access rights to define where with readers and when with time schedules an individual can gain entry Following the creation of access rights and departments you are able to create person records and assign access rights and departments to the person records If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image Define access rights Use the Access Right form Places amp Policies group to create access rights e To define where with readers and when with time schedules an individual can gain entry For systems using Micro controllers e To define which floors a person can access and what digital output groups a person can trigger with a valid credential Note Floors and elevators are assigned to an access right
226. e add icon ato begin a new record Create a record of an employee s personal information Only Last Name Personnel Type and Employee Number are required fields 2 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image 1 Select the Photo tab on the Person form 2 Select ONE of the records in the Record List 3 Click Capture Image Signature to capture a new image Based on the input device you previously selected the proper interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image Adjust then Save the adjusted settings 5 Click Capture Photo to capture the new image Once the photo is taken the Image Enhancement dialog box displays Note Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application Credentials Credential Refer to Define credentials on page qs 262 ED To create your own simple credential design 1 Click the add icon Esto begin a new record and enter a unique Description then click Save The Edit Credential Design button is now enabled Assign a facility Review the guidelines and complete the tab on this form Click Edit Credential Design to run the Credential Design application Select New from Imaging File menu Draw a shape in your design window the size of your credential anu FwWNn For a background
227. e associated cannot be deleted The devices must be removed or assigned to another client before this client can be deleted e Client computers assigned as backup clients cannot be deleted You must first un assign this client from the Backup Clients list on the Backup Clients tab and then delete Region This field is available only when you first open the Client form and BEFORE you initiate a Search To locate a particular Server or client you are able to select a Server name from the Region drop down list The field default displays the Database Server computer name The clients associated with the selected Region display in the right windowpane If you click Search immediately after you open the Client form this field displays the default Server name and is unavailable for selection Workstation Type Select from the drop down list of available workstation types e Administration This is the default for new installations and new client workstation records This configuration allows full functionality except monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration e Operator This configuration allows this client workstation to monitor alarms activity functions Graphics Console and Video Console e SCIF This selection is for system with ACU controllers If this is a SCIF workstation enable SCIF on the Area form This configuration allows this client workstatio
228. e credential and person record is correct for access to this reader 1 Review the guidelines in Table 63 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Select this tab to view information about the reader as currently stored in the controller s database This is a read only windowpane in two column format as follows 127 128 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 45 Status tab Reader e Description rs 4 Facility pooo a Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Routing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Advanced Last status date l Last status time Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh may take a moment to complete Refresh Table 64 Form fields Element Description Display windowpane Micro controllers Physical Type Displays the actual reader type Normal Credential and Keypad and Credential or Keypad Logical Type Displays the reader type this reader is being used as Normal APB In anti passback In APB Out antipassback Out T amp A In time attendance in T amp A Out time amp attendance out In Required and Elevator Online Status Displays Online if the reader is currently online and Offline if the reader is currently offline Routing for Valid Transactions e History Whether valid transactions are being routed to history e Monitor
229. e is no connectivity authentication Password Enter the same password associated with the assigned user name if any that has been configured locally in the DVR for authenticating connectivity This is not a required field The default is no password however be aware that the DVR form and DVR device must be identical If you do not assign a password in the application but the DVR has a configured password there is no connectivity authentication Table 110 Form fields Chapter 5 Video Element Description PTZ Control Select TCP IP or None The default is None e Select TCP IP if cameras with PTZ capability are configured on this DVR and require control from this application e Select None if all cameras on this DVR are either fixed or if no control of PTZ cameras is desired Event Tagging Select TCP IP or None The default is None Select TCP IP if event triggers are required to tag recorded video upon activity from defined readers and alarms Select None if no tagging of recorded video is required for event triggers and only access to live video is desired upon activity from defined readers and alarms Time Sync Interval The DVR date and time clock can be synchronized by its host computer to ensure that access control alarm and video events across the entire system are time stamped in sync When DVRs on a centralized system reside in different time zones the DVRs should be hosted by computers in th
230. e list box on the right are the result of the first letter of the First name and the first letter of each Middle name entered Table 151 Form fields continued Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Employee number Enter a number assigned to and identifying this employee such as the employee s social security number This is a required field and the record does not save if the Employee number is left blank or if the number is not unique to this application The field accepts up to 12 alphanumeric characters CONVERSIONS ONLY The following information addresses conversions During the process of converting a database the system checks for possible blank or duplicate employee numbers in the database Results of this check display on the Administration group Preference form Open the form to display the Settings tab e Ifthe Enable unique amp required Employee Number check box is selected and unavailable all converted Person records have unique employee numbers All future Person records must have a unique employee number before the record can be saved e Ifthe Enable unique amp required Employee Number check box is NOT selected this is an indication that duplicate or blank employee number records exist in the database At this time you have the option to choose one of two preferences e Do nothing and continue to allow blank or duplicate employee numbers in Person
231. e refers to magnetic stripe cards Enter or select a number that indicates the number of times that this card number has been issued to the credential holder A card may be re issued if the card is damaged reported lost or stolen The original issue of this card begins with 00 A card can be issued up to 99 times Number This number must be unique to this application It may be already encoded into the card if you are using a card or you can assign a number in this dialog box This number is entered into a keypad reader when there is no card If you are using credential aliasing The alias displays here as a read only number and cannot be changed An alias number is assigned on the Credential Alias form Refer to Define credential alias on page 270 The encoded number is entered into a keypad reader Example if using a company code 00670010xXxXxxXxxxxxx01 where The first four digits indicate your company number 67 with preceding zeros 0067 The second set of four digits indicates your company site number 10 with preceding zeros 0010 The third set of digits is the unique card number xxxxxxxxxx The fourth set of digits is the number of times that this card has been issued to the credential holder 01 Status Note Active credentials are granted access through readers You can create a custom status description to display on the Activity Monitor using the Custom Credential Status form Refer to Create custom credential s
232. e steps in the order presented For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Table 48 Form fields Element Description Description The description of the controller should be unique and include where the controller is located and or how it is used Example 1 Building A2 North Telco Closet could represent Controller 1 located in Building A2 North in the Telco Closet This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for your new controller record from the Facility drop down list All devices such as readers alarms and Dis added with the controller belong to the same facility as the controller If you edit the Facility option on an existing controller record a messages displays Do other devices change to the same facility as the controller If you select Yes all associated devices and alarms change to the newly assigned facility If you select No the facility change takes place only on the controller record The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Records generation You can configure your controller record to match the controller s physical module configuration Only those records that are needed are configured Controller record generation For syste
233. e the 41 video backward one frame at a time Reverse Click to go from the current position to the beginning of the recording T Pause Click to pause the video Play Click to start playing video Forward Pause Navigate to the video clip you want to view Click Forward Pause to view Hie the next frame of recorded video Continue clicking to move the video forward one frame at a time p Fast Forward Click to quickly advance to the end of the video recording y Play Speed Click the bar and slide to adjust the playback speed of recorded video The DVR playback speed can be adjusted by this method from minimum to maximum speed pi Stop Click to stop playing the video File menu The File menu contains the following submenus Table 127 Form fields Element Description Save View Click to display the Save User View dialog where you can enter a view name and save the selected camera view configuration for future use All saved views are displayed in the Display Views tab of the Navigation pane Remove View Click to delete the currently selected view from the Display Views tab You are asked to confirm Click Ok to continue or Cancel to exit the dialog 211 212 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 127 Form fields continued Element Description Preferences Click to display the Video Viewer Preferences dialog which displays the default Snapshot and Video Cl
234. e the transactions are occurring Sequence Guide 1 If facilities are going to be used the facilities must first be defined in FCWnx on the Facility form When creating a facility record enter a description that uniquely identifies the location or function of the facility 2 Permissions are created and defined to determine what form and what fields are available within FCWnx Note The forms in FCWnx display an icon in the left corner indicating the permissions assigned to the current operator The form icons correspond to the icons and permissions assigned on the Permission form 3 Once defined facilities and permissions are available for assignment to an operator on the Operator form a At any given time the current operator has the ability to select the active facility for that session from the list of all facilities that the current operator is allowed to see b When a facility is assigned to an operator it displays in the Facility drop down list of FCWnx forms after a successful login by that operator Depending on assigned permissions that operator can now create records and assign facilities from the list that displays in the Facility drop down list Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description hex character Valid and allowable hex characters include the base 16 numbering system 0 through 9 and A through F image capture Your photographs and signatures can be created by dig
235. ea e Assign readers e Assign alarms e Assign DOs When an Area is designated as a SCIF Area and assigned to a SCIF workstation this workstation is able to control functionality for the SCIF Area Monitoring and control can be made at that SCIF workstation only Modifications to the SCIF Area configuration such as unassigning the area as SCIF or unassigning the Area to the SCIF workstation can be made on a non SCIF client only if the operator has SCIF facility permissions 6 Assign Access Rights Persons and Credentials Note Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF workstation cannot be configured monitored or controlled through an API connection unless you are at the SCIF workstation services Windows uses special programs called services A service is a process that can start automatically when the system boots and remains running as a background process independently of anyone being logged in It runs regardless of whether anyone is logged into Windows or FCWnx In other words the computer must be turned on but no one needs to be logged in SQL Server 2000 2005 MUST be running for network clients to connect and share the SQL database FCWnx Diagnostics handles all diagnostics on all computers FCWnx System Manager manages communication between computers and licensing This service also starts the FCWnx WebService FCWnx Manager is the main service and handles controller communications and alarms FCWnx Webservice handl
236. earch to display a list of Database Servers in your FCWnx system Select one of the Database Servers from the list box in the right windowpane The selected server name now displays in the Description field This is a required field and accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Area from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Region tab Use this tab to identify a Global Database Server or Regional Database Server and configure synchronization intervals This tab also contains the licensing information about the Region Figure 10 Region tab E Region e Description ana Region Backup Regions Global Server No Database Synchronization Interval min 5 History Database Synchronization Interval min 30 m License Info Client License 5 Photo Imaging License 5 Reader License 128 Camera License 16 API Connection License 1 Thin Client License Yes Apogee Yes Expiration Date Unrestricted Client Redundancy Yes Visitor License Yes Report Commander License Yes Guard Tours Yes Graphics Yes ACURS XL Support Yes Micro 5 Support No Micro2K Support No Deployment Standalone Table 22 Form fields Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Global Server If the selected server name e Is a Global Database Server
237. ecome available on the right of the window Select a response and click OK for the selected response to display in the Response windowpane of the Alarm Monitor form e You can manually extend the response by placing your cursor at the end of the entry and appending to a maximum of 256 alphanumeric characters e You can append an additional predefined response without overwriting the existing entry e When you append an additional predefined response to the existing entry a warning message displays if the response exceeds 256 characters The additional response is not appended The selected response is recorded in alarm history when the alarm is acknowledged Acknowledge Click to acknowledge an alarm Forced acknowledgement to an alarm is required only if the Operator Acknowledge check box has been checked to enable this function on the Alarm form An alarm process state is either Unacknowledged or Acknowledged To acknowledge an alarm select the desired alarm and click Acknowledge The alarm button changes to reflect the acknowledgement and clears from the window after reset Alarm Monitor shortcut menu Table 179 Form fields Element Description Show Inactive Alarms Display alarms in an inactive state and removed from view These alarms were previously acknowledged or purged from the Alarm Monitor This is a toggle election and is a way to display previous alarm activity without running a report Alarm Open
238. econd time as a security check Note This application supports Basic Authentication only and not Integrated Windows Authentication Product Update Available Notify Clients Immediately that Product Update is Available Select this check box to automatically notify client computers that a product update is available Update Message Text In this box enter a message that displays as a popup notifying client computers that a product update is available OK Click this button when configuration is complete The entries on this window are saved Help Click to access the Online Help system 344 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 195 Form f field continued Element Description Cancel Click this button to terminate and close this window The entries are not saved How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 195 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Check for update This item is enabled on the File drop down menu of the main application toolbar when the Enable Auto Update option is selected and completed on the Auto Update Configuration form Administration group Each time you log in the FCWnx system checks for updates Also at any time you may select this item to begin a search of the configured Web site for updates to the FCWnx application This process searches for new upgrades compares the version and if the patch or update needs to be applied a d
239. ected Server computer click Connect and wait as the Server Management Studio opens 2 Select and then right click the FCWnx database instance on the navigation tree to the right 3 Select Properties 4 Select Memory page 358 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 5 Set the Minimum Server memory in MB to no less than a quarter of the allowable limit Set the Maximum Server memory MB at approximately half of the allowable MB 6 Exit Server management Studio Documentation Question When the Documentation CD is inserted into the CD ROM drive and Web Site is clicked on the menu why does the GE Security Web Site link open a blank page Reset your Internet Explorer Options security setting to enable Allow META REFRESH Global configuration Question Converting an existing database to a Regional Server returns error messages and the database creation fails What do I do Conversion to a Regional Server is not allowed An existing FCWnx database can only be converted to a Global Database Server Question Subscription to Publication database nameis invalid What can I do Run SELECT SERVERNAME in Query Analyzer on both the Global Database Server and the Regional Database Server If either name does not match its related Server Computer name run the following on the affected server sp _addserver lt real server name gt LOCAL If this gives an error message stating that the name already exists then use the f
240. ection of the credential transaction printer is done on the Client form Valid Enable this field if you want valid credential transactions to be sent to the credential transaction printer Invalid Enable this field if you want invalid credential transactions to be sent to the credential transaction printer Lost Enable this field if you want lost credential transactions to be sent to the credential transaction printer 124 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 60 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Functions Schedule tab Use this tab to select the schedules that are used to set a reader offline online or lock unlock a door Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the state of the reader changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the state of the reader returns to the nonscheduled value For example if a reader is scheduled online it returns to offline at the end of the schedule Figure 42 Functions Schedule tab Reader e Description Po Facility of b Reader Type Schedules Status Advanced Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Routing Schedule m Reader schedule Time schedule ER C Online C Offline r Door schedule Time schedule zi 2 Unlock Cc Lock 7 Disable Auto Unloc
241. ection unless you are at the SCIF workstation An API can be installed on any computer in your FCWnx system however do not attempt to install on a domain controller The installation does not complete properly Review the system configuration with your IT Department for alternative reconfiguration options Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter the title of the external API This should be a unique identifier to the product Chapter 4 177 Devices Definition tab Enter information that defines an interface license for external application integration to this application Figure 76 API Connections e Description Definition Application Login ss Password Fo Confirm Password DO PC Name A Table 101 Form fields Element Description Application Login Enter the login used by the external application to connect and access the API Each login must be unique Password We recommend a noncryptic password The password must be greater than four alphanumeric or wildcard characters with no spaces The password is NOT case sensitive Confirm Password Enter the password a second time PC Name From the drop down list select the computer for this application that hosts the external application How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 101 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define floors Use this form in the El
242. ed The refresh process may take a few minutes Note A status refresh requested for a controller that is offline or in error is never returned 165 166 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 91 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to process refreshing the data CCTV tab Select this tab to assign CCTV alarms to alarms for this application The windowpane displays the CCTV alarms already assigned to this alarm Figure 68 CCTV tab E alarm e Description Facility Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Table 92 Form fields Element Description Add Remove Click to display the CCTV Alarm Assignment dialog box that allows you to add or remove items from the list This dialog box allows you to select and assign CCTV alarms to alarms for this application Only CCTV alarms in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 92 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Refer to the Facility Commander Wnx Installation Manual CCTV Interfaces appendix for additional information about CCTV interfaces 3 Click Save before you exi
243. ed as Active Note If this reader is associated with SCIF you cannot control this reader status unless you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting this reader Physical Type Normal Credential Only This reader requires only a valid credential to gain access Credential and PIN Required This reader requires a valid credential and a valid number PIN entered on the keypad to gain access Credential or Keypad Entry This reader requires you to enter either a valid credential number on the keypad or a valid credential to gain access Table 58 Form fields continuea Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Logical Type Normal Allows as many successive accesses as needed as long as the credential is valid APB Anti passback in This type of reader which gives an IN status is used to enter an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to an APB out reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global APB on the Settings Tab of the Preference form a different controller All controllers are updated The following options are available for selection if this reader is associated with a Micro controller APB out Anti passback out This type of reader which gives an OUT status is used to leave an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to an APB in reader connected to the same controlle
244. ed image to the original image Choosing Restore undoes any changes made to the original image Clear When you select the Clear option from the shortcut menu the image is cleared and the image file is deleted The image cannot be recovered Enhancement Shortcut Menu There are four submenus for the Enhancement shortcut menu option Adjust by Example When you select this option a dialog box displays You can adjust the brightness contrast focus exposure and red green and blue colors Special Effect by Example This dialog box allows you to add special effects to any image The applicable effects are Mosaic Impressionist Watercolor Emboss and Posterize Remove Red Eye This dialog box allows you to remove the red eye effect of any person in an image Vignette The Vignette dialog box allows you to configure a vignette effect to any image Manipulation Shortcut Menu Mirroring Flip Vertically Flip an image from top to bottom Flip Horizontally Flip an image from left to right Invert negative Select this option to invert an image create a color negative Convert to 8 bit grayscale Select this option to convert an image to an 8 bit 256 grayscale image Once this option is selected there is no undo You have to reload your image Save Image Changes to an existing image or newly captured image are saved to the host when you click Save Chapter 7 259 Access rights departments persons and credentials Ex
245. ed printer models For directions on installing the drivers for this printer refer to the appropriate GE documents or the instructions that came with your printer If you purchased this system with this printer from GE the DataCard drivers are installed for you To print credentials the default printer MUST be the Imaging printer However this means that the Print Preview Report File menu does not display accurately You need to select your report printer BEFORE you preview a report To select a different printer from the File menu select Print Setup and then your report printer If your printer is networked you may be required to adjust the security properties At the computer that owns the printer navigate to the Properties window for the selected printer Click Start Settings Printers Select the printer and then right click From the shortcut menu select Properties On the Security tab of the Properties window proceed to add Anonymous Login to the Group or user names Readers Question What is the maximum number of readers per controller That depends on the controller Refer to the Licensing Capacities table of your Installation Manual Appendix A 363 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Setup Ques tion How do I identify the ports used for FCWnx communication We recommend that you configure your FCWnx system with the Windows firewall ON In order for your system to perform successfully FCWnx opens communication po
246. ed video event The following windows open e The Digital Video Viewer Refer to Navigate video console on page 209 for information about the Digital Video Viewer e Video windowl s displaying the recorded video associated with the credential transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time View Single Recorded Frame Select to display the first frame of the event recording as a still photo Quick Launch Accesses live and recorded video from camerals associated with the reader s credential transaction as defined by its event trigger Note A message dialog displays if video is not available because associated cameras are not assigned to the currently active facility Swipe and show option Note Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time If readers have not been selected the program does not start If Imaging is not licensed for the system this option is not available The Swipe and Show program is a monitoring and validation option available on the Activity Monitor form When properly configured and following a credential transaction the operator is able to observe a credential photo and text description of the transaction in the Swipe and Show window An operator is able to monitor transactions and compare the photo ID to a live image Figure 126 Swipe and Show window 8 Swipe E Show 293 294 Facility Commander Wnx Edition Us
247. edential at an APB OUT reader in Miami Ignore APB Status Across Regions If selected the APB status is local to the selected Region and status is retained within the Region Regions are independent of each other and the status is not recognized by another Region If necessary select Retain APB Status Across Regions Select Invalidate Credential Across Regions if that is appropriate for your FCWnx system Select Ignore APB Status Across Regions to retain the APB status within the local Region How to 1 Assign APB IN readers 2 Assign APB OUT readers 3 4 5 6 Click Save before you exit this tab Global configuration regional rules This topic addresses administration and behavior of a successful Global configuration Particular functions in the Global configuration must be handled locally at the Regional level The following table is an overview of administrative functions and links to forms where configuration and behavior must be considered Global Configuration Regional Rules Table 25 Global configuration Regional rules Form Access Right form Readers Only Alarm form Alarm Group Form Credential Alias Form CCTV Alarm Form Client Form Digital Input Form Digital Output Form Digital Output Group Form Digital Video Recorder Elevator Form Event Schedule Form Floor Intrusion Zone Form Manual Control Form Updates allowed in remote Regions Yes No See Comments No Ye
248. edited Refer to the Activity Monitor or the Guard Tour tab of the Manual Control form for tour status Chapter 8 281 Guard tours Table 168 Form fields continued Element Description Description Enter a unique or suggestive description for this tour The field accepts 1 to 64 characters Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Guard Tour Tab Configure the specifics of this tour You cannot save this record until you have completed the Tour tab NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Guard tour tab Configure the specifics of this tour by completing the elements displayed on this tab Figure 123 Guard tour tab e Description Facility X Guard Tour Tour Host Computer y Start Tour Point y Max tour time min J7 Route activity to printer Tour Points Move Up _ MoveDown Down _ Assign Tour Points _ Assign Tour Points Points Tour Credentials Assign Tour Credentials 282 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 169 Form fields Element Description Tour Host Computer From the drop down list select the computer that hosts this tour Guard tours must be owned by a specific client host Start Tour Point From the drop down li
249. efer to an expanded facility definition in the Glossary on page 377 Facility tab Use the field on this tab to create facility records Figure 13 Facility tab Facility Description I 48 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 26 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a description that uniquely identifies location or function of the facility Save Click to save this record How to 1 Click the add icon to begin a new facility record 2 Enter a unique description in the Description field This may be a building name or location such as FAU Campus Office Building 3 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Identify and configure clients Use this form in the Administration group to add a client to the FCWnx network or assign backup clients Note Only systems licensed for Client Redundancy have the ability to select backup clients Table 27 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter or edit a unique description for the client you are adding If you do not enter a description this field automatically populates with the PC Name selected on the Client tab Note Global Client Descriptions We recommend that your client description include a meaningful name of the Global or Regional Database Server computer When the description displays on the Cl
250. eferences Note 1 The synchronization processing time depends on how much data needs to be synchronized and the performance of your system 2 Using Windows we recommend that you synchronize time settings on the computers within your Global configuration 3 When re assigning devices such as controllers or DVRs across regions you must stop and restart services first on the original owner of the devices and then on the computer to which the devices are newly assigned You must allow sufficient time for data replication to complete across all affected regions before restarting services on the newly assigned computer Verify that devices are online and operable following the re assignment Define facilities Use the Facility form Places amp Policies group to define facilities Your database can be partitioned and related records can be grouped These groupings are called facilities If facilities are used you must create Facility definitions in the FCWnx system Note A facility option can be designated on MOST forms throughout the system and any number of facilities can be defined e Usually the system administrator is assigned to all facilities e Operators can be assigned to one or more facilities and can choose which facilities to be active at any given time e All records have the default Ignore Facilities which means the records are not under facility protection therefore those records are visible to all operators Also r
251. eir same time zone The hosting computers synchronize their DVR clocks at the interval selected as well as immediately manage any system date and time changes including daylight savings time Select one e None default e 1 Hour e 4 Hours e 8 Hours e 12 Hours e 24 Hours If DVRs are required to be synchronized with the system for this application date and time clock 12 Hours is a recommended setting for most systems How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 110 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Video Display tab Select this tab to set up your DVR video window display options These options are configurable per DVR and are intended for optimizing system performance based on your network bandwidth and computing hardware This application can be configured to request and process video from DVRs in reduced resolution and color for display purposes while the video remains locally stored on the DVR in its original recorded resolution and color settings All video is transmitted over the network in a compressed Wavelet format 193 194 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 85 Video Display tab Table 111 Form fields Resolution Max Search Time for Recorded Events 15 UN secs ps El Digital Yideo Recorder e Description test Facility ignore Facilities y Definition Communications Settings Video Display Status Medium y I Bla
252. el select and enter text over the existing text The address field label can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters in length How to 1 Select in the field of any one of the Address fields Enter over the existing text up to 32 alphanumeric characters 2 3 Repeat for each label field that you want to edit 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 2 System preferences Communication Settings tab Use this tab to select the modems that are to be used for dial up controllers Figure 6 Communication Settings tab E Preference nix Settings User Fields Mode Labels Address Fields Communication Settings Clear Archive Security Advanced Installed modems Disconnect after idle minutes Network Port Range Low end 6700 High end 6709 BEM 7 Table 17 Form fields Element Description Installed Modems Displays all modems currently installed on the PC To designate a modem for use with a dial up controller enable it by clicking in the box to the left of the modem name so that a check displays If you have a modem installed for support use DO NOT SELECT THAT MODEM For systems using ACU controllers The modem can either be a Star Comm or a US Robotic Sportster modem at the host For systems using Micro controllers The modem must be a Star Comm at the host Modems used with FCWnx must have a Windows modem driver If there is no modem matching what is currently on your system you m
253. elected the operator must acknowledge the alarm on the Alarm Monitor form before the alarm can be cleared Priority This number indicates the priority of this alarm and how it displays on the Alarm Monitor form This priority tells the system host in which order it should alert the operator if multiple alarms occur at the same time The lower the number the higher the priority The priority range is O through 19 Example A Duress alarm is assigned priority 2 An Intrusion alarm is assigned priority 3 Multiple Intrusion alarms were being reported when a Duress alarm occurs The Duress alarm displays above the Intrusion alarms on the Alarm Monitor form Chapter 4 157 Devices Table 85 Form fields continuea Element Description Route alarms to history If selected alarm activity is written to the alarm history Print alarms at host If selected the alarm history transaction is printed on a selected system printer when the alarm changes state between alarm and reset Alarm transactions print only if the transaction is routed to the printer and the alarm transaction printer is selected The selection of the alarm transaction printer is done on the Client tab of the Client form Delay Time This feature is enabled for systems using ACU controllers From the drop down list select the number of seconds during which an alarm can be delayed without generating an alarm This is an Arm Delay requirement Comment Use thi
254. ell Server e Dell PowerEdge Systems Installation and Troubleshooting Guide provided with your Dell Server e Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server CD and applicable Service Pack e Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or 2005 CD Standard Edition and latest applicable Service Pack Replacing a RAID failed hard drive Note For optimum results GE recommends that the drive be powered off before it is removed or replaced A loss of data or data corruption may occur if disks are replaced without powering off Replace the damaged hard drive with another hard drive with the same capacity then restart the system The RAID controller automatically rebuilds the mirror hard drive For instructions on replacing a failed hard drive refer to the documentation shipped with your Dell PowerEdge System Installing OpenManage Server Assistant The Server Assistant software provides tools to set up and configure the PowerEdge system components and software Installation includes drivers diagnostics and utilities Refer to the documentation and instructions shipped with your Dell PowerEdge System If you have a complete system failure where both hard drives are damaged or your system has no operating system installed follow the steps below 1 Set up the speakers monitor mouse and keyboard as directed by the documentation provided by Dell Attach the AC adapter and plug the power cable into a grounded power outlet Insert the Dell OpenManage Server Ass
255. emplate and click to save any changes made to the template preferences An update message displays Remove Select a template and then click to delete it from the list A Delete Template dialog box displays to confirm your choice and the template is deleted Make Default Select a template and then click to automatically load this template whenever this form is opened A Default Template confirmation message displays Close Click to close this window without taking any action New template dialog Use this dialog box to create a new template You are prompted to enter the name of the template you want to create Keep in mind that any information currently on the report form is saved under this name Preview The Print Preview Report option on the File menu allows you to preview before printing and is available only when a Report form is displaying A printer must be added to your FCWnx system in order for this feature to be available Following completion of all tabs and options on the Report form click to preview a copy of your report On the Preview Report screen the Total field represents the number of records in the database and not the number of records that matched your search criteria The zoom value always reads 100 regardless of the zoom used 329 330 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Print report The Print Report option on the File Menu allows you to send the current report to a defi
256. encrypting an Exchange Key Exchange encryption protects the Host to controller exchange of information Assigning an exchange key grants you a privilege of accessing the next level of encryption the Data Encryption You have two options e System When you choose this selection no additional selections are available or required This key is set at the factory This method of encryption is more convenient but more vulnerable The key is set at the factory system generated and exists in the Host software e Custom When you select this option the three dialog boxes become available At the controller enter the 48 character exchange key using FlashTool This exchange key must be identical to the key that was entered into the controller preference block at the controller Setting up a Custom exchange key is the most secure method of encryption The Custom key is user supplied The installer can go to each controller and assign the exchange key When assigning a Custom exchange key you must assign a total of 48 unique hex characters in three 16 character strings Do not repeat any characters This method of encryption uses a three pass authentication process Starting at the left the first pass authenticates 16 hex characters The second pass authenticates 16 hex characters The third pass authenticates all 48 hex characters Note If the Custom exchange key entries do not match an alarm condition indication displays in the Reference column of t
257. enerated allowing you to narrow the selection of information displayed on your report e Secure Area Description Enter the range of area descriptions on which you wish to report or leave both fields blank to generate a report for all Areas e From Select an Area description from the drop down list as the start of the range of Areas on which to base this report e To Select an Area description from the drop down list as the end of the range of Areas on which to base this report Credential report form This tab is used only when generating a Credential Report Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated e Credential Number Select the range of credential numbers you want to display on the report If you want to list all credentials leave these fields blank e Credential Status To provide additional filtering you can also select to list only those credentials assigned a selected status Credential History report form Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated e Credential Number Select the range of credential numbers you want to display on the report If you want to list all credentials leave these fields blank e Employee Name Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report If you want to list all persons leave these fields blank e Employee Number Select the range of employee numbers you want to display on the report If you want to list all numbers
258. ential activity External Reports The External Reports option opens the Launch External Reports window allowing you to access an executable application or report that was not created within FCWnx For example you may want to access a report created by a third party report generator such as Crystal Reports or Microsoft Access 2002 Within FCWnx you can navigate to the application or folder select the file Chapter 10 Reports and click Open once the report has been created and saved in a folder This is a view only function you cannot launch Access or edit entries Designing reports Template defined The Template drop down list on the Report forms displays the name of the currently loaded template if there is one To load select from the drop down list of the available templates and load the details to the form Report templates are useful when you run a certain report frequently After you select a report it can be saved as a template and revised by loading it from the template combo box Report templates window With any report form displayed click Templates A list box displays a list of available templates To use select the desired template and do one of the following Element Description Save As Select an existing template and then click to save with a new name A dialog box displays enabling you to enter a name for the new template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Save Select a t
259. ents define when an action occurs and time schedules define an interval of time over which an action occurs An event can schedule an action multiple times even within the same day Once an event is defined it may be applied anywhere events are used Deleting an event schedule does not affect the current state of any devices currently under the effect of the deleted event schedule An event remains active until another event occurs to change it Table 40 Form fields Element Description Description This field accepts 64 characters Enter a meaningful description for this event Facility A facility option can be designated for your new record from the Facility drop down list Save This record can be saved following a selection of Start Time or Stop Time Event Schedules tab Use this tab to create an event If you need to use facilities in your system create an event for each facility Use the facility description as a prefix on the Event Schedule form Description to indicate to which facility this event applies The time 24 00 is the same as 00 00 of the next day For example Friday at 24 00 is the same as Saturday at 00 00 72 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 21 Event Schedules tab Event Schedule e Description ity E Event Schedules 00 00 00 00 foo00 osjo sapo tepo 00 00 Sunday Li Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Mode
260. eo Retry Interval fj 5 Retry Count B Enter a DVR Address a unique logical address associated with this DVR from 1 to 255 This field is not available to edit existing records This number is used in this software to uniquely identify the DVR and its related records DVR Type Select a DVR type from the drop down list This application currently supports 10 and 16 camera channel multiplexer recorder models from Kalatel This field is not available for edit on existing records When you click Save the number of camera records are created equivalent to the type of DVR you selected Bus Address The bus address is a 2 digit field in the range of 1 to 32 The bus address refers to the physical DVR device address on the RS 485 bus and must be entered when multiple DVRs exist on a single bus and or for controlling camera s with PTZ capability Host Computer Select a Default Hostname from the drop down list that hosts the defined DVR and act as its communications server If the Default Hostname computer is in a failover condition you cannot re assign this DVR to any other Host computer except the Active Client that is presently hosting this device Poll Time seconds Poll Interval Enter the length of time in seconds that elapse prior to a status request being sent to the DVR for verification of communications and processing of error and or alarm messages since the last poll Timeout Enter a lengt
261. er Manual The Swipe and Show window is resizable and displays the following Table 175 Form fields Element Description Photo A photo displays in this windowpane for the credential presented to the reader If no photo is available or an unknown credential is presented to the reader a silhouette displays Name First name middle initial and last name of credential holder Employee Number Number assigned to this employee Department Department where person is assigned Transaction Type Valid displays green invalid displays red or unknown displays gray messages display Guard Tour activity types also display See Activity monitoring on page 288 for a listing of activity types Date Time Reader transaction date and time Reader Description Description of reader where credential was presented Always on Top Right click the Swipe and Show title bar to display a shortcut option that keeps the window in the forefront of all windows displaying on the workstation If you select another transaction the window content changes to the available information for that transaction Close this window by selecting the window exit button closing the Activity Monitor form or closing this application client program Alarm monitoring All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut me
262. er com updates FCWnx701 msp ReadMe http www myserver com updates ReadMe rtf Where version is the version of installation that is available on the server Size is the size of the installation in bytes Insta11 is the URL to the installation of the patch upgrade and ReadMe is the URL to the installation s ReadMe file If you don t have a ReadMe file the ReadMe line is omitted from this file You can place the installation file and ReadMe at any location on the internet or intranet as long as their URLs are currently recorded in the FCWnx ini update file Appendix A 343 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Figure 139 Auto update ES Auto Update C Enable Auto Update HTTP Server Path http HTTP Server User Name if required HTTP Server Password if required Repeat HTTP Server Password Update Message Text Table 195 Form f field Element Description Enable Auto Update Select this check box to enable the Check for Update item of the File menu Settings HTTP Server Path This is the Server to which you need to connect in order to search for available updates This field may look something like the following http ge security com HTTP Server User Name Enter the User Name used to reach the HTTP Server if required HTTP Server Password Enter the password used to reach the HTTP Server if required Repeat HTTP Server Password Enter the password used to reach the HTTP Server a s
263. er does not recognize the credential as valid the controller communicates with the host to confirm credential validity If the credential is valid the information for that credential is downloaded to the controller therefore the controller acknowledges this credential as valid the next time the credential is presented to the reader Send Real Time Digital Output When this check box is selected any digital output change of state is reflected on the Status alarm Graphics Console in real time status Note Every transaction that changes the state of a digital output on this controller is now written to history e If you intend to place digital output symbols on your graphics maps that indicate the state of a digital output this option must be selected for this controller Refer to your Graphics Console User Manual Graphics Symbol Editor Properties and Conditions for information about setting controls and assigning properties for your graphics monitoring e If this option is not selected you can not see digital output status for this controller on your graphics maps and digital output transactions are not written to digital output history Micro Controllers Only Exit Request Debounce Enable this field to increase the sense time on all the Exit Dis exit requests This field is useful if using noisy or chattering contact interference in which you receive false exit requests ACU Controllers Only DI Alarm Termination Type Se
264. er to change a value for multiple records at one time for example updating a Department value for all selected records Multiple rows can be selected by left clicking the first desired record then dragging the mouse and releasing it on the last desired record Nonconnected rows may be added to the selection by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse All selected rows are highlighted Changing a field value changes it for all selected records 4 Make the necessary changes to the form 5 Complete the form A detailed explanation of each field on the form can be found on the Form fields table for each form in this guide Not all fields may display on your form or they may display as read only and disabled When all required information is complete you are able to save the record 22 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Click Save kzl If you are unable to save or additional information is required a message displays informing you of the additional requirements in order to save this record Complete the additions or necessary changes and click Save again Deleting records To delete a record From the Application Group pane such as Personnel select a secondary item then click the appropriate tab For example Personnel Person Personnel tab When a form is opened the record list window is empty From the tool bar click Search So A record list window displays with all of
265. er within 6 minutes 1s required 30 seconds for manual transfer of cables and 5 minutes 30 seconds for the system boot sequence Compatibility has been verified with the following protected premise control units e ACU2X ACU2XL8 ACU2XL16 ACURS2 ACURS4 e Micro 5 and Micro 2000 using a PXN or PXNplus CPU board The system shall be connected to a listed surge suppressor with a maximum marked rating of 330 volts The installation instructions shall specify signal line transient protection complying with the Standard for Protectors for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Circuits UL 479B with a maximum marked rating of 50 volts The equipment shall be installed in a temperature controlled environment Twenty four hours of backup power shall be provided to the HVAC system The HVAC system shall be capable of maintaining a temperature between 55 and 95 E The installation instructions shall specify that in addition to the main power supply and secondary power supply that are required to be provided at the central supervisory station the system shall be provided with an uninterruptable power supply UPS with sufficient capacity to operate the computer equipment for a minimum of 15 minutes If more than 15 minutes is required for the secondary power supply to supply the UPS input power the UPS shall be capable of providing input power for at least that amount of time The UPS shall comply with the Standard for Uninterruptable Power Supply
266. error when I try to start the client software What should I do now on page 363 Question Why do Services shut down while Diagnostic Viewer is running A dialog box pops up and displays the message Diagnostic Manager Service has Shutdown After I restart services no new messages are displayed Communication has been lost with the services and the file needs to be reopened again when the services are up and running Question What is the order in which the services should be shut down and started Shutting down the Diagnostics Service shuts down the other Services Refer to your Installation Guide for a detailed description of Services 371 372 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Note the service dependencies as described in Table 205 Table 205 Service Dependencies Service Dependency Diagnostics Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or 2005 must be running on the Database Server PC before diagnostics can run on client computers System Diagnostics Manager Diagnostics System Webservice System Manager and automatically starts when the Manager service starts API Diagnostics System System Manager This service can be started manually at the time you install an API interface Question J shut down my license domain server cold boot My clients are reporting database errors that is they have lost their network connection Why This can occur when the network goes down for any purpose common examples hub lose
267. ers for the selected Region Assign Click to assign APB OUT readers for this region Only readers previously configured as APB OUT readers are displayed for selection It may not be required or significant for the controllers in a Region to report status to another Region Select from one of the following notification options 44 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 24 Form fields Element Description Retain APB Status Across Region This is the default of three status options If selected the APB status is recognized across all Regions in the FCWnx Global system A credential can be presented at an APB IN reader in one Region and at an APB OUT reader in a second Region Enable Global APB must be selected on the Preference form Invalidate Credential Across Regions If selected this option disables the credential in all other regions when a person enters the selected Region by presenting the credential at an APB IN reader The Activity Monitor displays Invalid APB IN or Invalid APB OUT if you attempt to enter in or out of any other Region When a person exits the selected Region and the credential is presented at an APB OUT reader the credential becomes enabled in all other Regions Enable Global APB must be selected on the Preference form Example Employees badging IN at a Miami office are tracked and not allowed to credential IN to another location until they have presented their cr
268. ervice Pack 4Server 2000 Standard Edition Service Pack 4 or later Server 2005 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 or later 9 3 or later Question Can I customize the toolbars and add more buttons No The toolbars cannot be customized Question How do I perform a search on a specific item The Search button can be found on any form that provides search capabilities If you click this button when the current form is blank all records are returned To specify criteria fill in the information Example If you want to find all credentialholders with the last name Smith enter Smith in the Last name field and click Search You can also use the character that allows you to search for patterns Appendix A 369 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Example A search for credentialholders with the last name starting with Sm would yield such names as Smith and Smythers Question How do I display underlined letters for keyboard navigation This is an Effects option in the Display settings of your computer To change this setting 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel and then Display 2 Double click Display to open the Display Properties window of your computer 3 Navigate to the Effects options of your computer This may vary depending on your operating system 4 Clear the selected option that reads Hide underlined letters for keyboard navigation until I press the Alt key Click OK Close the Control Panel a Question Wh
269. es Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique description for the Intrusion Zone in this field In the process of saving a modified configuration a dialog box displays Please note if zone is currently armed this update disarms and rearms with your new configuration Do you want to continue If you select Yes the new configuration saves to the database If you select No your changes are not saved Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Area from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Intrusion zone tab This tab allows you to edit or create an intrusion zone record and associate DI DO and devices such as readers and alarms in the operator s selected facilities Figure 101 Intrusion Zone tab e Description to Facility ee Intrusion Zone status Number z A Controller y pate ArmpDisarm DO e Status Arm Disarm DI y m Devices Assigned Readers iil Assign Readers Assigned Alarms Assign Alarms Arm Delay sec Arm Delay 232 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 139 Form fields Element Description Number Assign and enter a number for the
270. es Use this tab to define where transactions on the reader are sent You have three options credential history Activity Monitor and a credential transaction printer Credential transactions print only if the transaction is routed to the printer the credential transaction printer is enabled and a credential transaction printer is selected Figure 41 Routing tab Table 60 Form fields Reader gt e Description Facility y Reader Type Schedules Status Advanced Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Routing Schedule History Monitor Printer 7 Valid I Valid 7 Valid Invalid 7 Invalid 7 Invalid IV Lost Y Lost 7 Lost Element Description History Valid Enable this field if you want valid credential transactions recorded in credential history Invalid Invalid credential transactions are always recorded in credential history This default is a read only field and cannot be changed Lost Lost credential transactions are always recorded in credential history This default is a read only field and cannot be changed Monitor Valid Enable this field if you want valid credential transactions to display on the Activity Monitor form Invalid Enable this field if you want invalid credential transactions to display on the Activity Monitor form Lost Enable this field if you want lost credential transactions to display on the Activity Monitor form Printer Note The enabling and sel
271. es local to this ACU controller Local Area Access Multiple Area Access Multiple Area No Access e Delay Arm Disarm Select from a drop down list of available delay arm disarm types local to this ACU controller Arm Disarm Delay Entry with Delay Exit with Delay This feature provides a mechanism similar to central station home burglar alarm processing Monitor points can be assigned a delay time during which the alarms can be monitored on off armed disarmed without generating an alarm report Comments Use this field to enter a location description or special considerations for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 65 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 133 Devices Define digital inputs Use the Digital Input form Security Devices group to modify a digital input record Digital inputs are physical sensing devices such as door sensors or motion sensors used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a controller When a controller record is created digital input records are also created Refer to DI module record creation on page 88 You cannot delete digital input records The digital inputs are managed by the associated controller record The number of digital inputs is based on the controller you set up and modules that the controller
272. es in Table 88 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Schedule tab Note These options are selectable for systems using Micro controllers These options are available for nonlogical alarms associated with ACU controllers Use this tab to assign schedules for monitoring and printing alarms Time schedules define intervals that include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the alarm monitoring or printing changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the alarm monitoring or printing returns to the nonscheduled value Figure 65 Schedule tab Table 89 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices O e SE SSS es Alarm e Description 4 Facility X Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Monitoring Time schedule m Print alarm Time schedule Element Description Monitoring Time schedule Click the drop down list to select a time schedule On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want to monitor alarms or Off if the above schedule is when you do not want to monitor alarms Print Alarm Time schedule Click the drop down list to select a time schedule Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want to print alarms or No if the above schedule is when you do not want to print alarms How to 1 Review the guide
273. es in Table 90 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Select this tab to view information about the selected alarm as currently stored in the controller s database This status reflects any changes made by schedules on this alarm This is a read only windowpane in two column format as follows Chapter 4 Devices Figure 67 Status tab e Description I Facility X Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Last status date Last status time Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh may take a moment to complete Refresh Ia fo Table 91 Form fields Element Description Micro controller status Alarm Group Displays the alarm group to which the alarm is assigned Alarm Monitor Displays whether this alarm is routed to the Alarm Monitor form ACU controller status Reset Displays either Closed or Open Alarm Displays Closed or Open Tamper Displays Cut or Short Last status date Displays the date when the status was last requested Last status time Displays the time when the status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information for this alarm from the controller It may take a moment to complete the refresh of the data A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connect
274. es not have any API connections 3 Is not a Thin Client 4 Is not a backup client or have any backup clients of its own 5 Is not a CCTV client 6 Is not hosting a Guard Tour 7 Client form Enable Auto Shutdown is selected Licensing controls the number of computers that can host FCWnx sessions If a particular client is shut down that license is now available for another client computer to be designated an FCWnx client and run the FCWnx application If not all clients require a license at the same time you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate computers 51 52 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 28 Form fields continued Element Description Ping Time msec e Interval This is the interval of time a broadcast message is sent indicating a client is online Default is 40 000 This field does not accept an entry less than 5 000 msec e Timeout The amount of time that elapses between broadcast message and response before the system considers a client offline The client status display on the Client Monitor form Default is 120 000 This field does not accept an entry less than three times the Interval amount specified ACTIVITY PRINTING CAUTION Windows 2003 or WinXP Professional Operating Systems If the printer you have selected is hosted by a computer running a Windows 2003 or WinXP Professional operating system you must add permissions to share this printer to the FCWn
275. es the video media service This service is dependent on the System Manager and automatically starts when the Manager service starts FCWnx Media Server is handled entirely by FCWnx Webservice This service requires no user intervention and starts and stops automatically FCWnx API Service is used when using an API interface This service is used when an external system is sending or receiving transactions by way of Application Program Interface to this application This service can be started manually at the time you install an API interface Note Changing the state of services without a good working knowledge of the purpose can cause the computer to act erratically Refer to Facility Commander Wnx edition services on page 4 383 384 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description Swipe and Show Note Only one instance of Swipe and Show is available for display on a computer at one time If readers have not been selected the program does not start If Imaging is not licensed for the system this option is not available The Swipe and Show program is a monitoring and validation option available on the Activity Monitor form When properly configured and following a credential transaction the operator is able to observe a credential photo and text description of the transaction in the Swipe and Show window An operator is able to monitor transactions and compare the ph
276. etwork Direct Facility ignore Facilities Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Port Settings rm Direct Configuration Controller Description Micro COM port X r Network Configuration m Primary Network P Address m Network Name m Secondary Network P Address Network Name Element Description Direct Configuration COM port You are able to change this setting ONLY if the controller connection type is direct connect or network direct Otherwise this field is unavailable From the drop down list select the COM port to which this controller is connected The system operates with the default setting of None if no port is designated Network Configuration Primary Network Note You must complete ONE of the following two selections These fields are available ONLY if the controller is other than a direct connect or dial up controller IP Address Select this option and then enter the IP address for network configuration Network Name Select this option and then enter the network name for the controller that hosts this controller Chapter 4 107 Devices Table 55 Form fields continued Element Description Secondary Network Note You must complete ONE of the following two selections IP Address Select this option and then enter the
277. evators group to associate a description to a floor number Facility A facility can be designated for the new Floor record from the Facility drop down list 178 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual y Fora shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Floor tab Use this tab to create a description for a floor Figure 77 Floor tab e oy A Floor Description Floor Selection 3 Table 102 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a description for the floor Floor Selection Click the drop down list of numbers to select a floor number or enter the floor number using your keyboard Duplicate numbers are acceptable Micro controller The drop down list for assigning a floor to a description accepts two character floor numbers and a maximum of 64 floors ACU Controller If your system is licensed and configured with an ACU controller the drop down list for assigning a floor to a description accepts three character floor numbers and a maximum of 128 floors How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 102 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define elevators Use this form in the Elevators group to define elevators Decide which method of elevator control you want to use Chapter 4 179 Devices Methods of elevator
278. eview the guidelines in Table 160 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Also see Mass update on page 268 for simultaneously updating properties on a group of records within this application 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab A credential record must be selected in order to enable this tab This windowpane provides an immediate status of the selected credential according to the information in the controller database Note This is a diagnostic tool The status displayed here is verification that a credential modification has actually taken place in the database according to a change in the Status as modified on the Credential Definition tab Figure 118 Credential status tab e Description LS Facility y Credential Definition Credential Status User Fields Controller Micro y Credential Status APB Status Use the Status button to retrieve the credential status from the selected controller Status Table 161 Form fields Element Description Controller Select a controller from the drop down list of available controllers in facilities assigned to this operator and then click Status The selected controller must be online in order to display a Status windowpane conveying information about the selected credential Credential Status Displays the current status according to the controller database Note A suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Crede
279. ext If applicable to your system continue with Chapter 8 Guard tours on page 279 277 278 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 8 Guard tours This chapter provides an overview when configuring your facility for Guard Tours Complete the steps as presented In this chapter OBP co a id eh dee pk CIA PEES CEEE tad 280 IET Guard FOUTS id A td e ai 280 Delne TORTS HORNS ac ii ii ia dew died eae tae 283 Whats ne a Oe wb hie A wh MG al eGo Soe Gee ws 285 280 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview Note This feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers A Guard Tour is an inspection of your facility premises made by a security officer at random intervals The officer stops at pre determined tour points along the way where a credential must be presented to a reader or hit a DI point so that the system can track the tour progress Each time the officer presents a credential to a reader a tour point is hit Define Guard Tours This feature is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers Note The Guard Tour form Guard Tours group is enabled if you are licensed for Guard Tour Also see the Manual Control form Guard tour tab on page 322 Conditions of the Guard Tour feature e Tour Point form must be configured before a Guard Tour record is configured Refer to Define tours points on page 283 e A Guard Tour must be confi
280. ey may want to view previously recorded video for a specific date and time which is not necessarily when the event occurs Video can be searched by e System Event Searches for events that occurred on readers or alarm intrusion digital inputs e DVR Event Searches video on specific DVRs or cameras DVR General Playback Searches by specific dates and times DVR Motion Searches a region of interest in a motion area How to search by system event 1 From the Action menu select Search Video The Search Video window displays 2 Select the System Event Search tab The search criteria includes start and end dates start and end times readers alarm intrusion digital inputs and event tags Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips 3 Use the Start Date and End Date fields to narrow the dates to search The current date is the default setting To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to select the day Click OK 213 214 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 4 Use the Start Time and End Time fields to further narrow the search To change the start and end times enter the hour and minutes in the field Use the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm 5 Click Reader to select the appropriate reader where the system event occurred 6 Click Alarm Intrusion DIs to sele
281. eypad Arm Disarm option is to set to None the Area cannot be disarmed but the readers do allow access When the Area is entered an alarm is reported This may not be the configuration that is intended Ifyou have no intention of arming disarming the Area you have two choices to control these alarms 1 Manually turn off monitoring on the alarms 2 Set local keypad masking to Local or Global leven though you do not have an IKE reader and control the access to the Area by manual control Disarm Digital Output Enter or select a number that represents the digital output relay associated with this Area alarm This entry can be a number between 0 and 175 The default is 0 that is no digital output is activated for this alarm Refer to the ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers Installation Guide for additional information regarding index numbers assigned to digital outputs as presented to the ACU controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 136 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital output tab This tab is enabled for SCIF Areas only Use this tab to assign or unassign digital outputs associated with this Area record This is a multi record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available digital output points not already assigned to another Area Four State Supervision rules apply regardless of the Armed Disarmed state of the Area
282. f 1 and maximum of 20 characters Additional password preferences were set on the Password tab of the Preference form Confirm Password Enter the password a second time exactly as entered in the Password field Note IMPORTANT The assigned password cannot match any previous five passwords Operator login passwords are case sensitive Because it is difficult to retrieve it is important for operators to remember their assigned password or write it down and store in a safe place Permission to Change Password If this check box is selected the operator indicated in this record has the option to change the login password If this checkbox is clear the option to change the login password is unavailable to this operator Expiration Password never expires If selected the password assigned to the current operator never expires If this checkbox is not selected the two remaining fields are available Expires in days This field is not available if Password never expires is selected From the drop down list of available time periods select number of days that pass before the password assigned to the current operator expires The selections are 30 60 90 120 or 180 days Warn prior to expiration days This field is not available if Password never expires is selected Enter or select the number of days before the expiration of the operator s password that a warning message displays indicating that the assigned operator password is abo
283. f the Reader form select a Door schedule entitled BocaHQ Normal Workweek from the drop down list of Time schedules 3 Select Unlock The result is that the selected reader unlocks the door based on the time schedule as configured for BocaHQ Normal Workweek Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence e Event schedules e Event notifier Quick Setup guide Schedules Event Schedule Refer to Define event schedules on page qs 71 Click the add icon ato begin a new record Enter a unique title for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 3 A facility option can be designated Review Table 41 and create an event using the guidelines listed Click Save before you exit this tab Note You need to assign this event schedule to a device such as a controller see Controller form Events tab or a reader see the Reader form Reader Type Events tab Example BocaHQ Weekend Begins indicates a facility specific event schedule where BocaHOo refers to a geographic location For example you could create an event beginning each Friday at 6 00 P M that resets the APB status and the T amp A status and sets a reader to Credential and Keypad Employees coming into the building after 6 P M on Friday are required to present their credential and then key in a PIN number to enter the building Remember that an event stays in effect un
284. fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Configure alarm routing and bumping This form in the Alarms amp Events group allows you to configure the routing of alarms to one or more Client Groups by time schedule or at all times Bumping is a term used to describe forwarding the alarms to an additional location e You must have Client Groups configured beforehand e You can bump an alarm to one or more Client Groups following a time lapse of an unacknowledged and unpurged alarm to the Client Groups selected for routing e Alarm bumping information is displayed on the Alarm Monitor form in the alarm state column Note You may want to review this Sample Scenario before you begin This is a routing and bumping schedule for a business in two buildings administration building and a factory working three shifts Figure 73 Routing and bumping scenario Time Schedules 8am to Spm 5pm to Midnight Midnight to Sam Example An alarm comes in at 8 30am that is configured to be routed to Group 1 The alarm is not purged or acknowledged therefore itis bumped to Group 4 at 8 40am The transaction is written to Alarm History Table 98 Form fields Alarms Route to Group 1 Group 2 Group 2 Alarms Bump to Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Alarms Bump After 10 min 5 min 1 min Group Descriptions Client Work Station WS s Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6
285. figure alarm routing and bumping 0 ccc cee eee 172 PPT CONC CHONS 0 A ee A ERA RE AIAG A 176 a AA E Bk ha Racca H E ER RE we 177 Deme CHV MOIS cbs cine dass anrbadsdwrda ay a k Gawrdd A 178 WU TRE CIE A A o dai 186 84 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview Before you proceed make sure that your peripheral system hardware is installed and running Refer to the installation instructions for your brand of hardware Device configuration The following order is recommended for completion of device configuration 1 O p S NY OA SS 10 Note Create controller records Additional device records can be configured following the creation of controller records Refer to Controllers overview on page 84 Configure reader records Refer to Define readers on page 112 Configure digital inputs Refer to Define digital inputs on page 133 Set up alarm instructions Refer to Define instructions on page 151 Configure alarm records Refer to Define alarms on page 153 Configure alarm groups Refer to Define alarm groups on page 167 Configure digital outputs Refer to Define digital outputs on page 143 Configure digital output groups Refer to Define instructions on page 151 Configure elevators Refer to Define elevators on page 178 Configure DVRs Refer to Define digital video recorders on page 188 Configure cameras Refer to Define cameras on page 198 12 13 14 15 Start controller communic
286. figure the DVR Refer to the manuals received with your DVR for hardware setup and installation specifics A sample scenario is displayed below Figure 82 Triplex video setup A ProBridge PTZ data translation device is not required for DVMR triplex models A KTD 405 Keyboard B Terminal Block C Kalatel DVMR Triplex D Video Surveillance Monitors E Stationary and or Dome Cameras F 10 100Mb Ethernet TCP IP Network 3 Configure DVR devices DVR devices can be hosted on the Server computer for this application and or client workstations The actual number of DVR devices hosted on each Server computer may vary Distributing DVR hosting across multiple computers may be required for optimizing system performance in your specific application Create preset records Configure cameras Set up event triggers OPTIONAL Set up alarm Graphics AA 190 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual DVR Digital Video Recorder DVR A generic reference to CCTV equipment that can provide digital video multiplexing and or recording The Video Console system program accessible from the Operations menu allows you to monitor and control video for multiple DVRs and their associated cameras Digital Video Viewer can also be accessed on the toolbar for this application by clicking this icon from the toolbar Note On the Digital Video Viewer window click Help for additional information about the program Additionally refer to th
287. figure the default ONLY those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass update changes are enabled in Mass Update mode Navigating from any form to another form in Mass Update mode takes that form out of Mass Update mode Person Form The following fields are available for mass update Facility Personnel Type Department and Access Rights See Define persons on page 247 Credential Form The following fields are available for mass update Assign To Status Dates Issue Dates Expiration and Dates Return See Define credentials on page 262 When changing an assigned credential to unassigned the status automatically changes to Issuable When changing status to Issuable a message displays a Yes or No option If Yes the status automatically changes to Issuable and selected credentials are unassigned When changing an unassigned credential status is Issuable to an assigned person the status changes to Active Records selected for mass update with a status changing to anything other than Issuable causes a check for credential assignment If any credential in the mass update selection is not currently assigned these credential records become unavailable and a message displays indicating they are unavailable 269 270 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Define credential alias Note This form is available only if aliasing option was selected during initial Server installation Use the Credential
288. folder e Free disk space that equals at least three times the size of your database backup file e The sa password available e Sufficient time and patience to complete the procedure To append data 1 Open the Maintenance Utility and select Append from the menu bar Navigate to the drive on the local computer where the backup file is located Select the folder in which the backup file is located Select Archive from the Backup Source File list Drag and drop the backup Archive file to the Archive Databases Only dialog box Enter the sa password Click Append RADA E O The Append process can take a considerable amount of time depending on the size of the backup During the Append process the application looks like it is not responding This is normal 9 When you have finished using the data we recommend that you delete the appended data using the Preference form Clear Archive tab This keeps the current Archive file from becoming too large in size Restoring databases Complete instructions for Restore functions are detailed in the Installation Manual Restoring your databases depends on your system and how you performed your backups Note Professional Edition If you have a backup of this application s databases the data can be restored using the Maintenance Utility Security tab This tab allows you to select the preferences for passwords used in the FCWnx system Figure 8 Security tab Preference q e
289. form Clear Clear all credential transactions 291 292 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 173 Form fields continued Element Description Reader List Display an Edit Readers List dialog The Edit Readers List displays Available and Assigned readers that are enabled for monitoring Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the dialog box Swipe and Show Start the Swipe and Show program This option is not available if the system is not licensed for Imaging or readers have not been selected Help Displays the online Help system Activity Monitor shortcut menu The Activity Monitor shortcut menu consists of the following options Table 174 Form fields Element Description Resume Starts the scrolling of credential transactions This option is active only if you previously selected Pause All credential transactions display that occurred while the Pause option was on once you select Resume Pause Suspends scrolling of credential transactions on the Activity Monitor Clear Clears all credential transactions from the Activity Monitor Swipe and Show Readers Select to display an Edit Readers List assignment form Select those readers you want
290. forming you that your system is up to date Configure Ports Select this option to configure firewall and DCOM settings on your computer 15 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 7 File menu continued Element Description Change Password The Change Password option opens the Change Password Dialog Box that allows you to change the password of the operator currently logged in Note This dialog box is available only if this operator has permission to change the operator password as assigned on the Operator tab of the Operator form Exit Click to display a dialog box Enter your logoff ID and Password to quit the FCWnx client program Table 8 Search menu Element Description Clear Search The Clear Search option clears all data in the current form Use this option when the form has data and you want to begin a new search The option does not conduct a search nor does it affect any data in the database It only clears data from the form in preparation for a search or cancels a change to a record The Clear Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open Recall Search The Recall Search option refills the current form with the last search criteria data Use this option when you want to recall the last search criteria This option does not conduct a search or affect any data in the database The Recall Search option is available only when a form that contains re
291. from which to choose and assign to this controller e Clear formats in controller Click to clear all custom credential formats from the controller Credentials associated with those formats no longer work If you change the credential format any format that existed in the controller previously is replaced 2 Start flashing controller s This option starts flashing the selected controller s with the latest firmware A dialog box displays asking you to verify your request The flashing process takes approximately two to three minutes it varies with amount of data that needs to be transmitted to the controller Upgrades Micro controllers This application software communicates with controllers flashed with Secure Perfect 4 X and later firmware All offline credential and alarm transactions are uploaded to the Server computer after the Chapter 9 Monitor and control conversion process and stored in the appropriate history table Allow all the offline transactions to be processed before flashing controllers to the FCWnx firmware to minimize data loss The duration of time to upload is dependent on the number of transactions stored and the length of time that the Server computer does not communicate with the controllers This might be a few minutes or several hours ACU controllers There are two ways of getting the FCWnx firmware into the ACU panels following a conversion from a Diamond II system 1 Copy the firmware file from the FCWnx
292. g is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video at the camerals current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the camerals record rate to its event record rate settings Chapter 5 Video Table 121 Form fields continued Element Description Assign Alarms Click to display an Alarm Assignment window enabling you to select and assign unassign an alarm record for this Event Trigger record The Alarm Assignment window displays a list of alarms in the system for this application for the facilities available for assignment by this operator All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Auto Pop up Select this check box to enable an automatic live video pop up window when an alarm occurs associated with this alarm trigger Additionally the Enable Alarm Video Popup must be enabled on the View menu If this operator s Permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available this option does not activate even though selected here Also refer to Enable alarm video popup How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 121 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Enable alarm video popup View menu Select this i
293. g on the references set on the Advanced tab of the Preference form Use preceding zeros if necessary to create the appropriate number of digits Follow Extend Alarm Sense Time e Select this option to enforce Extend Alarm Sense Time for this credential record If you assigned this credential to a person from the Assigned to drop down list this person is now allowed extra time to gain access to an entry or exit point in the system Time limitations are configured on the Door Functions tab of the Reader form e If this credential is being assigned to a person whose existing record indicates that Extend Alarm Sense Time is enforced this check box displays as already selected Example An extended time limit beyond normal can be configured for an employee who enters a motorized door by wheelchair or any individual that requires additional time to pass through a doorway Follow Conditional Unlock This option configures this credential to follow the conditional unlock configuration of the Person form If this is a new credential you must manually select this option Select to enable this feature if you are allowing this credential to access the facility although the facility may be locked due to a mode change or event that caused a normal schedule override such as a plant closing for inclement weather Dates Click calendar to select a date Issue The date the credential was assigned and issued to a person Expiration The fi
294. g the camera presets for this camera 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 5 201 Video Define event triggers Event tagging overview When a digital video camera is activated and associated with a reader event or alarm event the recording for that activity is tagged During this tagging process the camera remains actively recording and then archives the recording to disk Once recorded the recording can be retrieved by a search option based on the event tag If the Event Trigger that activated the tagging was defined as Tag as event instead of Tag only the DVR would have changed recording rate to a special event recording rate for a period of time as predefined during the DVR setup and configuration When tagged events are identified by a search retrieved and viewed the video playback begins at the start of the event and continues playing until you elect to discontinue the playback Event triggers must be created on the Event Trigger form to define the logical rules that initiate event driven video response Video Event Trigger form The Event Trigger form Alarms amp Events group opens with the Preset Camera tab displayed An event consists of a camera and either readers alarms or zone activity A trigger causes an event or program routine to be executed depending on what options you set on the tabs of this form Intrusion Zone activities can also trigger an event Example A camera begins recording in respo
295. gain access to an APB OUT reader e TA In Invalid Current credential TSA current status of IN and attempted to gain access to T amp A IN reader TA Out Invalid Current credential TSA current status of OUT and attempted to gain access to a TSA OUT reader e Valid Floor Elevator control with floor tracking is being used and the person was granted access to the selected floor e Invalid Floor Elevator control with floor tracking is being used and the person was not granted access to the selected floor Duress Valid Grant Access on Duress is active on this system selected on the Preference form and door access was granted with a valid credential This selection allows a duress alarm to be generated when a PIN code is entered and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 e Duress Invalid Grant Access on Duress is not active on this system not selected on the Preference form and an attempted door access with a PIN code and one of the following a Micro controllers with the final digit incremented by 1 That is 1239 becomes 1230 b ACU controllers with the entire number incremented by 5 That is 1239 becomes 1244 e Duress Valid Open Grant Access on Duress is active on this system selected on the
296. ging set the aspect ratio Set console alarm sounds Configure for line coloring for suspended credentials Enable T amp A and APB if applicable for your system If this is a conversion or upgrade you can select Enable unique and required Employee Number Select if you want to enable Grant Access On Duress O OY E EA 1 Configure if you want Alarm E mail Notification 10 Click Save before you exit this tab User Fields tab Complete this tab to modify the labels for user fields These labels are used on the Person form and Credential form Figure 3 User fields tab Settings User Fields Mode Labels Address Fields Communication Settings Clear Archive Security Advanced r Person User Fields r Credential User Fields User Field 1 Credential User Field 1 User Field 2 Credential User Field 2 User Field 3 Credential User Field 3 User Field 4 Credential User Field 4 User Field 5 Credential User Field 5 User Field 6 Credential User Field 6 User Field 7 Credential User Field 7 User Field 8 Credential User Field 8 User Field 9 Credential User Field 9 User Field 10 Credential User Field 10 User Field 11 Credential User Field 11 User Field 12 Credential User Field 12 User Field 13 Credential User Field 13 User Field 14 Credential User Field 14 User Field 15 Credential User Field 15 User Field 16 Fa Credential User Fiel e
297. gned Preset Camera box Remove Select then click Remove to remove a Preset and Camera combination from the list of available combinations in the Assigned Preset Camera box This option is disabled if there are no existing records How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 119 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Readers tab Select reader s and transaction type s that become the source for initiating the Event Trigger Chapter 5 203 Video Figure 91 Readers tab e Description Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone A Assigned Readers M Transactions C Tag as event VV Valid J7 Invalid IZ Unknown Y Lost m Tag Selection C None C Tag only Table 120 Form fields Element Description Assigned Readers This pane displays readers assigned to this Event Trigger record Assign Readers Click to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this Event Trigger Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Transactions Select any or all of the options as types of reader transactions to trigger an event e Valid e Invalid e Unknown e Lost For additional information regarding reade
298. goff ID and Password e To start the FCWnx client program from the File menu e To quit the FC Wnx client program using the Close button in the top right corner of the FCWnx window Note The default Login logout ID is secure and the default Password is master If you purchased your system from GE Security the default ID and Password are set for you UPGRADES Versions of Secure Perfect 4 0 and earlier did not require case sensitive default login passwords When upgrading from a version of Secure Perfect or earlier you may experience a problem logging in If you have never changed it your system default password may be set to initial caps as in Master and not master Logoff The Logoff option on the File menu allows you to log off of FCWnx without closing the program A message box displays Click OK to log off of the FCWnx application logging off allows an operator to log off and another operator to log in without ending the program or Cancel to cancel the logoff process While logged off no one can enter data into FCWnx however FCWnx continues to communicate with the controllers store alarm and credential transactions in the history database and notify you of alarms based on your facility assignment Refer to the Client form for information on turning alarm notifications on and off The FCWnx services are still running but you do not receive any alarm notifications DO NOT shut down services unless you are instructed or the syste
299. gs tab Use this tab to enable the diagnostic settings Figure 141 Settings tab O Diagnostic Setting e Description Settings J7 Enable debug messages rm Logfiles C Program Files GE FCWwns logs test BCTEXDKO71 C Program Files GE FCWns logs FCWnx spl BCTEXDKO71 C Program Files GE FCWns logs FCWnx spl INFRA_16C1241 EN Table 197 Form fields Element Description Enable debug messages Select this box to enable monitoring for the selected diagnostic object Logfiles Default and newly created logfile names display in the Logfiles windowpane Select a file name from the list of files displayed to which you are assigning this component for monitoring By assigning a component object to write to a particular logfile you are removing that object from the list of components that write to the default logfile 348 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 197 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save to save your new settings before you exit this tab 3 When you open the Diagnostic Viewer the activities of your selected component display in the logfile to which it is assigned Those items with the COM and Line as part of the component name have the highest effect on system performance and hard drive usage Although you may want to monitor several objects at the same time this results in a large number of messages and comprom
300. guration points that display are limited to the active Region You cannot edit a Guard Tour Point if it is assigned to a Guard Tour Add Click to configure a new Tour Point record Delete Click to delete a selected Tour Point record from the list in the windowpane on the right that is no longer required and is not assigned to an existing Guard Tour If this is a Global configuration points that display are limited to the active Region Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Enter a unique or suggestive description for this tour point Facility Assign a facility option from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator If you do not select a facility Ignore Facilities is assigned for you Tour Point tab Configure a reader or digital input You cannot save this record until you have completed the Tour Point tab NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Tour Point tab A tour point can be a reader or digital input You must select one option before you can save this point record Chapter 8 285 Guard tours Figure 124 Tour Point tab Tour Point e Description Facility v Tour Point C Reader Digital Input y Table 171 Form fields Element Description Reader If you selected Reader this field is available Select a reader from the drop down list of available reade
301. gured before a physical tour can begin e All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region Refer to Global configuration regional rules on page 44 e Tour points can be both readers and DIs e The same credential must complete the entire tour A credential can only be assigned to one tour at a time e The credential read does not grant access or cause an invalid alarm e Double hit points by the tour credential along the tour result in invalid tour transactions e A tour begins when the Start Point is hit or manually started by the operator at a computer running this application e A tour ends when all points assigned to the tour are hit or at the expiration of the time assigned for the duration of the tour Also a tour can be ended manually by the operator at a computer running this application e An alarm is generated if a tour is not completed within the assigned maximum tour time e Credential transactions are stored in credential history and available to generate reports e DI tour points are assigned to only one tour e Credentials must be assigned to a tour in order to be a tour credential Table 168 Form fields Description Delete Delete a selected Guard Tour record from the list in the windowpane on the right that is no longer required or applicable The associated alarm record for this Guard Tour is simultaneously deleted If a tour is in progress this record cannot be deleted or
302. h of time to wait for a response after a request prior to retrying if no response has been returned Retry Interval Enter the length of time to wait between retries Retry Count Enter the number of retries to attempt before qualifying a communications failure 191 192 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 109 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Communication Settings tab Use this tab to assign or edit a TCP IP address PTZ control event tagging and clock time synchronization Figure 84 Communication Settings tab Digital Yideo Recorder e Description test Facility Ignore Facilities oal Definition Communications Settings video Display Status m DVR Address TCP IP Address 5 E PTZ Control None TCPAP m Event Tagging None TCP IP None C 1 Hour C 4 Hours Time Sync Interval 8 Hours C 12 Hours C 24 Hours Table 110 Form fields Element Description TCP IP Address Assign or edit the TCP IP network address for the DVR Username Enter the same user name configured locally in the DVR for authenticating connectivity This is not a required field The default is no username however be aware that the DVR form and DVR device must be identical If you do not assign a user name in the application but the DVR has a configured username ther
303. happens when the following two conditions are met 1 If the alarm is not configured for Operator acknowledge on the Alarm form 2 Logical alarms are system generated and configurable They cannot be a cut or shorted Examples Invalid credential alarm Lost credential alarm Duress credential alarm Host Comm alarm Encryption alarms Failover alarms This differs from a physical alarm that is generated by an actual input device Figure 128 Alarm Monitor 4 Alarm Monitor OR lol x Alarm State Priority Description Reference Process State Count Host Date Time Device Date Time alarm 0001 1 02 Read 152160009645 P Unacknow 14 10 06 2006 11 10 06 2006 11 Instruction Response Response Acknowledge Using the Alarm Monitor form Note For a shortcut menu to the functions available within the Alarm Monitor form or to a related form click the right mouse button within the first windowpane where the alarms display or the second pane where the messages display Not all options are available You must select an alarm activity with a camera association in order to enable video options on the shortcut menu Chapter 9 Monitor and control There are three sections to the Alarm Monitor form 1 The top section or pane lists the alarms 2 The second pane lists any instructions assigned to the current highlighted alarm 3 The third pane allows you to respond to an alarm
304. he Alarm Monitor form Edit Click to re assign or revise an existing encrypted Custom exchange key for a selected controller It is possible to assign a duplicate exchange key on separate controllers in your FCWnx system When you click this button one time this button label changes to Auto Generate Auto Generate Click this button to system generate a Custom exchange key We recommend that you record this number You can now enter this key into the controller preference block at the controller 99 100 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 50 Form fields continued Element Description Data Key Data Encryption is additional security assigned to protect the Host to controller exchange of information The data messages are encrypted FCWnx supports two methods of data encryption standards DES and DESIII e DES This option uses a single pass of authentication and 16 unique hex characters are required When you select this method only one dialog box is available for input Enter 16 unique hex characters in this binary field We recommend that you do not repeat any character The additional two dialog boxes are unavailable for entry e DES III This method of encryption uses a three pass authentication process Starting at the left the first pass authenticates 16 hex characters The second pass authenticates 16 hex characters The third pass authenticates all 48 hex characters Enter 48 unique hex characters in the
305. he controller before dialing in again The default number of minutes is 180 Dial Out Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list during which the controller automatically dials the host to upload transactions When Maximum disconnect time expires the controller dials the host only if this time schedule is active Note This setting operates independently from alarm reporting and dialing the host if selected on the Alarm form for systems using Micro controllers Enter the number from 1 to 9 of 30 second intervals that the controller waits in between each dial to the host For example if you specify 2 then the controller waits 2 x 30 60 seconds between each dial to the host Dial Interval Select the interval none 1 hour 8 hours 12 hours and 24 hours at which the controller automatically dials the host The controller dials at the bottom of the hour For example if you select the 1 hour interval the controller would dial at 4 30 5 30 and continue every hour after How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 56 and complete the fields on this tab according to the controller type that you are configuring 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 109 Devices Settings to reach controller tab Note This tab displays ONLY when you are configuring a dial up head of line controller Use this tab to configure how the host dials the controller Figure 38 Settings to Reach Controller
306. he digital input as On Off or Trouble e On means that the digital input point is in the Active state as defined on the Digital Input Status form e Off means that the digital input point is Inactive as defined on the Digital Input Status form e Trouble means that the digital input point has been cut or shorted Physical State Displays the physical state of the digital input point e Open means that the contact is open e Closed means that the contact is closed e Cut means that the line has been cut Short means that the line is shorted Date Displays the date that the status was requested Time Displays the time that the status was requested How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 187 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital output status The Digital Output Status form Monitors and Controls group provides a snapshot of the current digital output status in the controllers A digital output represents an external device such as lights sirens and door strikes that may be connected to the controller Status tab This form displays the status of the selected digital outputs according to the information in the controller s database by Reader DO or other DOs by controller or for all controllers 311 312 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 132 Status tab Wf Digital Output Status AE Status Select DO Type Select Controlle
307. he right arrow to assign an available elevator e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an elevator The elevators that display in this list are those that are configured on the Elevator form Assigned floors This windowpane displays the floors assigned to the current access right Table 143 Form fields continued Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Assign Floors Click this button to display the Floor Assignment dialog box and select from a list of floors available for assignment by this operator Only floors assigned to the selected elevators are available for assignment If no floors are listed verify that the floors have been configured on the Floor form The Floor Assignment window displays when you click Assign Floors enabling you to select and assign a floor association for this form Only floors assigned to the selected elevators are available for assignment Only floors in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available floor e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a floor The floors that display in this list are those that are configured on the Floor form How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 143 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital Output Groups tab Note This tab is enab
308. his tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab Select this tab to display information about the digital input as stored in the controller s database such as its sense time 141 142 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 52 Status tab e Description I Facility El Digital Input Digital Output DO Groups Schedule Events i Last status date Last status time Use the Refresh button to refresh the data on this page Please note that a refresh may take a moment to complete Refresh j X EN I Table 72 Form fields Element Description Sense Time The sense time as of the last status date and time Enabled Yes No Whether the digital input is enabled or disabled as of the last status date and time Last status date The date on which the status was last requested Last status time The time that status was last requested Refresh Click to receive the current status information for this digital input How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 72 2 Request the latest information by clicking Refresh It may take a moment to process refreshing the data Note A status refresh on a controller that is offline is never returned Chapter 4 Devices Define digital outputs Use the Digital Output form Security Devices group to search and view or modify an existing digital output record A digital output represents an
309. ialog box displays a message e Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the update process or click Cancel to close the dialog box and process the upgrade at another time e If you click OK to begin the update a Wise Update Wizard begins the update process A series of windows displays Follow the prompts When the update is completed the Wise Update Wizard prompts you to reboot e If the Web site cannot be reached a message informs you that communication failed Recheck your update configuration settings and try again e If no new updates are available for your system a message displays informing you that your system is up to date Diagnostics overview This application accessed in the Diagnostics group provides an extensive and convenient diagnostic utility to turn the monitoring of the FCWnx system components on and off To display debug messages in the Diagnostics Log within this application the diagnostics for that component you want to monitor must be turned on Each client computer has a set of diagnostic objects that represent what can be monitored on that computer Specific objects are particularly helpful to Engineering when diagnosing an issue For each client this application creates a default logfile others can be created for each day of the week such aS EEFriday spl This file is overwritten each week thus creating a new log for that day During normal operation of this application informational as well as debug mes
310. ic tool used in conjunction with this application Diagnostic Viewer allows you to view the contents of the application diagnostic log files apply filters to limit the information displayed and search for a specific log entry Each day this application writes messages to a diagnostic log file Refer to Diagnostic Viewer program on page 351 Diamond II Diamond II DII is a Browser based Facility Security System for access control alarm monitoring DIAMOND II Color Graphics photo badging and CCTV control FCWnx combines the features of Secure Perfect and Diamond Il software with a whole new look Features are enabled on the application forms according to the controller hardware and system that you purchased and licensed encryption See DES DESIII on page 380 facility The FCWnx database can be partitioned and grouped These groupings are identified as Facilities If Facilities are not defined all operators are able to access all the FCWnx records based on the permissions associated with the form Reminders e Facility partitioning does not involve access rights or who goes where e The same facility is assigned for all devices associated with the controller when a controller is created e Reports can be generated based on the currently active facility or all facilities assigned to the current operator e GLOBAL SYSTEMS To view transactions outside of your region you must have in your active facility the client s facility wher
311. icates if this reader uses door strikes equipped with Lock Monitor switches If this option is not selected the reader does not monitor the lock Enable Magnetic Lock Bond Sensor This feature makes special provisions for compatibility with Bond Sensor outputs of Locknetics mag locks If this option is not selected this door does not use the lock sensor Note This feature is only supported on readers controlled by ACU2 controllers using the RRE Reader module It should only be used with the Locknetics Model 101ATSDSMMBS Magnetic Lock or approved equivalents IKE Readers Basic Keypad Display Functions When this option is selected the reader displays a 32 character LCD display that can use various text messages These messages are prompts such as ARMED DENIED or TRY AGAIN If this option is not selected messages do not display Enhanced Keypad Display Function This option is selected by default When this option is selected another level of security is added allowing the user to swipe a credential through the reader rather than entering the number It can also be used with or without a PIN number after the credential number Enable Local Alarm Zone Bypass This option is available only when Enhanced Keypad Display Functions is selected When this option is selected the user is allowed to swipe a credential through the reader or enter a PIN to disarm an alarm e Area Arm Disarm Select from a drop down list of available arm disarm typ
312. icking on it Capabilities include e Live video can be sent to multiple video consoles e Video Console can be automatically launched with live and recorded video when an alarm event occurs e Multiple video streams from multiple DVRs can be sent to the Video Console e Multiple camera views allow an operator to select two up four up nine up or sixteen up views e Recorded video is available to multiple Video Consoles e A single frame of recorded video can be viewed e Video can be searched by date and time play position or token If the camera has PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom capabilities you can use the mouse to control the camera movement This feature is not available if another operator has control of the camera qs 25 qs 26 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 3 Operator tasks continued Element Description Manually Control Dis DOs Areas Refer to Manual control form on page qs 314 Intrusion Zones 1 Click Monitors amp Controls group 2 Click Manual Control icon The Manual Control form allows the operator to perform the following depending on the operator s facilities and permissions e Manually lock unlock doors e Turn on off DO digital output e Monitor on off alarms and alarm groups Enable disable DI inputs e Arm disarm Areas and Intrusion Zones e Change the mode of a controller e Start stop a Guard Tour 3 Refer to the individual tab controls for
313. ient Monitor form the Global and Regional Server are easily identifiable Example Description bcttestpc client to bcteeserver where bcttestpc is the name of the client computer and bcteeserver is the name of the Regional Database Server for this client Facility A facility option can be designated for your new client record from the Facility drop down list Note You must restart the FCWnx client program for changes to the Auto logoff selection to take effect Networking FCWnx requires that you set up a network protocol to allow the server and clients to communicate FC Wnx uses the TCP IP network protocol Chapter 2 49 System preferences You need to validate visibility and connectivity to the client and servers by name resolution FCWnx uses PC Names only The following describes two ways to validate operations e Invoking Ping Select Start then Run At the Open field enter command A DOS like window opens At the prompt enter ping pcname where pcname is the name of the PC to which you are validating visibility and connectivity If you receive a response of an unknown host you need to re examine you TCP IP configuration If you receive a reply the client server is online and available for connection Start Run PC Name Select Start then Run At the Open field enter pcname where pcname is the name of the PC to which you are validating connection If the connection is valid you see the shared folders o
314. ients on the Client form the PCName must exactly match the network name of the computer in order for connection to be made Active Client This column displays an entry when a client failed and a backup client is now hosting its devices e The column displays the currently active hostname e if a backup attempt to a backup client failed the column displays Hostname Backup Failed where Hostname the backup client that was unable to host devices for the failed default host During the process of recovery to the default client the column displays Hostname lt recovering gt This only displays at the default client computer Following a recovery to the default host this column is blank Client Type Type of client FCWnx or CCTV This client can be one of the workstation types as assigned on the Client form See Workstation Type on page 50 Imaging Status Shows whether the client currently has Imaging capabilities To change the Imaging status the client must have a connection status of Not Connected e Enabled This client has Imaging capabilities that is you can capture design and print using this computer e Disabled This client does NOT have Imaging capabilities Thin Client Status Displays whether this client is licensed for Thin Client terminal services 302 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 180 Form fields continued Element Description Connection Status Current status of
315. ies are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available Area e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an Area Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form 256 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 156 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Image capture Note Your photographs and signatures can be created by digital cameras video cameras and signature pads Support for certain Imaging features and functions may be product specific and not necessarily supported by all compatible peripherals Selecting an input device Follow the instructions provided by the device manufacturer for installing an input device Imaging can use any device that has a TWAIN WINTAB or Video for Windows VFW driver installed To select an input device 1 Goto the Personnel group and select Person The Person form displays 2 Select the Photo tab then click Search to display a current list of records 3 Select one of the records in the records list then click Capture Image Signature The Image Capture Application screen displays 4 Using the mouse point to the photo area and right click A context menu displays 5 Select Input Device from the context menu A Select Profile window displays listing the available input devices on your computer By default the in
316. ies is assigned if no other selection is made Chapter 4 Devices Alarm Response tab Use this tab to enter a predefined alarm response This multi line dialog box accepts 64 alphanumeric characters The responses you create and save display as selections on the Alarm Monitor form Figure 60 Alarm Response tab Alarm Response XQ Facility Ignore Facilities Alarm Response Response E 911 How to 1 Complete the field on this tab Examples Police are on their way Maintenance is cleaning up 2 Click Save between each entry and before you exit this tab Define alarms The Alarm form Alarms amp Events group is used to modify an alarm record An alarm is a notification that something has happened within this application An alarm occurs when a defined device such as a digital input changes to a state defined as the alarm state For example if a digital input alarm state is defined as Open in the Active State then an alarm occurs when the state changes to Open Alarms can also be used for noncontroller related events such as CCTV alarms Most alarms are tied to digital output points associated with devices such as switches and motion detectors Note Not all alarms are present at the same time and are determined by the modules installed in the controller When you set up your controller some alarms are automatically set up for you However alarms for digital inputs must be set up manually using the
317. ign events and sense times to this digital input Edit This button is available only if there are currently assigned sense time events Click this button to display the Edit Sense Time dialog box From here you can assign an event and sense time or modify the existing sense time assignment e Event Select an event from the drop down list If there are no events listed you need to configure events using the Event Schedule form e New time Select or enter a sense time The value is in seconds and indicates the delay before triggering an associated digital output or sending in an alarm if the DI type is Alarm This number tells the system how many seconds to wait after sensing the input has changed to Active State Enter 00 to immediately send the transaction to the host notifying the host of a state change Increase the Sense Time entry if using noisy or chattering contacts Example This value could indicate the delay time in seconds that elapses between the time a door contact is broken and the time the output and alarm are triggered If door contact is closed before the sense time elapses the alarm would not come in to this application and the output would not activate Add To add events to the list select an event and click The Edit Sense Time dialog box displays Assign an event and sense time Remove To remove events from the list select an event and click How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 71 and complete t
318. igned the current personnel type Credential designs are created on the Credential Design form If you do not want the credential to imprint the default design the design can be changed when the credential is printed How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 147 and complete the fields on this tab Example You may want all Permanent Personnel to have a Portrait credential la Assign the Description as Permanent 1b Assign the Credential design as Portrait 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define departments The Department form Personnel group allows you to create a department that you can then assign to a person record using the Person form Department selection can also be used to group records when running a Person Report Table 148 Form fields Description Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Department from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator Department tab Use this tab to define Department names within your company Chapter 7 247 Access rights departments persons and credentials Figure 109 Department tab e Facility Department Description Table 149 Form fields Element Description Description This field accepts 64 alphanumeric characters Enter a Department name or edit an existing Department name in your company How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 149 and complete the field on this tab 2
319. ility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment 2 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Security Devices Digital Output Group Refer to Define digital output groups on page qs 149 1 Enter a unique description for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters 2 A facility option can be designated Note If you assign DOs that belong to a different facility you may be creating an undesired result not all DOs are visible under certain facilities 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence e Alarm Instruction e Alarm responses e Alarm Quick Setup guide qs 9 Alarms amp Events Alarm Instruction Refer to Define instructions on page qs 151 g The instructions should belong to the same facility as the transaction with which they are associated Assign a number to the instruction records The range for instructions is O to 254 for a total of 255 instructions Enter the text you want to display when the associated transaction occurs The instruction can be 1 to 500 alphanumeric characters in length Alarms amp Events Response Refer to Define alarm responses on page qs 152 gt 2 3 A facility option can be designated
320. in Date Calendar End Date Calendar Table 146 Form fields Element Description Assigned Areas This list box displays a list of Areas currently assigned to this access right Assign Areas Click to display the Area Assignment dialog box and select from a list of Areas available for assignment by this operator The Area Assignment window displays when you click Assign Areas enabling you to select and assign an Area association Only Areas in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available Area e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an Area Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Table 146 Form fields continued Element Description Area Control Allow access at all times Select if you want the access right to allow access at all times Allow access by schedule Time Schedule The time schedule governs when the access right grants access to the Area The default for all Areas is Always If you want to change the schedule for this Area select a schedule from the drop down list If you need to create a schedule open the Time Schedule form Note ACU controllers support eight Time Schedule intervals per Time Schedule Even if you previously saved a Time Schedule record with more than eight intervals on
321. in Table 61 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Routing Schedule tab The features on this tab are available for readers associated with Micro controllers Use this tab to select the schedules that are used to determine when valid transactions are sent to the history file monitor and or printer Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the routing of the transactions changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the routing of the transactions returns to the nonscheduled value For example if valid transactions are scheduled to route to history the transactions stop being routed to history at the end of the schedule 125 Facility Commander Wnx Edition Figure 43 Routing Schedule tab Reader b Description Facility y Reader Type Schedules Status Reader Door Functions Routing Functions Schedule Advanced Routing Schedule m Valid transactions to history Time schedule VERA C Yes C No m Valid transactions to monitor Time schedule C Yes C No m Valid transactions to printer Time schedule Table 62 Form fields C Yes CoNo Element Description Valid transactions to history Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Yes No Select Yes if the above schedule is when you want valid transactions to be saved
322. ing Schedule Reader Type Schedules Status Advanced Normal Credential On T Credential and PIN Required Py Credential or Keypad Entry PF y Access with Facility Code Py Access with Company Code Py Table 63 Form fields Element Description Normal Credential Only Select an event schedule from the drop down list f this system uses ACU controllers time schedules display This reader is then used as a Normal reader beginning at the time and day given Present your credential Credential and PIN Required Select an event schedule from the drop down list If this system uses ACU controllers time schedules display This reader is then used as a credential and keypad reader beginning at the time and day selected Present your credential and enter a PIN Credential or Keypad Entry Select an event schedule from the drop down list If this system uses ACU controllers time schedules display This reader can be used to present a credential or enter a PIN beginning at the time and day selected Present your credential or enter a PIN The following fields are for systems with ACU controllers Access with Facility Code Access with Facility Code Select a time schedule during which access is granted if the Facility Code on the credential and person record is correct for access to this reader Access with Company Code Access with Company Code Select a time schedule during which access is granted if the Company Code on th
323. ing looks all right on the Micro Utility Form check the hardware settings 1 Click Start Settings and then Control Panel 2 From the Control Panel window double click System then select Device Manager then Ports 3 Check that the baud rate on the host matches the baud rate set for the micro Question My network micro is not working as expected What should I do now Follow the same steps as in COM Port Not Working as discussed above Verify the micro s IP address from the Comm Device field If no problems are identified on the Micro Utility form try pinging the micro using the IP address presented in the Micro Utility form For example c ping 192 9 201 107 If the ping command fails with a Request timed out message verify that the micro IP address is correct that the micro is operational and that all the gateways routers between this computer and the micro are operational You receive a reply screen display Question My domain controller is inaccessible What is happening to the system There may be an occasion when the domain controller is inaccessible In a Global Edition configuration replication continues however be aware that Microsoft SQL Server services MSSQL and SQLA gent have limitations Review the following scenarios Scenario One A Database Server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible SQL services and replication continue normally without in
324. ing the facility of a DI to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment 134 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Digital Input tab Use this tab to configure the selected digital input Figure 47 Digital Input tab amp Digital Input Ss 2 Enabled Table 67 Form fields Element Description Controller Displays the controller description to which this digital input is associated This is a read only field and unavailable for modification Module Displays the controller module number where this digital input is located This is a read only field and unavailable for modification Number Displays the number of the digital input This is a read only field and unavailable for modification Table 67 Form fields continuea Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Type Select the type of DI that you are configuring If you select another Type click Search to update the list box display of associated triggers e Alarm means that this digital input is being used to trigger an alarm e Elevator means this digital input is being used for elevator control e Inactive means this digital input is not being used at this time e Digital Output means this digital input is being used to trigger a digital output and no alarm is generated e Intrusion means this digital input arms disarms an
325. intrusion zone e Guard Tour means this digital input is a point along a pre determined inspection tour of your premises by a security officer Note Digital Input Type of Intrusion can only be made if the previous type was Inactive meaning no other access control digital input was active For example you cannot assign Intrusion type to a DI that was previously set as an Alarm the DI type must first be Inactive Be aware that selection of this type overrides any access control You cannot assign any access control digital outputs digital output groups schedules or events for this record Active State The active state of a selected digital input can be either Closed or Open Note A third option Both displays as grayed out and unavailable for selection unless the DI Type is Guard Tour During a Guard Tour a single state trigger one time hit triggers a DO in both states Closed OR Open Enabled If you selected Digital Output as the Type defined above enable this field to trigger DOs For all other type Digital Inputs this is a read only field enabled and unavailable for modification Sense Time Note If your system is license for ACU controllers this option label reads Delay time Enter or select the amount of time an alarm is delayed from triggering This is used with Arm Delay It is the amount of time allowed to enter the secure Area and disarm the alarms using a reader located inside the Area Minu
326. ion replication continues however be aware that Microsoft SQL Server services MSSQL and SQLA gent have limitations Review the following scenarios Scenario One A Database Server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible Result SQL services and replication continue normally without interruption Scenario Two A Database Server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible The Database Server computer is rebooted Result SQL services and replication continue normally because the assigned security token has not expired for the SQL services domain account There are limitations of which you should be aware 360 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Domain login must have been obtained before the domain controller became inaccessible Consult your IT Administrator for additional discussion about the security token Networking Question If I lost my network connection how do I test and reconnect If you lost cannot see or cannot change your network connection you can re register the Netshel1 d11 file by following these steps 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Open field enter regsvr32 systemroot system32 netshell dll 3 Click OK to display the following Figure 144 netshell dll dialog box x 2 lt gt DilRegisterServer in C WINNT system32 netshell dil succeeded 4 Click OK Verify that you ca
327. ion are created The auto configuration feature anticipates your configuration requirements For example the MPX2000 is a single module micro controller Other modules do not display for selection as shown in the image below This module address is 2 Figure 26 PX2000 configuration Controller e Description px2000 Facility Ignore Facites El Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Port Settings Modules MPx2000 Configuration 0003 0 Default In this example notice the DI records created automatically when the MPX2000 record was saved Figure 27 DI records Digital Inp ioj e Description 0003 00101 A Description Nu Sense Type State 14236 01 01 ACU Reader 1 0 00 Forced Open Facility ignore Facilities X 14236 01 01 ACU Reader 1 0 00 REX Alarm Open 14236 01 02 ACU Reader 2 0 00 Inactive Open Digital Input Digital Output DO Groups Schedule Events Status 14236 02 02 ACUReader 2 0 00 Forced Open 14236 02 02 ACU Reader 2 0 00 REX Alarm Open Controler peo S 14236 02 04 ACU Reader 4 0 00 Inactive Open S 14236 03 03 ACU Reader 3 0 00 Forced Open Module 0003 14236 03 03 ACU Reader 3 0 00 REX Alarm Open 14236 03 06 ACU Reader 6 0 00 Inactive Open Number fi 0003 0 15 Tamper 15 0 00 Alarm Open 0003 0 16 Power 16 0 00 Alarm Open Type Inactive y 0003 0 01 Reader 1 0 00
328. ions are Alarm Event or Text If you select a Text search enter the text such as camera name in the Text field Click Search The Results display with number of matches found camera name start date and time end date and time and type Double click an item in the Results to view the video in the Video Console Click Clear to return to the default settings and remove any matches in the Results pane How to search by time and date Investigators and other operators may want to view previously recorded video for a specific date and time which is not necessarily when the event occurs The Video Console allows you to retrieve recorded video from the DVR which differs from only retrieving a marked video clip from an alarm event To search for video clips 1 Use the navigation pane to locate the DVR storing the video event Chapter 5 215 Video 2 From the Action menu select Search Video The Video Search window displays 3 Select the DVR General Playback tab The search criteria includes recorder camera date and time Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips 4 Use the Recorder drop down list to select the appropriate DVR 5 Use the Camera drop down list to select the appropriate camera 6 The current date displays in the Video Search window To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar
329. ip directories Click to browse for an alternate location in which to store these files Exit Click to exit the Video Console Action menu The Action menu contains the following submenus Table 128 Form fields Element Description Closes All Click to close all currently selected live or recorded video Search Video Click to open the Video Search window where you can search for recorded video events based on the preference criteria specified Save Video To File Click to display Save Video To File dialog where you can select the file format file name and the location in which to save the recorded video When these selections have been made click Start Recording to begin recording Once recording begins this button label changes to Stop Recording Play Video From File Click to display the list of recorded video stored in the VideoClips directory Navigate to the file and select it to begin playing the video Display menu The Display menu contains the following submenus Table 129 Form fields 1Up Click to display video in a single video pane 2 Up Horizontal Click to divide the video viewing area into two panes side by side 2 Up Vertical Click to divide the video viewing area into two panes one on top of the other 4Up Click to divide the video viewing area into four panes 9Up Click to divide the video viewing area into 9 panes 16 Up Click to d
330. is not selected any associated alarm instruction is not included in the message e If this check box is selected and there are no alarm instructions no instructions are included in the message Alarm Reset Text This text is how you want the alarm State to display to the receiver You can do one of the following e Accept the default alarm state entry as displayed in the language of the current operator e Select and replace the existing text with alarm state text in another language such as the language of the receiver You can also add to the text with additional text no more than 32 alphanumeric characters total describing the state Alarm Text Default alarm state text is Alarm displayed in the language of the current operator Reset Text Default alarm reset state text is Reset displayed in the language of the current operator How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 45 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Example Alarm Information The information displayed on the e mail message may look similar to 0151 1 01 DI Alarm 10 16 02 15 20 59 where 0151 1 01 DI Alarm The controller module and reader The alarm state 10 16 01 15 20 59 The controller date and time Define mode schedules Use the Mode Schedules form Schedules group to define the date and time a mode goes into effect The purpose of a mode is to allow the controllers to operate differently than
331. is report form You cannot undo this election however you can later display and assign another report as the default Create Default Template Select this option to create a default Report template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Note Ifa specific date is part of this template it uses that date whenever this report is run therefore it is important to update the calendar criteria as needed Delete Template Select this option to delete the current Report template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template Check for Update This item is enabled when the Enable Auto Update option is selected on the Auto Update Configuration form of the Diagnostics group Each time you log in your system for this application checks for updates Also at any time you may select this item to begin a search of the configured Web site for updates to the system for this application This process searches for new upgrades compares the version and if the patch or update needs to be applied a dialog box displays a message e Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the update process e Click Cancel to close the dialog box and process the upgrade at another time e Ifthe Web site cannot be reached a message informs you that communication failed Recheck your update configuration settings and try again e If no new updates are available for your system a message displays in
332. ises system performance Note After viewing return to the Diagnostic Setting form and disable the debug messages When to enable debug messages for a diagnostic object Table 198 Diagnostic objects and when to monitor Diagnostic object name Reasons to monitor debug messages FCWnx objects Diagnostic Manager If FCWnx Diagnostic Service does not start Client If communication problems exist between the FCWnx Server and it s clients Video Management If the FCWnx Server has a video problem on the Server side database application or device errors Video GUI If an FCWnx application problem exists on the user interface client side SQL If data returned in an FCWnx application form does not seem accurate This object monitors and captures SQL statements being generated from the Server and client General To monitor general nonspecific form activity CCTV If problems exist during CCTV serial communication For example alarms can be configured to trigger predetermined cameras on the CCTV Matrix Switcher If an alarm does not fire at a particular camera select this object to monitor debug messages in order to determine where the failure resides Alarms If problems exist during alarm activity Port Queue To monitor all network serial or dialup data port communication This object captures data from the Server to the micro controllers This is a high level diagnostic object and an Engineer nor
333. istant CD into the CD ROM drive If prompted select the appropriate language a e Accept the terms of the Software License Appendix A 367 Diagnostics and troubleshooting When Welcome to Dell OpenManage Server Assistant opens verify that the language is correct then click Server Setup The Server Setup window displays Set the Time Zone and Day Date and Time then click Start Server Setup When the Configure RAID Controller window opens select RAID 1 and set the RAID Virtual Disk Size to Maximum Click Configure RAID Note If a window opens asking if you want to delete the existing virtual disk click Yes You are then prompted to reboot Click OK Installing the operating system Refer to appropriate section of the Installation Manual for details and instruction to configure the Operating system Installing Dell OpenManage RAID Array Manager Follow the instructions below to install and configure the Dell OpenManage RAID Array Manager 1 Insert the Dell OpenManage Applications CD in the CD ROM drive The CD autoruns unless this function has been disabled If disabled click Start Run then Browse to navigate to the drive containing the CD ROM then select setup exe to display the Dell OpenManage Installation window Click Next At the Software License Agreement click Accept to continue the installation The OpenManage Installation Wizard displays At the Select setup type screen click Express Setup
334. isting of responses defined on the system Schedules provides a listing of time and mode schedules defined on the system If this is a Device Report the following options are available Alarm provides a listing of alarms defined on the system and alarm specific information Alarm API Connections provides a list of alarm details defined in the system received through an external interface Alarm Camera provides a list of camera alarm details defined in the system as well as the DVMRs that own them Alarm DVMR provides a list of DVMR alarms defined in the system 332 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual e Alarm Group provides a listing of alarm groups defined on the system and the controller that owns the groups e Cameras provides a list of cameras and camera details such as camera presets on the system and the DVR s that own them e Digital Input provides a listing of digital inputs DI defined on the system and DI specific information e Digital Output provides a listing of digital outputs DO defined on the system and DO specific information e Digital Output Group provides a listing of digital output groups defined on the system and the controller that owns them e Digital Video Recorder provides a list of DVRs defined on the system and DVR specific details e Elevator provides a listing of elevators defined on the system and elevator specific information e Controller provides a listing of controllers defined o
335. it e Tour Started Manually A Guard Tour was started manually at the control station and not by presenting a credential at a reader or DI point Tour Ended Manually A Guard Tour was ended manually at the control station and not by presenting a credential at a reader or DI point e Tour Activity A tour point was hit along a Guard Tour Invalid Tour Activity e Double hit of any assigned tour point e Atour point is hit during a paused tour e Ifa tour has not started and its points are hit an invalid tour activity transaction is not generated e Tour Paused This previously started tour has been paused The clock time to complete this tour is temporarily stopped Tour Resumed This previously paused tour has resumed The clock time to complete this tour is resumed Table 172 Form fields continued Element Description Chapter 9 Monitor and control Area When an Area or Zone is armed disarmed this column displays the description of the Area Zone Location e Displays the DI or reader description e If an event trigger has been defined for associating video with transactions from specified reader s a camera icon displays as part of the reader description When selecting a credential transaction identified with a camera icon right click to display the shortcut menu then select a video option e If this credential is a guard tour credential this field displays the description
336. ital cameras video cameras and signature pads Support for certain Imaging features and functions may be product specific and not necessarily supported by all compatible peripherals Refer to Image capture on page 256 integrity utility The utility can be run manually if you want to check your database integrity The system compares and validates the integrity of your database schema If selected the system automatically corrects missing or incorrect schema properties such as columns keys constraints indexes triggers and tables The executable file is installed with this application and resides in the program folder Refer to How can test the integrity of my database on page 356 language On the Operator form click the drop down list to display a list of available languages installed on your system Select the language with which this operator accesses and operates the FCWnx system Refer to Multiple language support on page 64 mass update This option is not available until at least one record exists in the list box to the right of the form The Mass Update mode allows you to simultaneously update properties on a group of records within the application This is very helpful when a number of records for a single form require the identical property or value change Forms where Mass Update is applicable include the Person form and Credential form Refer to Mass update on page 268 PDF Portable Document Files PDFs
337. ithin a defined zone can be used to arm and disarm the zone with a valid access right for the reader and an Intrusion Zone assigned Arm 1 followed by a valid credential read e If all alarm points are reset not in an active state of alarm and all doors closed then all readers are placed offline doors locked and alarm points are monitored on The corresponding Digital Output is triggered as selected on the Intrusion Zone form e When the zone is successfully armed all readers in the zone provide visual indication that the zone is armed Note We recommend using CASI brand readers configured to display the PIN light ON or flashing depending on the selected reader model A Zone armed transaction is generated and displays on the Activity Monitor form e When a zone is not successfully armed due to an invalid zone configuration on the Access Right form an Arm Disarm Failed Invalid Access Right transaction is generated e If any alarm points are set in an active state of alarm or a door is open the zone does not become armed An Arm disarm Failed Zone not secure transaction is generated and displayed on the Activity Monitor form Chapter 6 235 Areas and intrusion zones Disarm 0 followed by a valid credential read e All alarm points in the zone are monitored off and readers in the zone are placed online for normal operation Note We recommend using CASI brand readers configured to display the PIN light switching fro
338. ived by GMC GMC General Events f GMC application windows are not launching when requested for example attempting to open graphics monitor graphics symbol editor graphics map editor or graphics preferences fails Monitor to display what application requests GMC is receiving from the FCWnx application GMC Action Commands If commands issued from graphics maps are not being executed Monitor to display what commands GMC is trying to activate through the SP API GMC Database Checking If GMC is notifying the operator of errors when attempting to access the database but FCWnx does not inform the operator that there are problems with the database Monitor to display any attempts by GMC to inform the FCWnx application of difficulties accessing the database VMC objects VMC Platform This is for internal use only VMC Viewer f the Video Viewer does not display displays improperly or items are missing VMC Client Media f there is a problem playing live or recorded video from a camera and the problem exists on the user interface client side VMC Server Media f there is a problem playing live or recorded video from a camera and the problem exists on the Server side database application or device errors VMC Clip Recording If there is a problem with recording or playing back video clips VMC Drivers Client If there is a user interface client side problem that seems to be related to a particul
339. ivide the video viewing area into 16 panes Custom 7 Click to divide the video viewing area into 4 panes the lower right pane is divided into 4 smaller panes making a total of 7 viewing panes Custom 11 Click to divide the video viewing area into 2 large panes 3 medium panes and 6 small panes making a total of 11 viewing panes Focus Near Select to change the camera focus to the foreground Select again until the focus is satisfactory Chapter 5 Video Table 129 Form fields continued Element Description Focus Far Select to change the camera focus to the background Select again until the focus is satisfactory Iris Open Select to increase the amount of light Select again to increase in increments until the lighting is satisfactory Iris Close Select to decrease the amount of light Select again to decrease in increments until the lighting is satisfactory Window menu The Window menu contains the following submenus Table 130 Form fields Element Description Save Position Select this option to have the Video Console window display in the same position of your desktop every time it is launched Always On Top Select this option to have the Video Console window remain on top even when it is not the active window on your desktop Search for video When investigating alarm events investigators or other operators may need to retrieve previously recorded video clips or th
340. ivity Monitor as One Week Suspension Access is denied Example 2 An employee is working in your facility as a temporary contract worker performing maintenance The credential is assigned a status of Active A custom credential definition Maintenance Contractor was created and assigned The transaction displays on the Activity Monitor as Maintenance Contractor Access is granted only for the duration of the contract Figure 121 Custom Credential Status form credential Status E 10 x Custom Credential Status Credential Status Custom Credential Status M Select Credential Status co Active Valid amp Valid Open C Suspended Invalid Add Update Delete Q Cancel Table 165 Form fields Element Description Custom Credential Status List Box A display of previously created custom credential status definitions When you select a definition in the list box the selected definition displays in the Edit box The selected definition can be updated or deleted Custom Credential Status Create or revise an existing custom credential status definition by entering text in this text box Following a revision click Update to complete the process Chapter 7 273 Access rights departments persons and credentials Table 165 Form fields continued Element Description Select Credential Status Active Valid Valid Open Select to assign an active status to this credential
341. k Table 61 Form fields Element Description Reader schedule Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Online Offline Select whether the schedule chosen above sets the reader online or offline Chapter 4 Devices Table 61 Form fields continuea Element Description Door schedule Time schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list Unlock Lock Select whether the schedule chosen above locks or unlocks the door controlled by this reader Disable Auto Unlock Select this check box to temporarily disable the schedule that would automatically unlock a door at the start of a new time schedule When a valid credential is presented to the reader for the first time and during the current time schedule in effect the door unlocks for the first time and the schedule is now in place as configured If no valid access has been detected from start of schedule to current time the controller continues to wait for a valid credential access before implementing the schedule If a Lock schedule is selected this feature is grayed out and not available for selection Example This is particularly helpful if a snowday or hurricane prevents employees from entering the building at the normal time Although the current schedule would normally unlock the door the door remains locked until the first employee arrives at the reader and presents a valid credential How to 1 Review the guidelines
342. k firmware file e MicroPXNPlus and MicroPXNPlus2000 The form opens with the latest e 1 network firmware file displayed Click the drop down list to display and select an older network firmware file e Browse Click to navigate to another media source or directory where firmware files reside e Override Block Checking Ignore this check box This selection is for Customer Support use only Note Secure Perfect Version 4 Xx and later micro firmware is able to communicate with this application host and continue to send alarm and credential transactions Upgrading your system can be a seamless operation without loss of data time constraints during the controller migration process or lockdowns during the database upgrade process However in order to take advantage of the new features that are dependant on the firmware the ultimate goal is to bring all controllers to current level as soon as possible following the database upgrade 111 112 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Define readers Use this form Security Devices group to define readers Readers are the devices that interpret the encoded numbers on credentials Readers are usually located near doors or gates that the system controls Credentials are presented to the readers in order to gain access through a door e When a controller record is created reader records are also created The number of records depends on the controller that you configure and the reader modules
343. k iiaaddadeddeedd 198 PRESEETOD sese aii 200 Define event triggers ici A Gere 201 Event tagging OVERVIEW at SS ae ne eee whee 201 Video Event Tigger iii Menease haohaes EES A 201 Pr set Camera HOB a a Siena S 202 Readers TOD ii A AI 202 Alim is A AN 204 Enable alarm video popup sss sssr naeran di bi da 205 INtUSION Zone taD pas AA AAA ASS 205 Record Video to CD science a a a ds aa 207 DVRiGISKAS full coa a ia e 208 Navigate video console ooomomocccin canaria a Eaa 209 Video Console WINDOW scams ii e A ia ideal 209 Navigation PM Gocqa pa neadaman ERE daaaemmaneg desea waena enim Y 210 Play Control ope sone sa a sia ils a AA 211 PIC IMONUS aa di A tie antes AAA AAA adele NA 211 ACUM MEA seeds dah id io 212 Display Meir A AAA 212 WiNdoW Mela A a 213 Search for Videos iaa e a ii 213 How to seareh by System UN ii a a and 213 How t search by video VEN sas 214 How to search by time dnd date coccion iia vas aww EEIN dobbs eee bho biaaees 214 HOW tOSCGRCH DY MOON ri ed a dt 215 Define CCTV interfaces cio idas 216 COTO o ES 216 Whats NEXT iii sl A sia 217 Areas and intrusion zones susi A daa 219 OVEIVIEW Ores vaciadas ia 220 Define areas iii A ad data 220 AO AS A iia 221 lo o A lols E EATE 222 ANOTA a ii AA te naan ba od oils AAA nua ld 4 224 Digitaloutput TOD aa SA AN Saa 226 E uit ith teh Ste cee oe ac au E aera aa aad E seta eae 227 Arm Disarm an area by access right 0 0 2 coer r rrr rnnr rrr rnnr 228 vii
344. l Figure 117 Credential Definition tab I Credential Table 160 Form fields Element Description Assigned to Select the name of the person to whom this credential is assigned If this credential is not yet assigned select lt UNASSIGNED gt Refresh Click to update the person list with the most up to date information It is possible to select all credentials for this person assign a status right click to display the shortcut menu and select mass update All records for the selected person are now assigned the identical status 264 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 160 Form fields continued Element Description The following three fields relate to systems with ACU controllers Company Code Select None or select from the drop down list of available company codes as previously assigned on the Advanced tab of the Preference form Note When you select a company code number the Card Number and Issue Number fields become available Card Number This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This number must be unique to this application It may be already encoded into the card if you are using a card or you can assign a number in this dialog box This number is entered into a keypad reader when there is no card Issue Number This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This featur
345. l Shutdown al E JE Table 29 Form fields Element Description Backup Clients This list box displays those clients you have assigned to take over control of any nondirect controllers and DVRs in the event of a failure at the default client computer The order in which the client names display determines which client is next in line to take over The timing of the takeover is a variable Backup clients must be online FCWnx services are running In the event of a failover the client entry includes the client computer name and then the total combined number of DVRs and controllers of the default client and backup client e Move Up Select and click to move this client up the list e Move Down Select and click to move this client down the list e Assign Click to display a Backup Clients Assignment dialog box listing client computers found on your FCWnx system Those computers selected and assigned when you close the dialog box display in the Backup Clients list box 54 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 29 Form fields continued Element Description Database Connection Heartbeat The FCWnx system validates communication with backup clients by pinging sending continuous broadcast messages If there is a communication failure between the default client and the backup client the backup client looks for a Heartbeat time stamp in the database as an indication that the default client
346. l arming Note Readers with the matching exiting Area will beep such as the reader on the inside of the door After the prerequisites are met 1 The reader beeps 1 minute before the arming 2 The Area arms 3 If the user is monitoring the Auto Arm on Inactivity alarm the alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor form 4 A Zone Armed message displays on the Activity Monitor Arm Delay Timer sec Set the amount of time in seconds that is allowed for the credential holder to exit the Area before the alarms are monitored When configuring the alarm points to be used in the secure Area make sure that you set the Held Open Options The default is 0 which means that the timer is disabled This field has a range from 0 to 255 minutes 225 226 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 136 Form fields continued Element Description Keypad Arm Disarm Select to allow arm disarm of this Area using the reader keypad or manual control This feature is associated with IKE Readers designed for keypad arming disarming None Arm Disarm by keypad is not enabled in this Area Local Arm disarm is local to one ACU controller one Area Global Arm disarm spans multiple ACU controllers and Areas Complete the association by configuring the reader for Arm Disarm Type on the Reader form and assigning credential holders to this Area Note Initially every newly created Area is armed If the Area form Alarm tab K
347. l controller the assignment arrow button is dimmed and unavailable for assignment as a primary output group If the controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO group is triggered 162 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 88 Form fields Element Description This section applies to Micro and ACU controllers When an alarm is active or DO event occurs select the action to be performed on all DOs within all selected DO groups This action applies to both logical and physical alarms Reader DO Actions On Alarm On Reset e Normal The door locks and valid credentials unlock the door Schedules can override this state e Lock no access The door locks and does not allow access Controllers put the readers in an offline state Schedules can override the state and put the controller back online e Indefinite Unlock The door is put into an unlock state Schedules can override the current state Auxiliary DO Actions On Alarm On Reset e On Indefinite The DO is put into active state indefinitely Schedules cannot override this state on a controller e Off The DO is put into the de active state indefinitely Schedules cannot override this state on a controller e On for Duration The DO is put into the active state for the duration defined Schedules cannot override this state on a controller How to 1 Review the guidelin
348. l system Review the following Global configuration regional rules on page 44 Replication and synchronization conflicts on page 46 Review the Installation Manual chapter covering Installing a Global Configuration Confirm and review your configuration options then review the Troubleshooting section Refer to Microsoft Replication software documentation in printed and electronic format Terminal services Question J cannot capture and print with terminal services Capturing images requires the camera to be attached to a computer where the person is located which is not the case with terminal services However images can be captured elsewhere saved to file and loaded to FCWnx Printing credentials with terminal services is similar to printing a report or Microsoft Word document If the operator has permission to access the Credential Design application and photo which is taken care of based on the terminal service login printing a credential is permitted Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting User questions Question My Diagnostics component services have started Why doesn t System Manager and Manager services start If you have just restored a database or re created a database you need to relicense and restart your system in order to start the application Question How do I put a reader online From the Application pane select Access then select Reader From the right side of the screen select the
349. lable for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available Client Group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a Client Group Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Routing Client Groups windowpane Time To Bump Select the number of minutes to wait before bumping this alarm notification to an additional location if the alarm is not acknowledged or purged at the Routing work station The Alarm Monitor form indicates that this alarm is bumped The minimum setting is one minute The default and maximum is 30 minutes Select the number of seconds to wait before bumping this alarm notification to an additional location The default is zero Comment Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review Figure 73 on page 173 and the guidelines in Table 99 to complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Alarms tab Figure 75 Alarms tab Es Routing and Bumping e Description i Facility X Definition Alarms Alarms Assign Alarms 175 176 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 100 Form fields Element Description Alarms This windowpane displays the names of alarms assigned to this Routing and Bumping record
350. le Following completion of all tabs and options on the Report form click to preview a copy of your report Note On the Preview Report screen the Total field represents the number of records in the database and not the number of records that matched your search criteria The zoom value always reads 100 regardless of the zoom used Print Report The Print Report option allows you to send the current report to a defined printer This option is available only when a Report form or Report is displaying Export This option is available only when a Report form is displaying The Export option allows you to select an export format for your report There are a variety of formats available including text Word for Windows Lotus HTML and Excel Select an export destination for the report to a disk file exchange folder Lotus Domino Lotus Domino Mail or Microsoft Mail MAPI Save Template As Select this option to create a new template and save under a new file name This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Set As Default Template Use this option to select a template to use as the default template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template While the selected Report form is displaying select Set As Default Template A message displays stating the current template is now the default template for this form This template is automatically loaded whenever you open th
351. least one client is assigned to this group on the Client Group tab Client Group tab On this tab you must assign at least one FCWnx client computer in order to save this Client Group record Figure 16 Client Group tab Hs Client Group e Description Facility Client Group Clients Assign Clients Comments 58 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 32 Form fields Element Description Clients This windowpane displays the names of client computers that are assigned to this Client Group Assign Clients Click to display a Client Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign FCWnx clients to this Client Group Client Assignment Dialog This dialog box allows you to select and assign FCWnx client computers to a Client Group Only clients in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available client e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a client Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Clients windowpane Comments Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review Table 32 and click the add record icon to create a new Client Group record Enter a unique description for this group of clients Assign
352. least one license available Verify that you are using TCP IP as your network protocol and that it is configured properly Verify that the network protocol you are using is installed on both the client and Server computers On the Server computer go to the Services form and check services If the Status column is blank for that service then it is not running Select the service line and click the Start button e If the status changes to Started then the service is now running Try to start the program now If the program still won t start the network may be down Check the current day s log on the network client e If the status does not change to Started check the current day s log of the server log It should display an error message providing a reason for shutting down 364 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Question System Service does not start What is the reason e The Service cannot access the database e The client machine name is not in the client table e The services on the Database server are not running e System service on the local machine does not start e The local machine did not receive a ping from the license domain machine within the ping timeout interval check that the license domain services are running e Client license count may have been exceeded Refer to the Licensing Capacities table of your Installation Manual for supported capacities Question What does this message mean Maxim
353. lect only one floor 181 182 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 103 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Public Access tab Note This tab is available for systems using ACU controllers Use this tab to assign an Area and Time Schedule associated with this elevator record during which public access is allowed Figure 79 Public Access tab e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Edit dd Remove Area Time Schedule Table 104 Form fields Element Description Area Time Schedule This windowpane displays the Area description and associated time schedule for public access to the Area using this elevator Edit Select an Area Time Schedule and then click Edit to open the Area Time Schedule Selection dialog box allowing you to change the associated Area or Time Schedule The Area Time Schedule dialog box allows you to select and assign an Area and Time Schedule for public access associated with this elevator record Only Areas in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select an Area from the drop down list e Select a Time Schedule from the drop down list to associate with the selected Area Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Area Time Schedule windowpane Click Cancel to terminate and close this window
354. lect the Termination Type from the drop down list This wiring termination describes the type of end of line resistor used on this ACU controller hardware The default selection is Dipswitch For additional information refer to the ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers User Guide Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 49 Form fields continued Element Description Keypad PIN Max Invalid PIN Count for systems using ACU controllers 1 Select this check box if you want your FCWnx system to suspend credentials after an invalid PIN is entered and a credential is presented at a reader a configured number of times 2 Then enter a number between 1 and 6 as the number of times an invalid PIN code is entered at a system reader before the credential is suspended The default of this field is 3 3 If suspended the credential must be changed to active by a system administrator How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 49 and complete the fields on this tab according to the controller type that you are configuring 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Elevator digital output interface Elevator companies may choose not to allow installers to handle the elevator wiring directly They may provide contacts from the elevator circuit that can be used to interface between FCWnx and the elevator control Sample wiring scenarios display below Chapter 4 97 Devices Figure 29 Sample elevator digital
355. led for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers This tab allows you to assign groups of digital outputs to access rights Figure 105 Digital Output Groups tab e Description Facility X Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones Areas Assigned Digital Output Groups Assign Digital Output Groups 241 242 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 144 Form fields Element Description Assigned Digital Output Groups This windowpane displays a list of assigned output groups for the current access right Assign Digital Output Groups Click this button to display and assign digital output groups to the selected access right Only DO Groups that are related to the same controller as the readers selected in the Access Right tab are available for assignment If no digital output groups display verify that digital output groups were set up on the Digital Output Group form The Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box displays when you click Assign DO Groups allowing you to select and assign DO groups you want associated with the selected record Only DO groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available DO group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a DO group Click OK to display results in the Outputs Groups windowpane How to
356. ler such as the firmware version You can request the latest information by clicking Refresh On the Settings to Reach Host tab e Enter the telephone number s that the controller dials to reach the host e Enter the interval at which the controller automatically dials the host e Enter the number of times the controller tries the same number e Enter the number of intervals that the controller waits before trying a telephone number again On the Settings to Reach Controller tab e Enter the telephone number s that the host dials to reach the controller e Enter the interval at which the host automatically dials the controller Enter the number of times the host tries the same number Enter the number of intervals that the host waits before trying a telephone number again On the Controller Configuration tab select the modules that are in the controller you are setting up Click the desired module in the Modules and drag to the Configuration column To delete a module from the Configuration column select then right click and select Delete Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 13 Click Save to save the record If there is any required information missing a message displays listing those items that are incorrect or missing Do not forget to save the record again once you fix those items 14 When the controller record is created the records for the associated readers alarms alarm groups digital outputs and digital
357. lers The maximum number of floors is 32 2 modules x 16 DOs 32 DOs ACU controllers The maximum number of floors is 64 Floor tracking by keypad Define the floors available and define a digital output relays for each floor The reader s keypad is used to select the desired floor Only digital outputs provided by the DO module can be used In addition each DO can be used in only one floor The number of floors is limited by the number of DO modules that can be placed in the controller The maximum number of modules in a controller is four Micro controllers The maximum number of floors available is 64 4 modules x 16 DOs 64 DOs ACU controllers The maximum number of floors available is 128 12 on the ACU2 controller 7 RRMs x 16 relays and 1 RRM x 4 relays Floor tab of access right form for systems using Micro controllers On the Personnel menu select Access Right to open the Access Right form Floor tab to assign access rights to elevators and floors Select from the Available list those elevators you want to use with the form The elevators that display in this list are those that are set up on the Elevator form Floors and DOs can be assigned an access right to define which floors a person can access and what DOs a person can trigger with a valid credential 180 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Configuring elevator control using a Micro controller Note Create Floor records and floor numbers to be used
358. les coocinin 684 oc it vend Wie SR e aaa 77 Mode Schedule Dacia A A anes AERA Ewes 79 Chapter 4 o A O A sdesan sees 83 OVA A A an eines es 84 Device configuration ooimioicoonca nec A a ERENER TER REES 84 Controllers OVErVi W Ss cicicscsdsectanstotendas a radianes 84 Define controllers 2c oia A EREET ANERE ENAREN ETIR EEE 86 Records TON a A A erzasuucts 86 Controller DTM ta vic dalla 92 SEU A dae 98 AAA A REE E Slee heen E et ae 100 Comments TAD cas A cea eee 101 EVENTS TOD uti bey phd aa idas 102 Status PIIA TEE E ee dd 102 controller configuration tabaco rara becada 104 POSES O ridad da das 106 Settings to Reach Hostia ii a a 107 Settings to redch controller td s cc c co vrancndadaaice a o 109 Controller flash and controller preference configuration cece eee cece cece eee eeeaes 110 1 View edit rd seas whaataug E S EEEE E 110 2 Start flashing controla ii decades cena AAA 111 3 View Edit Hashimlesscs ccncsnanamennsatca lt ada naco ooo 111 Define readers escocia dd daa 112 E A 113 Door FUNCION Mii aaa 119 ROULING tabs ia II NN PA ERRAI E AAAA N 123 FUNCTIONS Schedule tab voor yrr dua E EEA A sees AEE EEEE EO 124 Routing Schedule tabis ded oo EEE AAA E A A 125 Reader type sch dules tab cc nid va ved RETIREE EEEN ETETEA a 126 SUS Di sana en nhs agin NN O EES 127 Advanced HOD aaeeea aE N AEN T A e a E oie A OAR AE te 129 Define CiGitalinpUts viudas is a A ad 133 Digital Input tab seisine isa te rd dic
359. lick My Computer on the Windows XP Desktop 2 From the Tools menu select Folder Options to open a Folder Options window 3 Click the View tab and locate the Use simple file sharing Recommended checkbox in the list of Advanced Settings 6 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 4 To disable Simple File Sharing ensure this checkbox is not checked Click inside the checkbox to disable the option The Simple File Sharing checkbox should be at or near the bottom of the Advanced Settings list 5 Click OK to close the Folder Options window The settings for Simple File Sharing are now updated no computer reboot is required Note 1 Enabling Simple File Sharing prevents the ability to assign user level passwords to shares When Simple File Sharing is enabled on a computer remote users are not prompted for a password when accessing that computer s shares 2 If the Windows XP Professional computer is part of a Windows domain rather than a Windows workgroup this process for enabling or disabling Simple File Sharing has no effect Simple File Sharing always remains disabled for computers joined to domains Configuring firewall and DCOM settings This application assists you in configuring firewall and DCOM settings on your computer We recommend that you configure your FCWnx system with the Windows firewall ON In order for your system to perform successfully the following firewall and DCOM ports must be configured for server and
360. lines in Table 89 and complete the fields on this tab Example If alarm monitoring is scheduled On it returns to Off no monitoring at the end of the assigned schedule 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Events tab Use this tab to assign events for alarm groups and alarm sense times Events define start time s and day s only There is no end associated with an event Therefore that event stays in effect until another event changes it or you change it manually 163 164 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 66 Events tab Table 90 Form fields e Description l Facility v Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV m Alarm group Event Description Alarm Group Edit Add Remove Element Description Alarm group This windowpane displays assigned events and their associated alarm groups Edit This button is available only if you currently have a list of assigned events and alarm groups An Edit Alarm Group dialog box displays and allows you to modify the selection of events and associated alarm groups Add Click Add to assign events to the specified alarm group An Edit Alarm Group dialog box displays enabling you to build a list of events and associated alarm groups Remove Select an entry in the list of displayed events then click Remove to remove from the list How to 1 Review the guidelin
361. linked to the Power alarm the siren sounds when the alarm is generated Figure 56 Advanced tab Digital Output e Description 0001 1 01 DO Facility Ignore Facilities y Digital Output Schedule Manual Control m Alarm Control Alarms Alarms Time Sched Link Only If Ignore A 4 Time Schedule None gt F Unk Grip If Offline F Ignore Alarm Monitor State Table 77 Form fields Element Description Alarm Control Available Alarms Windowpane Select from the Available list those alarms that you want to assign to this record The alarms that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only alarms in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Note You must assign a Time Schedule in order to move this Alarm to the Selected windowpane Select then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm Selected Alarm Windowpane The alarms that display are those that are currently assigned to this record Select then click the left arrow to unassign an available alarm Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list e If no time schedule is to be assigned you must select None before you can move a selected output relay from the available windowpane to the assigned windowpane e If there are none listed create a time schedule on the Time Schedule form Link Onl
362. list that you want to assign to this Area record If a schedule is not selected this configuration is active at all times If you need to create a schedule open the Time Schedule form Note ACU controllers only support 16 Time Schedule intervals Even if you save a Time Schedule record with more the 16 intervals only Time Schedules with 16 intervals or less display in this drop down list e When the Arm Disarm schedule is set active Armed the associated secure Area is armed by placing all readers offline and all alarm points monitored on e When the Arm Disarm schedule is reset not active Disarmed the associated secure Area is disarmed by placing all readers online and all alarm points monitored off Auto Arm Inactivity Timer min Enter the amount of time in minutes of inactivity that elapse before the Area automatically arms The default is 0 which means that the timer is disabled This field has a range from 0 to 255 minutes Example Use this feature in Areas monitored by motion detectors You can define the number of minutes of inactivity that can pass before an unarmed area automatically arms Prerequisites e The Area must be local to the controller with at least one alarm assigned e Auto Arm Inactivity Timer must have an entry greater than 0 e The Area must be disarmed without an alarm being activated for the number of minutes specified above e An optional reader in the Area that beeps indicating one minute unti
363. lity for the Oy OV DVR only You receive a message displaying Do other devices change to the same facility as the digital video recorder Select Yes or No If you select Yes the alarm record and camera records change as well You need to verify the accuracy of the revised records Create preset records Configure cameras Set up event triggers OPTIONAL Set up alarm graphics Security Devices Camera Presets Refer to Define camera presets on page qs 197 1 After setup and programming of your DVR devices to meet your monitoring requirements you need to parallel the settings and positions in the configurations in this application This form allows you to edit or enter a description and number for a camera preset Presets must be defined before you can assign them to a camera on the Presets tab of the Camera form Note This option is available for PTZ cameras only A facility option can be designated In the text field enter a number within the range of 1 to 32 This number only references the preset number programmed and stored in a camera with PTZ capability Click Save This preset is now available for assignment to a specific camera Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence e Camera Presets e Event Triggers e Flash Download firmware to the controller Quick Setup guide Application Group Menu Application Form R Security Devices Camera
364. ly eight intervals are saved to the controller Begin Date Click to display a calendar dialog to select the day month and year to begin this access right The default is today s date End Date Click to display a calendar dialog to select the day month and year to end this access right The default is 20 years from today s date How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 146 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define personnel type The Personnel Type form Personnel group is used to create category types for employees and assign default credential designs for each category Personnel Type tab Use this tab to create personnel types and assign a default credential design to each personnel type Figure 108 Personnel Type tab A Personnel Type Personnel Type Description Credential hf 245 246 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 147 Form fields Element Description Search Click to display a list of existing types Three personnel types come standard with this application e Permanent e Contractor e Temporary Description This field is required and accepts 64 alphanumeric characters Enter a basic description of the personnel type Credential Design Select a default credential design from the drop down list of available designs Your selected design prints whenever credentials are sent to the printer for people ass
365. m ON or flashing to OFF depending on the selected reader model A Zone disarmed transaction is generated and displays on the Activity Monitor form e When a zone is not successfully disarmed due to an invalid credential an Arm Disarm Failed Invalid Access Right transaction is generated e When a zone is disarmed all normal access control rules apply for gaining access Arm Disarm an Intrusion Zone Using Arm Disarm Intrusion DI All of the same rules apply as if arming or disarming using an access right e When the zone is successfully armed all readers in the zone should provide visual indication that the zone is armed and a Zone Armed transaction is generated on the Activity Monitor form e When a zone is not successfully armed an Arm disarm Failed transaction is generated e When a zone is disarmed all normal access control rules apply for gaining access and a Zone Disarmed transaction is generated What s next Continue with Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials on page 237 236 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials This chapter provides an overview of the forms used to create and assign access rights and create department person and credential records In this chapter e 238 VISTE MBESIS ER A A eed RR a 238 DORE personnel LUDO o edd riani Pa Ce a 245 TIGRE DEPORTE e eiee ia ox main ehh co Renin e down edhe act 246 Denn
366. m disarm Intrusion DI readers and alarms e Arm Disarm Intrusion DI This is a single record selection from a drop down list filtered by active facility that consists of all available Arm Disarm Intrusion points for the controller Only the Dis that have not been assigned are available e Alarm Points This is a multi record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available controller alarm points not already assigned to a zone 24 7 4 State Supervision rules apply regardless of the Armed Disarmed state of the zone e Readers This is a multi record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available readers not already assigned to a zone Readers must be active and nonelevator type e Azone can be configured to contain the following An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Alarm Points only and no Readers An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Readers only and no Alarm Points Alarm Points and Readers only with no Arm Disarm Intrusion Point Readers only Note An arm disarm DO can be assigned for any of these 4 A Status tab provides the ability to request status of the zone and each of its associated points as follows e Zone Armed or Disarmed e Arm Disarm Intrusion DI Active Inactive Trouble e Readers Online or offline e Alarm Points Monitored Off Monitored On qs 16 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup
367. m requires maintenance Shutting down Note Itis ESSENTIAL that you shut down FCWnx and your computer properly The results could be disastrous if you do not follow this procedure You may be required to re install all of the software on your computer To shut down the FCWnx services Chapter 1 9 Introduction 1 Click START Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools and then Services Scroll to services The services should be stopped in the following order FCWnx API Service FCWnx Webservice FCWnx Manager Shutting down Manager service stops controller communications FCWnx System Manager Shutting down System service stops client communications FCWnx Diagnostics If you select FCWnx Diagnostics first a message displays informing you that the other services also stop All other services shut down and lastly Diagnostics shuts down 2 Exit Control Panel 3 From the taskbar click Start then Shut Down 4 From the Shut Down Windows form verify that Shut down is selected and click Yes Menus Following a successful logon your application window displays Figure 1 Application window Menu Bar P Facility Commander Wnx i File Search View Reports Window Help Application Toolbar _ E amp E g E Record Toolbar El k P ja D amp le Application Group Pane Application Group ox 22 Personnel Credentials wy Places amp Policies A Monitors amp Contr
368. mally translates messages This data is extremely useful for troubleshooting general data problems between the Server and controllers Manager Service Appendix A Diagnostics and troubleshooting Table 198 Diagnostic objects and when to monitor continued Diagnostic object name Reasons to monitor debug messages To monitor FCWnx Manager Service on starting stopping connecting to other Servers and regular processing Flash If problems exist when using eFlash to flash micro controllers using the Controller Monitor form System Service To monitor FCWnx System Service on starting stopping connecting to other Servers and regular processing TAPI Loader To monitor TAPI dial up connections between the Server and the modem being used for communication with controllers TAPI Device To monitor TAPI dial up connections between the Server and the modem being used for communication with controllers Modem Port Queue To monitor dial up modem connections This object captures data being sent by a Server to a controller using dial up communication Machine To monitor computer to computer communication API If problems exists during API activity DI If problems exists during DI activity DBTrigger If problems exist with database triggers The triggers are responsible for downloading badge access rights and related access data to the controller Guard Tour If problems exist du
369. mes from the assigned list and then click the left arrow to unassign Click OK to accept the selections and close this window How to 1 Review the list of assigned Backup Regions 2 If applicable select to move a Region up or down in backup priority 3 Click Assign to display the Backup Region Assignment dialog box Chapter 2 43 System preferences 4 Assign one or more database servers as Regional database backup servers 5 Click OK to close the dialog box and display the computer names as assigned 6 Click Save before you exit this tab APB Region Configuration tab Use this tab to identify APB IN and APB OUT readers and configure the APB behavior across Regions Figure 12 APB Region Configuration tab E Region e Description ectexoKQ71 Region Backup Regions APB Region Configuration M APB Entering Region Assign m APB Exiting Region Assign Retain APB Status Across Regions Invalidate Credential Across Regions Ignore APB Status Across Regions Table 24 Form fields Element Description APB Entering Region This list box displays those readers that have been selected as APB IN readers for the selected Region Assign Click to assign APB IN readers to this region Only readers previously configured as APB IN readers are displayed for selection APB Exiting Region This list box displays those readers that have been selected as APB OUT read
370. mpartmentalized Information Facility JP Enable Sir SCIF Area Workstation y Element Description APB Enabled Select to enable APB tracking for this Area Readers associated with this Area must also be assigned a Logical type of APB on the Reader form Local Re Entry Timer min Enter a number between 0 and 255 as the number of minutes the user cannot enter this Area again regardless of whether they went through an OUT reader If a user tries to go through an IN reader a second time the controller sends an invalid Timed APB message to the host The default setting is 0 Reader settings assigned on the Reader form override any configuration on this form 222 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 134 Form fields continued Element Description Sensitive Compartmentalized Enable SCIF Select this option to indicate that this Area is a SCIF Sensitive Information Facility Compartmentalized Information Facility Proceed to select a SCIF Area Workstation SCIF Area Workstation Select from the drop down list of those available to be assigned as a SCIF workstation for this Area When a workstation is selected and the Area record is saved this workstation controls functionality within the SCIF Area Modifications to the SCIF configuration can be made at this workstation only This SCIF workstation allows complete access and configuration of any associated device reader alarm Output relay
371. mplete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab What s next Continue with Chapter 10 Reports on page 327 326 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 10 Reports This chapter provides an overview of the reporting capabilities within this application In this chapter OVEIVEW rrea det a bed Week ee ek LS ee ey 328 o jek ide d oa renis Males TEOSES A KOCIAR EE 329 Tabs on repart PO oie ci a eae he knw Mad daw boa ha Da 330 328 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview All reports are selections on the Reports drop down menu of the main application toolbar FCWnx provides extensive reporting capabilities based on your system configuration Note Reports are filtered so that supplied information pertains only to the selected facilities of the current operator A list of standard reports is provided below Seven are history reports In addition FCWnx has the ability to access reports created by using a third party report generator The following is a brief description of each report 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Person Provides person information such as address and department on all or a subset of persons in the system Credential Provides information in areas you select on all or a subset of credentials in the system Administration Generates reports about the administrative areas of the system Reports cover alarm instructions event
372. ms with Micro controllers When you select a controller type on the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form a Power Comm module is automatically added to the Configuration column on the Controller Configuration tab of the Controller form As a result certain additional records are created e Alarm Records e Tamper e Power e Host Comm e If this is a network micro a controller comm encryption alarm is created e SRP Reminder The Micro PX 2000 supports 4 readers e 16DO Reminder The Micro PX 2000 supports 8 DO points e 20DI Reminder The Micro PX 2000 supports 11 DI points Note Micro PX 2000 modules shipped after November 1 2003 support the 11th DI as a low battery alarm for the controller e Digital Input Records e Tamper Chapter 4 87 Devices e Power e Sixteen 16 Alarm Group Records As mentioned above all alarms are automatically assigned to Alarm Group 0 You can change this on the Alarm Group form For systems with ACU controllers Common alarm records e Tamper e Power e Low battery e Host Comm e Controller COMM encryption ACURS2 and ACURS4 controllers e Reader records e Alarm records e Input records e Output records ACU2X ACU2XL 8 and CU2XL16 controllers e 12 Aux DI records e 12 Aux DO records Note By default none of these alarms are monitored If you want them to display on the Alarm Monitor when the alarm is triggered you need to go to the Alarm form Alarm tab and ena
373. n Only Last Name Personnel Type and Employee Number are required fields If your company is using credentials you may want to capture an image and design a credential that incorporates that image 1 Select the Photo tab on the Person form 2 Select ONE of the records in the Record List 3 Click Capture Image Signature to capture a new image Based on the input device you previously selected the proper interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image 4 Adjust then Save the adjusted settings 5 Click Capture Photo to capture the new image Once the photo is taken the Image Enhancement dialog box displays 6 Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application Table 2 Administrator tasks continued Quick Setup guide Element Description Mass Updates Refer to Mass update on page qs 268 1 Open a blank form Click Search to display a list of existing records We recommend entering search criteria to narrow your search results to only records that are to be updated Note If there are no records Mass Update is not available 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu to related forms To enable the Mass Update mode select Mass Update from the shortcut menu 3 Note the change in the appearance of the form ONLY those fields or dialog boxes that are available for mass update changes are now enabled and blank Refer to Condi
374. n Zone Assignment window displays when Assign Intrusion Zone is clicked on the Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right form or Event Trigger form The window displays a list of all intrusion zones for the controllers in the facilities available for assignment by this operator You can assign an unlimited number of intrusion zones to an access right e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available intrusion zone e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an intrusion zone Click OK to accept the selections and display the Intrusion Zones in the Assigned Intrusion Zones list box Note If you do not have valid access to a reader that belongs to an Intrusion Zone due to a schedule in that access right you are not able to arm disarm a zone How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 145 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 243 244 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Areas tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Use this tab to assign Areas to an access right and assign a time schedule Areas are owned by ACU controllers Figure 107 Areas tab e Description Facility Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones reas Assigned reas Assign reas Area Control Allow access at all times C Allow access by schedule Time schedule E Beg
375. n open the properties of your network connection in the Network Connections folder of your computer e If the issue is resolved and connection to resources is restored you do not have to perform the following steps e If the issue persists and you receive an error message follow these steps 6 Click Start and then Run 7 Inthe Open field enter regsvr32 systemroot system32 o0le32 d11 8 Click OK to display the following Figure 145 ole32 dll dialog box x y e HD DilRegisterServer in C WINNT system32 ole32 dll succeeded 9 Click OK Appendix A 361 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 10 Restart your computer Question My COM port is not working as expected What should I do now Use the Micro Utility Form to troubleshoot communications between the host and the micro e Make sure the State field shows the micro as Online If it is Offline right click then select Set Online Tf it is Error then the host is not able to communicate correctly with the micro e If this is a direct connect micro make sure the Connection field shows Connected e Make sure the baud rate setting on the micro matches the baud rate setting for the computer s COM port e Make sure the Comm device field shows the proper communications port for this micro that is COMI for COM port 1 e Use the Status and Message Queue fields to check the condition of the communications Refer to the Online Help for information on status messages If everyth
376. n the remote PC Note Ifyou are using Token Ring and or TCP IP you are encouraged to contact your system administrator for local requirements and restrictions Client tab Use this tab to configure a client record Figure 14 Client tab e Description a Facility y Client Backup Clients PC Name Browse OS Type y Region y Workstation q Type m Imaging Status gt Thin Client Status C Disabled C Disabled Enabled Enabled Auto logoff oe IZ Display alarm notification Minutes 3 7 Enable Auto Shutdown r Ping Time msec Interval o TimeDut Alarm and Guard Tour DI activity printing MV Enable Printer a Select Printer Ml 50 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 28 Form fields Element Description PC Name e When creating a new client record click Browse to display a Select Client window listing all computers found on your network by PC name FCWnx uses PC names only To add a client select the computer name from the list and click OK You can add as many clients as you want but you are limited to the number of licensed clients connected to the network at one time The number of client licenses presently active and connected to the FCWnx system can be found on the Client Monitor form e By default when an existing client record displays PC Name is read only and not available for edit e Client computers to which devices ar
377. n the system and controller specific information e Reader provides a listing of readers defined on the system and reader specific information If this is a Time and Attendance Report the following options are available First In Last Out calculates the difference between the first In transaction and last Out transaction within the time period you specify on the Date Range tab All other transactions are ignored e Paired In Out calculates the difference between all In and Out transactions within the time period you specify on the Date Range tab The earliest In is paired with the first Out following it and both times are displayed together followed by the difference between them in hours The next In along with its paired Out are displayed together on the next line This continues until all Ins and Outs have been paired together and displayed An error message displays if e There is not a matching number of In transactions and Out transactions within a specified time period There are two In transactions without an Out between them e There are two Out transactions without an In between them Group Records Select the field by which you want to group the records This provides the organization of the report The choices in the drop down list correspond with the selection of Report Type This option may not be available on all report types Sort Groups Displays the fields in order of precedence by which the groups are sorted If this box
378. n to do everything that an Administration workstation can perform as well as monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration e Not Applicable This option is used for CCTV workstations only During a database conversion from an earlier version of FCWnx workstation types default to Administration Imaging Status e Disabled Select if you want to disable Imaging in order to enable another client computer e Enabled Select to enable Imaging here but you are limited to the number of licensed Imaging stations enabled at one time The number of Imaging licenses presently active can be found on the Client Monitor form Table 28 Form fields continuea Chapter 2 System preferences Element Description Thin Client Status An FCWnx client computer can also be a thin client A thin client has Terminal Services and or Citrix Server software installed If the FCWnx client has Thin Client Status of Enabled other computers can connect to the Terminal or Citrix Server on the FCWnx client and run FCWnx e Disabled Select if you want to disable the thin client option e Enabled Select to enable the thin client option at this FCWnx client The number of thin clients you can enable is controlled by the number of thin client licenses you have Refer to the Client Monitor form which displays the number of thin client licenses presently available and in use
379. n you add a 16 DO module sixteen 16 digital output records are created Example 0001 1 01 Do This digital output is on controller 1 module 1 point 1 To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the number prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters For systems with ACU controllers When you add an RRM module the following records are created e 16 digital output e 2 Aux DI Example 16337 00 0 ACU Reader To change this description enter over the existing text and save the record It is recommended that you keep the number prefix in each digital output description displayed to aid in locating the alarm points on the physical hardware This field accepts a maximum of 64 characters Creating direct connect controller records 1 When you click Add to add a controller record the Controller Definition tab of the Controller form displays default values filled in for Head of line and Credential Loading Complete the following Enter the address of the controller 90 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 10 11 e Enter the type of controller e Tf this controller is the first controller on a string of controllers select Yes in Head of line Otherwise select No and select the head of line controller If this is a downstream controller th
380. nce Refer to Chapter 2 System preferences on page 24 You must restart the FCWnx program for any changes to the Preference form to take effect JSelect a time interval for archiving your database 1 Configure the number of seconds that elapse before your FCWnx system detects and advises you that your database is not accessible If you are using image badging set the aspect ratio Set console alarm sounds Configure for line coloring for suspended credentials Enable T amp A and APB if applicable for your system nar w If this is a conversion or upgrade consider selecting Enable unique and required Employee Number Select if you want to enable Grant Access On Duress ox Configure if you want Alarm E mail Notification Policies amp Places Facility Refer to Define facilities on page qs 47 1 Click the add icon B to begin a new record 2 Enter a unique description in the Description field This may be a building name or location Administration Client Refer to Identify and configure clients on page qs 48 1 Enter or edit a unique description for the client you are adding If you do not enter a description this field automatically populates with the PC Name selected on the Client tab Note Global Client Descriptions We recommend that your client description include a meaningful name of the Global or Regional Database Server computer When the description displays on the Client Monitor form the Global and
381. nd the alarm is in the alarm state for 12 seconds the output relay is active for a total of 22 seconds beginning when the alarm entered the alarm state Comments Use this field to enter a location description reason for creating this record or special considerations for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 74 and complete the fields on this tab When a controller is reset or the database is reloaded all schedules from midnight to present time run EXCEPT for schedules that have a DO On time NOT equal to zero and were set to occur prior to the current time Example You have created a schedule to occur at 8 00 am to activate a digital output 1 minute At 10 00 am the database for the controller is downloaded During the download process all schedules from Midnight to the current time 10 00 am are re run Your schedule for the 8 00 am DO does not run since it started and ended before the current time of 10 00 am 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 145 146 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Schedule tab Use this tab to define schedules for turning digital outputs DO on or off Time schedules define intervals that include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes At the start of the schedule the state of the DO changes to the scheduled value At the end of the schedule the
382. ned 59 60 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 34 Form fields continued Element Description Note SCIF Workstations SCIF permissions OVERRIDE what is assigned on this form SCIF permissions depending on the type of client workstation assignment on the Client form are as follows e Administration This is the default for new installations and new client workstation records This configuration allows full functionality except monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration e Operator This configuration allows this client workstation to view all monitors and monitor alarms activity functions Graphics Console and Video Console e SCIF If this is a SCIF workstation enable SCIF on the Area form This configuration allows this client workstation to do everything that an Administration workstation can perform as well as monitoring unmonitoring alarms opening closing doors and activating deactivating DOs that belong to a SCIF configuration Note When using the API Form Alarms events and functions associated with a SCIF workstation do not display and cannot be configured monitored or controlled through an API connection unless you are at the SCIF workstation e Not Applicable Select this workstation type for CCTV interfaces During a database conversion from an earlier version of FCWnx workstation types default to Admini
383. ned for viewing all controllers are displayed if their number is equal to or less than 64 No For a shortcut menu to functions available within the Controller Monitor form select a controller from the list and right click 303 304 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 130 Controller Monitor Description Active Hos Default Ho Micro BCT6XDK BCTEX e acu BCT6XDK BCTEX Ea px2000 BCT6XDK BCTEX Table 183 Form fields Address 1 14236 3 Connection Firmware version Comm device Head Of Line Mode Online Connected 6 1 07 Idle comi Normal Online Connected 08 02 01 Idle 10 40 254 Normal O Offline Shutdown 0 Idle comi Micro Normal Element Description Description The Description is assigned to the controller when defined on the Controller form Active Hostname The name of the computer that controls communications to the controller For those computers licensed for Client Redundancy the current Active Hostname may be a backup client and have a different name than the Default Hostname computer Default Hostname This column does not display if this computer is not licensed for Client Redundancy The hostname displayed is the computer that normally hosts this controller The icon image displays in green when the controllers are controlled by the originating host The icon image displays in yellow to signify a failed system The backup client com
384. ned printer This option 1s available only when a Report form or Report is displaying Create default template Select this option on the File menu to create a default Report template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying Note Ifa specific date is part of this template whenever this report is run it uses that date therefore it is important to update the calendar criteria as needed Set as default template Use this option on the File menu to select a template to use as the default template This option is available only when a Report form is displaying with a loaded template While the selected Report form is displaying select Set As Default Template A message displays stating the current template is now the default template for this form This template is automatically loaded whenever you open this report form You cannot undo this election however you can later display and assign another report as the default Export This option on the File menu is available only when a Report form is displaying The Export option allows you to select an export format for your report There are a variety of formats available including text Word for Windows Lotus HTML and Excel Select an export destination for the report to a disk file exchange folder Lotus Domino Lotus Domino Mail or Microsoft Mail MAPD Delete template Select this option on the File menu to delete the current Report template This option is av
385. ng setup such as controller address IP address change or phone number changes Once saved the controller resets and the new changes take effect Note Ifyou change preference block data through this application any Universal Credential Format UBF data is erased For example Ifa M 5 PXN was originally configured as a direct serial controller during installation but is now a network controller select the updated controller type and complete the network information Click OK The controller accepts the changes resets then changes the host information for this controller The Controller Preference Direct Dialup tab allows you to change the connection type of the controller and its Address Idle Time and DI res tolerance The Controller Preference Networking tab displays only if the system identified your controller as a network controller and allows you to change the network preferences for the controller Controller Preference Credential Format This tab opens to display the custom credential formats that are currently in the controller If there are no custom formats the fields are empty If a format in the database does not match what is available in the controller the window list displays a message Unrecognized Format To change the credential format e Magnetic stripe Select the type of magnetic stripe format from the drop down list e Wiegand Click Assign formats to display a list of available Wiegand credential formats
386. nitoring of a group of alarms off or on using the keypad This can also be accomplished by setting up a schedule for an alarm group using a time schedule Note Only reader module door inputs and 20D module input points can be shunted from a keypad To identify a reader module door input look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 Reader To identify a 20DI module input point look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 DI Chapter 4 119 Devices Door Functions tab Use this tab to define the door settings associated with the selected reader Figure 40 Door Functions tab 120 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 59 Form fields Element Description Time Maximum unlock The time interval in minutes and seconds that a door remains unlocked after the reader reads a valid credential This is the amount of time that a user has to open a door based on a valid input 1 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 60 maximum minutes 2 Enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum seconds Example A facilities employee may be required to move equipment or furniture in and out of rooms The assignment requires a block of time beyond the normal unlock time as configured and sufficient time to empty or fill rooms through which access is gained by a reader and valid facility credential Alarm sense The time interval in minutes and seconds that
387. nly instructions in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available instruction e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign an instruction Click OK to display results in the Instruction windowpane How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 86 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Digital Outputs tab Use this tab to link digital outputs to an alarm When this alarm is triggered the linked digital output is also triggered Chapter 4 159 Devices Figure 63 Digital Outputs tab ACU system e Description Facility R Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Output A Primary Local Output B a kNone gt z Output Relay Control Digital 0 Time Sched Link Only If Ignore A Digital Output 14236 00 00 ACU Reader 0 DO Relay 14236 00 00 ACU Reader 0 4ux DO Relay 14236 01 01 ACU Reader 1 DO Relay 14236 01 01 ACU Reader 1 Aux DO Relay 14236 02 02 ACU Reader 2 DO Relay 14236 02 02 ACU Reader 2 Aux DO Relay 14236 03 03 ACU Reader 3 DO Relay 14236 03 03 ACU Reader 3 Aux DO Relay Time Schedule TF Link Only If Offline T Ignore Alarm Monitor State Table 87 Form fields Element Description This section is enabled for digital outputs that are controlled by Micro controlle
388. nse to an invalid credential transaction An alarm is recorded in response to the credential transaction Table 118 Form fields Element Description Description Enter text up to 64 alphanumeric characters in length The description should convey specific information relating to a physical location camera reader or state such as Front Door Inv Credential Camera 1 Reader 1 You can assign a reader alarm or camera alarm or both and this can be reflected in the description of the Trigger 202 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Preset Camera tab This window enables you to assign camera s and their associated presets with an event Up to four cameras can be assigned per event trigger Figure 90 Preset Camera tab Table 119 Form fields e Description Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Assigned Preset Camera Preset Camera Remove cm Element Description Assigned Preset Camera This pane displays assigned preset cameras for this event Windowpane Edit Click Edit to display the Preset Camera Selection window You are able to edit an existing Preset and Camera combination associated with this event This option is disabled if there are no existing records Add Click Add to select a camera and corresponding preset The available presets for a camera display after you select the camera Click OK The addition now displays in the Assi
389. nsole This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual Graphics Editor allows you to place symbols representing devices such as doors readers digital inputs or controllers on graphics maps For example start with a floor plan and place symbols on the map to indicate their location and then link these symbols to a physical device In addition you can add text to create labels and print the graphics maps The Graphics Editor also allows you to import gif jpg jpeg or AutoCAD dxf files to be used in creating your graphics maps Graphics Console Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual Graphics Console provides a graphical view of the premises and allows an operator to locate alarms or events as they occur such as a door held open alarm Operators can issue commands such as locking and unlocking doors Manual control form Note Functions associated with a SCIF workstation cannot be controlled with the Manual Control form EXCEPTION If you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting the controller door DO alarm and DI functions can be controlled The Manual Control form Monitors and Controls group allows the operator to perform the following depending on the operator s facilities and permissions e Manually lock unlock doors e Turn on off DO digital outp
390. nstalled This application starts in the language of the operating system For example if Windows Spanish is installed this application starts in Spanish Initially there is only one operator provided with the system an English language operator with the login ID of secure and a password of master The very first login to this application MUST be done under this operator If the operating system is in a language other than English there is a slight delay in Chapter 2 System preferences bringing up this application main menu since the English help files must be copied into the main directory e To set up a different language operator you must go to the Operator form and add an operator with the desired language A combo box on the operator form lists the available languages for the system A language must be selected prior to saving the operator s record e Multiple language logins are supported without having to restart the application Log out and log back in as the new operator There is a slight delay in bringing up this application main menu since the new language help files must be copied to the main directory This application along with the Help files display in that operator s language e Any data entry done after the operator s login is in the operator s language For example when adding a controller all the attached device descriptions are in the operator s language e There are several areas that are not translated such
391. nt Keypad Entry Card Number Length y J7 Enable Valid No Passage Table 58 Form fields Element Description Controller This is a read only field The description of the controller that manages this reader Module This is a read only field The default description is in the format mmmm b Module Type where mmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number and Module Type represents the reader module For example 0001 1 8RP would be the reader on controller one 8RP module one Number This is a read only field The number of the reader Example For a Micro 5 Px 1 to 16 for a Micro PX 2000 1 to 4 The number corresponds to where the reader is connected on the controller See the Micro 5 Installation Guide Micro PX 2000 and Micro PXN 2000 Installation Guide or ACU Networked Intelligent Controllers User Guide for more information 114 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 58 Form fields continued Element Description Model Select from the drop down list of card data formats The list of formats that display is associated with the type of controllers used in your system For Micro controllers e CASI RUSCO Supervised if using a CASI RUSCO supervised reader such as the 94x or 97x series proximity readers set for supervised F 2F e CASI RUSCO 440 445 if using a CASI RUSCO Model 440 Model 445 or Model 910 e Other if
392. ntials enabled on the Preference form displays in red font in the list box on the right APB Status Displays the current Anti Passback status Chapter 7 267 Access rights departments persons and credentials Table 161 Form fields continued Element Description TA Status Displays the current Time and Attendance status Status Click to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last Status request How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 161 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab User Fields tab Use this tab to enter user defined information for the Credential form record selected in the right windowpane Figure 119 User Fields tab e Description i Facility y Credential Definition Credential Status User Fields Modify Field User fields Value Credential User Field 1 Credential User Field 2 Credential User Field 3 Credential User Field 4 Credential User Field 5 Credential User Field 6 Credential User Field 7 Credential User Field 8 Credential User Field 9 Credential User Field 10 Credential User Field 11 Credential User Field 12 Credential User Field 13 Credential User Field 14 Credential User Field 15 Credential User Field 16 Credential User Field 17 Credential User Field 18 Credential User Field 19 Credential User Field 20 4 Table 162 Form fields Element Description Modify Field To give value to
393. ntinued Chapter 1 Introduction Element Description Delete Record Click to delete a record The Delete Record option deletes the current record from the database Note BE CAREFUL when selecting this option as deleted records cannot be recovered The Delete Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given all permissions Some forms such as the Reader form do not have a delete option Search Click to search The Search option conducts a search in the database for all records that match the search criteria data you enter in the form The records found by the search are displayed in the search results window Data can be in any number of fields in the form or any number of tables Only records that match all fields in which data is entered are displayed An asterisk can be entered in text boxes to indicate wildcard characters The Search option is available only when a form is open that contains records Examples e Enter S in an appropriate text box to display any records beginning with S e A search for credentialholders with the last name starting with Sm would yield such names as Smith and Smythers If no search data is entered all records display Any column displaying in the list box can be sorted by clicking on the column heading Recall Search Click to recall a search The Recall Search option refills the current form with the last search criteria data Use thi
394. ntroller immediately Flash Controller Click to open the Controller Flash Controller Preference Configuration window that allows you to download the latest firmware to the selected controller Refer to Controller flash and controller preference configuration below Remove Controller s Remove the controller from the Controller Monitor form window Search Controllers Opens the Search Criteria and Controller Selection form and allows you to narrow the amount of criteria displayed on the Controller Monitor form Select Columns Opens the Select Columns dialog box and allows you to select columns to display on the form 307 308 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 186 Form fields continued Element Description Recall Controller Search When checked recalls last search criteria from the Search Criteria and Controller Selection form Controller flash and controller preference configuration The Flash Controller option is available as an icon on the Controller Monitor form toolbar and shortcut menu This dialog box displays only if the controller is online There are three options 1 View edit preference info Controller Preference Direct Dialup This option is available for selection of a single controller When selected the Controller Preference Configuration screen displays and the configuration for the controller is retrieved allowing you to edit or change an existi
395. nts form Guard Tours group is enabled if you are licensed for Guard Tour A Guard Tour is an inspection of your facility premises made by a security officer at random intervals The officer stops at pre determined tour points along the way where a credential must be presented to a reader or 283 284 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual DI point so that the system can track the credential progress Each time the officer presents a credential to a reader a tour point is hit e Tour Points and a Guard Tours record must be created before a tour can begin e Tour points can be any readers or DIs that are not on a dial up controller e DIs must be configured as a DI type of Guard Tour e DI points can only be assigned to one Guard Tour e Reader tour points can be assigned to any tours and any number of tours e All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region e The credential read does not grant access or cause an invalid alarm e Double hit points along the tour result in invalid tour transactions e Credential transactions are stored in credential history and available to generate reports e A credential must be assigned to the tour Additional statements relating to Guard Tours are listed in Define Guard Tours on page 280 Table 170 Form fields Element Description Search Click to display or change an existing Guard Tour point record If this is a Global confi
396. nu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations The Alarm Monitor form displays alarm activity e An operator can see alarms on the Alarm Monitor form only for facilities that are currently active and assigned to the current operator e The option to monitor an alarm must be selected on the Alarm form in order for a specific alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form All responses can be obtained from the Administration Report with Response selected as the report type on the General tab Table 176 Form fields Chapter 9 295 Monitor and control Element Description Alarm Conditions Alarm Reset Cut Short Process States This is an internal state for alarm conditions Active Pending Inactive Completed The following diagram explains the action of alarms and how alarm states and process states relate to each other Figure 127 Alarm states i 5 NY Alarm Purge Al Removes from Alarm Monitor e When an alarm configured for Operator acknowledge is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short its internal process state is Active e When an alarm configured for Operator acknowledge is in alarm condition either Alarm Cut or Short and is acknowledged see 1 above its internal process state becomes Pending
397. nx Edition User Manual Question Our site uses this application in two languages Sometimes when we log in the Help files are not in the correct language Why This occurs when you are using either a non English operating system or this application in non English and you did not correctly shut down this application To eliminate this problem you MUST select the File menu and then Exit to correctly shut down this application Question How do I remove an alarm from the Alarm Monitor form When an alarm displays on the Alarm Monitor form appropriate action should be taken For example you may want to send a guard out to check that a door is secure Once the alarm has been investigated and reset if necessary it should be removed from the Alarm Monitor form 1 3 Some alarms may require an acknowledgment before they can be removed This feature is set on the Alarm form To acknowledge the alarm Without a response click Acknowledge and the Process state for that alarm changes to Acknowledged With a response click Responses to select a predefined response or enter your own in the Response field Then click Acknowledge and the Process state for that alarm changes to Acknowledged To remove an individual alarm without waiting for it to reset highlight the alarm and click Remove Individual If you have permission you can remove all alarms in one action by clicking the Remove All icon Question How do I troubleshoot my Globa
398. o Seconds D a Comments A Table 99 Form fields Element Description ROUTING Client Groups This windowpane displays the names of Client Groups assigned to this Routing record Assign Client Groups Click to display an Alarm Routing Client Group Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign Client Groups to this Routing record Only Client Groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available Client Group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a Client Group Click OK to close this dialog box and display the results in the Routing Client Groups windowpane Select one of the following options Always Select this option if you always want this Client Group to receive alarms Time Schedule Select this option to enable the Time Schedule drop down list and then select a Time Schedule from the list Table 99 Form fields continuea Chapter 4 Devices Element Description BUMPING Client Groups This windowpane displays the names of Client Groups assigned to this Bumping record Typically the Client Groups displayed here are different than those assigned to Routing Assign Client Groups Click to display an Alarm Bumping Client Group Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign Client Groups to the Bumping record Only Client Groups in the operator s facilities are avai
399. o exit ON pu er E From the Start menu select Programs then MSDE Admin to open the application and access the FCWnx database Question Why did my services shut down unexpectedly The log reports with a message Database is down This indicates a problem with connectivity to the database In order not to lose any transactions FCWnx saves all credential and alarm messages by writing them to a file and read the file back in when the services start up again Correct the connectivity problem with the database and restart services Question Why is performance sluggish and why does it seem to hang The Windows Task Manager indicates an excessive level of memory usage The diagnostic log indicates Server is too busy to complete operations or Too many resources are allocated SQL Server can be configured to use a fixed amount of memory or to dynamically adjust the amount of memory based on demand We recommend that you set the SQL Server memory as follows SQL 2000 Enterprise Manager 1 In Enterprise Manager on the selected Server computer select and then right click to access Properties 2 Select and display the Memory tab of the SQL Properties window 3 Select Dynamically Configure SQL Server memory 4 Set the Minimum MB to no less than a quarter of the allowable limit Set the Maximum MB at approximately half of the allowable MB 5 Exit Enterprise Manager SQL 2005 Server Management Studio 1 On the sel
400. o reach host Enter telephone numbers of up to 20 digits that the controller dials to reach the host If an outside line must be accessed in order to dial out enter a comma after the number that accesses the outside line typically 9 In this situation if the telephone number to be dialed is 1 555 666 7777 you would enter the number in this field as follows 9 15556667777 The controller dials the number in Number 1 and then tries the others in numerical order until connection it made Note All Number fields must contain a telephone number of up to 20 digits If there is only one telephone number for this controller to reach the host repeat this number in all fields If you click Save after completing the first Number field the system automatically completes all Number fields with a duplicate number Same number retries This is available for Micro controllers only Enter the number of times from 0 to 9 the controller should redial the same telephone number before moving on to the next available telephone number Retry interval for systems using ACU controllers Enter the number from 1 to 9 of minute intervals that the controller waits in between each dial to the host For example if you specify 2 then the controller waits 2 x 1 2 minutes between each dial to the host Maximum disconnect time min Select a range from 1 to 180 minutes as the maximum number of minutes that the host is allowed to be disconnected from t
401. of the tour point e If activity is manual control Client name displays Name e If this credential is assigned to a person the name of the person displays e If this activity is manual control the operator name displays e If this credential is a guard tour credential the name of the person displays e If this hit is a DI point this field is blank Number e If the credential is unknown or not assigned to a person the credential number or if aliasing is used the credential alias number is displayed e Otherwise this field is blank Reference e If this is an elevator reader Valid Floor or Invalid Floor displayed in the field this field displays the floor selected e If this is a guard tour the guard tour description displays e If Max Invalid PIN Count displays in the activity type then Credential Suspended displays here e For any other activity type this field is blank e For systems using ACU controllers Access logging information codes display Activity Monitor toolbar The Activity Monitor form toolbar consists of the following options Table 173 Form fields Element Description Resume Resume or restart the scrolling of credential transactions This icon is active only if you clicked Pause All credential transactions display that occurred while the Pause option was on once you select resume Pause This option pauses or suspends the scrolling of credential transactions on the Activity Monitor
402. oft SQL Server 2005 Server SQL Server Management Studio At the Connect to Server window verify that the Login and Password are correct and then click Connect Open the Databases folder Right click one of the databases and select Tasks then Back up from the shortcut menu 4 When the Backup Database box displays select Full In the Name field you can keep the default or choose a different name Under Destination choose Disk or Tape Edit the file path name as appropriate for the folder that you have created to receive the database Do not change the database name Click OK 7 Inthe Select a page pane click Options In the Options page select either Overwrite all existing backup sets or Append to the existing backup set We recommend that you append to the file 8 We recommend that you select Verify backup when finished Click OK to start the backup 9 Click OK when the Backup operation has been completed successfully window displays 10 Repeat these steps for each of the three FCWnx databases Quick Setup guide How to accomplish administrator tasks Table 2 Administrator tasks Element Description Create Controller Records e Direct Connect Controller Record e Dial up Controller Record Refer to Define controllers on page qs 86 Additional device records can be configured after creating controller records Click Security Devices group Click Controller icon Select connection type as Direct on the
403. ol an Area or Intrusion Zone and take an Area or Zone from one condition armed to another condition disarmed Items that display in the navigation pane are determined by facilities assigned to the current operator Example e When Armed readers do not allow access to anyone alarm points are monitored and readers ignore schedules When Disarmed readers allow access and alarms are not monitored Figure 135 Areas and Zones tab aio x e Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas and Zones Mode Guard Tour Description Befesh Erand Expand All Colapse Al Purpose Set state to Arm Disarm E b al E Table 191 Form fields Element Description Navigation Windowpane ACU controllers Displays configured Areas controllers and their associated alarms in a hierarchal structure Immediately following selection of a controller the system searches and displays associated Area records in the list box Micro controllers Displays configured Intrusion Zones controllers and their associated alarms in a hierarchal structure Immediately following selection of a Micro controller the system searches and displays associated Intrusion Zone records in the list box 320 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 191 Form fields continued Element Description Columns in Windowpane Description Description of the elements in this application
404. oller sends an invalid Timed APB message to the host e Timed APB min This field is enabled when you select a Logical type as APB in The default of this field is 0 Enter a number between 0 and 255 e Multiple Exiting Areas This option allows you to assign additional Areas that have readers that can be used as an alternative exit when leaving the Area that you entered These Areas may be attached or part of a common area with no readers in between A credentialholder who is exiting a common Area is also registered as in any of the other Areas Exit can be granted from the common area or any of the other Areas assigned here and the credential exit status is reset e Assign Click to display a list of Areas that are available to be assigned as an alternative or additional exit when leaving the Area that you entered Only Areas in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator Keypad Options This feature is for systems using Micro controllers Max Invalid PIN Count 1 Select this check box if you want your system to suspend credentials after an invalid PIN is entered and a credential is presented at a reader a configured number of times 2 Then enter a number between 1 and 6 as the number of times an invalid PIN code is entered at a system reader before the credential is suspended The default of this field is 3 3 If suspended the credential must be changed to active by a system administrat
405. oller monitoring on page qs 303 1 Right click on the Controller Monitor to display a shortcut menu Select Change State to put the controller online Click Download Database each time a controller is set to online in order to download the database to the controller Anytime a new controller database is required click Download Database Click Download Credentials to download credential records for the selected controller Places amp Policies Area Refer to Define areas on page qs 220 5 Note The Area form is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Use this form to configure secure Areas Your system supports up to 8 192 Areas Complete the steps in the order presented 1 You must first configure ACU controllers Reader records are automatically created when you configure an ACU controller The controllers must be connected and online to arm disarm if the Area spans controllers An Area can contain alarm points entry and exit points readers and digital outputs relays Areas can be local does not span controllers or global spans controllers Create Areas The intended application is suited for arming and disarming secure Areas from outside or inside of the monitored and secured Areas Click the add icon Esto begin a new record Assign devices to an Area in order to use the device functionality The defined secure Areas have the ability to be armed and disarmed through access
406. ollowing sequence sp dropserver lt real server name gt go sp _addserver lt real server name gt LOCAL go If the error message states There is already a local server then use the following sequence sp dropserver lt old server name gt go sp _addserver lt real server name gt LOCAL go Stop and restart SQL Server Question Event Log contains the following error message What can I do The File Replication Service is having trouble enabling replication from lt remoteservername gt for lt directory gt using the DNS name lt remoteservername gt FRS will keep retrying Following are some of the reasons you would see this warning 1 FRS cannot correctly resolve the DNS name lt remoteservername gt from this computer Appendix A 359 Diagnostics and troubleshooting 2 FRS is not running on lt remoteservername gt 3 The topology information in the Active Directory for this replica has not yet replicated to all the Domain Controllers This event log message will appear once per connection After the problem is fixed you will see another Event Log message indicating that the connection has been established Solution 1 System times may not by synchronized To resolve synchronize with the domain controller clock time a Run the following command on all computers to synchronize the clock time with the domain controller Net time domain controller name set y b Stop and then restart the File Replication
407. ols amp Alarms amp Events Y Security Devices E Elevators w Graphics mi Schedules Gateways amp Interfaces e Administration e Diagnostics 10 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 5 Form fields Element Description Menu Bar Select a menu bar item to display a drop down group of related options Enabled options on the drop down menus are preceded with a check w icon File Click to display File menu selections See Table 7 on page 14 Search Click to display Search menu selections See Table 8 on page 16 View Click to display View menu selections See Table 9 on page 16 Reports Click to display Reports menu selections See Table 10 on page 17 Window Click to display Window menu selections See Table 11 on page 19 Help Click to display Help menu selections See Table 12 on page 19 Application Toolbar Click to access frequently used forms Person Opens the Person form Activity Monitor Opens the Activity Monitor Alarm Monitor Opens the Alarm Monitor Graphics Console Opens the Graphics Console application If your system is licensed for this feature the icon displays Video Console Opens the Video Console application If your system is licensed for this feature the icon displays Manual Control Opens Manual Control Help With an application form displaying you can click the icon then drag the over
408. olumn may be blank Condition Displays the current state of the alarm The four possible states are as follows e Alarm The point is in the Active alarm state either Closed or Opened The Active alarm state for an alarm is defined on the Alarm form e Reset The point is no longer in the active alarm state e Cut The wiring to the alarm point has been cut e Short The wiring to the alarm point has been short circuited Process State The process state is Active Pending Inactive or Completed This is an internal state for alarm conditions To acknowledge an alarm select the desired alarm and click Acknowledge The alarm icon changes to reflect the acknowledgement and clears from the window after reset 297 298 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 177 Form fields continued Element Description Count The number of times the alarm has entered an alarm state since the alarm was last cleared from the Alarm Monitor Host Date Time The date and time the alarm occurred according to the system date and time Device Date Time The date and time the alarm occurred according to the controller s date and time Facility Displays the Facility associated with this alarm Area The column displays for systems with ACU controllers Displays the Area associated with this alarm Instructions Displays the instructions linked to the current alarm When an alarm is displayed on the Alarm Monitor f
409. onality The defined secure Areas have the ability to be armed and disarmed through access control by using a credential and keypad reader or manual control The Area form provides the ability to define areas for each controller that consists of the following e Keypad Disarm and arm e Time Schedules e SCIF Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facility Workstations e Readers Alarms e APB e Digital outputs When an Area record is updated and saved all controllers are notified of the new configuration Before you can delete an Area record 1 Access rights must be removed 2 Devices associated with this Area must be removed 3 This Area must be removed from the Advanced tab of the Person form as assigned for Arm Disarm Table 133 Form fields Chapter 6 221 Areas and intrusion zones Element Description Description This field accepts 64 characters Facility A facility option can be assigned for the Area from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made NG Fora shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Area tab Use this tab to configure the area record Figure 97 Area tab Table 134 Form fields e Description Facility v Area Reader Alarm Digtal Output m APB IV Enable Local Re Entry Timer min mSensitive Co
410. oor Digital Output Selection dialog displays Add To add a floor digital output link click this button The Floor Digital Output Selection dialog displays Use the dialog box to create or edit a floor to digital output link e Floor Select a floor from the drop down list of available floors Digital Output Select a digital output from the drop down list of available DOs e Area This control is available only if the selected reader is owned by an ACU controller Select an Area from the drop down list of available Areas Click OK to accept your selections and close this form Remove To remove a floor digital output select an entry from the list and then click this button How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 105 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab Note This tab displays ONLY if you select Floor Tracking By Input from the Floor Tracking field on the Elevator tab Select this tab to link a digital output and a digital input to a floor Note Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable MUST be on the same controller Chapter 4 Devices Figure 81 Floor Digital Output Digital Input tab e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digital Output Digital Input Assigned Floor Digital Qutput Digital Input Digital Output Digital Input Table 106 Fo
411. or Note Ifthe Preference form is set to grant access on duress access is granted and the credential transaction displays as Valid Duress If the Preference form is not set to grant access on duress the door does not open and the transaction is Invalid Duress If set to monitor an alarm is generated in both instances Keypad Entry Card number Length This drop down list is available for systems configured with ACU controllers This is the number of PIN digits that the keypad reader can accept From the drop down list select None or a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 9 Chapter 4 117 Devices Table 58 Form fields continuea Element Description Enable Valid No Passage Note This option is applicable to readers associated with Micro controllers This option is selected by default Select this check box if you want your system to notify you when a valid credential read occurs but the door did not open within the configured unlock time This may be an indication of someone deciding not to pass through the door or an accidental read as someone passes a reader e This feature must be associated with an alarm type of Door Forced or Door Held in order to be notified of a change in state of the door e In order to notify of a duress situation Grant Access on Duress must be configured on the Preference form How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 58 and complete the fields on this tab according to the reade
412. ord option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given all permissions Some forms such as the Reader form do not have a delete option Notes The Notes menu option opens a text file notes txt into which you can enter site specific information The program used to edit this file is the program that has been associated with txt files in Windows usually Notepad The notes txt file is saved to your desktop by default Logoff Click to display a dialog box Enter your logoff ID and Password to quit the FCWnx client program Print Setup Select Print Setup to open the Print Setup Window allowing you to select your printer printer properties paper source and orientation If your printer is networked you may be required to adjust the security properties At the computer that owns the printer navigate to the Properties window for the selected printer Click Start Settings Printers Select the printer and then right click From the shortcut menu select Properties On the Security tab of the Properties window proceed to add Anonymous Login to the Group or user names Table 7 File menu continued Chapter 1 Introduction Element Description Print Preview Report The Print Preview Report option allows you to preview before printing and is available only when a Report form is displaying A printer must be added to your system in order for this feature to be availab
413. ork e Network Dial up if this is a network controller and has a backup dial up option When the network connection is not available the host attempts to reach the controller via a dial up modem e Network Direct if this is a network controller When the network connection is not available communication fails over to the secondary direct connection and communication continues e Network Network if this is a network controller When the network connection is not available communication fails over to a secondary network communication through another IP address assigned on the Port Settings tab Using a device that converts IP protocol to serial communication your network communication is tunneled into packets and transported to your computer as if it were a serial connection This product supports the Lantronix USD10 USD100 device Note Dial Up and Network Dial Up Controllers If the host computer of this controller is licensed for Client Redundancy and has assigned a backup client a dialog box displays reminding you to complete the Client form by configuring telephone numbers for backup clients to reach this controller Host Keep Alive Enter or use the up and down arrows the number of seconds that the host waits before sending the next message to a controller Enter a number between 10 and 3600 In general you want a large number when you have many controllers on the same line or have a slow baud rate The default is 3
414. orm Use this tab to select the criteria by which this report is generated Employee Last Name Select the range of person last names you want to display on the report If you want to list all persons leave these fields blank Department To provide additional filtering you can select to run a report on only those persons in a selected department Personnel Type To provide additional filtering you can also select to list only those persons assigned a selected personnel type Round By Select the criteria by which you want the time of the Time and Attendance transaction rounded by Hour Half Hour 30 minute increments Quarter Hour 15 minute increments or Minute Date Range tab Roll Call Alarm History Credential History Zone History DI History Time and Attendance History or Operator History reports Use this tab to select a date and time range on which to base this report Daily time range Reports transactions that occurred between the start and stop time each day in the date range For example you select a start time of 8 00 a m a stop time of 5 00 p m a start day of April 1 and a stop day of April 5 You receive a report of credential transactions occurring between 8 00 a m through 5 00 p m each day of the day range Continuous time span Continuously reports on transactions that occurred between the start time on the start day to the stop time on the stop day For example you select a start time of 8 00 a m a stop
415. orm select the alarm The alarm instructions set up for this alarm display in the Instruction windowpane providing guidelines for the operator to resolve the alarm condition Predefined Instructions were created on the Instruction Form of the Alarms amp Events group Refer to Define instructions on page 151 Response This is a multi line dialog box allowing you to manually enter a response of up to 256 alphanumeric characters for the current alarm Alarm Monitor toolbar Table 178 Form fields Element Description Purge All Click this button on the toolbar to remove all alarms on the Alarm Monitor regardless of whether the alarms are acknowledged or unacknowledged An operator must have an ALL permission for the Alarm Monitor in order to have access to this icon Purge Individual Click this button on the toolbar to remove one or more alarms without waiting for them to reset The alarm s can be unacknowledged and cleared as long as it was not defined on the Alarm form as requiring an acknowledgment Select a series of alarms in sequence or individual alarms not in sequence Help Displays the online Help system Table 178 Form fields Chapter 9 Monitor and control Element Description Response Click to display a list of predefined responses Predefined responses are created on the Alarm Response form Refer to Define alarm responses on page 152 If the entire list does not fit scroll bars b
416. ose that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only outputs in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Note You must assign a Time Schedule in order to move this Output Relay to the Selected windowpane Select then click the right arrow to assign an available output Selected Output Relay Windowpane The outputs that display are those that are currently assigned to this record Select then click the left arrow to unassign an available output Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list The default is None e If there are none listed create a time schedule on the Time Schedule form e If no time schedule is to be assigned you must select None before you can move a selected output relay from the available windowpane to the assigned windowpane Activate Offline The default of this check box is not selected and this link functions during the time schedule regardless of the status of the digital input If selected the link between the digital input and output relay functions only when the controller is offline This output relay does not function during the selected time schedule Use this when multiple relays are to be linked to a single input Ignore Enabled State If selected the output relay triggers even when the alarm that has the digital output is not monitored How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 68 and complete the fields on
417. ost and controller can operate independently in different time zones If you want daylight saving changes the controller to recognize and implement daylight savings time select this check box e The default of this check box is checked and the controller recognizes daylight savings time changes e Ifthe checkbox is not checked the controller does not adjust for daylight savings time change How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 51 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Comments tab This tab and windowpane are provided to enter a location description reason for creating this group or special considerations for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field Figure 32 Comments tab Controller e Description Ke Facility y Events Status Controller Configuration Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments How to 1 Complete the comments field on this tab by placing your mouse cursor in the window and entering text from your keyboard 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 102 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Events tab Use this tab to assign events to this controller Figure 33 Events tab e Description fet Facility v Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration rere event TOM Reset TA event
418. oto ID to a live image The Swipe and Show window is set to a default size and cannot be resized Tailgating Tailgating refers to a user following another user through a door without presenting a credential They follow closely enough so they can get through the door or gate before it closes Only the first user is recorded as IN or OUT weak encryption key Weak encryption implies that the key could be unscrambled with a realistic amount of processing capacity and within a reasonable amount of time In FCWnx a message displays informing you that an assigned key is too weak and therefore invalid Corrections must be made before the record can be saved We recommend entering 48 unique hex characters in three 16 character strings Do not repeat any character Do not create a pattern Index A access right 237 240 241 242 243 245 269 290 assign readers 239 define 238 facility 380 floor 240 person form 253 person report 337 active directory password authentication 64 activity monitor 288 shortcut menu 292 toolbar 29 ACU 89 93 105 114 128 129 179 180 181 220 address 19 46 94 110 144 190 195 250 321 331 364 bus 9 controller 89 92 93 304 305 306 308 DVR 9 e mail 75 251 e mail field 26 fields 29 GE Security 373 IP 106 module 85 reports 328 TCP IP 92 alarm 9 alarm notifier 26 console sound 25 description 54 e mail notification 2 event notifier 5 event triggers 3 failover
419. ou to select and assign DO groups you want associated with the selected record Only DO groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available DO group e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a DO group Click OK to display results in the Output Groups windowpane Primary Local Output Group The first local output group in the list of assigned output groups automatically displays as the primary You can select another output group as primary from the output groups displayed in the windowpane If the selection is not on a local controller the assignment arrow button is dimmed and unavailable for assignment as a primary output group If the controller is offline or unable to communicate with the host at the time of an alarm only the Primary Local DO group is triggered This section applies to Micro and ACU controllers When an alarm is active or a DO event occurs select the action to be performed on all DOs within all selected DO groups This action applies to both logical and physical alarms Chapter 4 Devices Table 69 Form fields continuea Element Description Reader DO Actions Active Inactive Normal The door locks and valid credentials unlock the door Schedules can override this state Lock no access The door locks and does not allow access Controllers put the readers in an offline state Schedules can
420. ough the basic steps needed to configure your system It should be used in conjunction with the other chapters of this document or the online Help if additional and specific information is required Not all forms are described here How to prepare for your configuration Before you proceed make sure that your peripheral system hardware is installed and running This includes controllers readers modems printers and network lines Refer to your Installation Manual documentation provided with your equipment from GE or follow specific installation instructions for your brand of hardware How to configure a system in recommended sequential order on page qs 2 Define preferences on page qs 2 Define facilities on page qs 2 Define clients on page qs 2 Define permissions on page qs 3 Define operators on page qs 3 Define schedules on page qs 4 Configure devices on page qs 7 Create on page qs 14 areas intrusion zones access rights person records credential records Back up your system on page qs 18 Professional and Enterprise systems and database backups How to accomplish frequently performed tasks CIKLA EI These tasks can be accessed by the icons on the Application Toolbar amp Create Persons on page qs 17 BF Monitor Activities on page qs 26 2 View Remove Alarms from the Alarm Monitor Form on page qs 27 view Graphics Console on page qs 27 If your system is licensed for this feature the following i
421. output to a different facility than the controller You can create an undesired result if you do not fully understand facility assignment 143 144 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Digital Output tab Use this tab to schedule when the digital outputs in the group are in the active state and for the specified length of time Figure 53 Digital Output tab e Description sy led Facility Py Schedule Manual Control Advanced Controller y Module EAN Number y Active state On time C On Minutes Seconds C of E a Comment p Table 74 Form fields Element Description Controller This is a read only field Displays the description of the controller on which this digital output is located Module This is a read only field When the records are created the default value is in the format mmmm b Module Type where mmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number and Module Type is the type of reader module such as 16DO Example 0001 1 16D0 would be the digital output on controller one 16DO module one Number This is a read only field and displays the physical address of the digital output Table 74 Form fields continuea Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Active State On Off Defines whether the digital output is turned On or Off when the digital output i
422. override the state and put the controller back online Indefinite Unlock The door is put into an unlock state Schedules can override the current state Auxiliary DO Actions Active Inactive On Indefinite The DO is put into active state indefinitely Schedules cannot override this state on a controller Off The DO is put into the de active state indefinitely Schedules cannot override this state on a controller On for Duration The DO is put into the active state for the duration defined Schedules cannot override this state on a controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 69 and complete the fields on this tab Note Be aware that Invalid Credential alarms and Lost Credential alarms do not reset If you assign a DO Group to either of these alarms the alarm goes inactive or turns off when acknowledging or purging 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Schedules tab Note These options are available for alarms associated with Micro controllers These options are available for Auxiliary alarms associated with ACU controllers This tab is available only if you have selected Digital Output in the Type field on the Digital Input Tab Use this tab to assign a schedule Time schedules define intervals which include a start AND an end time for different days of the week and modes Figure 50 Schedule tab i amp Digital Input e Description Facility y Events Status Digital Input
423. own list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Note If you assign DOs that belong to a different facility you may be creating an undesired result not all DOs are visible under certain facilities Group tab Use this tab to assign digital outputs to a selected digital output group on a specified controller 150 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 57 Group tab Table 79 Form fields Digital Output Group e Description P Facility X zi Group Schedule Number Controller Digital Outputs Assign Digital Outputs Element Description Number This is a read only field displaying the number assigned to the digital output group Controller This is a read only field displaying the description of the controller on which this digital output group is located Digital Outputs This windowpane displays the digital outputs assigned to this group Assign Digital Outputs Click this button to display the Digital Output Assignment dialog box This dialog box allows you to select and assign digital outputs you want associated with the selected record Only digital outputs in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available digital output e Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a digital ou
424. p to 5 client workstations 64 controllers and 256 readers This manual provides information for system administrators to configure and operate the FCWnx software Chapter 1 Introduction Product contents Inspect the package and contents for visible damage If any components are damaged or missing do not use contact your supplier immediately If you need to return the package you must ship it in the original box Before you begin configuration Before you proceed make sure that your peripheral system hardware is installed and running This includes controllers readers modems printers and network lines Refer to your Facility Commander Wnx Edition Installation Guide documentation provided with your equipment from GE or follow specific installation instructions for your brand of hardware Licensing Note Your software is licensed during the installation process The license sequence is also an item on the Start Programs menu Refer to the License Help system for additional details of the licensing procedure and operating in demo mode Selection of the Help menu About this application options opens a screen displaying the software version service pack number copyright information licensing information and contact information Your license included Imaging software for this application that controls the number of clients that can launch Imaging Imaging installs with every installation however you cannot enable Imaging on mo
425. phanumeric characters making possible exceptionally lengthy street addresses or E mail addresses Chapter 7 251 Access rights departments persons and credentials Figure 111 Location tab 7 Person Table 152 Form fields Element Description Address1 The labels of these five fields are defined on the Preference form Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Telephone Enter the telephone number of this person You may use up to 14 alphanumeric characters There are no restrictions in format whether you use hyphens parentheses or spaces Enter in a format meaningful and understandable to your organization or application How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 152 and complete the fields on this tab Note Any fields can be used as an E mail Address but must first be designated as the E mail address on the Preference form as a User Field or Address Field entry 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 252 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual User Fields tab Use this tab to enter user defined information Figure 112 User Fields tab e Last Name nnn Facility yl Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Advanced Modify Field User fields User Field 1 User Field 2 User Field 3 User Field 4 User Field 5 User Field 6 User Field 7 User Field 8 User Field 9 los Table 153 Form fields Element Desc
426. phic for regular employees and a different graphic for contract employees within your organization Note The Credential Design application has an extensive Help system to assist in designing your credential layout import graphics link designs to credentialholder information and add barcodes or encode magnetic stripes This section is an abridged summary of the credential design process To create your own credential design 1 Select Credential Design from the Credentials group The Credential Design form Design tab displays 2 Click Add and enter a unique Description then click Save The Edit Credential Design button is now enabled Click Edit Credential Design to run the Credential Design application Select New from the Imaging File menu Draw a shape in your design window the size of your credential SN a E a For a background color select Edit Background then select a color from the Color dialog that displays Add one or several bitmaps inside the credential design preferences 8 Add one or several text boxes 9 Move or resize the photo and text as desired 260 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 10 Click Save Credential design form Complete the Credential Design form Credentials group to create credential designs Credential designs are the graphics printed on credentials You may want to use different graphics for different types of personnel such as a specific graphic for regular employees
427. plays any previously assigned alarms Assign Alarms Click to display the Alarm Assignment dialog box that allows you to select specific alarms that trigger e mail notifications Click OK and the selected alarms display in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Alarm Assignment dialog box This window displays a list of alarms in the FCWnx system for the facilities available for assignment by this operator All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Transaction Type Select one or both transaction types that trigger an e mail alarm notification e Alarm E mail notification is sent at onset of the alarm e Reset E mail notification is sent when an alarm is reset By default no type is selected when you create a new Alarm Notifier record A transaction type must be selected in order to save this record How to 1 Review Table 43 and assign alarms that are to trigger e mail notifications 2 Select one or both Transaction Type options 3 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 3 75 Schedules Person Selection tab The Person Selection tab allows you to assign people available in this operator s facility that receive an e mail notification of the alarm reset condition Figure 23 Per
428. points not already assigned to another Area The list box on the right displays alarms assigned to this Area Four State Supervision rules apply regardless of the Armed Disarmed state of the Area Figure 99 Alarm tab e Description S Facility X Area Reader Alarm Digital Output Alarms For Arming Disarming and SCIF control Assign Armed Area Monitoring Time Schedule Auto Arm Inactivity Timer min Arm Delay Timer sec 3 Disarm Digital Output device number Keypad Arm Disarm C None Local 4 C Global l4 Table 136 Form fields Description Alarms for Arming Disarm and This windowpane lists all alarms currently assigned to this Area SCIF control Table 136 Form fields continued Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones Element Description Assign Click Assign to display an Alarm Assignment window enabling you to select and assign available alarm records The Alarm Assignment window displays a list of system alarms for this application for the operator s facilities All alarms display If this is a Global system alarms are not filtered by Region e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available alarm e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an alarm Click OK to display results in the Assigned Alarms windowpane Armed Area Monitoring Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down
429. port To File When you select this option a Save As window displays Navigate to the Images folder that contains previously captured photo images You may select a filename image format bit depth and JPEG compression factor When you click Save the contents of the image control are saved using the selected settings If you want you can replace an existing image Select Input Device This option allows you to select an input device on the Select Profile dialog box from a list of Capture Profiles You may also set and apply automatic properties for the image you are about to capture Select Image Type This dialog box enables you to configure image types in the EPISUITE SDK configuration database You can use this dialog box to edit create or remove image types To modify an image type highlight the image type name in the list and click Edit to open the Image Type Manager dialog box Click Add to create a new image type or click Remove to delete the highlighted image type Revert Changes When you make any change to the image the Revert Changes option is enabled Otherwise the option is dimmed and you are not able to select it Selecting this option reloads the original image Design credentials Complete the Credential Design form Credentials group to create credential designs Credential designs are the graphics printed on credentials You may want to use different graphics for different types of personnel such as a specific gra
430. port information such as Duress Invalid Duress Valid Duress Valid No Passage Duress Valid Open Guard Tour Activity Invalid Invalid APB In Invalid APB Out Invalid Floor Invalid PIN Invalid T amp A In Invalid T amp A Out 338 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Invalid Timed APB Lost Max Invalid PIN Overdue Override Unknown Valid Valid No Passage and Valid Open If you want to use all activities select lt ALL gt Logical Reader Type Select the logical reader type that you want to use to limit the report such as APB In APB In or Out APB Out Elevator In Required Normal T amp A In T amp A In and Out T amp A In or Out or T amp A Out If you want to use all the logical reader types select lt ALL gt Floor Description Select the range of floor descriptions you want to display on the report If you want to list all floor descriptions leave these fields blank Area and Zone History report Use this tab to select additional specific source criteria by which this report is generated Activity Type Select the type of activity to use in generating this report If you want to use all intrusions zone activity type messages select lt ALL gt Location Select the source of the zone activity as a Credential Digital Input Manual Controller or lt ALL gt Device Description Enter the range of device descriptions on which you want to report Leave blank for all descriptions Controller Description Enter
431. predefined for Normal mode Monday through Sunday which is the default mode of the FCWnx system Operating modes are an administrative 77 78 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual decision as each facility has unique requirements For each mode FCWnx controllers manage their devices such as readers and doors in a predefined way e Like events there is no end time associated with a mode The mode remains active until changed by another mode schedule e The Host PC and controllers may be in different modes at the same time e Modes are not partitioned by facilities If you need to use facilities in your system create a mode schedule for each facility Use the facility description as a prefix on the Mode Schedule form in the Description to indicate to which facility this mode applies For example BocaHQ 8 to 5 would indicate a facility specific mode where BocaHQ refers to a geographic location Note You may have a schedule configured but never see a schedule change if you do not have the schedule associated with an Alarm Routing and Bumping configuration Table 46 Form fields Element Description Description Enter a meaningful and unique 64 digit or less alphanumeric description Facility A facility option can be designated for your new record from the Facility drop down list Chapter 3 Schedules Mode Schedule tab Use this tab to create a mode schedule Note Like events there is no end time as
432. pted for a password when accessing that computer s shares Note 2 If the Windows XP Professional computer is part of a Windows domain rather than a Windows workgroup this process for enabling or disabling Simple File Sharing has no effort Simple File Sharing always remains disabled for computers joined to domains Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description SCIF A group of rooms or buildings may be used for handling or processing classified information These areas are called Sensitive Compartmentalized Information Facilities SCIF Control is limited to the SCIF client workstation assigned to the Area Workstations within these areas must be configured with specific security clearance and permissions Recommended order for creating a SCIF Area 1 You must define a facility on the Facility form specifically for dedicating the device configurations belonging to this SCIF Area 2 On the Client form Client tab select Workstation Type as SCIF 3 On the Controller form configure the controller add to the SCIF facility if it is to be dedicated to SCIF functionality 4 lf the controller is not SCIF dedicated configure the reader DI alarm and DO devices assigning each device to the SCIF facility 5 On the Area form e Assign the SCIF facility e Select Enable SCIF e Assign a workstation to this SCIF Area Note Devices assigned here must be assigned to the facility created for the SCIF Ar
433. ption Select one of the following Select Default Layout Select a credential default layout as Portrait or Landscape Select Import Layout Select to make available the option to Browse to the designs folder and import an existing design If you have already chosen a default layout this option is unavailable Save Click to enable the Edit Credential Design button Edit Credential Design Click to open the credential designer program that allows you to draw the graphics that comprise the credential design If you had a previous version of credential designer that created files with a gdr extension you are prompted to save the file as a dgn when you edit a credential design for the first time Access the extensive Online Help system from the Credential Designer toolbar Additionally refer to the Credential Designer User Manual and review the What s New section A PDF file of the manual is provided on your documentation CD How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 158 and complete the fields on this tab e Each workstation where credential design or credential printing is to be performed must have its own license Refer to your Installation Manual for additional details e If Imaging Status is not enabled for this client workstation this feature is unavailable 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Installing print driver To install the print driver for your credential printer 261 262 Facility
434. ption you can use any method you like to back up the data Because the Server computer contains the database there is no need to back up your application folder on your client computers You should keep two sets of backups of the following Server computer files This application Data The data includes the following e Database Contains configuration data such as credentials and controllers e History Contains current history including credential transactions and operator history e Archive Contains the latest copy of this application history data e Images Contains the picture files of credential holders e Signatures Contains the signature files of credential holders e Graphics Backup needed if you are using Graphics Console Contains the alarm graphics maps Note The Server program MUST NOT BE RUNNING when you attempt a backup of images signatures or graphics You should back up this data more often since it changes so frequently While your internal policies may dictate your backup requirements we recommend that you create a backup at least every week Entire Installation of this application e The entire application folder should be backed up when you first set up the system and have confirmed that it is working and any time you upgrade It is very important that you also back up the registry settings In most backup programs you are prompted to back up these settings e ALWAYS MAINTAIN A CURRENT BACKUP Should you have
435. put device loads from a file 6 Select the input device you are using and click OK The next time you capture a photo the program uses the input device you selected 7 Repeat these steps to set up an input device for signature pads The program recognizes a separate input device for photos and signatures To select a record and capture a NEW image for the selected record 1 Select Person from the Personnel group 2 Select the Photo tab on the Person form 3 Select ONE of the records in the Record List 4 Click Capture Image Signature to capture a new image Based on the input device you previously selected the proper interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image Nn Adjust then Save the adjusted settings 6 Click Capture Photo to capture the new image Once the photo is taken the Image Enhancement dialog box displays 7 The dialog box that displays allows you to crop and enhance the newly captured image You notice that a highlighting box with eight sizing handles is placed directly over the center of the Original Image Note Chapter 7 257 Access rights departments persons and credentials Place your mouse pointer over the image The pointer changes from a single arrow to a four headed arrow This allows you to move the cropping area across the newly acquired image At this point you can either capture a different portion of the image as is or adjust the highlighting box to capt
436. puter listed in the Active Hostname column is controlling the dial up and network dialup controllers for this computer Firmware version Firmware version The version of firmware operating the controller Address Physical address assigned to the controller when defined State Current state of the communications with the controller e Online means that the host attempts to communicate with the controller e Offline means that the host does not attempt to communicate with the controller e Error means that there is a communications problem Connection Connection messages include the following e Connected controller is online and working e Shut down No connection e Create port trying to open a physical medium e Set up connection physical medium is open e Tear down connection connection is in the process of being closed e Waiting for call e Dialing e Retrying call e Destroy port physical medium is being closed Table 183 Form fields continued Chapter 9 Monitor and control Element Description Status Status shows what is happening between the host and the controller Messages include the following e Alarm download e Alarm message download e Credential download e DO download e DO group download e Download start e Elevator download e Error e Flash Error See Diagnostic Log e Flashing Controller The entry includes the percent of flash download complete
437. quence generates a duress alarm that displays on the Alarm Monitor similar to the following 0001 1 01 Duress The Activity Monitor displays activity type as Duress Activity The default setting for your system includes this feature already selected Clear this checkbox if you do not want this feature Enable credential line coloring for Select this checkbox to enable the FCWnx system to display suspended person and suspended credentials credential records in red Alarm Notifier E mail Support Enable Select this checkbox to activate the e mail notification option The following e mail dialog boxes become available To E mail Address Field Select a field name from the drop down list that is assigned as an e mail address 1 Labels for these field names are assigned on the User Fields and Address Fields tab of this form 2 The content of each field is entered in the User Fields or Address fields on the Person form Global systems To ensure successful e mail alarm notification across regions in a Global configuration the Global Database Server and all Regional Database Servers must have identical configuration settings That is 1 For all Servers in your Global system the user field selected for the To E mail Address Field must be identical While configuring each Server select the field that represents the e mail address from the drop down list 2 All other Alarm Notification information is specific to the Regional Database Server
438. r E Reader C Other le All By Controller Refresh DO Number Controller Description Current State Date Time 1 0001 1 01 Reader Micro Unlock 09 26 2006 05 46 42 PM 2 0001 1 02 Reader Micro Unlock 09 26 2006 05 46 42 PM 0 14236 00 004 ACU Unlock 09 26 2006 05 48 08 PM 1 14236 01 01 A ACU Unlock 09 26 2006 05 48 08 PM 2 14236 02 02 4 ACU Unlock 09 26 2006 05 48 08 PM 3 14236 03 03 4 ACU Unlock 09 26 2006 05 48 08 PM 1 0003 0 01 Reader px2000 e Unlock 09 27 2006 05 18 13 PM 2 0003 0 02 Reader px2000 Unlock 09 27 2006 05 18 13 PM 3 0003 0 03 Reader px2000 Unlock 09 27 2006 05 18 13 PM 4 0003 0 04 Reader px2000 e Unlock 09 27 2006 05 18 13 PM a l4 Table 188 Form fields Element Description Select DO Type e Select Reader to display the DO points available for the readers e Select Other to display Aux DOs the two DO relays available on a 2RP module and other DO points Example DO points include lights sirens and door strikes that may be connected to the controller Select Controller e Select All to display the status for the digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on all controllers e Select By Controller to display the status for digital outputs of the type selected in the field Select DO type found on a selected controller Click the drop down list to display active controllers Refresh Click to get an updated statu
439. r 1 Introduction Table 6 Application Group pane continued Element Description Security Devices Click to display items in the Security Devices group The following items display in the Security Devices group pane e Controller e Reader e Digital Input e Digital Output e Digital Output Group e DVR e Camera e Camera Preset Elevators Click to display items in the Elevators group The following items display in the Elevators group pane e Elevator e Floor Guard Tours Click to display items in the Guard Tours group The following items display in the Guard Tours group pane e Guard Tour e Guard Tour Point Graphics Click to display items in the Graphic Maps group The following items display in the Graphic Maps group pane e Graphics Map Editor e Graphics Symbol Editor e Graphics Preference Schedules Click to display items in the Schedules group The following items display in the Schedules group pane e Time Schedule e Event Schedule e Mode Schedule Gateways amp Interfaces Click to display items in the Gateways amp Interfaces group The following items display in the Gateways amp Interfaces group pane e CCTV Interface e API Connection Administration Click to display items in the Administration group The following selections display in the Administration group pane e Preference e Client e Client Group e Operator e Permission e Transaction Ove
440. r an Area Exiting Area Readers Click Assign to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this Area Assigned readers display in the Exiting Area Readers windowpane This type of reader which gives an OUT status is used to leave an Area Neutral Area Readers Click Assign to display a Reader Assignment window enabling you to select and assign a reader to this Area Assigned readers display in the Neutral Area Readers windowpane This reader indicates a valid credential read but does not indicate an IN or OUT state Note Neutral Areas are not associated with APB Reader Assignment dialog window This window displays when you click Assign or Assign Readers enabling you to select and assign a reader association Only readers in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available reader Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a reader Click OK to accept the assignments and close the form 224 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 135 and complete the reader fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Alarm tab Use this tab to assign alarms associated with this Area record This is a multi record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available alarm
441. r or if you selected Enable global APB on the Settings Tab of the Preference form a different controller All controllers are updated Note Global configuration You must configure this reader as APB if you plan to include this reader in a Region APB configuration Only designated APB reader types display for selection on the Region form T amp A in Time amp Attendance in This type of reader which gives an IN status is used to enter an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to a T amp A out reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global T amp A on the Settings Tab of the Preference form a different controller T amp A out Time amp Attendance out This type of reader which gives an OUT status is used to leave an area This reader does not release a door a second time until that credential is presented to a T amp A in reader connected to the same controller or if you selected Enable global T amp A on the Settings Tab of the Preference form a different controller In required This type of reader opens the door only if the credential presented currently has an IN status For example if you had a credential with a status of OUT and attempted to gain access through a reader that was marked as In required the door would not open Elevator This type of reader is used for elevator control This is set up using the Elevator Tab of the Elevator form T amp A
442. r the changed passwords in FlashTool by typing over the existing entries As you enter the password in FlashTool the characters are replaced by asterisks to ensure the security of the host access system Table 50 Form fields continuea Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Communication Encryption This feature allows you to configure additional security encryption that scrambles data into an unbreakable code for public transmission Encryption protects the Host to controller exchange of information The Host uses the Exchange Key to send the Data Key to the controller Once the Data Key is received the Host to controller communication is encrypted using that key Enable Encryption This check box is available only for head of line network network dialup network direct and network network controllers Note This check box and all selections in the Communication Encryption grouping are not available on downstream controllers Weak encryption implies that the key could be unscrambled with a realistic amount of processing capacity and within a reasonable amount of time In FCWnx a message displays informing you that an assigned key is too weak and therefore invalid Corrections must be made before the record can be saved We recommend entering 48 unique hex characters in three 16 character strings Do not repeat any character Do not create a pattern Exchange Key There are two options for
443. r transactions refer to Activity monitoring on page 288 Tag Selection Select one of the Tag options None No tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video or manipulating record rate Tag only A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video at the camerals current record rate Tag as event A tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video and for changing the camerals record rate to its event record rate settings 204 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 120 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Alarms tab This tab allows you to select alarm s and alarm transaction type s that become the source for this Event Trigger Figure 92 Alarms tab e Description Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Assigned Alarms m Transactions 7 Alarm Y Reset m Tag Selection C None C Tag Only Tag as Event m Video Window JV Auto Pop up Table 121 Form fields Element Description Transactions Select one or both options as types of alarm transactions to trigger an event The alarm must be set for monitoring Alarm An event is triggered as a result of an alarm Reset An event is triggered as a result of an alarm reset Tag Selection Select one of the Tag Selection options None No tag is sent to the DVR for marking recorded video or manipulating record rate Tag only A ta
444. r type that you are configuring Also see e Read and keypad type reader on page 117 e Keypad only type reader on page 118 e Normal type reader on page 118 e Keypad alarm shunting on page 118 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Read and keypad type reader Note Only reader module door inputs and 20D module input points can be shunted from a keypad To identify a reader module door input look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 Reader To identify a 20DI module input point look for a default description that follows this format 0001 1 01 DI Follow the steps below to shunt alarm groups within a controller connected to a keypad and credential reader 1 Press the start key on the keypad The start key is labeled with either an asterisk lt gt or a plus lt gt depending on the reader model 2 Enter one of the following 0 to turn monitoring off 1 to turn monitoring on Enter the alarm group number 00 to 15 you want shunted Press the end key that is labeled with either a pound sign or an lt x gt Present a valid credential to the reader Press the start key on the keypad again Enter your Personal Identification Number PIN on the keypad os Oy ie oR a Press the end key lt gt or lt x gt 118 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Keypad only type reader Note Only reader module door inputs and 20DI module input points can be shunted from a keypad
445. re 87 Definition tab e Description J Facility Definition Preset Table 114 Form fields Element Description Preset In this text field enter a number within the range of 1 to 32 or use the arrow controls to select a number This number only references the preset number programmed and stored in a camera with PTZ capability Click Save This preset is now available for assignment to a specific camera 198 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 114 and complete the field in this tab Click Save after each Preset number that you assign Click Add before beginning each new description or Preset record gt PN Click Save before you exit this tab Define cameras Use the Camera form in the Security Devices group to edit existing camera preferences Camera records are automatically created when a DVR is defined on the Digital Video Recorder form The camera records display in the format 00X 0X Camera where 00x is the DVR address and ox is the camera number Table 115 Form fields Element Description Description It is recommended that you keep the number prefix to aid in locating the cameras Note Device description updates are communicated to corresponding alarms Dis and DOs In order for changes to migrate to additional form windows that may be open at the time of a change the open windows should be closed and then re opened before
446. re computers than you have Imaging licenses Only clients that have an Imaging license enabled can capture images and signatures create credential designs and print credentials If not all computers require the license at the same time you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate computers Thin client licenses are limited to Enterprise Server computers running Windows 2000 2003 operating system Licensing controls the number of computers that can host remote sessions You cannot enable thin client on more computers than you have licenses If not all computers require the license at the same time you can enable and disable the option for the appropriate computers Note Torun the License program click in this sequence Start Run Programs Facility Commander Wnx and then FCWnx License The License Setup window opens Follow instructions as displayed License has a separate Online Help system The license that you purchase determines what items display in the Application Group pane For example if you are not licensed for Guard Tours the Guard Tours group does not display 3 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Client server architecture FCWnx Server client workstation and network enabled controllers communicate over 10 100Mb Ethernet LAN WAN typologies Refer to Controller Definition tab on page 92 for a list of supported controller types Table 4 Client Server architecture Element Description Win20
447. rease the idle time found on the Preference form Communication Settings tab on the controller that gives you more time to make the changes Server services must be restarted for the changes to take effect 2 Put the controller offline make the changes and then put the controller online The host automatically dials the controller and downloads the changes Setup RAID Server Question The RAID Server Event Viewer Systems and Applications Log indicates a drive failure Periodically checking the Event Viewer helps detect drive failures What can I do now The specifics of your error and warning messages can be determined by consulting the manufacturer s documentation or Customer Support for your brand of hardware The steps that follow are intended to be a guide in the recovery of a Dell PowerEdge system with a PERC 3 SI RAID 1 controller in the event of a system failure For specific details refer to the documentation shipped with your Dell PowerEdge system Continue with the following RAID disclaimer on page 365 RAID recovery what you need on page 366 Replacing a RAID failed hard drive on page 366 Installing OpenManage Server Assistant on page 366 Installing the operating system on page 367 Installing Dell OpenManage RAID Array Manager on page 367 Installing MS SQL Server 2000 2005 on the RAID server on page 368 RAID disclaimer GE recommends that installations that implement RAID Se
448. replication the operator must manually initiate a database download from the Controller Monitor form in order for changes to take effect Updating remote Regions Wait for replication interval and then perform a database download Applies to adds and deletes No action required No action required 46 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 25 Global configuration Regional rules continued Form Controller Form Mode Schedule Form Override Form Reader Form Time Schedule Form Tour Point Form Updates allowed in remote Regions Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Deletions allowed in remote Regions Yes Yes Yes N A Yes N A Comments Editing a controller in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur and then perform a database download to that controller If the user changes the host name to a remote client wait for replication to occur and then restart the hosting client s services Adding a controller in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur and then restart services on the remote client Updating remote Regions Wait for replication interval and then perform a database download Applies to adds and deletes No action required Updating remote Regions Wait for replication interval and then perform a database download Applies to adds and deletes All tour points must be associated with controllers within the same Region Replication and synchroniza
449. rights you want to assign to this person The access rights that display in this list are those that were previously set up on the Access Right form Only access rights in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available access right e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an access right How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 154 and complete the assignment on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 254 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Photo tab This tab allows you to capture images assign credential design layouts and print credentials Figure 114 Photo tab e Last Name J Facility X Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Advanced Photo Credential Taken Credential design Capture Image Sianature Einte Signature KI Pf Table 155 Form fields Element Description Photo If there is a photo associated with this person record it displays here Taken Date this photo was captured Capture Image Signature Click to run the Capture program allowing you to capture an image or signature of this person Refer to Image capture on page 256 Credential Displays the Descriptions of credentials assigned to this person as assigned on the Credential form If a printer is configured for your system you can select
450. ring Guard Tour activities DO If problems exist during DO activity Graphics Management To monitor FCWnx Graphics Management on starting stopping connecting to other Servers and regular processing Web Service To monitor FCWnx WebService on starting stopping connecting to other Servers and regular processing GMC objects GMC Login Transactions If GMC fails to launch correctly Monitor to provide tracing of the attempt by the GMC software to connect to the FCWnx application GMC Alarm Events If alarm status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what alarm data is being received by GMC GMC Digital Input Events If digital input device status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what digital input event data is being received by GMC GMC Digital Output Events If digital output device status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what digital output event data is being received by GMC 349 350 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 198 Diagnostic objects and when to monitor continued Diagnostic object name Reasons to monitor debug messages GMC Intrusion Zone Events f intrusion zone status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what zone event data is being received by GMC GMC Area Events f secure area status is not updating on graphics maps Monitor to display what area event data is being rece
451. ring of controllers select Yes under Head of line Otherwise select No and select the head of line controller If this is a downstream controller that you are adding the controller directly upstream towards the host from it need to be reset in order for it to recognize the controller you are adding Example If your line of controllers looks like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 And you want to add Controller 3 to the end of the line so that it now looked like this Host Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Then you would need to reset Controller 2 in order for Controller 3 to be recognized e For Connection type select Dial up e Select a Credential Loading method On the Password tab if you do not enter passwords the default passwords one 1 two 2 three 3 and four 4 are used If you want to change the passwords you may do so at any time On the Time Zone tab verify and adjust time zone settings as necessary On the Comments tab enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field On the Events tab you may want to schedule when APB and T amp A are reset and when the host dials the controller If you select an event for the Dial field host dials the controller you must stop and restart the Server before the host recognizes the event settings Select the Status tab to view information about the control
452. ription Modify Field Enter the value for the currently selected User Field This text box field accepts 32 alphanumeric characters User Fields are not appropriate for exceptionally lengthy street addresses or E mail addresses User Fields The current user field Label and Value is listed in this windowpane To give values to these fields select a Label How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 153 and complete the fields on this tab Example The label for User Field 1 was previously defined on the Preference form as Social Security Number The first label listed in this windowpane displays as Social Security Number Enter the corresponding Social Security for this person record in the Modify Field text box 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 7 253 Access rights departments persons and credentials Access Rights tab Use this tab to assign access rights to this person Figure 113 Access Rights tab e Last Name S Facility y Personnel Location User Fields Access Rights Photo Advanced m Assigned access rights Assign Table 154 Form fields Element Description Assigned access rights This windowpane lists any currently assigned access rights Assign Click to display the Access Rights Assignment dialog box enabling you to select the access rights you want to assign or unassign for this credentialholder Select from the Available list those access
453. rity Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com Contents Preta iia ia xiii Conventions used in this dOCUMENt oooococcoccocccccccnccncn rn xiii Safety terms and MD Sii A iii xiii NGVIGGtING a PDF TIC aii aa tas xiii RelategidOCumentauom ui ii veeaag ae E Eh xiv TRAINING SOURCES cocida ria xiv Q ick Setup guide aii eee ensooc oe eteee ray OOE E E E E EEES 1 How to accomplish frequently performed tasks 0c cece cece eee eee e rro 1 How to configure a system in recommended sequential order cece eee cece cece eee eeeees 2 How to accomplish administrator tasks cece cece e eee ence eee eee e ee eeeeennes 21 How to accomplish operator tasks cece cece eee e imi nero 25 Chapter 1 Introduction ccc ccc cece cee ee eee eee e ence eens eeeeeeeees 1 OVEIVICW 65 On hamesenadeaadanese ate dans Wea amemere mesa atic ae A E sea arede axa ee alia deem ou ok 2 PFOdUCE CONTENTS aia caricia cs ra RA 3 Before you begin configuration ooooccoroooccrcocccrro enn rr 3 LICENSING amet AAA AAA A 3 Client server architecture aiii A A a rca 4 Facility Commander Wnx edi
454. rm fields Edit Add Remove Element Description Assigned Floor Digital Output Digital Input This windowpane lists the currently assigned floors digital outputs digital inputs and Area for systems using ACU controllers Edit To edit a floor digital output digital input link select an entry from the list and click this button The Floor Digital Output Digital Input Selection dialog displays Add To add a floor digital output digital input link click this button The Floor Digital Output Digital Input Selection dialog displays Use this dialog box to create or edit a floor to digital output to digital input link e Floor Select a floor from the drop down list of available floors Digital Output Select a digital output from the drop down list of available DOs e Digital Input Select a digital input from the drop down list of available Dis e Area This control is available only if the selected reader is owned by an ACU controller Select an Area from the drop down list of available Areas Click OK to accept your selections and close this form Remove To remove a floor digital output digital input select an entry from the list and click this button How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 106 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 185 186 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Elevator Control Sample Scenarios Two Options with Floor Tracking by keypad 1 In
455. rms and symbols xiii schedules event 7 mode 77 time 68 SCIF 50 60 112 154 176 222 226 314 315 316 317 318 383 search 71 16 368 by video event 2 4 clear 77 recall 77 security tab 36 sense time 735 14 service pack 366 services 4 5 20 35 45 46 47 53 55 357 364 365 371 372 383 auto shutdown 5 dependencies 372 e mail 73 logoff 8 monitor 30 389 SQL 25 35 thin client 5 shunt 777 118 keypad 118 shutting down amp simple file sharing 382 on WinXP 5 SMTP server 73 subscription to publication 358 support 373 suspended 26 96 116 247 262 264 266 271 273 288 290 291 swipe and show 293 symbols xiii 3 4 synchronization 46 system preferences 23 T takeover and recovery 55 taskbar 79 TCP IP 48 49 TCP IP address DVR 192 template report 329 report default 330 terminal services 370 thin client 5 time zone 00 toolbars 9 training xiv transaction override 323 troubleshooting 34 diagnostic settings 347 diagnostics 341 dial up 364 global 370 logfiles 345 remote diagnostics 345 U UBF Universal Credential Format 0 UL certification requirements 376 underlined letters 369 unique and required employee number 2 27 Universal Credential Format UBF 0 upgrade 34 111 309 344 345 check 5 logs 345 password consideration unique and required employee number 2 27 390 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual V versions software firmware 368 video console 209
456. roller flash and controller preference configuration on page 110 e Credential formats in 40 bit and 55 bit Wiegand protocol in the following section 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Credential formats in 40 bit and 55 bit Wiegand protocol 4002 40 bit Wiegand format The 40 bits of transmission consist of two parity bits and 38 code bits The first bit transmitted is the first parity bit P1 it is even parity calculated over the first 20 bits The last bit transmitted is the second parity bit P2 it is odd parity calculated over the total 40 bits Code format F Facility 0 Digits B Credential Number 99 999 999 999 possible 12 digits Note This format was created to enable identical credential identification numbers to be produced in either S F 2F or Wiegand mode These numbers are derived from the 40 bit binary code in the proximity chip The credential number is comprised of the 38 least significant bits The most significant bit is set at O Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials 5502 55 bit wiegand format The 55 bits of transmission consist of two parity bits and 53 code bits The first bit transmitted is the first parity bit P1 it is even parity calculated over the first 27 bits The last bit transmitted is the second parity bit P2 it is odd parity calculated over the total 55 bits Code format F Facility 0 digits B Credential Number 16 digits P Parity Bit What s n
457. roller is to be assigned for elevator control e If the controller is an elevator controller it can only manage elevators and nothing else e Elevator records assigned to this Area must be reassigned or deleted Head of Line Once you have connected the first controller to the host this controller is the Head of Line in a string of controllers e Select Yes if you are configuring the first controller connected to the host e If you select No you must also select a head of line controller from the drop down list An M5PXNPlus or M2000PXNPlus must be a head of line micro to take advantage of the Integrated Configuration Tool for flashing the firmware If this is a new controller the network settings are set as the default Open a browser window such as IE enter the controller IP address such as http 192 168 6 6 and click Go Firmware download begins If an MSPXNPlus or M2000PXNPlus is downstream you have two options e You can use eFlash to download firmware e Consider obtaining a network connection and using the Integrated Configuration Tool to individually download firmware Connection Type You must select a controller type before this field becomes available An error message displays if the selected connection type is not valid with the controller type Select e Dial up if this controller is connected by a modem e Direct if a cable connects this controller e Network if this is a network controller connected by a netw
458. rride e Region e Auto update see auto update e Video CD Burner 13 14 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 6 Application Group pane continued Element Diagnostics Description Click to display items in the Diagnostics group The following items display in the Diagnostics group pane e Diagnostic Setting e Diagnostic Viewer e Logfile The following tables list the options displayed in the drop down menu of each Menu bar selection Table 7 File menu Element Description Save Record Click to save the current record The Save Record menu option saves changes made to the current record into the database Unsaved entries are discarded The Save Record option is available only when a form is open and you have been given permission to update records New Record The New Record menu option creates a new record preloaded with default data This is the best way to start or add a new record because the default data often saves you from entering the data The New Record option is available only when a form is open contains records and you have been given permission to update records The Add Record icon on the Record toolbar has the same features as the New Record menu option Delete Record Click to delete record The Delete Record option deletes the current record from the database Note BE CAREFUL when selecting this option as deleted records cannot be recovered The Delete Rec
459. rs Output A Primary Local Available Outputs Relays Windowpane Select from the Available list those outputs that you want to assign to this alarm record The outputs that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only outputs in the operator s facilities are available for assignment Output B Selected Outputs Relays Windowpane The outputs that display are those that are currently assigned to this alarm record Select then click the left arrow to unassign an available output 160 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 87 Form fields continued Element Description Note This section is enabled for digital outputs that are controlled by ACU controllers Output Relay Control Available Outputs Relays Windowpane Select from the Available list those outputs that you want to assign to this alarm record The outputs that display in this list are those that were previously configured and not currently assigned Only outputs in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Note You must assign a Time Schedule in order to move this Output Relay to the Selected windowpane Select then click the right arrow to assign an available output Selected Outputs Relays Windowpane The outputs that display are those that are currently assigned to this alarm record Select then click the left arrow to unassign an available outp
460. rs Note When reader records are created we recommend that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix and add text to the description field A complete and accurate reader description aids in assigning the reader points from this drop down list Digital Input If you selected Digital Input this field is available Select a digital input from the drop down list of available digital inputs Note When the digital input records are created we recommend that you keep the mmmm b pp prefix and add text in the description field A complete and accurate digital input description aids in assigning alarm points from this drop down list How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 171 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab What s next Continue with Chapter 9 Monitor and control on page 287 286 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 9 Monitor and control This chapter provides an overview of the monitoring options status capabilities graphics console and manual controls within this application In this chapter COEM 0 da id a ide Ee 288 A oko ok riria Keren EA RO Sees Mees EONA 288 Alarm PROMOTING cha cca cena a ad ia ene thau 294 CUNT DOVES 0 AAA eas 300 COMIONE MOORE cde one a TAR GRRE Raa 303 DEL TAUPE PATE ara eh Ala en waa Oa Sang a Ware odin daves 309 ndo IOUS oropa hao Che Lie a Edda Hea che Shaw eda 311 e E ie hi ee oles oa ae asain ase See coe aks 313 Manual
461. rs A time schedule can define an action multiple times even within the same day Once a time schedule is defined it can be applied anywhere time schedules are used Time schedules are not partitioned by facilities If you need to use facilities in your system create an event for each facility Use the facility description as a prefix on the Time Schedule form Description to indicate to which facility this event applies e Deleting a time schedule does not affect the current state of any devices currently under the effect of the deleted schedule e Time schedules assigned to a Public Access area on the Elevator form cannot be deleted e Ifyou delete a schedule while it is currently active this schedule never ends Table 38 Form fields Element Description Description This field accepts 64 characters Enter a meaningful and unique description for this schedule Facility A facility option can be designated for your new record from the Facility drop down list Save This record can be saved following a selection of Start Time or Stop Time Time Schedules tab Chapter 3 Schedules Note Deleting a schedule does not affect the current state of any devices to which this schedule is associated Any devices currently in a state associated with the deleted time schedule remains in that state until changed manually or by another schedule Figure 20 Time Schedules tab Table 39 Form fields 2 Time Schedul
462. rs are acceptable Also refer to the Legend group box Micro Magnetic Stripe N credential or facility site bit B Start character With few exceptions the start character is B the majority of the time 0 to 9 A C D E Constant characters Space Micro Wiegand B Credential identification BID bit F Facility Site Code P Parity 0 or 1 Constant Characters E Parity Layout Even O Parity Layout Odd X Space ACU Magnetic Strip N Credential identification BID bit C Company Code S Site Code Issue Code X Space ACU Wiegand B Credential identification BID bit C Company Code S Site Code Issue Code P Parity Layout X Space The following settings apply to Micro Wiegand Format ONLY These fields are not available for ACU Wiegand controllers Parity checking is an error detection technique that tests the integrity of digital data within the computer system or over a network Parity checking uses an extra bit that holds a O or 1 depending on the data content of the byte Each time a byte is transferred or transmitted the parity bit is tested Even parity systems make the parity bit 1 when there is an even number of 1 bits in the byte Odd parity systems make it 1 when there is an odd number of 1 bits Parity layout 1 E O Indicates the first parity bit in the data mask The entry must be an Even E or Odd 0 parity bit 275 276 Fa
463. rs that you import or export to your controller and store in the database for this application Figure 122 Credential format tab E Credential Format e Description Facility Credential Format Controller v Format Type C Magnetic Stripe Wiegand Position Credential data layout See Legend Parity layout 1 E 0 A Parity layout 2 E 0 AN Parity layout 3 E 0 A Parity layout 4 E O Y Number of credential characters poo Number of facility characters Legend Import format from file Export format to file a H Comments Table 167 Form fields Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description Controller Select the controller type from the drop down menu as a Micro controller or ACU controller Format Type Select from two data masks Magnetic Stripe The number is a mask embedded into a magnetic tape strip and usually adhered to credentials or credit cards Wiegand A pulse generating mask sensed by a pickup coil the reader This is a complex system to manufacture and virtually impossible to duplicate making it one of the most secure access control technologies The number is a mask of a digital O or 1 Position Indicates the location or position of the bit where your mouse pointer is presently positioned in the mask combination Credential data layout B C I The following characte
464. rst date on which the credential no longer grants access A blank value means the credential never expires Return The date the credential was returned Last Valid Access Date Date the last valid access was granted to the credential as stored in the database Time Time the last valid access was granted to the credential as stored in the database Reader Reader at which the last valid access was granted to the credential as stored in the database Area displays only on systems with ACU controllers Area where last valid access was granted to the credential This is a read only field Manual Control Reset APB and T amp A Status Note This option is not available for credentials when associated with an ACU controller Resets the APB or T amp A status of the current credential to neutral Find Credential Click to display a Find Credential dialog box select a reader and present a credential at that reader The record displays that is associated with the credential presented Select a reader from the drop down list of the Find Credential dialog box present a credential at that reader and this form displays the record that is associated with the credential presented If a record is not currently in this application you can add it This is a convenient way of finding the credential record for a card without searching all records 265 266 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 R
465. rts for you These are the default port setting values used by FCWnx for communication between Servers and clients Element Description 6699 Controller Communications Port 135 Client Workstation Server Communications Port RPC 1024 GE Security DVMRe StoreSafe Communication Port 8088 Server Workstation Video Streaming Port 8085 Start Video Communications Port Range 24 SQL MS SQL 2000 user This port number can be obtained from your Server Computer At the Database Server computer for this client click Start then Run and enter svr netcn exe Click OK When the SQL Server Network Utility window displays select TCP IP and click Properties The port number displays MS SQL 2005 user This port number can be obtained from your Server Computer At the Database Server computer for this client click Start select Programs Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Configuration Tools then SQL Server Configuration Manager When the SQL Server Configuration Manager opens expand the navigation tree for SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration to display Protocols for SPSQL Right click TCP IP select Properties and then the IP Addresses tab The SQL port number dis plays in the IPAII TCP Dynamic Ports field Question J get a connection error when I try to start the client software What should I do now 1 ES Make sure that your network client is defined in the Client Form Check the bottom of the Client Monitor Form and verify that there is at
466. rver configurations use RAID 1 configurations RAID 5 configurations are not recommended for the database due to possible transaction load issues RAID 1 configurations provide 100 data redundancy by disk mirroring 366 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Some customers may implement a combination of RAID 1 and RAID 5 configurations supported on one Server This can be a valid configuration if the operating system and miscellaneous files are isolated on a RAID 5 configuration while the database resides on a RAID 1 mirrored disk drive configuration Note You should only use RAID 5 for your operating system boot partition if your RAID 5 solution is hardware based Hardware based RAID solutions are provided by Dell s line of PowerEdge servers available to order directly from GE Security For those systems that have already been configured and the location of the databases needs to be corrected GE have created step by step procedures when moving the database files The procedures are located in the Technical Bulletin section of the GE security business Web site Go to www ge security com for additional information RAID recovery what you need In order to perform a recovery you need the following items e Dell OpenManage Server Assistant CD Version 7 2 or later provided with your Dell Server e Dell OpenManage Applications CD Version 3 2 or later provided with your Dell Server e Dell Online Documentation CD provided with your D
467. ry of a Regional Database Server host that failed was taken over by a backup Regional Server and is now able to host its database Also refer to Backup Regions tab on page 41 A notification message informs you of an unsuccessful recovery Recover FileServer To initiate recovery of a FileServer host that has failed and is now recovered and online This selection is enabled and used in a custom Global configuration where one or more database components are installed on a second or separate computer from the Database Server Manual Control Form To display the Manual Control form for this operator to manually perform operations on the system Controller monitoring All Monitors The monitor forms in the Monitors and Controls group open and display outside of the main application window Right click on the form window to display a shortcut menu of options The window can be independently moved anywhere on the desktop This feature has been incorporated to facilitate multi window management for both single and multi monitor workstation configurations The Controller Monitor form allows you to view all types of controllers the activities of those controllers monitor communications and control each controller in the system Using the Controller Monitor form you have the capability to select sort and display only the controllers that you want to view and then save that view The first time the Controller Monitor form is ope
468. s This chapter provides instructions for configuration of secure areas and intrusion zones In this chapter ETRE AE a ii did 220 E A E doe alana daca inhale ae nae 220 Overview intrusion Zones 6 eens 229 Delne FUSION SORES AA ee we as 230 PEE SFM a hes ice Se 3 da 4 235 220 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview areas The Area form Places amp Policies group is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers The Intrusion Zone form Places amp Policies group is enabled for systems licensed and configured with micro controllers Define areas Note The Area form is enabled for systems licensed and configured with ACU controllers Use this form Places amp Polices group to configure secure Areas Your system supports up to 8 192 Areas Complete the steps in the order presented 1 Note You must first configure ACU controllers Reader records are automatically created when you configure an ACU controller The controllers must be connected and online to arm disarm if the Area spans controllers An Area can contain alarm points entry and exit points readers and digital outputs relays Areas can be local does not span controllers or global spans controllers Create Areas The intended application is suited for arming and disarming secure Areas from outside or inside of the monitored and secured Areas Assign devices to an Area in order to use the device functi
469. s Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Deletions allowed in remote Regions Yes N A N A Yes Yes Yes N A N A No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Chapter 2 45 System preferences Comments Adding or deleting readers from an access right for a local Region or remote Region The controllers get updated with the correct reader information in both cases Digital Output Groups Elevators and Zone assignment for access right must wait until replication interval to update the remote database and then perform a database download to controllers in the remote Region Updating in a Remote Region Updates to noncontroller alarms such as CCTV Camera and DVR alarms are allowed Updates to devices directly controlled by I O modules in the controller such as digital inputs and readers are not allowed They must be updated at a local Regional level No action required No action required Backup Clients tab Assign dial up controller phone numbers Editing a DVR in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur before changes take effect If user changes the host name to a remote client wait for replication to occur and then restart the hosting client s services Adding a DVR in a remote Region Wait for replication to occur and then restart services on the remote client Editing an elevator in a remote Region Edits are not applied until replication occurs on the remote database After
470. s activated Contact your installer on how the digital output was wired This determines the active state of the digital output On time This feature is disabled for ACU controllers with a DO assigned to a reader Specify the length of time in minutes and seconds the digital output remains in the active state before going inactive The time may be overridden by the manual control buttons The default setting is 10 seconds If this is a Micro controller e For minutes enter a number between 0 minimum and 62 maximum e For seconds enter a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum If you enter O and this is e Output A then the digital output resets when the alarm resets e Output B then the digital output remains on until it is manually turned off or scheduled off If this is an ACU controller With a DO assigned to a reader this field is disabled and the read only time fields display what was configured on the Reader form This field is enabled if no Digital Output Relay door option is assigned on the Reader form Door Functions tab e For minutes enter or select a number between 0 minimum and 255 maximum e For seconds enter or select a number between 0 minimum and 59 maximum When the output relay is linked to one or more alarms the momentary contact time does not begin until the alarm returns to the inactive position thus extending the active time Example If the momentary contact time is set to 10 seconds a
471. s continued Element Description Arm Delay sec Arm Delay Enter the number of seconds to delay the arming of this intrusion zone This field accepts up to 255 seconds This time limit should allow a person to pass into or out of a monitored area before the zone is armed Note If your system is UL listed the delay cannot exceed 60 seconds Refer to the UL Certification Requirements in your Installation Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 139 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Status tab This tab displays the status of all devices associated with this zone and status of the Zone Figure 102 Status tab e Description Facility X Intrusion Zone Status Refresh 234 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 140 Form fields Element Description Status This list box displays the status of all devices associated with this Zone and status of the Zone Reader Status Online offline Alarm Status Monitored on monitored off Zone Status Armed Disarmed Digital Input On off trouble Digital Output Status Active inactive Refresh Click to refresh or update changes that occurred since the last status Refresh request How to 1 Perform a search 2 Select an Intrusion Zone record 3 Click Refresh Arm disarm an intrusion zone Arm disarm an intrusion zone using access rights Any credential and keypad reader or keypad w
472. s event triggers preferences operators permissions responses schedules clients e mail notification and intrusion zones Device Configuration Generates reports about the devices in the system such as readers alarms cameras and digital video recorders Schedules Lists the schedules and events assigned for each controller Access Provides a list of access rights and persons who have access to specific Areas s that is who has access where Floor Access Provides a list of floors defined in the system and the access granted to each one Area Lists the details of secure Areas configured in this application Alarm History Generates reports on alarm transactions Credential History Generates reports on credential transactions Operator History Generates reports on operator actions relating to operations on FCWnx forms Zone History Generates reports on intrusion zone transactions DI History Generates reports on digital input transactions Guard Tour History Generates sets of Guard Tour activities containing start points hits invalid points pauses resumes tour end points and tour time exceeded Time and Attendance History Generates reports on the number of hours employees were in their facilities Area History Generates reports on secure Area transactions and activity Roll Call Provides a list of the last access granted to any or all persons in the system that is who last went where based on individual cred
473. s field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 85 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Set Instructions tab Use this tab to select the instructions you want to display on the Alarm Monitor form when this alarm occurs Instructions are simply directions explaining how to react to the alarm Figure 62 Set Instructions tab e Description Facility X Alarm Set Instruction Digital Outputs DO Groups Schedule Events Status CCTV Move Up Move Down r Instruction 158 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 86 Form fields Element Description Instruction This windowpane displays the currently selected instructions in the order in which they display on the Alarm Monitor Form Move Up Click to move a selected instruction up one line it displays on the Alarm Monitor form in the modified order Move Down Click to move a selected instruction down one line it displays on the Alarm Monitor form in the modified order Edit Click to display the alarm Instruction Assignment dialog box that allows you to assign predefined alarm instructions to this alarm The Instructions Assignment window allows you to modify the list of instructions assigned to this transaction O
474. s on the digital outputs A refresh for a dial up controller causes the host to dial the controller unless they are already connected The refresh process may take a few minutes Note A refresh selected for an offline controller or controller in error is never returned Chapter 9 Monitor and control Table 188 Form fields continued Element Description Column Descriptions DO Number Number of the digital output e Description Description of the door DO in the database e Controller Number of the controller on which this digital output is found Current State Displays the state of the digital output Date Displays the date that the status was requested e Time Displays the time that the status was requested If this is a reader DO the states are e Lock The door is locked e Unlock The door is unlocked If this is any other DO the states are e Active The digital output is in the Active state defined on the Digital Output form e Inactive The digital output is NOT in the Active state How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 188 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Graphics Console Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual The Graphics Console option Monitors and Controls group opens the Graphics Console application that allo
475. s option when you want to recall the last search criteria The option does not conduct a search or affect any data in the database The Recall Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open Clear Search Click to clear a search The Clear Search option clears all data in the current form Use this option when the form has data and you want to begin a new search The option does not conduct a search nor does it affect any data in the database It only clears data from the form in preparation for a search or cancels a change to a record The Clear Search option is available only when a form that contains records is open Table 6 Application Group pane Element Description Application Group Pane e Select any Application Group title in the Application pane to display the items in that group e Right click the Application Group title bar to display the shortcut option Hide that hides the Application Groups To display again select the Windows menu Workspace option e Right click within a group to display a shortcut menu and select Large Icons or Small Icons default e The license that you purchase determines what items display For example if you are not licensed for Guard Tours the Guard Tours group does not display The docked pane can be dragged to an alternative position on your application window 11 12 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 6 Applic
476. s power temporarily network cable cut or broken It is best to either have clients use the Client Monitor Form to force users off or notify all clients to restart after a cold boot of the server is complete and after services have restarted on the license domain Question My services do not shut down What can 1 do Run the program spstop exe found in the FCWnx folder Click Start then Run At the Run window click Browse and navigate to spstop exe Click Open to display the file name in the command line of the Run window and enter a11 The Run window now displays as follows Program Files GE FCWnx SPstop exe all Click OK to stop the services Question What should a normal startup of services look like in the logfile It should look similar to the following with the exception of machine name and machine encoded seed and micros that may show up in the log The following sample startup script displays a sequence of key events in the startup process Note in bold SYSTEM SERVICE STARTED STARTING MANAGER SERVICE etc Video Appendix A 373 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Question What can 1 do when a video session does not launch If you select Video Console from the Application toolbar or in the Monitors amp Controls Group of the Application Group pane and a video session does not open 1 Review your diagnostic log file entries for errors or warnings Refer to Diagnostic settings on page 347 2 You may have
477. s that the system is no longer communicating with the server Navigation pane The navigation pane is made up of two tabs as listed in the table below Table 125 Form fields Element Description Physical View The Physical View tab displays configured DVRs and cameras in a hierarchal structure according to facility An operator only sees cameras and DVRs that are in the operator s assigned facilities Each DVR is identified with the associated cameras and preset conditions The DVRs are listed in alphabetical order Note All devices are displayed according to the facility to which they are assigned Therefore even if a camera is associated to a DVR if they are assigned to different facilities the camera does not display under the associated DVR Display View The Display View tab displays any custom views that you have saved Chapter 5 Video Play controls Table 126 Form fields Element Description Snapshot Click to capture the current image a single frame of video in a JPG format E You can attach this image to an e mail message later for distribution To set the default Snapshots directory in which to store images select File Preferences The Video Viewer Preferences dialog displays where you can browse to the directory of your choice Fast Rewind Click to quickly return to the beginning of the video Reverse Pause Click to view the previous video frame Continue clicking to mov
478. s the Alarm form allowing you to modify or view that particular alarm record Graphic Console Opens the Graphic Console form allowing you to view the alarm graphics map to which the alarm belongs View Live Video If a camera icon is not displayed to the left of the alarm description this option is not available If an alarm transaction is displayed with a camera icon to the left of the alarm description right click to view live video from the camera s associated with the alarm s transaction as defined by its event trigger Refer to Video windows on page 196 for window management information Note In order to view live video the DVR must be online if it is a duplex recorder the recorder must also be in record mode The following windows open 1 Digital Video Viewer Refer to Video Console Help for information about the Digital Video Viewer 2 Video window s displaying the current live view of the camera s associated with the alarm transaction Each window displays a dialog box containing the current date and time 299 300 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 179 Form fields continued Element Description View Recorded Video If a camera icon is not displayed to the left of the alarm description this option is not available If an alarm transaction is displayed with a camera icon to the left of the alarm description select to view live video from the camerals associated with
479. sages are written to the daily log file Note Under abnormal conditions the log file may also contain warning and or fatal messages indicating failure conditions Verify with Customer Support In order to diagnose a problem you may be requested to save a log file outside of the log folder so that the file is not overwritten That file can be renamed specific to a date or issue Additionally for each client there is a log located in the WINNT system32 folder Under normal system operation this log is empty It is used to log messages if the server and the database cannot be reached Appendix A 345 Diagnostics and troubleshooting Diagnostic Viewer is a separate program within this application To access Diagnostic Viewer select Diagnostic Viewer from the Diagnostics group It operates in real time That is every time this application writes an entry to the log file Diagnostic Viewer automatically displays the latest message By default Diagnostic Viewer displays only the latest 1000 messages The number of displayed messages can be changed on the Diagnostic Viewer Preferences form All log files should be saved in the Logs folder of this application it is easier to locate for backups and upgrades It is a shared folder which means other clients can gain access to the log files Remote diagnostics If you purchased your computer from GE Security the program pp ANYWHERE was included If you are experiencing problems this program
480. secondary IP address assigned for network network communications Network Name Select this option and then enter the secondary network name for the controller that hosts this controller How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 55 and complete the fields on this tab e If this is a direct connect controller select the COM port from the drop down list The Network Configuration section is not available e If this controller is other than a direct connect the Network Configuration sections are available for completion 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Settings to Reach Host tab Note This tab displays ONLY when you are setting up a dial up head of line controller Use this tab to configure how the controller dials the host Figure 37 Settings to Reach Host tab Controller 15 e Description dial up test Facility inore Faites y Controller Definition Security Time Zone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Settings to Reach Host Settings to Reach Controller m Phone numbers to reach host p Dial interval Number 1 None Number 2 C 1Hour C 8Hours Number 3 C 12 Hours Number 4 C 24 Hours Same number retries jo 1 Retry interval 30 sec Maximum disconnect time min Dial Out Time schedule z 108 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 56 Form fields Element Description Phone numbers t
481. seconds to wait after sensing the input has changed to Active State Enter 00 to immediately send the transaction to the host notifying the host of a state change Increase the Sense Time entry if using noisy or chattering contacts How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 96 and complete this tab Example This value could indicate the delay time in seconds that elapses between the time a door contact is broken and the time the output and alarms are triggered If door contact is re established before the sense time elapses the alarm would not come in to this application and the output would not activate 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define alarm priority This form in the Alarms amp Events group allows you to assign color priority attributes to an alarm state and bumped alarm The colors you assign display on the Alarm Monitor form when an alarm is generated The default color for alarms to display on the Alarm Monitor form is a white background with black font Chapter 4 171 Devices Figure 72 Alarm Priority form 01x Alarm Priority L Alarm State Background Font Preview Alarm y x Sample Reset y x Sample Bumped Background Font Preview Alarm 5 ample Reset Sample Save Reset System Defaults DK Cancel Table 97 Form fields Description Alarm Priority Select the alarm priority from the drop down list for which you are assigning a color palette
482. select this option for a cascading view of your forms with the active form taking precedence on the display screen Tile This option allows you to control multiple window or forms If you have several forms open but not visible select this option to view all forms at one time tiled side by side or one over the other on your display monitor Arrange icons This option allows you to control multiple windows or forms If you have several forms in progress you can temporarily minimize a form from view Select this option to arrange the minimized form icons across the bottom of your display screen Reset all window positions This option resets all main application and external application windows to the top left of your monitor Reset Position This option saves the position of any open external monitor The next time a saved window is opened it opens in the saved position Table 12 Help menu Help Topics Selection of this option starts the Online Help system e The left online Help navigation pane displays books and their contents index entries and a search tab e Click and drag the of the Application Toolbar over any menu bar or toolbar item and a window opens with information pertaining to the selection e With an application form displaying you can click the icon then drag the over any area of the open form and click again A window opens with information pertaining to the selected section of your form
483. sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence Application Group Menu Application Form e Access rights Departments To complete the Intrusion Zone functionality you also need to complete the Access Right form Intrusion Zones Tab 1 The Intrusion Zones tab of the Access Right form allows you to assign multiple intrusion zones using an assignment dialog e Only credential holders with an Intrusion Zone assigned on the Access Right form are able to arm and disarm zones using any of the credential keypad readers within a zone e When a zone is armed all readers within the zone go offline and normal access rights do not gain access into the area When a zone is disarmed all readers within the zone go online and normal access rights gain access into the area If schedules were assigned then the reader follows the schedule Note If you expect to arm disarm by using any one of the readers within a zone e That reader must be assigned on the Access Right tab of the Access Right form and be an assigned reader in the Intrusion Zone listed on the Intrusion Zones tab OR e Individually created access rights must be assigned to the person that arms disarms the Intrusion Zone One right allows access to the readers and another right allows access to the Intrusion Zone Places amp Policies Access Right Refer to Define access rights on page gs 238 Use this form to create access rights to define where with
484. service by navigating to Settings Control Panel then Component Services through Windows Explorer Check the Status of SQLAgent SQL for this application Note Archiving is performed on the database Server computer only Archiving creates a copy of the latest history transactions and then removes all the data from the history database The data is appended to the archive database until you decide the archive database has grown too large The factors in determining whether the archive database is too large can be e The performance you receive when running history reports The length of time you need to keep data e Other factors specifically related to your installation To remove data from the archive database 1 BACK UP YOUR ARCHIVE DATABASE for this application You have to back up the Archive database using utilities provided by SQL Server 2000 20050r by using the Maintenance Utility in this application After you perform the backup label and store the media in a safe place WARNING If you do not back up the SecurePerfectArchive you lose all the data stored in it 2 Select the Administration group then Preference The Preference form opens with the Settings tab displayed 3 Select the Clear Archive tab The Earliest Date in Archive DB and Latest Date in Archive DB fields indicate dates once you have clicked the Show Date button If you do not have any records in your archive database the two date fields state No Record 4
485. set The notification for this alarm point has been bumped to an additional location has reset and is no longer in the active alarm state Select a background and font color from the drop down lists to represent the Bumped Reset state of an alarm for the selected priority A preview of your color choices displays in the Preview block Save Click to update an adjusted priority configuration Revert to Original Ifyou changed a setting during this session and have not yet saved click to retain the colors previously assigned No changes are applied Reset System Defaults If you presently have colors assigned to alarms displaying on the Alarm Monitor form click to reset the colors to the system defaults of a white background with black font That is all alarms default to a white background with black font and not just the alarm that is currently displaying in the Alarm Priority form OK Click to close this form If you have changed anything on this form a message displays asking you if you want to save your changes Click Yes to save The newly assigned colors display on the Alarm Monitor form in real time if there are existing alarms Help Click to open the Online Help system Cancel Click to close this form without making any changes If you have changed anything on this form a message displays asking you if you want to save your changes How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 97 and complete the
486. signment dialog box that allows you to add or change the client group From Select the mode the system must be in for this schedule to occur To Select the mode the system changes to when this schedule occurs This field is not available for system using ACU controllers The following mode options are available for systems with ACU and Micro controllers Available Modes Alist of available modes displays here Micro Controllers Three modes are available and enabled for selection ACU Controllers Eight modes are available and enabled for selection How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 47 and complete this tab 2 Select the date 03 16 2006 from the calendar Date control 3 Click Edit in the Assigned Controllers group box 4 Select the controller ACU19588 from the controller list 5 Enable the checkbox for Mode 7 from the Available Modes group box 6 Click Save before you exit this tab Example modes Normal This mode is day of the week dependent and is the default mode for the FCWnx system The remaining modes are not day of the week dependent Both schedules and events can be defined in terms of modes Sunday through Saturday configurations are only in effect in Normal mode Next you could define other modes such as Mode 1 as Half Day Holiday Mode 2 as Full Day Holiday Chapter 3 81 Schedules Mode 3 might be Return to Normal since modes do not end another mode takes the active mode to another mod
487. so that you do not have to remember to back up your databases Since this application does not contain a backup option you can use any method you like to back up the data You should keep two backups of the Server computer as follows 1 Data backup Three databases Refer to instructions in the following cell of this table Externals Images Signatures Graphics Designs Video You should back up this data often since it changes so frequently We recommend that you create a backup at least every week 2 Back up entire Facility Commander Wnx Edition installation ALWAYS MAINTAIN A CURRENT BACKUP Should you have any problems with your system you can always restore your backup This includes your database as well as your files If you purchased your system from GE then your system contains a CD RW drive acceptable for backup purposes In Microsoft Windows Explorer navigate to the Facility Commander Wnx Edition program folder Copy the Facility Commander Wnx Edition folder to your backup media qs 20 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Task and sequence Application Group Menu Application Form This list assists in backing up databases in Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Note Although there are other methods we have included the following steps as a guide to assist you in performing one type of backup 1 From your Start men navigate to Micros
488. sociated with a mode The mode remains active until changed by another mode schedule Figure 25 Mode Schedule tab Table 47 Form fields Element Description Time The time displays in the format 00 00 hours minutes Select and enter text over existing time Enter AM or PM Date Click the arrows to navigate through the months and years until the appropriate month displays Click the day on the calendar that this mode begins Assigned Controllers Displays the currently assigned controllers for this mode 80 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 47 Form fields continued Element Description Edit Click to display the Controller Assignment dialog that allows you to add or change the controllers currently assigned You must select all controllers that this mode change effects Controller Assignment dialog This window displays when you click Edit allowing you to select and assign client group association for this form Only client groups in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator Select and then click the right arrow to assign an available client group Select and then click the left arrow to unassign a client group The following options are only available for systems with Micro controllers Assigned Client Groups Click to display the currently assigned client groups for this record Edit Click to display the Client Group As
489. son Selection tab F Event Notifier e Description fC O Facility oO Alarm Selection Person Selection Message Format Assigned People Assign People Table 44 Form fields Element Description Assigned People This windowpane displays people assigned to receive an e mail alarm notification Assign People Click to display the People Assignment window allowing you to select specific people that receive an e mail alarm notification People Assignment This window displays a list of Person Records with an e mail address in the FCWnx system Only person records in the operator s facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available person e Select then click the left arrow to unassign a person Note Only those with an e mail address in their Person Record display in the People Assignment list for assignment to an alarm notification Click OK and the selected people names display in the Assigned People windowpane of the Person Selection window How to 1 Review Table 44 and following the guidelines assign people 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Message Format tab The Message Format tab allows you to format the appearance of the e mail alarm notification based on your Windows regional font settings Figure 24 Message Format tab e Description Facility
490. ss right e Select then click the right arrow to assign an available intrusion zone e Select then click the left arrow to unassign an intrusion zone Click OK to accept the selections and display the Intrusion Zones in the Assigned Intrusion Zones list box How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 122 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Record video to CD This option in the Monitors amp Controls group allows you to record video to a CD Figure 94 Video CD Burner a videocovarner o Select files from the list below MN Space Used OKB Space Available OKB A x Select Recording Device 207 208 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 123 Form fields Element Description Select files from the list below Navigate the directory tree to display a list of previously recorded files recorded from a DVR By default the Video folder of your application displays If video clips are stored in another folder navigate to that folder to display the video file names A list box displays file details such as file names and file sizes Space Used This indicates the amount of existing data on the CD to which you are about to record Space Available This indicates the amount of remaining space on the CD to which you are about to record Select Recording Device From the drop down list navigate to the drive or device to which you are about to record
491. st select a tour point as the start point of this tour e Only direct and network controller devices display in this drop down list e When you select a start point __ Assign Tour Points becomes available Max tour time min e Enter the maximum number of minutes that this tour is allowed to last When the maximum time is reached a tour is ended automatically e The default and maximum number of minutes in this field is 480 Route Activity to Printer Select this check box to route credential activities to a selected and enabled system printer at the client computer that is hosting the Guard Tour You must have two separate printers configured if you are using a printer for tour activities and a printer for credentials Tour Points e Displays a list of assigned tour points All tours are random A random tour is a tour where all of its points do not need to be hit in a particular order except the assigned start point e Every time this tour is executed the order of hit points can vary A random tour ends automatically when all of its tour points have been hit Assign Tour Points e Click to display a Point Assignment dialog box allowing you to assign Tour Points to this tour e Selection results display in the Tour Points windowpane The Point Assignment window displays when you click Assign Tour Points enabling you to select and assign tour points to a tour e Select and then click the right arrow to assign an avail
492. stall a keypad reader in the elevator cab A user presents their badge at the reader The floor number is entered on the keypad to go to that floor 2 Assign input buttons associated with each floor to a 20 DI board in the micro to do floor tracking by input Note Neither of these choices requires any additional readers outside the elevator cab When you push the elevator call button the elevator is called and the door opens but does not go to any floor until a valid badge is presented to the reader in the cab and a valid floor is selected Without Floor Tracking Install a keypad reader in the elevator cab A user presents their badge at the reader Presenting a valid badge inside the elevator cab activates the buttons for all floors to which the person has access The user selects a floor from the elevator buttons Note A keypad reader is not required No readers are required on each floor A DI board in the micro is not required What s next Continue with Chapter 5 Video on page 187 if appropriate for your system Chapter 5 Video This chapter provides instructions for configuration of video options associated with video surveillance In this chapter OEPM o ai eh AEREE ide ee de 188 Define digital Vides FOOTIE oi cide hs Bata seda korit akeas 188 Define camera DIES oreca hee Lhe ew bla ew Lda e 197 PIERRE COIS soe BS SAR a Rak eR BAG ARR EEA EDA 198 Define event WIRES csc nw Eada ta Haase ER GRR a 201 Kecoa rocoto CH
493. state of the DO returns to the nonscheduled value Example If the DO is scheduled On the DO returns to Off at the end of the schedule Figure 54 Schedule tab Digital Output e Description aad Facility y Digital Output i 3 Manual Control Advanced Tum DO On Off Time Schedule x C On C Off e KI l l Pf Table 75 Form fields Element Description Turn DO On Off Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list This determines when the DO automatically turns on and off The default is None On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want the digital output to be in the Active state Select Off if the above schedule is when you want the digital output to be in the Inactive state Off is not available for systems configured with ACU controllers How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 75 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Manual Control tab Use this tab to manually set the state of a specified digital output Figure 55 Manual Control tab Table 76 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Digital Output e Description 0001 1 01 DO JA Facility ignore Facilities y Digital Output Schedule Manual Control Advanced Use this form to manually change the DO state Purpose Set state to Off On Indefinite Sched Override Element Description Purpose This field accepts
494. stem to wait before disconnecting from the controller when the connection is idle there is no history or database information being exchanged If you select 0 the connection remains active indefinitely and the host never drops communication with the controllers How to 1 To designate a modem for use with a dial up controller enable it by clicking in the box to the left of the modem name so that a check displays If you have a modem installed for support use DO NOT SELECT THAT MODEM 2 Select the number of minutes you want the system to wait before disconnecting from the controller when the connection is idle If you cross a firewall to communicate with a controller review Table 17 above 4 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 2 System preferences Clear Archive tab Use this tab to configure your system database archive clean up Figure 7 Clear Archive tab A os e 7 Settings User Fields Mode Labels Address Fields Communication Settings Clear Archive Security Advanced Earliest Date in Current Archive DB Show date Latest Date in Current Archive DB m Archive clean period October 2006 ajv October 2006 ajv Sun Mon TueWedThu Fri Sat Sun Mon TueWedThu Fri Sat Table 18 Form fields Element Description Earliest Date in Current Archive If you have an archive database this date displays when you click Show Date DB Latest Date in Current Archive DB If
495. stration Save Click to save this record How to 1 Review Table 34 and click Search to display all existing permission records in the list box on the right 2 Select one of the permissions 3 Expand the Forms navigation tree to display the FCWnx forms 4 Select a form and select one of the Actions to associate with the form and the permission you are creating 5 Click Save Notice that the icon has changed to the associated action granted to this permission Example If you want an operator to monitor alarm and credential activity select the Operation forms then set the following actions e Select Activity Monitor then select Read e Select Alarm Monitor then select the action Read e Select Manual Control then select Update Selecting Update for Manual Control allows the operator to manually change the DO state e Select Digital Output Status then select Read Chapter 2 61 System preferences On the Personnel form assign actions to allow the new permission to add persons and credentials into the database e Select Person then select Update e Select Credential then select Update Determine and create operators An operator is an individual who can access and control the FCWnx software Once a facility is assigned to an operator it displays in the Facility field after a successful login by that operator Operators are associated with permissions that define the actions operators can perform within
496. t 33 status 309 digital output 43 status 311 digital output groups 49 digital video recorders define 88 direct connect controller records 89 documentation CD 358 domain controller 64 359 361 download alarm 305 status 305 driver installation video 788 DVR 90 address 797 alarm 56 define 88 define cameras 798 report 332 334 status 794 supported connections 789 type 791 E editing records 2 edition enterprise 2 professional 2 elevator 115 128 135 180 181 defined 778 digital output interface 96 floor tracking by input 79 floor tracking by keypad 79 no floor tracking method 79 public access 82 reader 5 elevator control sample scenarios 86 e mail notification 75 e mail support alarm notifier 26 employee number upgrade 2 27 encryption 99 00 103 event log 358 event notifier 73 event trigger define 207 video 207 F facility 47 380 FCWnx ini 342 firewall 6 32 363 floor tracking 779 folder application 34 archive databases 36 credential design 260 exchange 5 330 images 259 logs 249 345 program 381 shared 49 system32 344 video 208 format credentials 273 frequently performed tasks G global configuration 2 387 global configuration regional rules 44 glossary 377 graphics console 3 3 guard tour 280 conditions 280 points 283 H hard drive data accumulation 269 usage by Diagnostic Viewer 348 351 usage during debug 353 help topics 79 hex character 387 I IKE
497. t be on the same controller Configuring elevator control using an ACU controller 1 Create a Controller record and assign the Controller type as an Elevator Controller This controller cannot manage any thing else It can only manage elevators Create Floor records and floor numbers to be used with the elevators Create Area records on the Area form e Assign readers to the Area See Area form Reader tab Note The Area must also be assigned to an access right for a person to gain access to that reader Now you can configure the elevator records You use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select e Method of elevator control e Readers e Floors to Area association You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available Note Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable must be on the same controller Elevator tab Chapter 4 Devices Select this tab to create or edit elevator information Figure 78 Elevator tab Table 103 Form fields Reader r Floor Tracking e Description test Elevator Public Access Floor Digtal Output 0003 0 04 Reader No Floor Tracking C Floor Tracking by Input C Floor Tracking by Keypad gt
498. t this tab Chapter 4 167 Devices Adding sound to an alarm If you would like to hear a sound from this application computer when an alarm occurs follow the steps below Note You MUST have a sound card in your computer Click Start Settings then Control Panel From the Control Panel window double click the Sounds and Multimedia icon In Sound Events scroll to this application Select the alarm to which you want to assign sound then select the sound you want for that alarm Click OK to save the change and exit the window or Apply to save that change and add more sounds Start this application select Administration then Preference pl Oy SP ee Se Nae On the Settings tab of the Preference form verify that the Console alarm sound field is set for the results you anticipate either Continuous or Short Define alarm groups Use the Alarm Group form Alarms amp Events group to assign events or schedules to alarm groups Alarm groups provide two things 1 a convenient way of scheduling many alarms at once and 2 a means of disabling monitoring in many alarms from a keypad reader Refer to Keypad alarm shunting on page 118 for additional information When a controller record is created 16 alarm groups are also created You cannot delete an alarm group record Alarm groups are owned by the associated controller record NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button
499. ta 344 DARWOSTICS OVEIVIEW ci 344 A tack a Rea tino Deedee Bele ee Bo eae BE GRR OS 345 DAR WO SIG BETTIE on io elke Ao OE ES EE E 347 When to enable debug messages for a diagnostic object 348 Diagnostic Viewer PYORTAIN oo ee eee be Ee ER EEO 350 UIE TEID e artes ac Winn gw E E TENE een ROA da iria acts welded ee 355 Q estions and ANSWEPS 0 in bk dd EAE eh ee A 356 Customer Support eae ie a ee Cade wa ale ees A Rae A hae 373 342 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview While this application was created to be as user friendly as possible this section is created to assist you with answers to frequently asked questions troubleshooting and settings to assist you in diagnosing problems Auto update Use the Auto Update form Administration group to configure your network computer for this application for automatic notification and installation of the latest Quick Fixes and Service Packs This feature must be coordinated with your IT Department They may have certain procedures restrictions or security policies in place To publish an update three things are required 1 2 3 Patch update install file ReadMe file that goes with the installation optional The FCWnx ini file that is the update file for WiseUpdate The update file is a text file that needs to be manually created with the name FCWnx ini in the following format WiseUpdate Version 7 0 1 Size 1095391 Install http www myserv
500. tab Controller e Description dial up test A Facility ignore Facilities y Controller Definition Security TimeZone Comments Events Status Controller Configuration Settings to Reach Host Settings to Reach Controller Phone numbers to reach controler p Dial interval Number 1 None 1 Hour Number 2 C 8Hours 12 Hours 24 Hours Same number retries jo fi Retry interval 30 sec Host call back Table 57 Form fields Element Description Phone Numbers to Reach Enter the telephone number of up to 20 digits that the host dials to call the controller If Controller an outside line must be accessed in order to dial out enter a comma after the number that accesses the outside line typically 9 In this situation if the telephone number to be dialed is 1 555 666 7777 enter the number in this field as follows 9 15556667777 The controller first dials the number in Number 1 and then tries the number in Number 2 Note All telephone number fields must contain a telephone number If there is only one telephone number for the controller enter this number in all fields Dial Interval Select the interval None 1 hour 8 hours 12 hours 24 hours at which the host automatically dials the controller The host dials one hour from the time the controller went into an idle no activity state If this is a new record the count begins once the record is saved If
501. tart automatically when the system boots and remains running as a background process independently of anyone being logged in It runs regardless of whether anyone is logged into Windows or FCWnx In other words the computer must be turned on but no one needs to be logged in The SQL Server 2000 2005 MUST be running for network clients to connect and share the SQL database FCWnx has five services that run on all computers The default Startup Type for services is set to Manual You are instructed to set the FCWnx services for an Automatic startup during the FCWnx installation process which means that they start as soon as the computer is started Once set to Automatic we recommend that you do not change these settings Chapter 1 5 Introduction 1 FCWnx Diagnostics handles all diagnostics on all computers 2 FCWnx System Manager manages communication between computers and licensing This service also starts the WebService 3 FCWnx Manager is the main service and handles controller communications and alarms 4 FCWnx Webservice handles the video media service This service is dependent on the System Manager and automatically starts when the Manager service starts 5 FCWnx Media Server is handled entirely by FC Wnx Webservice This service requires no user intervention and starts and stops automatically 6 FCWnx API Service is used when using an API interface This service is used when an external system is sending or receiving transac
502. tatus on page 271 Active The credential has been assigned to a person and may gain access An Active credential can be re assigned as a Guard Tour credential Guard Tour The credential has been assigned to a person and is used as a guard tour credential A Guard Tour credential can be re assigned as an Active credential Issuable The credential has not yet been assigned to a person or deactivated Lost The credential has been reported as lost or stolen Remake This credential has been damaged or returned Suspended This credential was assigned to a person who no longer works at the facility terminated or is currently not working at the facility Note A suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preference form displays in red font in the list box on the right Table 160 Form fields continued Chapter 7 Access rights departments persons and credentials Element Description PIN Number If this credential is used with a credential and keypad reader assign a personal identification number here This number must be entered at the keypad in order to gain access with this credential If Hide PIN Number is selected on the Security tab Preference form asterisks display in place of numbers in this field Note For systems using Micro controllers this number must be four digits For systems using ACU controllers this number can be 4 to 6 digits dependin
503. tem to enable disable an automatic live video pop up window when an alarm occurs with an associated alarm trigger By default this is a toggle option and is not selected This option must also be activated by selection of Video Window Auto Pop up on the Event Trigger form if the operator has been assigned permission for Digital Video Viewer If operator permission for Digital Video Viewer is not made available this option does not activate even though selected on the Event Trigger form Alarms tab Once selected the operator login retains this feature until disabled no matter which computer in the system was used for logging in Intrusion Zone tab This tab allows you to assign Intrusion Zones and Intrusion Zone transaction type s that become the source for this Event Trigger 205 206 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 93 Intrusion Zone tab Event Trigger e Description Preset Camera Readers Alarms Intrusion Zone Assigned Intrusion Zones m Transactions MV Am 7 Disarm 57 Invalid m Tag Selection C None C Tag only C Tag as event Table 122 Form fields Element Description Transactions Select any one or all of the types of Intrusion Zone transactions that trigger an event Arm Intrusion Zone arm transaction in progress Disarm Intrusion Zone disarm transaction in progress Invalid Intrusion Zone arm disarm transaction failed for one of the following reasons
504. terface Select the Interface from the drop down list If there is no interface listed then it has not been installed CCTV Alarm Select the alarm number from the drop down list When you assign a number an enable and disable message is automatically generated Table 132 Form fields continued Chapter 5 Video Element Description Enable Message An enable message is automatically generated when you select a number in the CCTV Alarm field You can edit these messages but any changes to the CCTV alarm number overwrite the changes to this message Disable Message A disable message is automatically generated when you select a number in the CCTV Alarm field You can edit these messages but any changes to the CCTV alarm number overwrites the changes to this message Reset CCTV Alarm When the alarm for this application is cleared from the Alarm Monitor Select this option if you want the CCTV alarm to reset when the alarm is cleared from the Alarm Monitor When the alarm Resets Select this option if you want the CCTV alarm to reset when the alarm is reset in the application How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 132 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab What s next Continue with Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zones on page 219 if appropriate for your system 217 218 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 6 Areas and intrusion zone
505. terruption Scenario Two A Database Server using a domain login successfully starts Later the domain controller becomes inaccessible The Database Server computer is rebooted SQL services and replication continue 362 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual normally because the assigned security token has not expired for the SQL services domain account There are limitations of which you should be aware Note Domain login must have been obtained before the domain controller became inaccessible You may want to review Microsoft and Windows publications relating to security tokens Additionally consult your IT Administrator for discussion about the security token as applied in your company Printers Question My credential printer is not functioning as expected What can I do You may use either a printer directly connected to your computer or a printer on the network For example you may have two Imaging stations but only one printer If you plan on printing either credential or alarm transactions at least one of those printers MUST be a line printer such as a dot matrix that supports a width of 133 characters either by using a wide carriage or printing in compressed mode You can now print credential transactions or alarms transactions from any client workstation printer If you plan on printing credentials you must use a GE approved Imaging printer Contact your GE security business sales representative for a list of support
506. tes Enter or select a number between 0 and 60 Seconds Enter or select a number between 0 and 59 seconds If 60 minutes is already entered you cannot enter a number of seconds Comments Use this field to enter any special consideration or reminder for this configuration This field accepts 256 characters It is not necessary to complete an entry in this field How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 67 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 135 136 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Digital Output ta b This tab is available only if you have selected Digital Output in the Type field on the Digital Input Tab Use this tab to link digital outputs to a digital input When this digital input is activated the digital output is also triggered Figure 48 Digital Output tab amp Digital Input 3 Description Digital Input Output A Primary Local Output B kNone gt y J lt None gt r Output Relay Control bo Groups Schedule Events Status Digital Output Time Sched Link Only If Ignore E Digital Output Time Schedule P Activate Offline F Ignore Enabled State 14236 00 00 ACU Reader 0 DO Relay 14236 00 00 ACU Reader 0 Aux DO Relay 14236 01 01 ACU Reader 1 DO Relay 14236 01 01 ACU Reader 1 Aux DO Relay 14236 02 02 ACU Reader 2 DO Relay 14236 02 02 ACU Reader 2 Aux DO Relay 14236
507. th preceding zeros 0067 The second set of four digits indicate your company facility number 10 with preceding zeros 0010 Arrows Click to move your new code number from the input field into the list box of existing code numbers Listbox This is a display of existing company codes Delete A numeric code can be deleted only if it is not being used in your FCWnx system Credentials Max number of PIN digits Enter or select a number between 4 and 6 as the number of allowable digits used as a credential PIN The maximum number of PIN digits is 6 This number is assigned on the Credential form Chapter 2 39 System preferences Table 20 Form fields continuea Element Description For ACU Controllers Enable Controller for New Protocol Only If selected the ACU controller auto detects which protocol to use communicates with this application only and cannot communicate with any other application The ACU controller must be connected and online in this application Example If this option is not selected it is possible to continue both access control systems during a transition period to your new software You may need to run reports from your previous software using the identical ACU controllers Save Click to save your company code records Following a save you cannot edit a code number record How to 1 Using the guidelines in Table 20 enter an 8 digit number Example 00670010 The first four
508. that the controller contains e The reader is automatically enabled as Online and Active and configured to accept credential transactions when a reader record is created The number of active readers counts against your reader limit For example if your license key allows the use of 128 readers you may have only 128 readers marked as active Note When the total of all reader records equals the maximum number of active readers allowed by your license you receive a warning message e The reader record controls both the physical reader and how the door locks and unlocks See your controller and reader installation manual for information on how to connect readers to a controller Use the Reader form to modify the reader configuration e If this reader is associated with SC F you cannot configure monitor or control this reader record unless you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting this reader NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form or Events form all schedule or event records display Element Description Description When reader records are created the default description is in the format Micro controller mmmm b pp ACU controller mmmmm na pp where mmmm Or mmmmm represents the controller number to which this reader is associated b represents the module number n represents the port number an
509. the Area by manual control How arming works 1 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential 2 The display requests the operator to enter a PIN 228 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual 3 The operator enters a PIN number plus 10 for example 1234 10 1244 the operator enters 1244 4 A message displays the state of the Area arming as successful How disarming works 1 2 3 The operator enters a credential identification number and swipes a credential The display requests the operator to enter a PIN The operator enters a PIN number plus 20 for example PIN is 1234 20 1254 the operator enters 1254 A message displays the state of the Area disarming as successful When using the Areas for Arm Disarm feature Note Arm 1 2 3 4 Disarm 1 2 3 4 The keypad arm disarm feature must be configured as Local on the Area form Alarm tab The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the Areas displayed select the Area to arm Select ON Reader display indicates Area Secured The operator enters an asterisk swipes a credential and enters a PIN if required Using the arrows to scroll up and down through the Areas displayed select the Area to arm Select OFF Reader display indicates Area Unsecure Arm Disarm an area by access right After
510. the device description is able to be seen Facility A facility option can be assigned for the camera from the drop down list of available facilities for assignment by this operator The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made Definition tab This tab displays the camera channel address with which DVR this camera is associated and camera type configurable for Fixed or PTZ The camera can be enabled or disabled for viewing and managing from within this application Use this form to edit the preferences of the selected camera record Chapter 5 199 Video Figure 88 Definition tab e Description i Facility y Definition Presets Address DMR E Camera Type y IV Enable Camera e Table 116 Form fields Element Description Address This is a read only field The address of the camera is automatically assigned The address is a 2 digit number that corresponds to the camera channel on the back of the DVR DVMR This is a read only field This field displays the corresponding DVR with which this camera is associated Camera Type Select a type of camera behavior as Fixed or PTZ from the drop down list Enable Camera By default this checkbox is selected The camera can be enabled or disabled for viewing and managing from within this application and setting accessibility from the Digital Video Viewer Disabled cameras do not display on the Digital Video Vie
511. the door should relock Close With this option when the door is closed the door locks immediately regardless of the Maximum Unlock Time Maximum unlock field above and the Alarm Sense Time Alarm sense field above is reset to zero Open With this option when the door is opened the Maximum Unlock Time Maximum unlock field above is set to zero and the door locks When the door is closed at any time during this process the Alarm Sense Time Alarm sense field above is reset to zero Duration With this option after the Maximum Unlock Time Maximum unlock field above expires the door locks and the Alarm Sense Time is reset to zero During the Maximum Unlock Time the state of the door does not affect the Maximum Unlock Time or the Alarm Sense Time Request to exit REX This option available for readers associated with Micro controllers Contact Open Enable this option if the Exit Request button is wired as open for an exit request Closed Enable this option if the Exit Request button is wired as closed for an exit request Unlocks door Select this check box if you want the door to unlock when an exit request button is pushed Follows extended unlock Select this check box if you want this REX to follow the time limits as configured for Extended unlock Send Real Time REX Status Select this check box if you want REX transactions to display in real time Extended auxiliary digital output Select an output from
512. the drop down list of available Digital Output points This output follows the Extended unlock time configurations and must be on the same controller as this reader Link to this reader Use this field to link this reader to another reader on the same controller Select a reader from the drop down list 121 122 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 59 Form fields continued Element Description ACU Controller options Door options Complete applicable selections in this grouping Relay Digital Output Select from the drop down list of available DO points This output operates the door strike for this reader The door strike DO is built into the unit The default is O e Default The DO number for the RRE based on the reader number selected e Other DOs available on the associated ACU controller The installer has selected a DO other than 0 for the door strike DO If you are not certain which DO is being used for the door strike contact the installer e None Use this selection when there is no door strike DO Note When configuring paired readers both readers use the same door access DO Contact Digital Input Select from the drop down list of available Dis If the controlled door has a contact it can be used to monitor the door status Default The door contact is automatically set as the first alarm point on the reader or reader interface Other alarms available on the associated
513. the existing records or displays the results of search operations and allows you to quickly navigate through the records found by a search Select a record from the list e Click a single record in the record list to select that record for deletion The keyboard up and down arrows can also be used to move from one record to the next e Multiple rows can be selected by left clicking the first desired record then dragging the mouse and releasing it on the last desired record Nonconnected rows may be added to the selection by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while selecting the row with the mouse All selected rows are highlighted Click Delete xl Click Save H If any record dependencies exist for the record you are deleting you are not able to delete You must remove the dependencies before you return to delete this record from the database Chapter 2 System preferences This chapter provides instructions for initial setup of system preferences facilities clients permissions and operators in your Facility Commander Wnx Edition system In this chapter Pa TTE Pane wend wl Mandal Silent alin and ellanans Mable Mealies 24 CONSULTE DIETETENCES opo iios tha Dhow Hoos Dew dhe RR has 24 CORONE TER a PASO CE we ew ee N 39 Global configuration regional ruleS 0 cc nes 44 Replication and synchronization conflicts ooo oo oooo n 46 a o hE baad Ohm ee a Ei edae e Saw Gin Liber eda 47 identify and configure CHEMIE
514. the minimum number of characters allowed for a password in the FCWnx system 2 Assign the minimum number of numeric characters allowed for a password in the FCWnx system Note If the current operator has permission to change their password the preferences selected here display in the Change Password window as reminders 3 Click Save before you exit this tab 38 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Advanced tab Use this tab to assign an 8 digit numeric code associated with the sites of your company business units Figure 9 Advanced tab E preterene as e Settings User Fields Mode Labels Address Fields Communication Settings Clear Archive Security Advanced m Company Site Code O B Delete m Credentials Maximum number of PIN digits p a m For ACU Controllers J Enable Controller for New Protocol Only AAA 4 Table 20 Form fields Element Description Company Code Group Input Field Enter the 8 digit number e This number is a combination of a 4 digit company code number with preceding zeros if appropriate and a 4 digit company facility code number with preceding zeros if appropriate e This number can be all zeros e This field accepts only numeric digits and must be 8 digits e This number corresponds to the number that is encoded in your access cards Example 00670010 The first four digits indicate your company number 67 wi
515. ther alarm group available on that controller displayed on the drop down list 156 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 85 Form fields continued Element Description Owner Type This is a read only field and displays the object to which the alarm belongs or refers e API Alarm is bi directional and owned by the external interface e CCTV Interface Alarm is owned by an interface e Client Alarm is owned by a Regional Database client e Controller Alarm is owned by a controller e Digital Input Alarm is owned by the digital input such as a motion sensor The 11th DI on a Micro PX 2000 or M PXN 2000 is owned by the controller it is a low battery alarm from the controller e Failover Alarm is owned by the host client e Guard Tour Alarm is owned by a reader or digital input e Camera Alarm is owned by a camera e Kalatel DVMR Alarm is owned by a Kalatel DVR e Reader Alarm is owned by a reader e Region Failover Alarm is owned by the host Regional Database Server e Module Alarm is owned by an individual module Settings Note If this alarm is associated with a SCIF workstation this control is not available for selection unless you are at the workstation that is hosting the ACU controller associated with this alarm Monitor Alarm Short Cut Reset If selected this alarm when triggered displays all alarm conditions available to this alarm on the Alarm Monitor form You have the option
516. this application is shut down the count begins once this application is started Same Number Retries Enter the number of times from 0 to 9 the host should redial the same telephone number before moving on to the next available telephone number Retry Interval 30 sec Enter the number from 1 to 9 of 30 second intervals that the host waits in between each dial to the controller For example if you specify 2 then the host waits 2 x 30 60 seconds between each dial to the host 110 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 57 Form fields continued Element Description Host Call Back Select this check box if you want the host computer to return a call back to the controller providing additional validation that the correct host to controller communication has taken place How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 57 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Controller flash and controller preference configuration The Flash Controller option is available as an icon on the Controller Monitor form toolbar and shortcut menu This dialog box displays only if the controller is online There are three options 1 View edit preference info Controller Preference Direct Dialup This option is available for selection of a single controller When selected the Controller Preference Configuration screen displays and the configuration for the controller is retrieved allo
517. this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab DO Groups tab Use this tab to link digital output groups to a Digital Input When this Digital Input is triggered the linked digital output groups are also triggered The digital outputs remain active until the alarm is reset regardless of any specified on time setting for the DOs unless it is the primary local group not applicable for systems using ACU controllers e If it is the primary local group the DOs follow their specified ON time setting e If there is a reader in the primary local group the reader follows the Digital Input state e If the DOs in the primary local group are set to O for the ON time that forces the DO to follow the state of the alarm or input 137 138 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 49 DO Groups tab e Description Facility Digital Input Digital Output Schedule Events Status if Output Groups Primary Local Output Group ES None Assign DO Groups Reader DO Actions Auxilary DO Actions Active Active Inactive Inactive y 4 rf Table 69 Form fields Element Description The following features are applicable to only Micro controllers Output Groups This windowpane displays assigned digital output groups The digital output groups can be on a local or other controller Assign DO Groups Click to display a Digital Output Group Assignment dialog box allowing y
518. til another event occurs to change it Therefore in our example a second event needs to be scheduled to change that reader back to Normal on Monday morning Alarms amp Events Event Notifier Refer to Configure event notifier on page qs 73 1 Enter a unique title for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters A facility option can be designated Review Table 43 and assign alarms that are to trigger e mail notifications Select one or both Transaction Type options Review Table 44 and assign people to receive notification On WN Review Table 45 and format the e mail message qs5 qs 6 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 1 Quick setup sequence continued Element Description Application Group Menu Application Form Task and sequence e Mode schedules Schedules Mode Schedule Refer to Define mode schedules on page qs 77 Click the add icon ato begin a new record NS Enter a unique title for this record This is a required field and accepts 64 characters A facility option can be designated Review the guidelines in Table 47 and complete this tab Select the date 03 16 2006 from the calendar Date control Click Edit in the Assigned Controllers group box Select the controller ACU19588 from the controller list Enable the checkbox for Mode 7 from the Available Modes group box ES Fw Click Save before you exit this tab Example modes Normal This mo
519. time of 5 00 p m a start day of April 1 and a stop day of April 5 You receive a report of alarm transactions occurring between 8 00 a m on April 1 through 5 00 p m on April 5 Start Date Select the start date range by clicking the desired day on the calendar To move ahead or back by a month click the arrows on either side of the name of the month To move ahead or back by a year click the arrows on either side of the year Start Time Accept the default start time as displayed or enter a start time Stop Date Enter an end date range by clicking the desired day on the calendar To move ahead or back by a month click the arrows on either side of the name of the month To move ahead or back by a year click the arrows on either side of the year Stop Time Accept the default stop time as displayed or enter a stop time Chapter 10 337 Reports Database tab Alarm History Credential History Zone History DI History Time and Attendance or Operator History reports Use this tab to select the history database to use for this report The file name displayed on the tab is the currently selected archive database e Select Archive Database Click to select the archive history database e Use default Click to use the current history database Additional filters tab Person report This tab displays ONLY if you have selected User Data in the field Report Type on the General Tab of the Person Report Use this tab to add user fields as an
520. tion conflicts Conflicts with this application replication are rare but can occur A conflict occurs whenever two users in different Regions simultaneously update a field on an individual record or update a record at a Global Database Server computer and a Regional Database Server computer during synchronization For example Region revises an address from 4444 SW 8th St to 5544 SW 8th St Region 2 revises an address from 4444 SW 8th St to 6544 SW 8th St There are now two different values in the same field of the same records in two different regions Each region s scheduled SQL Server Merge Agent activates the merge process and the changes are sent to the Global Server e If both updates arrive at the Global Server during the same synchronization process the SQL Server detects which update arrived first and that update is successful e Ifthe update at Region Two arrived before the update at Region One during the same synchronization process then Region Two s update is successful The address is updated to 6544 SW 8th Street on both Region One and Region Two Keep in mind that conflicts can only occur during the same synchronization process e When the Global Server and Regional Server are connected and synchronization occurs the SQL Server Merge Agent detects conflicts and then determines which data is accepted and propagated to other sites based on the first record to successfully reach the Global Server Chapter 2 System pr
521. tion provides full security management functions including access control intrusion zone control alarm monitoring alarm graphics console reporting photo ID badging and CCTV interfaces as standard features FCWnx also offers integrated system options that include digital video surveillance and Web based reporting FCWnx Global configuration SQL Server 2000 Replication services are used to distribute the data from a Global Server to Regional Servers FCWnx installation creates the necessary components for a replicated system configuring publications and subscriptions at each level The Global Database Server is the main FCWnx database server The term main as used in this context means that the Global Database Server acts as a hub for all replication activity This Global Server hosts a Distributor whose role is to store history and miscellaneous information about merge replication When the Distributor is created on a database it generates its own database to store information Once publishing is enabled on the Global Server it is able to control and monitor publications and subscriptions as well as the starting and stopping of replication agents Regional Database Servers act as client database servers They have the ability to subscribe to publications located on the Global Server These Regional Servers operate independent of the Global Server for a period of time as necessary Subscriptions are pushed to each Regional Server by the Global
522. tion services 0 cece cece nee eect rra 4 Simple File Sharing ON WinXP 0 cece cece cece eee eee ne eet e nee eee e eee tense eenee eens 5 Configuring firewall and DCOM settings 0 cece ccc eee eee eee nent n eee e eee eennne eens 6 Navigation as cosida airada AAA AA 8 CO ii T EEN A EEEE 8 LOO OMe itso Soy pennies at nee AE AE E A OSE 8 SHUT DOM A A dada 8 A E RON 9 A elle ter tact AA Rach sara S E EEE E E E EAA 19 Creating editing and deleting records cece cece cee eee rn ccoo 20 CHEATING MECOPAS ir da 20 ECILIMORFE CORDS o T ome same eames See hseaeaes 21 Chapter 2 System preferences 2c ddccccnandese ded scenes ssecuedeswseeetuSeaaas ees 23 AO AO II bead peat os beet aeeiewe las aun E ta niedetitesdets 24 Configure preferences unicidad See ee oc be esata E E A deeded wide 24 SettiMNG TAD sus yas saedouaueeees Goeteeneenreuad a E 24 UseriFiclds tab 2225025 id e dt ewes seeded ee h 27 Modelabels toby cocidas praia 28 Address Fields tab tata dd dd ide 29 COMMUNICATION Settings TAD oases disci a a 31 Clear Atehive A PPP adiddebonns vos deenav bbe duumeanaaes sates 33 Backing Ud iste in ic linde 34 iv Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 3 A O Ua tenanalnerpl ddddaiannbnrd biddalkee ld seauw dies ans na aun es 34 Appending archive databases 0 6 6 c ccc rr rr 36 Restoring databases a A 36 SEGUI LD nd I EAR 36 Advanced TD ici aa ii
523. tions by way of the Application Program Interface to this application This service can be started manually at the time you install an API interface Note Changing the state of services without a good working knowledge of the services purpose can cause the computer to act erratically Services automatically shut down when a client closes the FCWnx application and meets ALL of the following criteria 1 Does not host any controllers or DVRs 2 Does not have any API connections 3 Is not a Thin Client 4 Is not a backup client or have any backup clients of its own 5 Is not a CCTV client 6 Is not hosting a Guard Tour 7 Client form Enable Auto Shutdown is selected Licensing controls the number of computers that can host FCWnx sessions If a particular client is shut down that license is now available for another client computer to be designated an FC Wnx client and run the FCWnx application If not all clients require a license at the same time you can enable and disable the license for the appropriate computers Simple File Sharing on WinXP Simple File Sharing is a feature in Windows XP that removes file sharing security options available in other versions of Windows This setting must be disabled for FCWnx to operate successfully between Servers and clients Once the user sets the permission the user and clients have access to shared files and the ability to assign passwords to shares To disable folder shares 1 Double c
524. tions of mass update on page qs 269 4 Select the records you want to adjust from the list box on the right Make the required adjustment to the form Click Save The update of records begins immediately A window displays with a progress bar indicating the update progress 7 Click Abort if you want to stop the update in progress Note You cannot close a form during the Mass Update process 8 Right click shortcut menu navigation is unavailable when you are in Mass Update mode 9 If you have changed any preference but did not Save a message reminds you to discard or save your changes 10 Smaller batch updates are recommended to prevent performance issues during a mass update 11 A Mass Update Complete dialog box displays indicating completion or failure 12 When mass updates are processed to an access right a log file is generated and a View Results key displays in the dialog box Click to view the completion log We recommend that you rename and save this file to another location for reference purposes Renaming the log prevents an overwrite 13 When the process is complete a Mass Update Complete dialog message displays 14 Right click and select Mass Update from the shortcut menu to disable and exit Mass Update mode The records refresh at this point Note Updates display in the list box to the right Alarm Routing and Bumping Refer to Configure alarm routing and bumping on page qs 172 1 Click Alarms amp
525. to select the day Click OK 7 Inthe Time field enter the time using the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm Click Go 8 Move the slider to increase or decrease the play position for recorded video Zero percent represents the beginning of the recorded video and 100 percent represents the end of the recorded video Click Go How to search by motion 1 From the Action menu select Search Video The Search Video window displays 2 Select the DVR Motion Search tab The search criteria includes recorder camera start and end dates and start and end times Enter multiple values to narrow the search criteria to locate video clips 3 Use the Recorder drop down list to select the appropriate DVR 4 Use the Camera drop down list to select the appropriate camera The Motion Area displays live video from the selected camera 5 Use the Start Date and End Date fields to narrow the dates to search The current date is the default setting To change the date click the date field and a calendar displays From the drop down lists select the month and year Then click on the calendar to select the day Click OK 6 Use the Start Time and End Time fields to further narrow the search To change the start and end times enter the hour and minutes in the field Use the military format such as 17 00 00 to represent 5 00 pm 7 Use the mouse to select a region of interest in the Motion Area One area or multiple areas can be
526. to create a report on the schedules and events defined in this application Access The Access option opens the Access Report form that allows you to create a report based on persons in this application that have access rights and to any of the specific Areas Floor Access The Floor Access option opens the Floor Access Report form that allows you to create a report based on the floors defined in the system and the access granted to each floor Area The Area report option opens the Area Report form that allows you to create a report based on the secure Area transactions in the system Alarm History The Alarm History option opens the Alarm History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of alarm activity Credential History The Credential History option opens the Credential History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of credential transactions in the system Operator History The Operator History option opens the Operator History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of operator activity Zone History The Zone History option opens the Zone History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of intrusion zone transactions in the system DI History The DI History option opens the DI History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of digital input transactions in the s
527. to image keylines When you print the credential from the application the keylines are replaced by the image The photo can be placed on either the front or the back of your credential design Click OK The selected image is moved to the Photo tab of the Person form Click Save The image capture is saved to the database Displaying existing images During normal operations images are not downloaded from the server In order to view an existing image for a credential record the image s must be loaded to the computer 1 On the Person form select the Photo tab then click Search and highlight a record from the record list Click Capture Image Signature button to enable the Image Capture Application screen Move the mouse pointer to the existing image and right click A shortcut menu for the image appears The available image options on that menu are discussed in the paragraphs that follow 258 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Capture Based on the input device you previously selected the appropriate interface window displays for adjusting capturing and loading a new image Enhance and Crop These options allow you to individually crop or enhance the current image You can adjust the existing image without having to recapture the image Compare and Restore When a stored image is downloaded and a new image is captured the Compare option is enabled on the shortcut menu to compare the newly captured or edit
528. to restart your computer to restart your FCWnx services Customer Support Note If you require assistance first contact your local Business Partner To contact GE Security use the following numbers and addresses Note Telephone United States 1 888 GE SECURITY 1 888 437 3287 Asia 852 2907 8108 Australia 61 3 9259 4700 Europe 48 58 326 22 40 Latin America 305 593 4301 Be ready at the equipment before calling Web Site www ge security com Support rs bctsupport ge com Documentation bctdocs O ge com Check the Web site periodically for timely information on all GE Security products 374 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Appendix B Certifications This appendix provides information about certifications for a UL listed system In this appendix OVEIV A ca dine Se a dip we bee chp ow ce bw ae ce Og wR eas 376 HR inks cae 1hg eas Fed oad Hy hg dy Gee 376 376 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview Your installation must adhere to the requirements listed in the Certification section of the Installation Manual in order to qualify as a UL listed system UL certification Facility Commander Wnx is a UL listed system UL 1076 Grade A Proprietary Burglary Requirements UL 294 Access Control Requirements You must adhere to the following requirements in a UL listed installation 1 10 11 12 The computer and monitor shall be completely duplicated Provision for switchov
529. to schedule alarm monitoring on the Schedule Tab of this form If this option is NOT selected but a schedule is in place the schedule monitors alarms only for the time that monitoring is on Although the option to monitor is displayed for the 11th DI on a Micro PX 2000 low battery alarm an alarm is not generated for Cut and Short e An operator can see alarms on the Alarm Monitor form only for facilities that are currently active and assigned to the current operator e The option to monitor an alarm must be selected on the Alarm form in order for a specific alarm to display on the Alarm Monitor form e Alarms do not display on the Alarm Monitor form if the selection to monitor an alarm is removed even though Alarm Routing and Bumping may be configured Always monitor Short Cut Reset If selected this alarm always displays Cut Short and Reset conditions of alarms on the Alarm Monitor form Select this option if a schedule prevents monitoring an alarm reset condition during certain periods of the day but you still want Short Cut and Reset to be monitored and displayed Although the option to monitor is displayed for the 11th DI on a Micro PX 2000 low battery alarm an alarm is not generated for Cut and Short Controller dial host If selected an alarm occurring on a dial up controller or controllers downstream from a dial up controller causes the controller to dial the host in order to report the alarm Operator acknowledge If s
530. to set up the credential transaction that you want to enter into history 323 324 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 138 Override tab CA ola ce Override Person Hemandez Mickey Reads Type APB Neutral T A Neutral Credential y C APB In C T A ln APB Out C T A Out Time jos 59 39 Reader 0001 1 01 Reader y Dat Fa ee Calendar Update Controller Database Selection FCwnx History Generate C FCwWnx Archive Table 194 Form fields Element Description Person Select a person from the drop down list Credential Select a credential from the drop down list of credentials currently in the database Time Accept the default or select and enter over the default time Note The current time and date are displayed by default Date Accept the default date select and enter over the default date or click calendar to enter a date Calendar Click to display the calendar Reader Type Select a reader type Reader Select a reader from the drop down list of available readers for assignment by the current operator Update Controller Enable this field if you want to send this transaction to the controller Database Selection Select either the History database or Archive database Generate Click this button to enter the transaction into the database Chapter 9 325 Monitor and control How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 194 and co
531. tomatically following a database creation or conversion and upgrade from a previous version of this application No user interaction is required The utility can be run manually if you want to check your database integrity The system compares and validates the integrity of your database schema If selected the system automatically corrects missing or incorrect schema properties such as columns keys constraints indexes triggers and tables The executable file is installed with this application and resides in the program folder 1 2 3 Locate and double click the DatabaseIntegrity exe file to manually run the utility Enter the Server Name or click Browse and navigate to the appropriate Server Name Enter the SQL system administrator sa Database Password or accept the encrypted database password of the default Server Click Connect to locate and connect to this application databases The remaining selections are now enabled Accept the default options or review and disable selections Select one of two options Verify that Check Database Integrity is selected OPTIONAL Select the Autocorrect check box This feature runs only once and corrects obvious schema in the database Results display in a report Note Autocorrect is not available on a Global configuration Select which databases to check Select Start to begin Wait as the Database Integrity tool compares and validates the integrity of your database Messages generate
532. tor workstation configurations Create Reports Refer to Designing reports on page qs 329 1 Click Reports on the menu bar 2 From the drop down menu select the type of report that you want to create 3 Select a template or create a new template 4 The options on a tab and drop down options in a field vary depending on the type of report you are creating qs 27 qs 28 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to Facility Commander Wnx Edition 7 0 This manual provides information for system administrators to configure and use a Facility Commander Wnx Edition system This chapter provides an overview of FCWnx Note Throughout this document reference to Facility Commander Wnx Edition is represented as FCWnx in text content In this chapter RPE A eda aoe eee de ck 4s Oe RAA 2 a e T EE wa eeinn Beate Mente Rate MBean a ake Bea aa 3 Before you begin configuration co ds ee eee es 3 o RS a hile 3 CHEAUS CIVERA A a es 4 Facility Commander Wnx edition Services oooooomooomo m 4 Simple File Sharing on WinXP 0 cee 5 Configuring firewall and DCOM settings 00 0 0 cen 6 NAW GUNGN nan a ee 8 Creating editing and deleting records 0 0 0 600s 20 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Overview Facility Commander Wnx Edition is a multi edition offering of Integrated Secure Management Software designed on Microsoft Windows technology FCWnx Edi
533. tput Click OK to display results in the Digital Outputs windowpane How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 79 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Chapter 4 151 Devices Schedule tab Use this tab to define schedules for turning all digital outputs in a selected digital output group on or off Figure 58 Schedule tab e Description E E J Facility P Group Schedule DO control Time schedule A C On C Off Table 80 Form fields Element Description DO control Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list On Off Select On if the above schedule is when you want the digital outputs in the selected digital output group to be in the Active state Select Off if the above schedule is when you do not want the digital outputs in the selected digital output group to be in the Active state How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 80 and complete this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define instructions Use the Instruction form Alarms amp Events group to create messages that display on the Alarm Monitor form whenever the associated alarm occurs Instructions are directions on how to react to specific transactions Table 81 Form fields Description Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop down list of available facilities The default of Ignore Facilities is assigned if no other selection is made
534. tries you would like to view You may display up to 50 000 entries from the beginning of the file or the last 50 000 entries from the end of the file based on your selection of one of the radio buttons below your entry This option is useful if a log file is extremely large Read from beginning of file Enable this option to open the file with the FIRST or oldest entry in the viewer Read form end of file Enable this option to open the file with the LAST or most recent entry in the viewer The current line number number of entries displayed and total number of entries in the log are displayed in the status line of the Diagnostic Viewer screen Online help Online help Selection of this option starts the FCWnx Help system Additionally with an application form displaying you can click the icon then drag the over any area and click again A window opens with information pertaining to the selected section of your form User Manual Selection of this option launches Adobe Acrobat and displays this manual the Facility Commander Wnx User Manual About the application Selection of this option opens a screen displaying the software version service pack number copyright information licensing information and contact information 355 356 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Questions and answers Database Question How can I test the integrity of my database The Integrity utility runs au
535. troduction Table 9 View menu continued Element Description Menu Buttons The Menu Buttons option determines whether or not the graphics display beside options in the drop down menus Note Clear the check box to hide the graphics from view Split The Split option allows you to increase or decrease the horizontal size of the tabs and windowpanes on a form Next Pane The Next Pane option moves the cursor between the main form the tabs and the search results window if there is one Workspace This is a toggle option and determines whether or not the Application Group pane displays along the left side of the application window Additionally you can drag the docked Application Group pane to an alternative position on your application window Application Toolbar This is a toggle option and determines whether or not the Application toolbar displays at the top of the application window Record Toolbar This is a toggle option and determines whether or not the Record toolbar displays at the top of the application window Select Facility The Select Facility option opens the Set Active Facilities form that allows you to change the facilities currently in use Enable Alarm Video Popup Select this item to enable disable an automatic live video pop up window when an alarm occurs with an associated alarm trigger By default this is a toggle option and is not selected This option must also be activated by selection of Vi
536. ty that consists of available controller alarm points not already assigned to a zone 24 7 4 State Supervision rules apply regardless of the Armed Disarmed state of the zone e Readers This is a multi record selection from an assignment dialog filtered by active facility that consists of available readers not already assigned to a zone Readers must be active and nonelevator type e A zone can be configured to contain the following An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Alarm Points only and no Readers 230 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual An Arm Disarm Intrusion Point with Readers only and no Alarm Points Alarm Points and Readers only with no Arm Disarm Intrusion Point Readers only Note An arm disarm DO can be assigned for any of these 4 A Status tab provides the ability to request status of the zone and each of its associated points as follows e Zone Armed or Disarmed e Arm Disarm Intrusion DI Active Inactive Trouble e Readers Online or Off Line e Alarm Points Monitored Off Monitored On B Complete the Access Right form Intrusion Zone Tab The Intrusion Zone tab of the Access Right form allows you to assign multiple intrusion zones using an assignment dialog OR Only credential holders with an Intrusion Zone assigned on the Access Right form are able to arm and disarm zones using any of the credential keypad readers within a zone When a zone is armed all readers within the zone go offline
537. ues to work efficiently Review Table 30 on page 56 Click Administration group Click Client icon Click the Backup Clients tab and assign backup clients Click Monitors amp Controls group Click the Client Monitor icon NOW Ff WYN S Monitor clients on the Client Monitor form qs 21 qs 22 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 2 Administrator tasks continued Element Description Create Credential Designs Refer to Design credentials on page qs 259 1 Click Credentials group 2 Click Credential Design icon 3 Click the add icon to begin a new record and enter a unique Description then click Save The Edit Credential Design button is now enabled Click Edit Credential Design to run the Credential Design application Select New from Imaging File menu Proceed to design your credential Click Save Create Access Rights Refer to Define access rights on page gs 238 1 Click Places Policies group 2 Click Access Right icon 3 Review the guidelines and complete the tabs and fields on this form according to the type of controllers in your system Following the creation of access rights create departments 5 Now you are able to create person records and assign access rights and departments to the person records Create Person Records Refer to Define persons on page gs 247 1 Click Personnel group 2 Click Person icon 3 Create a record of an employee s personal informatio
538. ult Hostname r Credential loading C Force C Leam J7 Exit request debounce J7 Report Real Time Digital Output Status Dl Alarm termination type l Keypad PIN I Max Invalid PIN Count al i s Table 49 Form fields Chapter 4 Devices Element Description Controller Type Select the controller you are configuring from the drop down list FCWnx operates with the following controller types Micro Controllers Micro 5 M2000 and M3000 e M5PX supports 16 readers for direct serial and remote dial up modem communications links e M5PXN supports 16 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e MSPXNPlus supports 16 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e M2000PX supports 4 readers for direct serial and remote dial up modem communications links e M2000PXN supports 4 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links e M2000PXNPlus supports 4 readers for 10 100Mb Ethernet communications links May also be used for direct serial and remote dialup modem communication links Note If your system is using M3000 controllers select controller type as M5PXNPlus see description above ACU Controllers Not
539. um Number of Clients Limit Reached The maximum number of clients are already connected to the server Refer to the Licensing Capacities table of your Installation Manual for supported capacities Question Why aren t the supervised DI points on my 2SRP module working Check the module addresses on the reader modules in your controller They must be consecutively numbered This means that the first reader module must be set to Address 1 the second reader module must be set to Address 2 and so on Question What s good to know about dial up troubleshooting Dial Up Troubleshooting Tips While some information is automatically saved to the logfile you can decide whether certain items ports lines controller or forms are sent to the logfile Select Diagnostic Setting from the Diagnostics group For more persistent problems this application provides an extensive diagnostic utility Diagnostic Viewer The Diagnostic Viewer application allows you to view the diagnostic log file apply filters to view information and search for a specific log entry Diagnostic Viewer has its own Help system for additional information Your Diagnostic Viewer program Logfile indicates modem status by displaying one of two possible messages Message 1 The following modem is not functioning properly lt modem name gt Message 2 The following modem is functioning properly lt modem name gt Where lt modem name gt is the name of the modem such as Hayes
540. umping When you select this tab a windowpane displays a list of available online controllers or client groups in your system based on facility permissions for the current operator Figure 136 Mode tab Chapter 9 Monitor and control EN Manual Control 3 15 x a e Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas andZones Mode Guard Tour Select Display Type ce ler C Clients Controller Description Current Mode Controller Address ACU Normal 14236 Micro Normal 1 Set Mode to Purpose Normal r 77 Apply Mode y AAA 7 Table 192 Form fields Element Description Select Display Type Controllers Select to display real time description current mode and address of online controllers Clients Select to display real time current mode for configured Clients Set Mode to From the drop down list select one of the available modes to which you want to change e The Current Mode status as displayed in the list refreshes automatically following a change of mode by schedule or manual control Updates for controllers display in the Mode column of the Controller Monitor form Updates for clients display on the Client Monitor form Apply Mode Click Apply Mode to send the command to the controller or client Available modes include Normal Mode 1 Mode 2 and Mode 3 Modes are created and labeled on the Mode Labels ta
541. ure some or all of the image Refer to the Image Capture Application Help system for additional specific details of this application To crop an image 1 2 Place your mouse pointer within the highlighting box s cropping area Press and hold down your left mouse button and drag move the cropping area to the desired location on the image Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new location of the highlighting box Click OK The photo can be placed on either the front or the back of your credential design To print the photo your credential design must include photo image keylines When you print the credential from the application the keylines are replaced by the image To resize the crop box 1 Place your mouse pointer directly over one of the highlighting box handles The pointer changes from a four headed arrow to a two headed arrow This allows you to resize the cropping area Press and hold down your left mouse button and drag move the handle toward the center of the cropping area The size of this highlighting box is fixed to the aspect ratio of the image type 4 x 5 for photos 5 x 1 for signatures When the cropping area is sized to your satisfaction move the highlighting box so that it covers the portion of the image that you want to capture Click OK The Image Capture Application screen displays with the selected image in place To print the photo your credential design must include pho
542. using the mass update feature All records for a selected person can be assigned the identical status Note A suspended credential that has Enable Line Coloring for Suspended Credentials enabled on the Preference form displays in red font in the list box on the right Description Enter a unique description of the credential person name or credential type This is a required field and this record does not save without an entry in this dialog box If you attempt to save a record without a description a dialog box displays asking if you want to use the credential identification number as the Description Click Yes to use the credential identification number or return to the form and enter a Description of your choice If you are entering credential records before person assignment consider entering a credential identification number as the Description This dialog box accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters Note If this is a converted database from an earlier version of this software that allowed blank Description fields the credential identification number now displays in the Description field of those records Facility The facility assignment is a read only field Chapter 7 263 Access rights departments persons and credentials Ls For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button Credential Definition tab Use this tab to define a credentia
543. ust add the appropriate modem If already installed begin with Step 3 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel then Phone and Modem Options 2 When the Options window opens click the Modems tab Click Add to open the Wizard You can allow Windows to detect you modem or select from a list by manufacturers Complete the windows to add your modem Exit the Wizard when finished 3 When you are returned to the Modem list of the modem tab select the appropriate modem and click Properties e Inthe Properties window click the Modem tab Set the Maximum Port Speed to 9600 Click OK 31 32 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 17 Form fields continued Element Description e For systems using ACU controllers In the Properties window click the Advanced tab In the Extra initialization commands field enter the following SMO amp KO amp N6 amp U6 e For systems using Micro controllers In the Properties window click the Advanced tab In the Extra initialization commands field verify that the field is blank e Click Change Default Preferences to open a properties window with the General tab displayed Set Data Connection Preferences as follows Port Speed to 9600 Data Protocol to Disabled Compression to Disabled Flow Control to Hardware Click OK 4 Click OK 5 Exit the Control Panel or continue to set additional modems Disconnect after idle Select the number of minutes you want the sy
544. ut Time Schedule Select a time schedule from the drop down list e If no time schedule is to be assigned you must select None before you can move a selected output relay from the available windowpane to the assigned windowpane e f there are none listed create a time schedule on the Time Schedule form Link Only If Offline The default of this check box is not selected and this link functions during the time schedule regardless of the status of the alarm If selected the link between the alarm and output relay functions only when the controller is offline This output relay does not function during the selected time schedule Use this when multiple relays are to be linked to a single alarm Ignore Alarm Monitor State If selected the output relay triggers even when the alarm that has the digital output is not monitored How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 87 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab DO Groups tab Use this tab to link digital output groups to an alarm When this alarm is triggered the linked digital output groups are also triggered The digital outputs remain active until the alarm is reset regardless of any specified on time setting for the DOs unless it is the primary local group not applicable for systems using ACU controllers e If it is the primary local group the DOs follow their specified ON time setting e If there is a re
545. ut e Monitor on off alarms and alarm groups e Enable disable DI inputs e Arm disarm Areas and Intrusion Zones e Change the mode of a controller e Start stop a Guard Tour Refer to the individual tab controls for additional information regarding the available functions Chapter 9 315 Monitor and control Reader Dgital Output tab Note Functions associated with a SCIF workstation cannot be controlled with the Manual Control form EXCEPTION If you are at the SCIF workstation that is hosting the controller functions can be controlled Manually lock or unlock doors and turn on or off DO digital output points depending on the current operator s facilities and permissions Note Schedules override manual changes unless Indefinite Unlock has been selected Controllers always run schedules defined previously in its database Therefore if there was a schedule set to be in effect at the current time the manual change would be overridden and the schedule would be enforced Figure 133 Reader Digital Output tab REE Reader Digital Output Alarm Digital Input Areas and Zones Mode Guard Tour Select DO type _ Select Controller C Other E All By Controller y Description Controller On Time Door Status Reader Status Area Set state to Purpose Duration Unlock Lock a Indefinite Unlock Sched Oyeride Table 189 Form fields Element Description
546. ut to expire The number of days in this field must be less than the number of days selected in the Expires in days field When this option is selected a message displays when logging in to FCWnx informing the operator of the number of days until the password expiration occurs Select Yes to change the password immediately Select No to continue using FCWnx and change the password at a later time If the password has expired the operator can no longer log on If the operator does not have permission to change the password the operator is instructed to contact the FCWnx Administrator to change the password These warnings are logged as operator history transactions and can be retrieved by running a report on operator actions using the System Operator filter for Login Name 63 64 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 36 Form fields continued Element Description Active Directory Password Note If this option is selected FCWnx Password Authentication options are not Authentication available The Active Directory domain controller authenticates this operator name and password The operator added to FCWnx must be a valid operator in the domain computer The next time this operator logs in to FCWnx for this feature the user must log in to the domain when logging into the computer for access to the FCWnx system The user cannot log in to the local computer the user logs in to the Domain FCWnx v
547. valid credential is presented e Company Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching company code e Facility Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching facility code Host Offline Select a validation option available at this reader when the associated host is offline from the controller e Normal Access is granted when a valid credential is presented e Company Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching company code e Facility Code Access is granted when a credential is validated for only a matching facility code e Secure This is a lock down mode and no entry is allowed at this reader Example This feature may be useful during construction of a new section to an existing building An entrance is being used by construction workers for accessing the construction site Credential validation is minimal Degraded Mode Access Select this option if you want this reader to function even when communication has been interrupted between the controller and the reader RREs must be powered separately from the ACU controller The door contact and relay must be owned by the external module The reader recognizes the first five company facility codes only Door Mode Access Normal No Overlap Access is allowed as usual when a valid credential is presented Overlap Door Open Any number of credentials can be presented at this reader while the door
548. verview of window behavior based on the selections assigned on the Digital Video Recorder form Note Learn more about video windows in Navigate video console on page 209 There are several ways to open a video window On the main toolbar of this application click the Video icon On the View drop down menu select Enable Alarm Video Pop up In the Monitor amp Control application group click the Video Console icon On the Alarm Monitor when an alarm is generated with associated video the Video Console icon displays Right click the alarm transaction message to access the Video Console application On the Activity Monitor when an event is triggered with associated video the Video Console icon displays Right click the event transaction to access the Video Console application In the Graphics Console application click Quick Launch when associating devices with graphic maps Each window displays a title bar identifying the application name and instance number The minimize restore maximize and exit options display in the upper right corner of each window Resize Window To resize a window point to any corner border and drag a sizing handle to the size window you want to display Increasing the window size is limited to the size of your monitor screen Decreasing the window size is limited to the system default corresponding to the Small option available on the Video Display tab Window Menu Save Position Each window
549. viously assigned on the Advanced tab of the Preference form Note When you select a company code number the Card Number and Issue Number fields become available Card Number This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This number must be unique to this application It may be already encoded into the card if you are using a card or you can assign a number in this dialog box This number is entered into a keypad reader when there is no card Issue Number This field is available for input when a company code number has been selected This feature refers to magnetic stripe cards Enter or select a number that indicates the number of times that this card number has been issued to the credential holder A card may be re issued if the card is damaged reported lost or stolen The original issue of this card begins with 00 A card can be issued up to 99 times Encoded number Displays the credential s encoded number Credential Alias e If you selected Manual aliasing during installation enter the new number for the credential e If you selected Automatic aliasing during installation the number are entered for you Find Credential Click to display a Find Credential dialog box select a reader and present a credential at that reader The record is displayed that is associated with the credential presented Save Click to save this record How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table
550. wer How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 116 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab 200 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Preset tab The Presets tab allows you to assign previously defined presets to a camera Presets must first be defined on the Camera Preset form Presets are assignable to PTZ cameras only Assign predefined presets for the selected camera Note This tab is unavailable for fixed cameras Figure 89 Presets tab e Description IE Facility v Definition Presets Assigned Presets Assign Camera Presets Table 117 Form fields Element Description Assigned Presets This windowpane displays a list of previously assigned presets Assign Camera Presets Click this button to display the Camera Preset Assignment dialog box A list of available camera presets displays These presets were previously defined on the Camera Preset form e Select one or more presets from the available list and then click the right arrow to assign e Select one or more presets from the assigned list and then click the left arrow to unassign Click OK to accept the selections and close this window When the Camera Preset Assignment form closes the selected presets display in the Assigned Presets windowpane Click Save to save the selections How to 1 Review to the guidelines in Table 117 and complete this tab by assignin
551. wer operates in real time That is every time this application writes an entry to the log file Diagnostic Viewer automatically displays the latest message By default Diagnostic Viewer displays only the latest 1000 messages The number displayed can be changed on the Preferences Form Select this option to set options for the program such as automatically opening the current day s default log file Figure 142 Diagnostic Viewer Diagnostic Yiewer SPLOGFRIDAY SPL E oj xj File Edit Yiew Filter Help V dala alL eea unje e Date Time Module Message al 07 28 06 08 20 38 SP Diagnostic Ping Handler Initialized 07 28 06 08 20 42 SP Diagnostic License Handler Initialized O 07 28 06 08 20 43 SP Diagnostic System Manager Initialized O 07 28 06 08 20 43 SP Diagnostic Machine Manager Initialized O 07 28 06 08 20 43 SP Diagnostic Process Terminator Created 07 28 06 08 20 43 SP Diagnostic Redundancy Manager Initialized 07 28 06 08 20 43 SP Diagnostic Host Scheduler was added to system manager O 07 28 06 08 20 43 SP Diagnostic jee SYSTEM SERVICE STARTED otto 09 08 06 14 49 31 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 09 08 06 15 30 13 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 09 08 06 15 48 34 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 3 09 08 06 16 03 45 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 3B 09 08 06 16 17 05 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 09 08 06 16 28 34 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 09 29 06 09 30 17 SP Diagnostic Invalid pointer 4 b Read
552. wing conventions are used in this document Bold Menu items and buttons Italic Emphasis of an instruction or point special terms File names path names windows panes tabs fields variables and other GUI elements Titles of books and various documents Blue italic Electronic version Hyperlinks to cross references related topics and URL addresses Monospace Text that displays on the computer screen Programming or coding sequences Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A caon Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property PAE warnine Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury Navigating a PDF file When Adobe Acrobat Reader opens your PDF file use the tools to navigate through the document Element Description Nh Use the hand tool to navigate through the document Position the hand over a linked area Sd until the pointer changes to a pointing finger Click the link to jump to the linked topic or page Click to go back to the previous view Click to go to the next view Click to display a window that allows you to enter a word or phrase for which to search PY Search Click Search and wait as Acrobat generates the results Use this toolbar to navigate back and forth through the pages of the currently displayed document
553. wing you to edit or change an existing setup such as controller address IP address change or phone number changes Once saved the controller resets and the new changes take effect Note If you change preference block data through this application any Universal Credential Format UBF data is erased Example If an M 5 PXN was originally configured as a direct serial controller during installation but is now a network controller select the updated controller type and complete the network information Click OK The controller accepts the changes resets then changes the host information for this controller The Controller Preference Direct Dialup tab allows you to change the connection type of the controller and its Address Idle Time and DI res tolerance The Controller Preference Networking tab displays only if the system identified your controller as a network controller and allows you to change the network preferences for the controller Controller Preference Credential Format This tab opens to display the custom credential formats that are currently in the controller If there are no custom formats the fields are empty If a format in the database does not match what is available in the controller the window list displays a message Unrecognized Format To change the credential format e Magnetic stripe Select the type of magnetic stripe format from the drop down list Wiegand Click Assign formats to display a list of
554. wing you to search and select controllers that you want to display on the Controller Monitor form Refer to Search criteria and controller selection below Note The first time the form is opened when there is more than 64 controllers a message displays informing you of the number of controllers about to display and ask if you want to select search criteria Help Displays the online Help system Search criteria and controller selection This dialog box allows you to enter search criteria for available controllers from facilities to which you have access that you want to add to your view or remove from the list of displayed controllers based on the results of the search criteria Complete one or more of the search criterion Table 185 Form fields Element Description Controller Enter a controller description for which to search You may use wildcard characters as part of the search criteria Controller Address Enter a controller address Online Offline Error Select controllers that meet the search criteria and are online offline or in an error state Hostname Select a host name Table 185 Form fields Chapter 9 Monitor and control Element Description Comm Port Select a communication port Available Controllers The controllers are displayed that meet the search criteria and are not already selected to be displayed in the Controller Monitor form Selected Controllers
555. with the elevators See Floor tab on page 178 Configure the elevator records You use the Elevator form to configure elevator records Here you select Method of elevator control See Methods of elevator control on page 179 Readers Verify that readers are active on the Reader form See Reader tab on page 113 Floors You can set a reader for elevator control using this form only When you return to the Reader form and display a corresponding reader record you notice that all other options in the Logical Type section are not available The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the Power Communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules The type of modules you want to use in your dedicated controller DO only or a combination of DO and DI modules determines the number of floors available After installing the CPU module the Power Communication module and at least one reader module there are four slots available that can be used for digital input modules or a combination of digital input modules and digital output modules Elevator control does not span controllers This means the reader digital outputs and digital inputs if applicable mus
556. with this application host and continue to send alarm and credential transactions Upgrading your system can be a seamless operation without loss of data time constraints during the controller migration process or lockdowns during the database upgrade process However in order to take advantage of the new features that are dependant on the firmware the ultimate goal is to bring all controllers to current level as soon as possible following the database upgrade Digital input status The Digital Input Status form Monitors and Controls group provides a snapshot of the current status in the controllers active or inactive and physical state open or closed of a digital input contact Digital inputs are physical sensing devices such as door sensors or motion sensors used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a controller Refer to your controller installation for information on how to connect a digital input device to the controller Once you have set up your digital inputs and alarms you need to verify the accuracy of your configuration Status tab This tab provides the status of the selected digital input according to the information in the controller database You can list the digital inputs for all controllers or list the digital inputs per controller 309 310 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Figure 131 Status tab E Digital Input Status 0001 0 01 Tamper 0001 0 02 Power 0001 1 01 DI 0001 1 01 Reader 0001
557. ws you to view the maps of your facility that were created in the Graphics Editor These maps point out the location and type of incoming alarms as they occur such as a door held open alarm Operators can issue commands and launch applications such as locking and unlocking doors Graphics Console consists of four applications that allow you to edit link and monitor graphic maps These applications are e Graphics Preferences e Symbol Editor e Graphics Editor e Graphics Console Graphics Preferences Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual Graphics Preference allows you to set preferences for a graphics map You can define the number of layers that can be used to separate object types and the rate at which links blink to identify a graphics map in alarm 313 314 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Symbol Editor Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Console This option and related features are covered in detail in the Graphics Console User Manual Symbol Editor allows you to associate object types such as doors readers digital inputs or controllers with icons representing properties and conditions Use the Symbol Editor to create delete save upload and download symbol schemes Graphics Editor Note This option is available if you are licensed for Graphics Co
558. x network At the host computer navigate to your printer property settings On the Security tab add ANONYMOUS LOGON or NETWORK to the Security permissions Note Printers can be connected to the Server or any client computers The defaults of the activity printer selections are cleared on any newly configured system Any system with a newly converted database requires reconfiguration of these activity printer selections at each client workstation Alarm and Guard Tour DI Activity You must enable select a printer and route alarms to a printer in order for alarm activity Printing to print e Enable Select this check box to print alarm activity If you select to enable alarm activity printing you must select a printer in order to save this record e Printer Displays the currently selected printer to which alarm activity prints This may be the same or a different printer than that used for credential transactions e Select Printer Click this button to select a printer to which alarm activity prints Note Print Alarms At Host must be selected on the Alarm form in order for alarm activity to print Credential and Zone Activity You must enable select a printer and route credential activity to a printer in order to Printing print credential transactions e Enable Select this check box to print credential activity If you select to enable credential and zone activity printing you must select a printer in order to save this record
559. xpiration Click OK to accept the selected date displayed and close the form Click Cancel to close the Calendar form without making any changes Click None to clear the date currently in the field demo mode When the License Setup window displays during the installation sequence the option to Cancel can be selected Installation of this application completes and operation of your system continues in demo mode until you successfully license your system After each hour of login time the system shuts down and you are required to restart this application to continue operations This sequence continues indefinitely if you have not properly licensed your system Refer to the Online Help system in the Licensing Setup for additional information 379 380 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Table 206 FCWnx terms explained continued Element Description DES DESIII Data Encryption is additional security assigned to protect the Host to controller exchange of information The data messages are encrypted Methods of Encryption DES This option uses a single pass of authentication and 16 unique hex characters are required DES III This method of encryption uses a three pass authentication process Starting at the left the first pass authenticates 16 hex characters The second pass authenticates 16 hex characters The third pass authenticates all 48 hex characters Diagnostic Viewer The Diagnostic Viewer application is a diagnost
560. y Current 80 Displayed 90 CAP NUM SCRL 352 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual Menus Options described in the following menu tables also display in the Diagnostic Viewer toolbar Table 199 File menu Open Logs Note Select this option to open an FCWnx application log file spl extension This opens a LogFile Dialog window and allows the user to select the file to open Select the Filename and click OK The logfile displays in the Diagnostic Viewer window This option is also found on the Diagnostic Viewer toolbar Open Other Note This selection is for GMC VMC logfiles Log extension Select this option to open an application log file associated with GMC or VMC diagnostics This opens a Launch External Logfiles window Select a file with a log extension and click Open The file opens in Notepad for your review Close Select to close the current log file Delete Contents Select this option to delete the contents of the current log file WARNING Deleting the contents of a log file causes all messages in the log to be discarded Once discarded these messages no longer exist Reload Select this option to reload the current log file into the viewer This command is most useful after changing the filter settings Properties Select this option to view the current log file s properties such as the full path name of the log file the number of entries that it contains and the num
561. y If Offline The default of this check box is not selected and this link functions during the time schedule regardless of the status of the alarm If selected the link between the digital input and alarm functions only when the controller is offline This alarm does not function during the selected time schedule Use this when multiple alarms are to be linked to a single input Ignore Alarm Monitor State If selected the output relay triggers even when the alarm that has the digital output is not monitored Chapter 4 149 Devices How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 77 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Define digital output groups Use the Digital Output Group form Security Devices group to assign digital outputs to a group and schedules to digital output groups Digital output groups provide an easy convenient way of scheduling many digital outputs at once To create digital output groups manually create the groups and then assign the digital outputs to them NG For a shortcut menu to related forms move the mouse pointer below any tab and click the right mouse button If you are using this shortcut menu to get to the Schedules form all schedule records display Table 78 Form fields Element Description Description This field is required and accepts up to 64 characters Assign a unique title to this record Facility A facility option can be assigned from the drop d
562. y can t I delete a record Some forms such as the Digital Output Status form and the Manual Control form do not contain a Delete button because they display only status information Other forms such as the Reader form Alarm form Alarm Group form Digital Output form and the Digital Output Group form also do not contain a Delete button To keep the system stable NO ONE is given permission to delete these records not even a System Administrator These records are deleted when the associated controller is deleted However on other forms you may be assigned delete permission If you can t delete on those forms you do not have permission to delete Question No readers display in the reader list box Why Only readers assigned Active are displayed in the list box Go to the Reader form and click the Reader tab Verify that the readers you are using are assigned Active Question Why are there no alarms displayed on the Alarm Monitor form Go to the Alarm form and click the Alarm tab Make sure that the Monitor option is On Also check the schedules There may be one in effect that does not route certain alarms to the Alarm Monitor form Question J deleted all the records on one of my forms I clicked Add to add a record and the text lt deleted gt displays and sometimes information from the previous record How do I get rid of the text lt deleted gt To correct this click Clear and then click Add 370 Facility Commander W
563. you do not have valid access to a reader that belongs to an Intrusion Zone due to a schedule in that access right you are not able to arm disarm a zone 240 Facility Commander Wnx Edition User Manual How to 1 Review the guidelines in Table 142 and complete the fields on this tab 2 Click Save before you exit this tab Floor tab Note This tab is enabled for systems licensed and configured with Micro controllers This tab allows you to configure controls for elevators and floors by assigning them to access rights Figure 104 Floor tab Table 143 Form fields e Description Facility y Access Rights Floor Digital Output Groups Intrusion Zones Areas Assigned Elevators Assign Elevators Assigned Floors Assign Floors Element Description Assigned elevators This windowpane displays a list of the elevators assigned to the current access right Assign Elevators Click this button to display the Elevator Assignment dialog box and select from a list of elevators available for assignment by this operator If no elevators are listed check that the elevators have been configured on the Elevator form The Elevator Assignment window displays when you click Assign Elevators enabling you to select and assign an elevator association for this form Only elevators in the operators facilities are available for assignment by this operator e Select and then click t
564. ystem Guard Tour History The Guard Tour History option opens the Guard Tour History Report form that allows you to generate a report of completed tours displaying tour activities such as start points hits invalid points pauses resumes tour end points tour time exceeded manual start and manual stop Time and Attendance History The Time and Attendance History option opens the Time and Attendance History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of time and attendance activity and the preferences you select Area History The Area History option opens the Area History Report form that allows you to create a report based on the history of secure Area transactions in the system Roll Call The Roll Call option opens the Roll Call Report form that allows you to create a report based on preferences selected for people who last entered a facility by way of a specified reader External The External Reports option opens a Launch External Reports dialog that allows you to select an executable program or report that was not created within this application For example you can access reports you created using a third party report generator such as Crystal Reports or Microsoft Access 2002 Table 11 Window menu Chapter 1 Introduction Element Description Cascade The Cascade option allows you to control multiple windows or forms If you have several forms open but not visible

User Manual - Kimmel Services

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents